2013-05-2020

UOP Technical Requisition Fabrication

Page 1 of 3 970086 R060-2

1.

General/Administrative/Safety Requirements
Modules and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with the following documents: 1. 970086 S011P-0, Specification—Execution Plan and Reporting 2. 970086 S060-0, Specification—Module Fabrication 3. 970086 S072-0, Specification—Reporting Shipping Damage, Shortage, and Loss 4. 970086 S140A-0, Specification—Language and Units 5. 970086 S140C-0, Specification—Documents for Custom-Designed Goods and Services 6. 970086 S140V-0, Specification—Documentation Submittal 7. 970086 S140-SDI, Specification—Supplier Document Index a. General b. Piping c. Civil/Structural

d. Instrumentation e. Electrical f. Equipment

8. Pemex Minatitlan Refinery Site Information a. Entrance and Routing within the Refinery 9. Pemex Requirements a. Applicable Standards and Codes b. Minimal Indivisible Units Requirement c. Provisions for Safety, Health and Environmental Protection

d. Country of Origin Requirements

2.

Fabrication/Installation
Fabrication/Installation shall be provided in accordance with the following documents: 1. 970086 R601F-1, Requisition—Instrument Installation 2. 970086 R701F-1, Requisition—Electrical Installation 3. 970086 R801F-1, Requisition—Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination 4. 970086 R901F-0, Requisition—Structural-Steel and Concrete Construction 5. 970086 R905F-0, Requisition—Painting

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-2020

UOP Technical Requisition Fabrication

Page 2 of 3 970086 R060-2

6. 970086 R907F-0, Requisition—Insulation Supply and Installation 7. 970086 S999C-0, Specification—Cross-Discipline Clearance and Accessibility 8. 970086 Inspection Requirements a. 970086 S150-A, Specification—Examination, Testing, and Inspection Planning b. 970086 U060F-A—Fabrication Inspection Data Sheet c. 970086 U601F-A—Instrumentation Inspection Data Sheet

d. 970086 U701F-A—Electrical Inspection Data Sheet e. 970086 U801F-A—Piping Inspection Data Sheet f. 970086 U901F-A—Structural Steel Inspection Data Sheet

g. 970086 U901FC-A – Foundation Inspection Data Sheet h. 970086 U907F-A—Insulation Inspection Data Sheet 9. 970086 V060-0, Documentation Data Sheet — Fabrication 10. 970086 Material Take-Offs a. Mechanical Equipment List b. Equipment Outline Drawings – Later c. Piping Line List

d. Piping Tie-In List e. Piping Bill of Materials f. Piping Specifications

g. Piping Specialty Items– Later h. Valve Specifications i. j. k. l. Pipe Support Bill of Material Steam Tracing Bill of Material – Later Civil and Structural Steel Bills of Material Equipment Insulation Summary– Later

m. Instrument Bill of Material n. Electrical Bill of Material – Updated 05/20/13 11. 970086 Drawings a. Mechanical Flow Diagrams b. General Arrangement Drawings c. Instrument Engineering Design Drawings

d. Electrical Engineering Design Drawings
Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-2020

UOP Technical Requisition Fabrication e. Heat Tracing Engineering Design Drawings– Later f. Piping Engineering Design Drawings 1. Piping Plans 2. Piping Isometrics 3. Pipe Supports 4. Spring Supports 5. Expansion Joints – Later g. Civil Engineering Design Drawings h. Structural Engineering Design Drawings

Page 3 of 3 970086 R060-2

3.

Demolition and Modification
Demolition and Modification shall be provided in accordance with the following documents: 1. 970086 Demolition Drawings a. Demolition Index b. Demolition Mechanical Flow Diagrams c. Demolition Drawings

2. 970086 Equipment Demolition and Modification Scopes– Later

4.

Customer Specifications (Attached Separately)
All goods and services shall comply with the following documents: 1. List of Project Pemex Specifications 2. Pemex Specifications

5.

Conflicts
In case of conflicts among the documents in this Requisition, the document order of precedence shall be as follows (from highest to lowest): 1. Bills of Material 2. UOP Specifications and Data Sheets 3. Engineering Design Drawings 4. Pemex Specifications

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

PEMEX REFINACION INVITATION TO BID GRAL. LAZARO CARDENAS REFINERY

SECTION 1 GENERAL/ADMINISTRATIVE/SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

2013-01-18

UOP—Specification Execution Plan and Reporting

Page 1 of 2 970086 S011P-0

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for project execution plan and reporting.

2.

Execution plan
1. Project execution plan shall include the following: a. b. c. d. 2. Objectives Schedule Organization for project Names of lead project personnel

Approval of execution plan shall be obtained from UOP prior to start of work.

3.

Schedule
1. Schedule shall include the following: a. b. c. d. e. 2. Work breakdown structure Start date and duration of each task Total duration of work Agreed upon dates for UOP-supplied data, approvals, and equipment Critical path method (CPM) dependencies

Fabrication/Installation schedule shall include subdivisions for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. Foundation Demolition Structural steel Piping Instrumentation Electrical Insulation Procurement Equipment installation Pressure testing Site Pre-Shutdown Activities Shutdown Activities

3.

Approved baseline schedule shall be frozen prior to the start of work.

4.

Progress report
1. 2. Progress reports shall be provided monthly. Progress report shall include the following: a. Schedule with the following for each subdivision and total project:

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-18

UOP—Specification Execution Plan and Reporting 1. 2. 3. 4. b. c. d. e. f. g. Comparison against baseline Actual start Actual finish Percentage of work completed

Page 2 of 2 970086 S011P-0

Status of major milestones for period Procurement status reports Problem and issue areas with brief analysis Recovery plan, with cost impact, if project falls behind schedule Information needed from UOP Change order status

5.

Progress photos
1. 2. Photos of progress on fabrication and installation shall be provided weekly. Progress photos shall include the following: a. b. 3. 4. 5. 6. Overall shots from each corner of the unit Close-up shots of tagged equipment and instruments as they are installed and piped up

File format shall be JPG. Image density shall be less than or equal to 200 DPI. There shall be one image per file. Photos shall be transmitted to via e-mail.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-29

UOP Specification Fabrication and Installation

Page 1 of 4 970086 S060-0

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for fabrication and installation of the revamp components.

2.

Definitions
1. 2. 3. 4. Contractor – Fabricator and installation contractor executing scope of work Customer – PEMEX Refinacion Site – Gral. Lazaro Cardenas Refinery – Minatitlan, Veracruz, Mexico Project – PEMEX Minatitlan CCR Revamp

3.

Customer Requirements
1. Contractor shall follow all applicable specifications within this requisition including all applicable Customer standards and codes referenced in section 1.9.a of 970086 R060 Contractor shall provide Minimal Indivisible Units information per section 1.9.b of 970086 R060 for the entire scope of work. Contactor shall provide Country of Origin information for procured material and equipment per section 1.9.d of 970086 R060

2. 3.

4.

Labor/Qualifications
1. 2. Contractor shall provide all labor to manage and execute the project scope of work Contractor shall have an ASME R Stamp for performing alterations and repairs to existing pressure vessels within the scope of work. ASME R Stamp shall be valid for both shop and field work and Contractor shall be able to supply ASME R-1, R-2 or R-3 forms as applicable.

5.

Safety
1. 2. UOP will have a dedicated on-site Safety Supervisor to coordinate and direct the Contractor’s safety personnel. Contractor shall have an established safety program that meets or exceeds requirements defined within the PEMEX Provisions for Safety, Health and Environmental Protection. Contractor shall supply their labor force with the required safety gear and equipment to complete the scope of work. The following site safety personnel are required: a. b. c. Safety Supervisor Confined Space Entry Monitor Hot Work Monitor

3. 4.

6.

Schedule
1. Contractor’s activities shall comply with the overall Project Schedule in section 1.7 of 970086 R060

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-29

UOP Specification Fabrication and Installation

Page 2 of 4 970086 S060-0

7.

Site Execution
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. UOP will have a staff of on-site personnel that will include a Construction Manager, Contracts Manager, Administrative Assistant and Safety Supervisor. Contractor will interface with UOP to define scopes of work and execution. UOP is responsible for interfacing with Customer regarding any discrepancies. Contractor will be required to obtain all refinery personnel and vehicle entry permits for their labor force. Contractor will be required to apply and obtain all daily working permits from the Customer. Supply all temporary off-site and on-site offices and work facilities, including all equipment and materials, to execute the project scope of work. New structure and components within will be installed while the existing unit is operating. Modifications to the existing unit will be performed during a planned Turnaround outage in November of 2013. Refer to Section 1.7 of 970086 R060 Space within the refinery will be provided for lay down, work facilities and storage as indicated in 1.8. Contractor shall include any additional off-site space that will be required to execute the work. a. The Project has requested 12,000 m2 (80m x 150m) on-site to be used as work space and storage facilities. Refer to section 1.8.a

8.

Procurement
Goods and services shall be provided by Contractor except as follows: 1. The following items shall be obtained from UOP: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Tagged Equipment - as indicated on the Mechanical Flow Diagrams Tagged Piping Specialty Items – as indicated on the Mechanical Flow Diagrams Tagged Instruments – as indicated on the Mechanical Flow Diagrams Regeneration Tower (FA-510) inner screen, baffles, nozzles, outlet pipe and multi-point thermocouples Surge Hopper (FA-515) inlet flow dampener and panel coils Dur-o-lok Couplings Power Control Panels Engineered pipe supports

9.

Component receiving and storage
1. 2. 3. 4. Contractor shall have local facilities to receive and store equipment and materials. Components shall be received, inspected for damage and quantity, logged in, and stored. Inconel, Hastalloy, and stainless steel material shall be segregated from each other and carbon steel and galvanized material. Storage of component shall comply with component suppliers’ instructions.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-29

UOP Specification Fabrication and Installation

Page 3 of 4 970086 S060-0

10.

Fabrication, Modification and Installation 10.1. Fabrication/Installation plan
1. Fabrication/Installation plan shall include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 2. Sequence of assembly Component receiving, storage, and protection plan Protective coating plan Fabrication access plan Equipment-insertion plan Lifting plans Transportation plan Demolition plan Modification plan

Approval of plan shall be obtained from UOP prior to fabrication/installation.

10.2. Isolation of Inconel, Hastalloy, and Stainless Steel
Inconel, Hastalloy, and stainless steel shall be isolated from cutting, grinding, and welding of galvanized material that is above or within 10 ft (3 m) of these materials.

10.3. Protective coating
1. 2. 3. Protective coatings that are damaged during fabrication shall be repaired. Painting shall be completed prior to bolted connections being assembled. Approval for welding after painting shall be obtained from UOP.

10.4. Equipment installation
1. 2. 3. 4. Carbon-steel slings shall not touch stainless-steel equipment. Equipment shall be installed per equipment-supplier’s instructions. Equipment and related spare parts shall be protected from entry of dirt and moisture and maintained per equipment suppliers’ instructions. Equipment supported from steel at grade shall have the lower nuts tack welded to the supporting beam flange.

11.

As-built documents
1. 2. 3. Changes made to engineering design shall be marked in red pen on a copy of engineering design documents. Changes shall show as-built condition. As-built documents shall be: a. b. Maintained by Contractor and available to visiting UOP personnel Provided to UOP at end of construction.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-29

UOP Specification Fabrication and Installation

Page 4 of 4 970086 S060-0

12.

Spare parts
1. The following spare parts shall be provided: a. b. One set of permanent gaskets plus 10% for every size and class purchased for the project. 10% of piping and miscellaneous bolts, nuts, and washers to be utilized for field installation.

13.

References
The most recent edition, except as otherwise specified, of the following documents are cited in this document. None

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-18

UOP Specification Reporting Shipping Damage, Shortage, and Loss

Page 1 of 1 970086 S072-0

1.

Scope
This document defines requirements for reporting shipping damage, shortage, and loss.

2.

Receiving
1. 2. Shipments shall be inspected for visible damage and shortage upon arrival. Shipping damage and shortage shall be: a. b. c. d. 3. Noted on carrier’s document before signing. Photographed Set aside for further inspection Reported

If shipping damage is on packaging, only, cargo may be moved to inventory.

3.

Reporting
1. 2. Shipping damage and shortage to cargo shall be reported to UOP’s assigned Modular buyer and resident engineer by telephone and fax within one business day of receipt. Report shall contain the following as a minimum: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. Material receipt number Date received Shipping company name Packing List Bill of lading Supplier name Item tag number(s) Description of damage or incorrect quantity Estimated value of the loss Location of damaged goods Container and seal number where applicable. Any other applicable information

4.

Other
1. 2. 3. Breaking of seal(s) on damaged container(s) shall be witnessed by UOP representative. Damaged goods shall be stored until released by UOP representative. A recommendation for disposition (repair, destruction, or return) of damaged goods shall be made after UOP inspection.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-10-08

UOP Specification Language, Units, and Documents

Page 1 of 3 970086 S140A-0

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for language, units, and documents.

2.

Language
1. 2. Writing shall be in English language for technical documents. Writing shall be in Spanish language for nameplates.

3.

Units
1. 2. Values of physical quantities shall be expressed in MKS units. MKS units shall be defined as follows: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. Temperature Pressure (gauge) Pressure (absolute) Mass Volume Length Alternate Length Liquid Relative Density C kg/cm²(g) kg/cm²(a) kg m³ m mm sp gr T°C/15°C

Liquid Absolute Density kg/m³ at 15°C Vapor Flowing Density Flowing Quantities 1. 2. 3. Mass Vapor Liquid kg/h m³/h m³/h kg/m³

l.

Standard Quantities 1. 2. Vapor Liquid normal m³/h at 0°C and 1.033 kg/cm²(a) std m³/h at 15°C kcal/kg mm kcal/h kW cP

m. Enthalpy n. o. p. Heat Rate Electrical Power Viscosity

4.

Document identification
Document shall contain the following identification: 1. 2. 3. Supplier or original-equipment-manufacturer name Supplier or original-equipment-manufacturer document designator Revision designator and date

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-10-08

UOP Specification Language, Units, and Documents 4. 5. Title Item tag number

Page 2 of 3 970086 S140A-0

5.

Transmittal letter
1. 2. Transmittal letter shall be provided with document or documents. Transmittal letter shall contain the following information: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 3. 4. Supplier name UOP purchase order number UOP Technical Requisition designator Supplier reference number Date of submittal Street address of location to which comments and approval should be returned Name and phone number of contact who can confirm receipt of comments and approval

Submitted document shall be listed in transmittal letter. For each document listed in the transmittal letter, the following shall be shown: a. b. c. d. e. Supplier or original-equipment-manufacturer document designator Revision designator and date Title Number of copies submitted Reason for submittal, which shall be one or the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. For bid For approval Final As-built

6.

Reduced copies
1. 2. If C or D-size document is provided, a copy reduced to A or B size shall be provided. If A1 or A2-size document is provided, a copy reduced to A3 or A4 size shall be provided.

7.

Certification of final documentation
1. Final document shall be both of the following: a. b. 2. Marked “Certified for Construction” Signed by a person authorized to bind supplier

Document shall not be certified for construction unless either of the following is true: a. It has been approved without comment.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-10-08

UOP Specification Language, Units, and Documents b.

Page 3 of 3 970086 S140A-0

If approved with comment, comments have been incorporated without modification.

8.

References
The most recent edition, except as otherwise specified, of the following documents are cited in this document. None

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-10-08

UOP Specification Documents for Custom-Designed Goods and Services

Page 1 of 1 970086 S140C-0

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for documents.

2.

Revisions
1. If information on drawing changes, the following shall apply: a. b. 2. 3. Change shall be clouded. A triangle, with the revision number or letter inside, shall abut cloud.

If information on data sheet changes, an indication of which lines changed shall be provided. If information not on data sheet or drawing changes, a markup showing changes shall be provided. a. b. Addition shall be underlined. Deletion shall be struck through.

3.

Native File Submittal
1. Final submittal shall include the native file, if available.

4.

Order-specific document
Document created specifically for the order shall comply with this section.

4.1. 4.2.

Inapplicable information
Inapplicable information shall be excluded or crossed out.

Document size
Document size shall be ANSI Y14.1 flat size A, B, C, or D.

5.

References
The most recent edition, except as otherwise specified, of the following documents are cited in this document. American National Standard ANSI Y14.1, Decimal Inch Drawing Sheet Size and Format

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-10-08

UOP Specification Electronic Documentation Submittal

Page 1 of 1 970086 S140V-0

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for submittal of documents in electronic form for proposals and review.

2.

Requirements
1. 2. Final documentation shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic format. Electronic documentation shall be in both of the following formats: a. b. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Adobe® PDF file or TIFF file Native format documents, when available.

Electronic files shall be converted directly into PDF or TIFF from the native file rather than scanned. For multi-page documents, a single file containing all pages shall be provided. Background color shall be white. Text color, line work and diagram shall be black unless color differentiation clarifies the document. File size should be kept to a minimum and shall not exceed 9 megabytes. The file name shall be the same as the paper document designator. File name shall include revision designator.

3.

Transmittal letter
1. Transmittal letter shall be provided with each document submittal.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

PEMEX REFINACION INVITATION TO BID GRAL. LAZARO CARDENAS REFINERY

SECTION 1.7 Supplier Document Index

 General  Piping  Civil/Structural  Instrumentaiton  Electrical  Equipment

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX
( MFD, Plot Plan and GA )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT NO. UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE DRAWING NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 12264-01-F20-220116-001 1 LOT A4 HYDRAULIC CALCULATION TO BE ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 970086-D101 970086-D102 970086-D103 970086-D104 970086-D105 970086-D106 970086-D107 970086-D108 970086-D109 970086-D110 970086-D111 970086-D112 970086-D113 970086-D-114 970086-D-115 970086-D-116 30611-1-DEMO 30611-2-DEMO 30613-1-DEMO 30613-2-DEMO 30613-3-DEMO 30613-4-DEMO 30614-X-DEMO 30615-1-DEMO 30615-2-DEMO 970086-D131 970086-D132 970086-D-133 970086-D134 970086-D135 970086-D136 970086-D137 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1

DESCRIPTION
MFD LEGEND AND GENERAL NOTES (1 OF 3) MFD LEGEND AND GENERAL NOTES (2 OF 3) MFD LEGEND AND GENERAL NOTES (3 OF 3) MFD RECYCLE GAS COALESCER MFD LIFT ENGAGER NO.1, LOCK HOPPER NO.1 AND CATALYST COLLECTOR MFD ORGANIC CHLORIDE INJECTION PUMPS, CHLORINATION BLOWER AND CHLORINATIONHEATER MFD REGENERATION TOWER, AIR HEATER AND REGENERATION HEATER MFD DISENGAGING HOPPER, REGENERATION BLOWER AND REGENERATION COOLER MFD VENT GAS COOLER AND PREHEAT GAS HEATER MFD SURGE HOPPER, LIFT ENGAGER NO. 2 AND LOCK HOPPER NO. 2 MFD DUST COLLECTOR, LIFT GAS BLOWER AND LIFT GAS BLOWER SPILLBACK COOLER MFD BOOSTER GAS COALESCER MFD UTILITY HEADERS AND CCR NITROGEN HEADER MFD AIR DRYER AND DUST COLLECTOR DETAIL MFD OIL MIST AND LIFT GAS BLOWER DETAIL MFD INSTRUMENT AIR DETAILS DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S GENERAL ARRANGEMENT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

Rev. 0 15-May-13 REMARK

TO BE ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION

Page 1 of 1

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX
( Piping )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT NO. UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS DRAWING NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
12264-01 PIPE SUPPORT 12264-01-F70-20051-001 DEMO-PKG#01 DEMO-PKG#02 DEMO-PKG#03 DEMO-PKG#04 DEMO-PKG#05 DEMO-PKG#06 DEMO-PKG#07 DEMO-PKG#08 DEMO-PKG#09 DEMO-PKG#11 DEMO-PKG#12 DEMO-PKG#13 DEMO-PKG#14 DEMO-PKG#15 DEMO-PKG#16 DEMO-PKG#17 DEMO-PKG#18 DEMO-PKG#19 DEMO-PKG#20 DEMO-PKG#21 DEMO-PKG#23 DEMO-PKG#24 DEMO-PKG#25 DEMO-PKG#26 DEMO-PKG#27 DEMO-PKG#28 DEMO-PKG#30 DEMO-PKG#31 DEMO-PKG#33 DEMO-PKG#35 DEMO-PKG#36 DEMO-PKG#38 DEMO-PKG#39 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT A4 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 STANDARD PIPE SUPPORTS PIPING DEMOLITION INDEX DEMO PACKAGE #01 DEMO PACKAGE #02 DEMO PACKAGE #03 DEMO PACKAGE #04 DEMO PACKAGE #05 DEMO PACKAGE #06 DEMO PACKAGE #07 DEMO PACKAGE #08 DEMO PACKAGE #09 DEMO PACKAGE #11 DEMO PACKAGE #12 DEMO PACKAGE #13 DEMO PACKAGE #14 DEMO PACKAGE #15 DEMO PACKAGE #16 DEMO PACKAGE #17 DEMO PACKAGE #18 DEMO PACKAGE #19 DEMO PACKAGE #20 DEMO PACKAGE #21 DEMO PACKAGE #23 DEMO PACKAGE #24 DEMO PACKAGE #25 DEMO PACKAGE #26 DEMO PACKAGE #27 DEMO PACKAGE #28 DEMO PACKAGE #30 DEMO PACKAGE #31 DEMO PACKAGE #33 DEMO PACKAGE #35 DEMO PACKAGE #36 DEMO PACKAGE #38 DEMO PACKAGE #39 12264-01-F70-270414-001 970086-D802 970086-D139 970086-D140 970086-D141 970086-D142 970086-D143 970086-D144 970086-D145 970086-D146 970086-D147 970086-D148 970086-D149 970086-D150 970086-D151 970086-D152 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Rev. 0 15-May-13 SIZE
A1 A3 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 Piping Tie-In List PIPING LINE INDEX PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN

DESCRIPTION

REMARK

Page 1 of 8

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX
( Piping )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS NO. DRAWING NO.
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
AE-L105R(A)-MS-1_SHT_1 AE-L105R(B)-MS-1_SHT_1 AE-L105R(C)-MS-1_SHT_1 AE-L105R-MS-1_SHT_1 AE-L107R-MS-1_SHT_1 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_1 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_2 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_3 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_4 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_5 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_6 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_7 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_8 AI-L103-PR-8_SHT_1 AP-L264N-MS-2_SHT_1 AP-L601R-PR-8_SHT_1 AP-L601R-PR-8_SHT_2 AP-L601R-PR-8_SHT_3 AP-L602R-PR-24_SHT_1 AR-L105R-MS-1_SHT_1 CL-L502R-M1A1_SHT_1 CL-L504R-M1A1_SHT_1 CL-L513R-M1A1_SHT_1 CL-L513R-M1A1_SHT_2 CL-L515R-M1A1_SHT_1 CL-L515R-M1A1_SHT_2 CL-L516R-M1A1_SHT_1 CL-L517R-M1A1_SHT_1 CM-L278N-MS-11_SHT_1 DAA-L270N-MS-1_SHT_1 DAA-L270N-MS-1_SHT_2 DAA-L273N-MS-11_SHT_1 DAA-L273N-MS-11_SHT_2 DAA-L273N-MS-11_SHT_3 DAA-L273N-MS-11_SHT_4 DAA-L273N-MS-11_SHT_5 DAA-L273N-MS-11_SHT_6 DA-L401R-PR-8_SHT_1 DA-L402R-PR-8_SHT_1 DA-L701R-PR-8_SHT_1 DA-L703R-PR-8_SHT_1 DA-L801R-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L115R-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L115R-PR-8_SHT_2 GI-L115R-PR-8_SHT_3 GI-L116R-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L118N-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L118N-PR-8_SHT_2 GI-L118N-PR-8_SHT_3 GI-L128R-PR-8_SHT_1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC

Rev. 0 15-May-13 SIZE DESCRIPTION REMARK

Page 2 of 8

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX
( Piping )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS NO. DRAWING NO.
104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154
GI-L254N-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L257N-PR-5_SHT_1 GI-L258N-PR-5_SHT_1 GI-L274N-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L275N-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L275N-PR-8_SHT_2 GI-L275N-PR-8_SHT_3 GI-L275N-PR-8_SHT_4 GI-L279N-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L280N-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L251N-B2A2_SHT_1 RE-L252N-B2A2_SHT_1 RE-L252N-B2A2_SHT_2 RE-L253N-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L253N-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L253N-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L267N-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L267N-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L267N-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L267N-PR-8_SHT_4 RE-L268N-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L268N-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L268N-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L271N-B2A1_SHT_1 RE-L403-PR-1_SHT_1 RE-L403-PR-15_SHT_1 RE-L406-PR-2_SHT_1 RE-L409-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L409R-PR-21_SHT_1 RE-L410-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L411-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L412-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L425-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L425R-PR-10_SHT_1 RE-L425R-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L460-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L502-PR-5_SHT_1 RE-L506R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L509R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L510R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L512R-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L513R-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L513R-PR-36_SHT_2 RE-L514R-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L515R-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L516R-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L517R-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L601R-PR-5_SHT_1 RE-L603R-PR-5_SHT_1 RE-L603R-PR-5_SHT_2 RE-L603R-PR-5_SHT_3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Rev. 0 15-May-13 SIZE
A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC

DESCRIPTION

REMARK

Page 3 of 8

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX
( Piping )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS NO. DRAWING NO.
155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205
RE-L603R-PR-5_SHT_4 RE-L603R-PR-5_SHT_5 RE-L606R-B1A1_SHT_1 RE-L607R-B1A1_SHT_1 RE-L607R-B1A1_SHT_2 RE-L701(A)-PR-3_SHT_1 RE-L701(B)-PR-3_SHT_1 RE-L702-PR-2_SHT_1 RE-L703-PR-2_SHT_1 RE-L710R(A)-PR-6_SHT_1 RE-L710R(A)-PR-6_SHT_2 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_1 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_2 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_3 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_4 RE-L715R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L716R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L731R-B2A2_SHT_1 RE-L741-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L801R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L801R-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L801R-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L801R-PR-8_SHT_4 RE-L801R-PR-8_SHT_5 RE-L801R-PR-8_SHT_6 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_10 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_11 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_12 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_13 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_4 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_5 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_6 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_7 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_8 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_9 RE-L803R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L803R-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L803R-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L803R-PR-8_SHT_4 RE-L803R-PR-8_SHT_5 RE-L806R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L806R-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L806R-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L807R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L810R-B2A2_SHT_1 RE-L810R-B2A2_SHT_2 RE-L811-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L811-PR-23_SHT_2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Rev. 0 15-May-13 SIZE
A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC WILL RE-ISSUE TO REDUCE NUMBER OF DUR-O-LOK COUPLINGS WILL RE-ISSUE TO REDUCE NUMBER OF DUR-O-LOK COUPLINGS WILL RE-ISSUE TO REDUCE NUMBER OF DUR-O-LOK COUPLINGS WILL RE-ISSUE TO REDUCE NUMBER OF DUR-O-LOK COUPLINGS

DESCRIPTION

REMARK

Page 4 of 8

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX
( Piping )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS NO. DRAWING NO.
206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245
RE-L811-PR-23_SHT_3 RE-L811R(A)-B2A2_SHT_1 RE-L811R-B2A2_SHT_1 RE-L815R-B2A2_SHT_1 TRIM1-EA-520-B1A1_SHT_1 TRIM1-L302N-PR-8_SHT_1 TRIM1-L306-PR-5_SHT_1 TRIM2-EA-520-B1A1_SHT_1 TRIM2-L302N-PR-8_SHT_1 TRIM2-L306-PR-5_SHT_1 TRIM3-L306-PR-5_SHT_1 TRIM-L300N-PR-3_SHT_1 TRIM-L301N-PR-5_SHT_1 TRIM-L302N-PR-8_SHT_1 V-748-B1A1-NI_SHT_1 VA-L102R-MS-12_SHT_1 VA-L104R-MS-12_SHT_1 VA-L104R-MS-12_SHT_2 VA-L276N-MS-12_SHT_1 VA-L276N-MS-12_SHT_2 VA-L276N-MS-12_SHT_3 VA-L276N-MS-12_SHT_4 VA-L277N-MS-12_SHT_1 VA-L277N-MS-12_SHT_2 VA-L277N-MS-12_SHT_3 VB-L272N-MS-11_SHT_1 VB-L272N-MS-11_SHT_2 VB-L272N-MS-11_SHT_3 VB-L272N-MS-11_SHT_4 VB-L272N-MS-11_SHT_5 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_1 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_2 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_3 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_4 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_5 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_6 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_7 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_8 VC-L281N-B1A1_SHT_1 VC-L282N-B1A1_SHT_1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Rev. 0 15-May-13 SIZE
A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC

DESCRIPTION

REMARK

Page 5 of 8

UOP DRAWING NO.
AE-L103R-MS-1_SHT_1 AE-L103R-MS-1_SHT_2 AI-L261N-MS-1_SHT_1 AI-L262N-MS-2_SHT_1 AI-L263N-MS-2_SHT_1 AR-L103R-MS-1_SHT_1 AR-L103R-MS-1_SHT_2 GI-L128N-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L259N-B1A1_SHT_1 RE-L259N-B1A1_SHT_2 RE-L259N-B1A1_SHT_3 RE-L260N-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L260N-PR-36_SHT_2 RE-L260N-PR-36_SHT_3 RE-L260N-PR-36_SHT_4 RE-L260N-PR-36_SHT_5 RE-L265N-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L265N-PR-36_SHT_2 RE-L265N-PR-36_SHT_3 RE-L284N-PR-5_SHT_1 RE-L408R(A)-PR-4_SHT_1 RE-L408R(A)-PR-4_SHT_2 RE-L408R(A)-PR-4_SHT_3 RE-L408R(B)-PR-4_SHT_1 RE-L602R-PR-5_SHT_1 RE-L808R-PR-8_SHT_1 TRIM1-ME-504-B2A2_SHT_1 TRIM2-ME-504-B2A2_SHT_1 TRIM3-ME-504-B2A2_SHT_1 TRIM1-L304N-PR-8_SHT_1 TRIM2-L304N-PR-8_SHT_1 TRIM1-DC-501-PR-10_SHT_1 TRIM2-DC-501-PR-10_SHT_1 VC-L269N-B2A1_SHT_1 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_1 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_2 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_3 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_4 DA-L402-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L409-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L421-PR-23_SHT_1 DA-L401-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L414-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L422-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L509-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L510-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L715R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L716R-PR-8_SHT_1 DA-L703-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L708-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L733-PR-23_SHT_1 DA-L701-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L731-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L811R-B2A2_SHT_1 DA-L801-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L813-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L811R-B2A2_SHT_1

Drawing Description
PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD)

Notes
Need final header sizing for Cooling Water Supply for Spillback Cooler EA-516 Need final header sizing for Cooling Water Supply for Spillback Cooler EA-516 No Comperessor Package GB-507A/B drawings received No Comperessor Package GB-507A/B drawings received No Comperessor Package GB-507A/B drawings received Need final header sizing for Cooling Water Return for Spillback Cooler EA-516 Need final header sizing for Cooling Water Return for Spillback Cooler EA-516 On HOLD Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler Fan GB-506 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler Fan GB-506 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler Fan GB-506 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler EA-515 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler EA-515 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler EA-515 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler EA-515 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler EA-515 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Outlet to Disengaging Hopper FA-513 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Outlet to Disengaging Hopper FA-513 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Outlet to Disengaging Hopper FA-513 On HOLD From Lift Engager #1 FA-512 to Impactless Elbow, Need Lift Engager drawings From Lift Engager #1 FA-512 to Impactless Elbow, Need Lift Engager drawings From Lift Engager #1 FA-512 to Impactless Elbow, Need Lift Engager drawings From Impactless Elbow to Disengaging Hopper FA-513 Expansion Joint on bottom of Regen Heater BH-500 Dust Collector ME-503 dump, Need Dust Collector drawings Block Valve between Booster Gas Coalescer ME-504 and Level Glass LG-3201 Block Valve between Booster Gas Coalescer ME-504 and Level Glass LG-3201 Blind Flange on Level Glass LG-3201 top PDT-1386 for ME-504 PDT-1386 for ME-504 TE-311A remounting TE-312 mounting Vent Stack for Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Re-Issue to reduce number of DUR-O-LOK Couplings Re-Issue to reduce number of DUR-O-LOK Couplings Re-Issue to reduce number of DUR-O-LOK Couplings Re-Issue to reduce number of DUR-O-LOK Couplings Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2251 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2251 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2251 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2252 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2252 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2252 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2254 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2254 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2255 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2255 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2257 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2257 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2257 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2258 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2258 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2258 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2259 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2259 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2259 (ON HOLD)

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX
( Piping Stress Files )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT DRAWING NO. UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 SPRING SUPPORT INDEX SH-BH500-01B SH-BH502-01-A SH-BH502-01-B SH-BH502-02-A SH-BH502-02-B SH-EA515-01A SH-EA515-01B SH-EA515-02A SH-EA515-02B SH-FA511-01-A SH-FA511-01-B SH-FA511-01-C SH-FA511-01-D SH-FA512-01-A SH-FA512-01-B SH-FA512-01-C SH-FA512-01-D SH-FA516-01-A SH-FA516-01-B SH-FA516-01-C SH-FA516-01-D SH-FA517-01-A SH-FA517-01-B SH-FA517-01-C SH-FA517-01-D SH-RE-L260N-01 SH-RE-L260N-02 SH-RE-L260N-03 SH-RE-L265N-01 SH-RE-L267R-01 SH-RE-L267R-02 SH-RE-L268N-01 SH-RE-L408R-01 SH-RE-L408R-02 SH-RE-L512R-01 SH-RE-L513R-01 SH-RE-L514R-01 SH-RE-L515R-01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4
SPRING SUPPORT INDEX SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION REMARK

Page 7 of 8

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX
( Piping Stress Files )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT DRAWING NO. UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
52 53 54 55

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION
SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT

REMARK

SH-RE-L516R-01 SH-RE-L517R-01 SH-RE-L607R-01 SH-RE-L607R-02 SH-RE-L710R-01 SH-RE-L710R-02 SH-RE-L802R-01 SH-RE-L802R-02 SH-RE-L802R-03 SH-RE-L803R-01 SH-RE-L803R-02 SH-RE-L806R-01
SH-VB-L272N-01 SH-VC-L269N-01 STR-RE-L606R-01 STR-RE-L606R-02 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 A A A 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1

A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4
A4 A4 A4 A4

Page 8 of 8

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX
( Civil / Structural )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT DRAWING UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 970086-D899 970086-D900 970086-D901 970086-D902 970086-D903 970086-D903-DEMO 970086-D904 970086-D905 970086-D906 970086-D907 970086-D908 970086-D909 970086-D910 970086-D911 970086-D912 970086-D913 970086-D914 970086-D915 970086-D916 970086-D917 970086-D918 970086-D919 970086-D920 970086-D921 970086-D922 970086-D922-DEMO 970086-D923 970086-D924 970086-D925 970086-D926 970086-D927 970086-D928 970086-D928-DEMO 970086-D929 970086-D930 970086-D930-DEMO 970086-D931 970086-D932 970086-D933 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 COVER SHEET CCR STRUCTURE STRUCTURAL STEEL GENERAL NOTES, LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS CCR STRUCTURE CONCRETE GENERAL NOTES, LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION LOADING DIAGRAM CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION LOCATION PLAN CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION DEMOLITION PLAN CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS BLOWER GB-505 FOUNDATION MODIFICATION PLAN AND SECTIONS CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION PAVING AND DRAINAGE PLAN CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION PAVING AND DRAINAGE SECTIONS AND DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE STEEL STRUCTURE INSTALLATION SEQUENCE CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 100,475 & EL. 104,000 CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 106,600 & EL. 110,200 CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 113,200 & EL. 116,600 CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 120,000 & EL. 122,800 CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 125,200 & EL. 128,800 CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 132,400 & EL. 135,600 CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 139,000 & EL. 141,800 CCR STRUCTURE ELEVATIONS COLUMN LINES "C" & "D" CCR STRUCTURE ELEVATIONS COLUMN LINES "1.1" & " 2.1" CCR STRUCTURE SECTIONS AND DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE STAIR ELEVATIONS SECTIONS "A" & "B" EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 104,000, 106,400 & 110,125 EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 120,045 & EL. 122,845 EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PLANS TOS EL. 116,510, 120,045 & 122,845 EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 122,845 & EL. 128,775 EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 132,325 & EL. 136,975 EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 141,800 & EL. 146,875 EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE ELEVATIONS COLUMN LINES "A", "B", "1" & "2" EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE SECTIONS AND DETAILS EXISTING REACTOR STRUCTURE FRAMING PLANS EXISTING REACTOR STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PLAN AND SECTION EXISTING REACTOR STRUCTURE SECTIONS AND ELEVATIONS PIPE SUPPORT STRUCTURE PLANS SECTIONS AND DETAILS PIPE SUPPORT STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PLAN AND SECTION CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS EL. 100,500 TO 106,625 CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS EL. 110,225 TO 116,625 CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS EL. 120,025 TO 125,225 Page 1 of 2

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION REMARK

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX
( Civil / Structural )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT DRAWING UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. NO.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 970086-D951 PEMEX CSA PLATF 12264-01-F40-20031 0 A 0 1 LOT 1 LOT 1 LOT A4 A4 A4 Structural Engineering Calcs for Pemex 450 pph CCR Structure and Foundation PEMEX CSA Platform & Pipe Support Structure by Blower BOM CSA BOM for PEMEX CCR project 970086-D934 970086-D935 970086-D941 970086-D942 970086-D943 970086-D944 970086-D937 970086-D938 970086-D939 0 0 0 0 0 0 A A A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION
CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS EL. 128,825 TO 135,625 CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS EL. 139,025 TO 141,825 CCR STRUCTURE STEEL DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE STEEL DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE STEEL DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE STEEL DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS

REMARK

Page 2 of 2

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX
( Instrument )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. DRAWING NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
970086-D600 970086-D601 970086-D603 970086-D605 970086-D606 970086-D607 970086-D608 970086-D609 970086-D610 970086-D611 970086-D612 970086-D613 970086-D614 970086-D615 970086-D616 970086-D617 970086-D618 970086-D619 970086-D625 970086-D626 970086-D628 970086-D629 970086-D630 970086-D631 970086-D632 970086-D633 970086-D636 970086-D637 970086-D638 970086-D639 970086-D640 970086-D641 970086-D644 970086-D645 970086-D648 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 LOT 2 1 1 1 1 LOT 1 LOT 1 LOT 1 LOT 1 LOT 1 LOT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOT 1 1 1 1 1 1 A3 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 INSTRUMENTATION DRAWING LIST INSTRUMENT DESIGN SUMMARY INSTRUMENT SYMBOL LIST & GENERAL NOTES INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - GRADE INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 1 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 2 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 3 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 4 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 5 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 6 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 7 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 8 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 9 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 10 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 11 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 12 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 13 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 14 INSTRUMENT HOMERUN CABLE SCHEDULE INSTRUMENTATION HOMERUN CONDUIT ROUTING PLAN INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-L-D-011 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-L-D-012 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-T-021 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-A-011 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-A-021 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-L-D-051 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-D-071 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-A-071 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-T-081 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-T-082 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-A-091 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-L-A-091 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-H-T-001 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-H1-T-001 INSTRUMENT WIRING DIAGRAM TEMPERATURE ELEMENT/TRANMISTTER LOCATION

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION REMARK

Page 1 of 4

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX
( Instrument )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. DRAWING NO.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
970086-D650 970086-D653 970086-D654 970086-D660 970086-D667-1 970086-D667-10 970086-D667-12 970086-D667-13 970086-D667-14 970086-D667-15 970086-D667-16 970086-D667-17 970086-D667-18 970086-D667-19 970086-D667-2 970086-D667-22 970086-D667-3 970086-D667-4 970086-D667-5 970086-D667-6 970086-D667-7 970086-D667-8 970086-D667-9 970086-D668-1 970086-D668-2 970086-D669-1 970086-D669-2 970086-D669-3 970086-D669-4 970086-D669-5 970086-D669-6 970086-D669-7 970086-D669-8 970086-D669-9 970086-D669-10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1LOT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A1 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION
INSTRUMENTATION CABLE BLOCK DIAGRAM INSTRUMENT JUNCTION BOX ASSEMBLY DRAWING DISCRETE / ANALOG INSTRUMENT JUNCTION BOX ASSEMBLY DRAWING THERMOCOUPLE INSTRUMENT BILL OF MATERIAL INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - PNEUMATIC HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - PNEUMATIC HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP

REMARK

Page 2 of 4

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX
( Instrument )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. DRAWING NO.
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105
970086-D669-11 970086-D669-12 970086-D669-14 970086-D669-16 970086-D669-17 970086-D669-18 970086-D670-1 970086-D670-2 970086-D670-3 970086-D670-4 970086-D670-5 970086-D670-6 970086-D670-7 970086-D670-8 970086-D670-9 970086-D670-10 970086-D670-11 970086-D670-12 970086-D670-13 970086-D670-14 970086-D670-15 970086-D670-16 970086-D670-17 970086-D670-18 970086-D670-19 970086-D670-20 970086-D670-21 970086-D671 970086-D672 970086-D673 970086-D674 970086-D675 970086-D676 970086-D677 970086-D678 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A1 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION
INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM AT-383 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM LE/LSHH-307 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM LE/LSHH-347 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM LE/LSHH-349 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM LE/LSHH-309 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM FT-362 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM ME-502 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM FT-1016

REMARK

Page 3 of 4

106 107 108 109 110 970086-D679 970086-D680 970086-D681 970086-D682 FB8372-D 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1LOT A3 A3 A3 A3 A4 Rev. REV SHTS SIZE NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. DRAWING NO.SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX ( Instrument ) PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM ME-503 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM ME-11 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM AT-388 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM BENTLY NEVADA (GB-505) INSTRUMENT DEMOLITION EXISTING INSTRUMENT INDEX REMARK Page 4 of 4 .

DECK 2 POWER. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN .DECK 13 POWER. GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN . GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN .SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX ( Electrical ) PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. 3 LAYOUT ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SUBSTATION NO. GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN .DECK 6 POWER. GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN .DECK 8 POWER.DECK 14 NEW CCR STRUCTURE ISOMETRIC ELEVATION VIEW POWER CONDUIT ENVELOPE ISOMETRIC ELECTRICAL HOMERUN CONDUIT ROUTING PLAN ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND CONDUIT ROUTING PLAN ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION UNDERGROUND CONDUIT ROUTING PLAN ELECTRICAL BILL OF MATERIAL MATERIAL SCHEDULE FOR POWER SYSTEM NAME PLATE ELECTRICAL HOMERUN CABLE SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION HOMERUN CABLE SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL PANELBOARD SCHEDULE RP-1 RECEPTACLE PANEL ELECTRICAL PANELBOARD SCHEDULE LP-1 LIGHTING PANEL ELECTRICAL PANELBOARD SCHEDULE EM-LP EMERGENCY LIGHTING PANEL ELECTRICAL PANELBOARD SCHEDULE IPP-1 INSTRUMENT POWER PANEL Rev.DECK 12 POWER.DECK 3 POWER. GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN . GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN . GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN . DRAWING NO. GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN .DECK 11 POWER. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 970086-D700 970086-D701 970086-D702 970086-D703 970086-D703-D 970086-D706 970086-D706-D 970086-D707 970086-D708 970086-D709 970086-D710 970086-D711 970086-D712 970086-D713 970086-D714 970086-D715 970086-D716 970086-D717 970086-D718 970086-D719 970086-D720 970086-D721 970086-D722 970086-D723 970086-D727 970086-D728 970086-D728-D 970086-D732 970086-D733 970086-D735 970086-D735-D 970086-D739 970086-D740 970086-D741 970086-D742 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1LOT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 A1 A4 A4 A4 A4 ELECTRICAL DRAWING LIST ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS AND GENERAL NOTES ELECTRICAL LOAD LIST ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION NO. GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN . GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN . GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN .DECK 10 POWER.DECK 5 POWER.DECK 4 POWER. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION REMARK Page 1 of 2 .DECK 7 POWER.DECK 9 POWER. GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN .DECK 1 POWER. GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN . GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN . 3 LAYOUT POWER.GRADE POWER.

GA-514A .ORGANIC CHLORIDE INJECTION PUMP DEMO PHOTO .REGENERATION COOLER FAN DEMO PHOTO .GB-503B .REGENERATION BLOWER DEMO PHOTO .GB-507A/B . DRAWING NO. RP-1 ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS SOCKET OUTLET MOUNTING ON GRADE ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS SOCKET OUTLET MOUNTING ON DECK ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS WELDING RECEPTACLES MOUNTING ON GRADE ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS WELDING RECEPTACLES MOUNTING ON DECK ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS LIGHTING SYSTEM PENDANT MOUNTING ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS LIGHTING SYSTEM STANCHION MOUNTING ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS POWER SYSTEM CONDUIT FEED ON GRADE ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS POWER SYSTEM CONDUIT FEED ON GRADE ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS POWER SYSTEM CONDUIT FEED ON GRADE ELECTRICAL EXISTING PANEL SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS ELECTRICAL CONNECTION AT HEATER ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS POWER SYSTEM MOTOR TERMINATION ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS GROUNDING SYSTEM ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS GROUNDING SYSTEM ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MOTOR CONTROLS .NEW DEMO PHOTO KEY PLAN DEMO PHOTO . REV SHTS SIZE NO.GB-506 . EM-LP.GA-513B.INSTRUMENT AIR COMPRESSOR DEMO PHOTO . 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION REMARK ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS PANELBOARDS IPP-1.SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX ( Electrical ) PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO.GB-505 .EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MOTOR CONTROL ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MOTOR CONTROLS .LIFT GAS BLOWER DEMO PHOTO . 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 970086-D743 970086-D744 970086-D745 970086-D746 970086-D747 970086-D748 970086-D749 970086-D751 970086-D752 970086-D753 970086-D754 970086-D755 970086-D756 970086-D759 970086-D760 970086-D762 970086-D762-D 970086-D763 970086-D764 970086-D770-D 970086-D771-D 970086-D772-D 970086-D773-D 970086-D774-D 970086-D775-D 970086-D776-D 970086-D777-D 970086-D778-D SK-12264-E-001 SK-12264-E-002 970086-D704 970086-D705 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A1 A4 A4 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 Rev.NEW ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS HEATERS CONTROLS AND AIR COMPRESSORS .REGEN HEATER & AIR HEATER ELECTRICAL CALCULATION FOR LIGHTING SYSTEM GRADE LEVEL ELECTRICAL CALCULATION FOR LIGHTING SYSTEM DECK LEVEL ELECTRICAL AREA CLASSIFICATION ELECTRICAL AREA CLASSIFICATION - ISSUED FOR REFERENCE ISSUED FOR REFERENCE Page 2 of 2 .ORGANIC CHLORIDE INJECTION PUMP DEMO PHOTO .GB-503A . LP-1.LIFT GAS BLOWER DEMO PHOTO .BH-500 & BH-502 .

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX ( Equipment ) PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12264-01-F50-250111-100-IFC 12264-01-F50-250111-101-IFC 12264-01-F50-250111-102-IFC 12264-01-F50-250111-103-IFC 12264-01-F50-250111-106-IFC 1226401M010 1226401M040 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A1 A1 Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION NOZZLEPRO FEA FOR 24" WITH OCC LC 6 NOZZLEPRO FEA FOR 24" NOZZLE WITH OCC LC 7 NOZZLEPRO FEA FOR 24" NOZZLE WITH OCC LC 8 NOZZLEPRO FEA FOR 24" NOZZLE WITH OCC LC 9 COMPRESS CALCULATIONS FOR REGENERATION TOWER(NOZZLES D & P) VESSEL MODIFICATIONS FA-510 REGENERATION TOWER VESSEL MODIFICATIONS REACTOR ASSEMBLY SURGE POT REMARK . UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE DRAWING NO.

8 PEMEX MINATITLAN REFINERY SITE INFORMATION . LAZARO CARDENAS REFINERY SECTION 1.PEMEX REFINACION INVITATION TO BID GRAL.

Veracruz.Refinery Entrance and Transportation Routing Gral. Lazaro Cardenas Refinery Minatitlan. Mexico De la autopista MinatitlánVillahermosa (nuevo acceso) Puerta Administrativa Área CCR Portada Oficina Pemex Residencia Área propuesta para almacén y talleres Route From Contractor Entrance to CCR Unit Route to Pemex Resident’s Office .

PEMEX REFINACION INVITATION TO BID GRAL. LAZARO CARDENAS REFINERY SECTION 1. HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION  COUNTRY OF ORIGIN REQUIREMENTS .9 PEMEX REQUIREMENTS  APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND CODES  MINIMAL INDIVISIBLE UNITS REQUIREMENTS  PROVISIONS FOR SAFETY.

VER. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. MONTAJE. FABRICACIÓN.. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. ANEXO B NORMAS Y CÓDIGOS APLICABLES . LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN.REFINERÍA “GRAL. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. VER. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN.

CÓDIGOS Y NORMAS APLICABLES.mx NORMAS MEXICANAS (NMX): Documento de aplicación voluntaria que elabora un Organismo Nacional de Normalización o alguna Secretaría. El contratista deberá informar oficialmente a la supervisión de Pemex Refinación dichas discrepancias y solicitarle los códigos a aplicar. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. la cual mantiene un catalogo actualizado de ellas http://www. directrices. a menos que se especifique lo contrario en los anexos de la sección II. sistema. la cual mantiene un catálogo actualizado de ellas. . la cual mantiene un catálogo actualizado de ellas. a través del portal de la Secretaría de Economía. proceso. o prescripciones aplicables a un producto. embalaje. el cual mantiene un catálogo actualizado de ellas. La supervisión de Pemex-Refinación determinará los códigos que procedan. métodos de prueba. instalación. para su selección y aplicación.pemex. actividad. especificaciones. proceso. para su selección y aplicación. especificaciones. actividad. así como aquellas relativas a la terminología. FABRICACIÓN. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN.com. a través del portal de la secretaría de economía. http://www. éstas se encuentran en el portal de PEMEX. a través del portal de la secretaría de economía. marcado o etiquetado y las que se refieran a su cumplimiento o aplicación. http://www. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL.economia-noms.mx NORMAS DE REFERENCIA: Son creadas por las entidades de la administración pública federal a través de sus comités de normalización y conforme a las cuales se adquieran. embalaje. o prescripciones aplicables a un producto. características. cuando las normas mexicanas o internacionales no cubran los requerimientos de las mismas o bien. servicio o método de producción u operación. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. Deberá usarse la edición/revisión y adendas más recientes de los citados documentos. El contratista del servicio deberá aplicar las normas de referencia de PEMEX. así como aquellas relativas a la terminología. servicio o método de producción u operación.economia-noms. El contratista del servicio podrá consultar todas las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas (NOM'S). sistema. conforme a las finalidades establecidas en el artículo 40 de la Ley Federal Sobre Metrología y Normalización.gob. que establece reglas. VER. VER. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. MONTAJE. instalación. simbología. simbología. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. especificaciones y los reglamentos aplicables. La lista incluida se deberá considerar como el requerimiento normativo mínimo exigido. el contratista es responsable de cumplir de acuerdo a sus alcances de manera estricta con todos los códigos.. arrienden o contraten bienes o servicios. Para el correcto desarrollo de los alcances del contrato. El contratista del servicio podrá consultar todas las Normas Mexicanas (NMX'S).mx. directrices.REFINERÍA “GRAL. marcado o etiquetado. características. normas. en caso de existir alguna discrepancia entre estos códigos y la ingeniería del proyecto. atributos. prácticas recomendadas. las consideren inaplicables u obsoletas. NORMAS OFICIALES MEXICANAS (NOM): Regulación técnica de observancia obligatoria expedida por las dependencias competentes. atributos. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. que prevé para un uso común y repetido.gob. El contratista del servicio podrá consultar todas las normas de referencia. reglas.

Construcción-condiciones de seguridad y salud en el trabajo. Relativa a los requerimientos y características de los informes de los riesgos de trabajo que ocurran. Productos eléctricos–especificaciones de seguridad.500 kW. Eficiencia energética para sistemas de alumbrado en edificios no residenciales. Recipientes sujetos a presión y calderas-funcionamiento-condiciones de seguridad. MONTAJE. NOM-016-ENER-2010 NOM-017-ENER/SCFI-2005 NOM-003-SCFI-2000 NOM-063-SCFI-2001 NOM-064-SCFI-2000 NOM-041-SEMARNAT-2006 DESCRIPCIÓN Condiciones de seguridad e higiene en los centros de trabajo para el manejo. pero sin ser limitante. fracción IV del reglamento de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización. Eficiencia energética de lámparas fluorescentes compactas–límites y métodos de prueba. . NORMAS O REGULACIONES TÉCNICAS EXTRANJERAS: Es aquel documento normativo emitido por un organismo de Normalización Extranjero y que es de aplicación exclusiva en su país de origen y que Pemex Refinación puede utilizarlo como referencia de conformidad con lo dispuesto en el artículo 28..746 a 343 kW. transporte y almacenamiento de sustancias químicas peligrosas. Límites. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. VER. NORMAS OFICIALES MEXICANAS (NOM) IDENTIFICACIÓN NOM-005-STPS-1998 NOM-011-STPS-2001 NOM-015-STPS-2001 NOM-017-STPS-2008 NOM-020-STPS-2002 NOM-021-STPS-1994 NOM-022-STPS-2008 NOM-024-STPS-2001 NOM-025-STPS-2008 NOM-026-STPS-2008 NOM-027-STPS-2008 NOM-031-STPS-2011 NOM-100-STPS-1994 NOM-113-STPS-2009 NOM-115-STPS-2009 NOM-001-SEDE-2005 PEC-NOM-001-SEDE-2005 NOM-007-ENER-2004 NOM-014-ENER-2004.180 a 1. en potencia nominal de 0. Establece las especificaciones de los extintores contra incendio a base de polvo químico seco. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. tipo jaula de ardilla. (Nota: aplicar sólo para sistemas de control de alumbrado) Eficiencia energética de motores de corriente alterna monofásicos. NORMAS Y ESPECIFICACIONES GENERALES. métodos de prueba y clasificación de los Cascos de protección. VER. Condiciones de seguridad industrial en los trabajos de soldadura y corte. Calzado de protección. Instalaciones Eléctricas (Utilización) Procedimiento para evaluación de la conformidad de la norma oficial mexicana NOM-001SEDE-2005. Eficiencia energética de motores de corriente alterna trifásicos de inducción. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. Colores y señales de seguridad e higiene e identificación de riesgos de productos conducidos por tuberías. Límites. Condiciones de iluminación en los centros de trabajo. Que establece los límites máximos permisibles de emisión de gases contaminantes provenientes del escape de los vehículos automotores en circulación que usan gasolina como combustible. Relativa a la selección y manejo de equipo de protección personal para los trabajadores en los centros de trabajo. Especificaciones. de inducción. Relativa a las condiciones de seguridad e higiene en los centros de trabajo donde se genere ruido. métodos de prueba y marcado. para integrar las estadísticas. métodos de prueba y marcado. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. Luminarias para uso en interiores y exteriores –especificaciones de seguridad y métodos de prueba. las normatividades a emplear durante el proyecto son las siguientes: A. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. tipo jaula de ardilla. en potencia nominal de 0. Electricidad estática en los centros de trabajo – condiciones de seguridad e higiene. FABRICACIÓN. Como mínimo. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. Relativa a las condiciones de seguridad e higiene en los centros de trabajo en donde se generen vibraciones. Conductores–requisitos de seguridad. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. de uso general.REFINERÍA “GRAL. Relativa a la exposición laboral de las condiciones térmicas elevadas o abatidas en los centros de trabajo.

Control de la contaminación radioactiva. Requisitos sanitarios que se deben cumplir en los sistemas de abastecimiento públicos y privados durante el manejo del agua. B. Industria de la construcción-agregados-muestreo Industria de la construcción-cemento hidráulico -método de prueba para la determinación de la finura de cementantes hidráulicos mediante la malla 0. Método de prueba para aditivos expansores y estabilizadores de volumen del concreto. Salud ambiental.AGGREGATES-DETERMINATION OF ORGANIC IMPURITIES IN FINE AGGREGATE. Salud Ambiental. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. Agua para uso y consumo humano. Que establece los límites máximos permisibles de emisión de ruido provenientes del escape de los vehículos automotores. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. TII: BUILDING INDUSTRY . LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. motocicletas y triciclos motorizados en circulación y su método de medición.determinación de la finura de los cementantes hidráulicos (método de permeabilidad al aire) Industria de la construcción-cementantes hidráulicos -determinación de la consistencia normal.AGGREGATES FOR CONCRETE-GRANULOMETRIC ANALYSIS-METHOD OF TEST Industria de la construcción -Agregados-Determinación de impurezas orgánicas en el agregado fino.. MONTAJE. FABRICACIÓN. Procedimientos sanitarios para el muestreo Productos y servicios. Agua y hielo para consumo humano.AGGREGATES . VER. Requisitos para equipos de radiografía industrial Parte 1: Requisitos generales. envasados y a granel. Industria de la construcción-agregados para concreto hidráulico-especificaciones y métodos de prueba. 325) Industria de la construcción-cementantes hidráulicos. TII: BUILDING INDUSTRY . PROCURA DE MATERIALES. BUILDING INDUSTRY . Agua para uso y consumo humano. calificación y certificación de personal de ensayos no destructivos.REFINERÍA “GRAL. Industria de la construcción-cementos hidráulicos-determinación del tiempo de fraguado de cementantes hidráulicos (método VICAT) Industria de la construcción-cementos hidráulicos-determinación de la resistencia a la compresión de cementantes hidráulicos Industria de la construcción-cementos hidráulicos-determinación de la sanidad de cementantes hidráulicos.Determinación de partículas ligeras.045 mm (No. Que establece los límites máximos permisibles de emisión de ruido de las fuentes fijas y su método de medición. Industria de la construcción-concreto hidráulico-determinación del revenimiento en el concreto fresco. VER. especificaciones sanitarias. IDENTIFICACIÓN NOM-045-SEMARNAT-2006 NOM-050-SEMARNAT-1993 NOM-080-SEMARNAT-1994 NOM-081-SEMARNAT-1994 NOM-008-NUCL-2003 NOM-025/1-NUCL-2000 NOM-025/2-NUCL-1996 NOM-127-SSA1-1994 NOM-230-SSA1-2002 NOM-201-SSA1-2002 DESCRIPCIÓN Que establece los niveles máximos permisibles de opacidad del humo proveniente del escape de vehículos automotores en circulación que usan diesel o mezclas que incluyan diesel como combustible Vehículos en circulación que usan gas licuado o natural u otros combustibles alternos. Industria de la construcción-concreto-concreto hidráulico industrializado-especificaciones. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. Aditivos estabilizadores de volumen. Industria siderúrgica-malla electrosoldada de acero liso o corrugado para refuerzo de concreto-especificaciones y métodos de prueba Capacitación. Industria de la construcción-agua para concreto-especificaciones. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. Industria de la construcción -Agregados. Requisitos para equipos de radiografía industrial Parte 2: Operación. . Límites permisibles de calidad y tratamientos a que debe someterse el agua para su potabilización. NORMAS MEXICANAS (NMX) IDENTIFICACIÓN NMX-B-254-CANACERO-2008 NMX-B-290-CANACERO-2006 NMX-B-482-1991 NMX-C-030-ONNCCE-2004 NMX-C-049-ONNCCE-2006 NMX-C-056-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-057-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-059-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-061-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-062-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-072-1997-ONNCCE NMX-C-077-1997-ONNCCE NMX-C-088-1997-ONNCCE NMX-C-090-1978 NMX-C-111-ONNCCE-2004 NMX-C-117-1978 NMX-C-122-ONNCCE-2004 NMX-C-155 ONNCCE 2004 NMX-C-156-ONNCCE-2010 DESCRIPCIÓN Industria siderúrgica-acero estructural-especificaciones y métodos de prueba.DETERMINATION OF LIGHTWEIGHT PIECES Industria de la construcción -Agregados para concreto -Análisis granulométrico-método de prueba.

REDUCING FIELD SAMPLES OF AGGREGATES FOR TESTING SIZE Industria de la construcción-cemento hidráulico-determinación de la reactividad potencial de los agregados con álcalis de cementantes hidráulicos por medio de barras de mortero.ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-283-1982 NMX-C-305-1980 NMX-C-403-ONNCCE-1999 NMX-C-407-ONNCCE-2001 NMX-C-414-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-CC-9001-IMNC-2008 NMX-EC-17025-IMNC-2006 NMX-J-010/1-ANCE-2010 NMX-J-010-ANCE-2005 NMX-J-019-ANCE-2006 NMX-J-035-ANCE-2001 NMX-J-075/1-ANCE-1994 NMX-J-075/3-ANCE-1994 NMX-J-098-ANCE-1999 NMX-J-109-ANCE-2010 NMX-J-118/1-ANCE-2000 NMX-J-118/2-ANCE-2007 NMX-J-170-ANCE-2002 NMX-J-199-ANCE-2002 NMX-J-294-ANCE-2008 NMX-J-295/1-ANCE-2010 NMX-J-295/2-ANCE-2010 NMX-J-429-ANCE-2002 NMX-J-438-ANCE-2003 NMX-J-451-ANCE-2011 NMX-J-503-ANCE-2005 DESCRIPCIÓN Industria de la construcción-agregados-determinación de la masa específica y absorción de agua del agregado grueso. para equipos eléctricos-especificaciones. Industria de la construcción -Aditivos químicos para concreto–especificaciones. Conductores-resistencia de aislamiento–método de prueba. al tamaño requerido para las pruebas.descripción de sus componentes minerales naturales. VER.. Productos eléctricos–conductores–conductores con aislamiento termoplástico a base de policloruró de vinilo con medidas internacionales-especificaciones. Tableros-Tableros de distribución de fuerza en baja tensión–especificaciones y métodos de prueba. Aparatos eléctricos-Maquinas rotatorias-Parte 1: Motores de inducción de corriente alterna del tipo rotor en cortocircuito en potencias de 0. Transformadores de corriente-especificaciones y métodos de prueba Productos eléctricos-Tableros de alumbrado y distribución en baja tensión–especificaciones y métodos de prueba. del tipo de rotor en cortocircuito. Iluminación–lámparas fluorescentes para alumbrado general–especificaciones y métodos de prueba. Sistemas eléctricos de potencia–suministro–tensiones eléctricas normalizadas. Terminales para cable aislado con pantalla para uso interior y exterior. IDENTIFICACIÓN NMX-C-164-ONNCCE-2002 NMX-C-165-ONNCCE-2004 NMX-C-170-1997-ONNCCE NMX-C-180-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-255-ONNCCE-2006 NMX-C-265. Especificaciones. Industria de la construcción-agregados-determinación de la masa especifica y absorción de agua del agregado fino-método de prueba Industria de la construcción . FABRICACIÓN.agregados . DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL.agua para concreto – análisis Industria de la construcción. 2. Industria de la construcción-agua para concreto-muestreo. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. Conductores-cables con aislamiento de policloruro de vinilo. Conductores–alambres de cobre semiduro para usos eléctricos–especificaciones. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. MONTAJE. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE.5 Kv a 230 Kv en corriente alterna–especificaciones y métodos de prueba. Sistemas de gestión de la calidad-requisitos. Industria de la construcción-concreto hidráulico para uso estructural. en potencias desde 0. Conductores-alambres. cables y cordones con aislamiento de PVC 80°C.agregados para concreto. Industria de la construcción-cementantes hidráulicos-especificaciones y métodos de ensayo. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. Industria de la construcción . VER. TII:BUILDING INDUSTRY AGGREGATES . 90°C y 105°C. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. Conectadores-Conectadores de tipo compresión para líneas aéreas-especificaciones y métodos de prueba. Iluminación-balastros para lámparas de descarga de alta intensidad y lámparas de vapor de .reducción de las muestras de agregados obtenidas en el campo. Industria de la construcción-varilla corrugada de acero proveniente de lingote y palanquilla para refuerzo de concreto-especificaciones y métodos de prueba.ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-277.062 Kw. muestreo y métodos de ensayo. 75 °C y 90 °C para alambrado de tableros-especificaciones. Iluminación-lámparas-lámparas incandescentes de filamento metálico para alumbrado general-especificaciones y métodos de prueba. Aparatos eléctricos-Maquinas rotatorias-Parte 3: Métodos de prueba para motores de inducción de corriente alterna.062 a 373 Kw. Conductores-conductores con aislamiento termófijo-especificaciones. Especificaciones. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. Iluminación-lámparas fluorescentes de doble base para alumbrado generalespecificaciones y métodos de prueba. Requisitos generales para la competencia de los laboratorios de ensayo y de calibración. Industria de la construcción-agregados para concreto hidráulico-examen petrográficométodo de ensayo. Conductores-conductores con aislamiento termoplástico para instalaciones hasta 600 V.REFINERÍA “GRAL.

Demoliciones y desmantelamientos. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. FABRICACIÓN. Apartarrayos tipo estación. Diseño de estructuras de acero. Bancos de resistencia. Actuadores para válvulas. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. Diseño de instalaciones eléctricas en plantas industriales. Sistemas de drenajes. Sistemas de tuberías en plantas industriales-diseño y especificaciones de materiales. Instrumentos de medición para temperatura. . MONTAJE.REFINERÍA “GRAL. Protocolos de comunicación en sistemas digitales de monitoreo y control. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. Ropa de trabajo para trabajadores de Petróleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios Identificación de productos transportados por tuberías o contenidos en tanques de almacenamiento. en equipos. Pruebas hidrostáticas de tuberías y equipos. Escaleras metálicas portátiles-información de seguridad. Recubrimientos A Base de Concreto A Prueba de Fuego en Estructuras y Soportes de Equipos Sistema de protección a tierra para instalaciones petroleras. NORMAS DE REFERENCIA (NRF). materiales y métodos de medición Escaleras metálicas portátiles-recomendaciones para selección. Clasificación de áreas peligrosas y selección de equipo eléctrico. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. Sistemas de aire acondicionado. Placas de orificio concéntricas. Diseño de Estructuras de concreto Soportes de concreto para tubería. Válvulas de control con actuador tipo neumático. Motores eléctricos. sistema de protección contra tormentas eléctricas – especificaciones. Secadores de aire para instrumentos. Espaciamientos mínimos y criterios para la distribución de instalaciones industriales en centros de trabajos de Petróleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios.. VER. Sistemas de tuberías en plantas industriales. Mangueras para servicio de contraincendio. IDENTIFICACIÓN NRF-004-PEMEX-2003 NRF-006-PEMEX-2011 NRF-009-PEMEX-2004 NRF-010-PEMEX-2004 NRF-028-PEMEX-2004 NRF-027-PEMEX-2001 NRF-032-PEMEX-2005 NRF-034-PEMEX-2004 NRF-035-PEMEX-2005 NRF-036-PEMEX-2003 NRF-046-PEMEX-2003 NRF-048-PEMEX-2007 NRF-051-PEMEX-2006 NRF-053-PEMEX-2006 NRF-065-PEMEX-2006 NRF-070-PEMEX-2004 NRF-091-PEMEX-2007 NRF-095-PEMEX-2004 NRF-115-PEMEX-2006 NRF-125-PEMEX-2005 NRF-137-PEMEX-2006 NRF-138-PEMEX-2006 NRF-139-PEMEX-2006 NRF-140-PEMEX-2005 NRF-146-PEMEX-2011 NRF-147-PEMEX-2006 NRF-148-PEMEX-2005 NRF-149-PEMEX-2005 NRF-150-PEMEX-2005 NRF-152-PEMEX-2006 NRF-159-PEMEX-2006 NRF-160-PEMEX-2007 NRF-162-PEMEX-2006 NRF-163-PEMEX-2006 NRF-164-PEMEX-2006 NRF-168-PEMEX-2006 DESCRIPCIÓN Protección con recubrimientos anticorrosivos a instalaciones superficiales de ductos. Manómetros. Conectadores-conectadores sellados-especificaciones y métodos de prueba. Sistemas fijos contra incendio cámaras de espuma. Cimentación de estructuras y equipo. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. Tablero de distribución en media tensión. uso y cuidado. Diseño y construcción de recipientes a presión. VER. IDENTIFICACIÓN NMX-J-519-ANCE-2006 NMX-J-549-ANCE-2005 NMX-W-144-1996 NMX-W-147-1996 DESCRIPCIÓN sodio de baja presión-especificaciones. Instalación y pruebas. Grupo generador (planta de emergencia). Aislamiento térmico para altas temperaturas. Espárragos y tornillos de acero de aleación y acero inoxidable para servicios de alta y baja temperatura. C. recipientes y tubería superficial. Sistemas de protección anticorrosiva a base de recubrimientos para instalaciones superficiales.

1 CME-010 REV. ADMINISTRACIÓN INDUSTRIALES DE CAMBIOS EN PARA LAS E DE INSTALACIONES INSTALACIONES INCIDENTES Y DG-ASIPA-SI-08600 REV. CANDADOS. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. 1 DG-GPASI-SI-02703 (1999) DG-GPASI-SI-02720 REV. 3 (2008) DG-GPASI-SI-02520 REV. 6 (2007) PROCESOS REPORTE PROCEDIMIENTO PARA ACCIDENTES EL ANÁLISIS Y . QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EL ESTABLECIMIENTO DEL INDICE DE CONFIABILIDAD DEL ESTADO FISICO DE LAS INSTALACIONES DE LOS CENTROS DE TRABAJO DE PEMEX REFINACION REGLAS DE SEGURIDAD PARA EFECTUAR TRABAJOS EN ESPACIOS CONFINADOS.REFINERÍA “GRAL.01 (1976) 3. EXPLICACIÓN Y APLICACIÓN DE LA POLÍTICA DE SEGURIDAD INDUSTRIAL Y DE PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL DE PETRÓLEOS MEXICANOS. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. 2 CME-036 REV. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. 2 (2007) DG-GPASI-SI-08200 REV. MONTAJE. LINEAMIENTOS PARA LA REALIZACIÓN DE OPERACIONES PELIGROSAS. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EL ANÁLISIS DE INCIDENTES. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EFECTUAR LAS PRUEBAS HIDROSTÁTICAS A TUBERÍAS Y EQUIPOS DE LAS INSTALACIONES DEPENDIENTES DE PEMEX REFINACIÓN.01 (1988) 800-18540-DE-SISOPA-001 800-18540-DE-SISOPA-002 800-80000-DCSIPA-L-001 800-80000-DCSIPA-L-002 CME-004 REV. ANÁLISIS Y PROGRAMACIÓN DE LA MEDICIÓN PREVENTIVA DE ESPESORES. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PRUEBAS DE INTERRUPTORES TERMO MAGNÉTICOS. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. REGLAMENTO DE SEGURIDAD FÍSICA INDUSTRIALES DE PEMEX REFINACION. DRENAJES EN LAS ÁREAS INDUSTRIALES DE PEMEX REFINACIÓN. 1 (1995) DG-GPASI-SI-02510 REV. VER. 1 (1996) DG-GPASI-IT-04006 REV. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. 2 CME-049 REV. FABRICACIÓN. 6 (2007) DG-SASIPA-SI-06100 REV. DISPOSICIONES ESPECÍFICAS DE SISOPA PARA TRABAJOS EN ALTURA. 1 DG-GPASI-IT-00202 REV. 1 DG-SASIPA-SI-04901 REV. 1 DESCRIPCIÓN ESCALERAS MARINAS Y RECTAS. (ÁRBOL DE CAUSAS DE RAÍZ). DISPOSICIONES ESPECÍFICAS DE SISOPA PARA EL USO DE EQUIPOS DE IZAJE (GRÚAS Y TORRES). D..243. LINEAMIENTOS PARA EL CONTROL DE ACCESO Y CIRCULACIÓN DE VEHÍCULOS AUTOMOTORES Y VEHÍCULOS PESADOS EN LOS CENTROS DE TRABAJO. ESPECIFICACIONES DE PEMEX IDENTIFICACIÓN 3. REGLAMENTO DE SEGURIDAD PARA CONTRATISTAS. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA INSTALACIÓN DE PORTACANDADO. 3 CME-035 REV. EMBALAJE Y MARCADO PARA EMBARQUE DE EQUIPOS Y MATERIALES.301. 2 DG-GPASI-IT-00204 DG-GPASI-IT-00400 REV. ETIQUETAS Y DOBLE SEGURO DE DESCONEXIÓN EN ARRANCADORES PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PUESTA EN SERVICIO DE UNA SUBESTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA O DE UN CENTRO DE CONTROL DE MOTORES (INSTALACIONES NUEVAS) GUÍA PARA ORIENTAR LAS ACTIVIDADES DE DIFUSIÓN. 1 DG-GPASI-SI-06101 REV. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA LA INSPECCIÓN DE TUBERÍA RECIÉN CONSTRUIDA ANTES DE OPERAR. GUÍA PARA EL VAPORIZADO DE LÍNEAS Y EQUIPOS DE PROCESO. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PRUEBAS DE CAMPO PARA LA RECEPCIÓN DE CABLES AISLADOS DE ALTA TENSIÓN PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PRUEBAS ELÉCTRICAS A ARRANCADORES MAYORES DE 600 VOLTS. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EL REGISTRO. VER. SISTEMAS AUTOMÁTICOS PARA LA DETECCIÓN Y ALARMA POR FUEGO O POR ATMÓSFERAS RIESGOSAS.1 CME-048 REV. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA RECEPCIÓN DE MOTORES ELÉCTRICOS. 4 (2008) DG-GPASI-SI-08400 REV.

346. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. CANALIZACIONES ELÉCTRICAS Y TELEFÓNICAS ALUMBRADO PARA INSTALACIONES INDUSTRIALES. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE.1 ASME B16. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN.2.01(1986) P. IDENTIFICACIÓN DG-SASIPA-SI-06102 REV. CONSTRUCCIÓN DE CANALIZACIONES ELÉCTRICAS SUBTERRÁNEAS PRUEBAS DE AISLAMIENTO EN CAMPO DE EQUIPO ELÉCTRICO.47 DESCRIPCIÓN UNIFIELD INCH SCREW THREADS (UN AND UNR THREAD FORM) GRAY IRON PIPE FLANGES AND FLANGED FITTINGS CLASSES 25.01 (2000) P.225.2. 3 DG-SASIPA-SI-08402 REV. NPS 26 THROUGH NPS 60 METRIC/INCH .3.2.20 ASME B16.3. LINEAMIENTOS PARA ELABORAR PLANOS Y DOCUMENTOS.11 ASME B16.01 (1999) P. CABLES DE ENERGÍA MONOCONDUCTORES. AND WELDING END.01 (1991) NO. SPIRAL-WOUND.06 (2000) P. SISTEMAS DE TUBERÍAS DE REFINERÍAS DE PETRÓLEO.04 (1999) P. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. PROCURA DE MATERIALES.01 (1990) P.2.02 (1999) P.2. SÍMBOLOS ELÉCTRICOS SÍMBOLOS DE COMUNICACIONES ELÉCTRICAS CABLES DE ENERGÍA MULTICONDUCTORES.0401.01(2000) P.21 ASME B16.01(1990) P.0403. E. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500.34 ASME B16.REFINERÍA “GRAL.2. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA VERIFICAR LAS CONDICIONES DE SEGURIDAD Y LOS REQUERIMIENTOS AMBIENTALES ANTES DE INICIAR LA OPERACIÓN DE INSTALACIONES INDUSTRIALES NUEVAS. CODIGOS.223.03 (1998) P.2. 3 (2007) DG-SASIPA-SI-06920 REV. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME) IDENTIFICACIÓN ASME B1.201.1.1. 125. INSTALACIÓN DE SISTEMAS DE CONEXIÓN A TIERRA INSTALACIÓN DE SISTEMAS DE ALUMBRADO PARA PLANTAS INDUSTRIALES.211.25 ASME B16. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EFECTUAR LA INSPECCIÓN DE TUBERÍAS DE PROCESO Y SERVICIOS AUXILIARES EN OPERACIÓN DE LAS INSTALACIONES DE PEMEX REFINACIÓN.3. SOCKET-WELDING AND THREADED METALLIC GASKETS FOR PIPE FLANGES. AND JACKETED NONMETALLIC FLAT GASKETS FOR PIPE FLANGES BUTTWELDING ENDS VALVES-FLANGED.231. VER. THREADED.2.0217. ORIFICE FLANGES.0226. CANALIZACIONES ELÉCTRICAS Y TELEFÓNICAS. COLORES Y LETREROS PARA IDENTIFICACIÓN DE INSTALACIONES Y VEHICULOS DE TRANSPORTE.0220.425. DISEÑO DE SISTEMAS DE TIERRAS.01(2007) P. MONTAJE.. SIMBOLOGÍA DE EQUIPO DE PROCESO.0000. VER.2.10 ASME B16. SISTEMAS PARA AGUA DE SERVICIO CONTRAINCENDIO ESTRUCTURACIÓN DE PLANOS Y DOCUMENTOS TÉCNICOS DE INGENIERÍA EMBALAJE Y MARCADO DE EQUIPOS Y MATERIALES. 0 GPASI-IT-0209 NO.01 (1999) P.201.2.03 (1990) P.01 (2000) P. FORGED FITTINGS.0000.3. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”.4.01 (1999) P. RÓTULOS PARA EQUIPO ELÉCTRICO EN PLANTAS Y SUBESTACIONES ELÉCTRICAS. 2 (2004) GNT-SNP-E008 GNT-SNP-T001 GNT-SNP-T003 GNT-SSIME-G002-2008 REV. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA LA AUTORIZACIÓN DE TRABAJOS EN INSTALACIONES INDUSTRIALES DE LA SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PRODUCCIÓN. CONSTRUCCIÓN DE CANALIZACIONES ELÉCTRICAS SUBTERRÁNEAS (EMPALMES).220.231. ESTANDARES Y PRÁCTICAS RECOMENDADAS Deberá usarse la edición/revisión y adendas más recientes de los citados documentos.01 (1983) P. FABRICACIÓN. DISPOSICIÓN ADMINISTRATIVA PARA EL USO DE ROPA Y EQUIPO DE PROTECCIÓN POR PERSONAL AJENO A PETRÓLEOS MEXICANOS. DISEÑO DE TUBERÍAS.211.431.2. AND 250 FACE TO FACE END TO END DIMENSIONS OF VALVES.09 (2005) P.03 (2000) SP-SASIPA-SI-02310 DESCRIPCIÓN GUÍA PARA LA COMUNICACIÓN DE ACCIDENTES.3.36 ASME B16. RING-JOINT. LARGE DIAMETER STEEL FLANGES. FLEXIBILIDAD DE TUBERÍAS.1 ASME B16.

IDENTIFICACIÓN ASME B16. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN.10M ASME B36. STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS.. VIII DIV. 2 DESCRIPCIÓN STANDARD PIPE FLANGES AND FLANGED FITTINGS.1 ASME MFC 3M ASME PTC 19. FOR PRESSURE-CONTAINING PARTS. OR BOTH. HEAVY HEX. SHEET. SUITABLE FOR FUSION WELDING.5 ASME B16. STAINLESS STEEL PIPE SURFACE TEXTURE (SURFACE ROUGHNESS WAVINESS.5 ASME SEC. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. AND VALVES AND PARTS FOR HIGHTEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ALLOY-STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL BOLTING FOR HIGH TEMPERATURE OR HIGH PRESSURE SERVICE AND OTHER SPECIAL PURPOSE APPLICATIONS. CARBON. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) IDENTIFICACIÓN ASTM A105/A105M ASTM A106/A106M ASTM A139/A139M ASTM A153/A153M STANDARD SPECIFICATION APPLICATIONS DESCRIPCIÓN FOR CARBON STEEL FORGINGS FOR PIPING STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL PIPE FOR HIGHTEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-FUSION (ARC)-WELDED STEEL PIPE (NPS 4 AND OVER) STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ZINC COATING (HOT-DIP) ON IRON AND STEEL HARDWARE. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. FOR GENERAL APPLICATION ASTM A182/A182M ASTM A193/A193M ASTM A194/A194M ASTM A216/A216M ASTM A217/217M ASTM A234/A234M ASTM A240/240M ASTM A269 ASTM A27/A27M . FABRICACIÓN. VER. AND LAY). MEASUREMENT OF FLUID FLOW IN PIPES USING ORIFICE. STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON AND ALLOY STEEL NUTS FOR BOLTS FOR HIGH PRESSURE OR HIGH TEMPERATURE SERVICE. AND ASKEW HEAD BOLTS AND HEX. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE.2. MONTAJE. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE. FORGED FITTINGS. AND VENTURI. HEAVY HEX. STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR FORGED OR ROLLED ALLOY AND STAINLESS STEEL PIPE FLANGES. NOZZLE.19M ASME B46.3 ASME B36. CARBON. MARTENSITIC STAINLESS AND ALLOY. VER. ALTERNATIVE RULES. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. AND STRIP FOR PRESSURE VESSELS AND FOR GENERAL APPLICATIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS AND WELDED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL TUBING FOR GENERAL SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS. FLOW MEASUREMENT BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE. RULES FOR CONSTRUCTION OF PRESSURE VESSELS.REFINERÍA “GRAL. HEX FLANGE. HEX. SUITABLE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PIPING FITTINGS OF WROUGHT CARBON STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL FOR MODERATE AND HIGH TEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CHROMIUM AND CHROMIUM-NICKEL STAINLESS STEEL PLATE. 1 ASME SEC. AND LAG SCREWS (INCH SERIES) PROCESS PIPING WELDED AND SEAMLESS WROUGHT STEEL PIPE. FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS.9 ASME B18. VIII DIV. LOBED HEAD. NPS 1/2 THROUGH NPS 24 METRIC/INCH STANDARD FACTORY-MADE WROUGHT BUTTWELDING FITTINGS SQUARE.1 ASME B31.

CARBON STEEL. AND HEAVILY COLD WORKED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL PIPES STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ALLOY-STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL BOLTING MATERIALS FOR LOW-TEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS FERRITIC ALLOY-STEEL PIPE FOR HIGHTEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION CONTAINING PARTS FOR CASTINGS. FOR PRESSURE- ASTM A358/A358M ASTM A36/36M ASTM A370 ASTM A377 ASTM A403/A403M ASTM A409/A409M ASTM A47/A47M ASTM A500/A500M ASTM A516/516M ASTM A53/A53M ASTM A532/532M ASTM A536 ASTM A563 ASTM A74 ASTM B443 ASTM B62 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-FUSION-WELDED AUSTENITIC CHROMIUM-NICKEL STAINLESS STEEL PIPE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE AND GENERAL APPLICATIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STRUCTURAL STEEL STANDARD TEST METHODS AND DEFINITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TESTING OF STEEL PRODUCTS STANDARD INDEX OF SPECIFICATIONS FOR DUCTILE-IRON PRESSURE PIPE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR WROUGHT AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL PIPING FITTINGS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR WELDED LARGE DIAMETER AUSTENITIC STEEL PIPE FOR CORROSIVE OR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR FERRITIC MALLEABLE IRON CASTINGS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR COLD-FORMED WELDED AND SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL STRUCTURAL TUBING IN ROUNDS AND SHAPES STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES. LOW AND INTERMEDIATE-TENSILE STRENGTH STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL BOLTS AND STUDS. STEEL. CARBON STEEL. WELDED. FOR MODERATE.. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. AUSTENITIC. AND STRIP. WELDED AND SEAMLESS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ABRASION-RESISTANT CAST IRONS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR DUCTILE IRON CASTINGS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON AND ALLOY STEEL NUTS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR NICKEL-CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM-COLUMBIUM ALLOY (UNS N06625) AND NICKEL-CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM-SILICON ALLOY (UNS N06219) PLATE. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. VER. VER.REFINERÍA “GRAL. BLACK AND HOT-DIPPED. 60 000 PSI TENSILE STRENGTH STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. MONTAJE. STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR COMPOSITION BRONZE OR OUNCE METAL CASTINGS AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API) IDENTIFICACIÓN API RP 500 DESCRIPCIÓN RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR CLASSIFICATION OF LOCATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL . IDENTIFICACIÓN ASTM A285/285M ASTM A307 ASTM A312/A312M ASTM A320/320M ASTM A335/A335M ASTM A351/A351M DESCRIPCIÓN STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL.AND LOWER-TEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PIPE. ZINCCOATED. SHEET. FABRICACIÓN.

SIZING AND SELECTION PRESSURE-RELIEVING AND DEPRESSURING SYSTEMS FLANGED STEEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES SEAT TIGHTNESS OF PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES VALVE INSPECTION AND TESTING SPECIAL PURPOSE COUPLINGS FOR PETROLEUM. EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES-PART 1: EQUIPMENT PROTECTION BY FLAMEPROOF ENCLOSURES “D”. AND ZONE 2 SIZING. IDENTIFICACIÓN PFI ES-7 PFI ES-24 PFI ES-27 PFI ES-35 DESCRIPCIÓN MINIMUM LENGTH AND SPACING FOR WELDED NOZZLES PIPE BENDING METHODS. ZONE 0. IDENTIFICACIÓN DESCRIPCIÓN INSTALLATIONS AT PETROLEUM FACILITIES CLASSIFIED AS CLASS I. ELECTRICAL APPARATUS FOR USE IN CLASS I.5/A5.23. SOLDERING. BRAZING. STANDARD WELDING TERMS AND DEFINITIONS INCLUDING TERMS FOR ADHESIVE BONDING.22.01) ANSI/ISA 60079-0 (12.. DIVISION 1 AND DIVISION 2 RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR CLASSIFICATION OF LOCATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AT PETROLEUM FACILITIES CLASSIFIED AS CLASS I. MEANING AND LIMITATION OF THE TERM NONSYMMETRICAL BEVELS AND JOINT CONFIGURATIONS FOR BUTT WELDS AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) IDENTIFICACIÓN AWS D1.12. SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL ELECTRODES FOR SHIELDED METAL ARC WELDING. PART 2 . DIVISION 2 AND CLASS III. CHEMICAL.1 AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) IDENTIFICACIÓN ANSI/ISA 12. TOLERANCES. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. PART 1. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN.0 AWS A5. SELECTION AND INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE-RELIEVING DEVICES IN REFINERIES.5M DESCRIPCIÓN STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE STEEL. MONTAJE. MANUAL OF PETROLEUM MEASUREMENT STANDARDS CHAPTER 14 NATURAL GAS FLUIDS MEASUREMENT SECTION 3 CONCENTRIC. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500.00. ZONE 1 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS: TYPE OF PROTECTION . DIVISIONS 1 AND 2 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES-PART 7: EQUIPMENT PROTECTION BY INCREASED SAFETY "E". DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL.01) ANSI/ISA 60079-18 (12.16. THERMAL CUTTING. FABRICACIÓN.01) DESCRIPCIÓN NONINCENDIVE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN CLASS I AND II.REFINERÍA “GRAL. PROCURA DE MATERIALES.ENCAPSULATION “M” EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES–PART 0: EQUIPMENT–GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PIPE FABRICATION INSTITUTE (PFI).01) ANSI/ISA 60079-1 (12.INSTALLATION SIZING.1M AWS A5. VER.3.1/A5. SPECIFICATION FOR LOW-ALLOY STEEL ELECTRODES FOR SHIELDED METAL ARC WELDING. MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (Estándares MSS) IDENTIFICACIÓN MSS SP 6 DESCRIPCIÓN STANDARD FINISHES FOR CONTACT FACES OF PIPE FLANGES AND CONNECTING-END FLANGES OF VALVES AND FITTINGS . AND THERMAL SPRAYING.1M AWS A3. SELECTION AND INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE-RELIEVING DEVICES IN REFINERIES.1/D1. SQUARE-EDGED ORIFICE METERS PART 1 GENERAL EQUATIONS AND UNCERTAINTY GUIDELINES API RP 505 API RP 520 API STD 520 API STD 521 API STD 526 API STD 527 API STD 598 API STD 671 API MPMS 14. PROCESS AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS “VISUAL EXAMINATION" THE PURPOSE.01 ANSI/ISA 60079-7 (12. AND GAS INDUSTRY SERVICES. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. VER.

2 . LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. DESIGN. GLOBE.102 IEEE STD 43 IEEE STD C50. MONTAJE.92.20. BALL VALVES WITH FLANGED OR BUTT-WELDING ENDS FOR GENERAL SERVICE SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH-TEST.12.12 IEEE-STD-56 IEEE STD C57. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. 167 KVA AND SMALLER) IEEE GUIDE FOR CONDUCTING A TRANSIENT VOLTAGE ANALYSIS OF A DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMER COIL IEEE STANDARD TEST CODE FOR DRY-TYPE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS IEEE STANDARD REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS IEEE GUIDE FOR APPLICATION OF POWER APPARATUS BUSHINGS IEEE GUIDE FOR LIQUID-IMMERSED TRANSFORMER THROUGH-FAULT-CURRENT DURATION IEEE GUIDE FOR TRANSFORMERS DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO GENERATORS IEEE TRIAL-USE GUIDE FOR THE DETECTION OF ACOUSTIC EMISSIONS FROM PARTIAL DISCHARGES IN OIL-IMMERSED POWER TRANSFORMERS IEEE GUIDE FOR THE APPLICATION OF NEUTRAL GROUNDING IN ELECTRICAL UTILITY SYSTEMS PART I.SOCKET WELDING. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. THREADED AND BUTTWELDING ENDS INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS AND ENGINEERS (IEEE) IDENTIFICACIÓN IEEE PUBL.2B IEEE STD C37.12.92. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN.12.116 IEEE STD C57. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS WITH SEPARABLE.INTRODUCTION IEEE GUIDE FOR THE APPLICATION OF NEUTRAL GROUNDING IN ELECTRICAL UTILITY IEEE STD C57.91 IEEE STD C37. FLANGED AND THREADED ENDS PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS . PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”.96 IEEE STD C37.REFINERÍA “GRAL.1 IEEE STD C62.109 IEEE STD C57. AND INSTALLATION.13 IEEE STD C57. MANUFACTURE.127 IEEE STD C62. SELF-COOLED.20. 98 IEEE STD 4 IEEE STD C37.23 IEEE STD C57. RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR TESTING INSULATION RESISTANCE OF ROTATING MACHINERY STANDARD FOR SALIENT-POLE 50 HZ AND 60 HZ SYNCHRONOUS GENERATORS AND GENERATOR/MOTORS FOR HYDRAULIC TURBINE APPLICATIONS RATED 5 MVA AND ABOVE GUIDE FOR INSULATION MAINTENANCE OF LARGE ALTERNATING-CURRENT ROTATING MACHINERY (10. SELECTION. HIGH-VOLTAGE CONNECTORS. APPLICATION. WROUGHT.010 IEEE STD C37.58 IEEE STD C57. IDENTIFICACIÓN MSS SP 45 MSS SP 58 MSS SP 72 MSS SP 75 MSS SP 80 MSS SP 85 ANSI/MSS SP 69 MSS SP 97 DESCRIPCIÓN BYPASS AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS –MATERIALS. AND CHECK VALVES GRAY IRON GLOBE& ANGLE VALVES. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. HIGH VOLTAGE (24 940 GRD Y / 14 400 V AND BELOW) LOW VOLTAGE (240/120 V.100 IEEE STD C57.2 IEEE STD C37.19.1 IEEE STD C37.20. VER.91 IEEE STD C57.000 KVA AND LARGER) IEEE STANDARD GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DRY-TYPE AND POWER TRANSFORMERS INCLUDING THOSE WITH SOLID CAST AND/OR RESIN-ENCAPSULATED WINDINGS IEEE STANDARD FOR TRANSFORMERS—TYPE UNDERGROUND. FABRICACIÓN. VER.2 IEEE STD C37.01 DESCRIPCIÓN GUIDE FOR THE PREPARATION OF TEST PROCEDURES FOR THE EVALUATION AND ESTABLISHMENT OF TEMPERATURE INDICES OF SOLID ELECTRICAL INSULATION MATERIALS IEEE STANDARD TECHNIQUES FOR HIGH-VOLTAGE TESTING. INSULATED.101 IEEE STD C37. BUTT-WELDING FITTINGS BRONZE GATE.20. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. IEEE APPLICATION GUIDE FOR AC HIGH-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS RATED ON A SYMMETRICAL CURRENT BASIS IEEE STANDARD FOR METAL-ENCLOSED LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR IEEE STANDARD FOR METAL-CLAD AND STATION-TYPE CUBICLE SWITCHGEAR IEEE STANDARD FOR METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR SUPPLEMENT TO IEEE STANDARD FOR METAL-CLAD AND STATION-TYPE CUBICLE SWITCHGEAR: CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ACCURACIES IEEE GUIDE FOR PROTECTIVE RELAY APPLICATIONS TO POWER TRANSFORMERS IEEE GUIDE FOR AC MOTOR PROTECTION IEEE GUIDE FOR GENERATOR GROUND PROTECTION IEEE GUIDE FOR GENERATOR GROUND PROTECTION. ANGLE. INTEGRALLY REINFORCED FORGED BRANCH OUTLET FITTINGS ..SELECTION AND APPLICATION.12. SINGLEPHASE.

802-7-89 IEEE STD 1100 IEEE STD. IEEE GUIDE FOR DESIGN OF SUBSTATION RIGID-BUS STRUCTURES IEEE GUIDE FOR GENERATING STATION GROUNDING IEEE DESIGN GUIDE FOR ELECTRIC POWER SERVICE SYSTEMS FOR GENERATING STATIONS IEEE STANDARD FOR CALCULATING THE CURRENT-TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIP OF BARE OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT IN INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL FACILITIES. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND REQUIREMENTS FOR HARMONIC CONTROL IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM GUIDE FOR TESTING TURN INSULATION OF FORM-WOUND STATOR COILS FOR ALTERNATING-CURRENT ELECTRIC MACHINES IEEE GUIDE FOR THE DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF CABLE SYSTEMS IN SUBSTATIONS IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ELECTRIC SYSTEMS HEALTH CARE FACILITIES. IEEE GUIDE FOR THE APPLICATION OF NEUTRAL GROUNDING IN ELECTRICAL UTILITY SYSTEMS PART IV.3 IEEE STD C62. AND EARTH SURFACE POTENTIALS OF A GROUND SYSTEM.GROUNDING OF SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR SYSTEMS IEEE GUIDE FOR THE APPLICATION OF NEUTRAL GROUNDING IN ELECTRICAL UTILITY SYSTEMS. DESIGN.GENERATOR AUXILIARY SYSTEMS. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. GUIDE FOR SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR MODELING PRACTICES IN STABILITY ANALYSES IEEE 802. VER.92. INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS ANALYSIS IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS FOR INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS. RECOMENDED PRACTICE BROADBAND LOCAL AREA NETWORK IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR POWERING AND GROUNDING ELECTRONICS EQUIPMENT. GRAY BOOK. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. GROUND IMPEDANCE. ORANGE BOOK. IDENTIFICACIÓN IEEE STD C62. 1110 . AND IMPLEMENTATION OF VENTED LEAD-ACID BATTERIES FOR STATIONARY APPLICATIONS. BUFF BOOK. TEST PROCEDURES FOR SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES PART I ACCEPTANCE AND PERFORMANCE TESTING PART II TEST PROCEDURES AND PARAMETER DETERMINATION FOR DYNAMIC ANALYSIS IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION FOR INDUSTRIAL PLANTS RED BOOK IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR GROUNDING OF INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS GREEN BOOK IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS IN COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS. VER. MONTAJE. STANDARD DIGITAL INTERFACE FOR PROGRAMABLE INSTRUMENTATION.REFINERÍA “GRAL. FABRICACIÓN. IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PROTECTION AND COORDINATION OF INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS. BRONZE BOOK. PART III. IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR INSTALLATION.DISTRIBUTION IEEE GUIDE FOR SAFETY IN AC SUBSTATION GROUNDING IEEE GUIDE FOR MEASURING EARTH RESISTIVITY. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL..92. IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR DESIGN OF RELIABLE INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS GOLD BOOK. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. STANDARD FOR INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND INFORMATION EXCHANGE BETWEEN SYSTEMS LOCAL AND METROPOLITAN AREA NETWORKS SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS PART 3: CARRIER SENSE MULTIPLE ACCESS WITH COLLISION DETECTION (CSMA/CD) ACCESS METHOD AND PHYSICAL LAYER SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD FOR LOCAL AREA NETWORK.4 ANSI-IEEE STD 80 IEEE STD 81 IEEE STD 100 IEEE STD 112 IEEE-STD-115 IEEE STD 141 IEEE STD 142 IEEE STD 241 IEEE STD 242 IEEE STD 399 IEEE STD 446 IEEE STD 484 IEEE STD 488 IEEE STD 493 IEEE STD 519 IEEE STD 522 IEEE STD 525 IEEE STD 602 IEEE STD 605 IEEE STD 665 IEEE STD 666 IEEE STD 738 IEEE STD 739 DESCRIPCIÓN SYSTEMS PART II. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. ESMERALD BOOK. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. THE IIIE STANDARD DICTIONARY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS TERMS AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD / IEEE STANDARD TEST PROCEDURE FOR POLYPHASE INDUCTION MOTORS AND GENERATORS. WHITE BOOK.3 IEEE STD. 802-5-89 IEEE STD.

LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. EXPANSIÓN JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATON (EJMA) IDENTIFICACIÓN EJMA DESCRIPCIÓN STANDARDS OF EXPANSION JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. RED BRASS. 368 BULLETIN DESCRIPCIÓN LOCAL STRESS IN SPHERICAL AND CYLINDRICAL SHELLS DUE TO EXTERNAL LOADINGS IN NOZZLES. CYLINDER TO CYLINDER INTERSECTIONS (NOZZLE FLEXIBILITY). METAL CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS METAL CABLE TRALY INSTALLATION GUIDELINES WIRING DEVICES—DIMENSIONAL SPECIFICATIONS WELDING RESEARCH COUNCIL (WRC) IDENTIFICACIÓN WRC No. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. VER. 107 BULLETIN WRC No. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. AND USE OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS AND GENERATORS PANELBOARDS DEADFRONT DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS (UPS)-SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION UTILYTY BATTERY CHARGERS POWER SWITCHING EQUIPMENT ALTERNATING HIGH-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS POWER SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLIES POWER SWITCHING EQUIPMENT STEAM TURBINES FOR MECHANICAL DRIVE SERVICE. MONTAJE. 297 BULLETIN WRC NO. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. STRESS IN INTERSECTING CYLINDERS SUBJECTED TO PRESSURE. PRINCIPIES AND RULES NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) IDENTIFICACIÓN NEMA 250 NEMA IC56-78 NEMA ICS 6 NEMA MG 1 NEMA MG 2 NEMA PB 1 NEMA PB 2 NEMA PE 1 NEMA PE 5 NEMA SG 3 NEMA SG 4 NEMA SG 5 NEMA SG 6 NEMA SM23 NEMA VE 1 NEMA VE 2 NEMA WD6 DESCRIPCIÓN ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (1000 VOLTS MAXIMUM) ENCLOSURE FOR INDUSTRIAL CONTROL AND SYSTEMS. FABRICACIÓN. INDUSTRIAL CONTROL AND SYSTEM ENCLOSURES. INSTALLATION. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. INC.. MOTORS AND GENERATORS SAFETY STANDARD AND GUIDE FOR SELECTION. VER. INC. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES. NON-ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS THERMOPLASTIC-INSULATED WIRES AND CABLES INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT . IDENTIFICACIÓN IEEE STD 1115 IEEE STD 1184 IEEE STD 1185 IEEE STD 1187 IEEE STD 1221 IEEE STD 1243 IEEE STD 1291 IEEE STD 1313. AND STAINLESS STEEL ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. (UL) IDENTIFICACIÓN UL 6 UL 6A UL 50 UL 83 UL 508 DESCRIPCIÓN ELECTRICAL RIGID METAL CONDUIT-STEEL ELECTRICAL RIGID METAL CONDUIT–ALUMINUM.1 DESCRIPCIÓN IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR SIZING NIKEL-CADMIUM BATTERIES FOR STATIONARY APPLICATIONS IEEE GUIDE FOR THE SELECTION AND SIZING OF BATTERIES FOR UNINTERRUMPIBLE POWER SYSTEMS IEEE GUIDE FOR INSTALLATION METHODS FOR GENERATING STATION CABLES IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR INSTALLATION DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF VALVE-REGULATED LEAD-ACID STORAGE BATTERIES FOR STATIONARY APPICATIONS IEEE GUIDE FOR FIRE HAZAR ASSESSMENT OF ELECTRICAL INSULATING MATERIALS IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS IEEE GUIDE FOR IMPROVING THE LIGHTNING PERFORMANCE OF TRANSMISSION LINES IEEE GUIDE FOR PARTIAL DISCHARGE MEASUREMENT IN POWER SWITCHGEAR IEEE STANDARD FOR INSULATION COORDINATION-DEFINITIONS.REFINERÍA “GRAL.

3” CFE SECCIÓN “C. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL.O.1.1.4. Reglamento de la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecológico y la Protección al Ambiente en Materia de Autorregulación y Auditorías Ambientales Reglamento de la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecológico y la Protección al Ambiente en Materia de Evaluación del Ambiental. II. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. 03-06-2011. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. VER. Ley de Aguas Nacionales Reglamento de la ley de Aguas Nacionales Ley General para la Prevención y Gestión Integral de los Residuos Ley Federal Sobre Metrología y Normalización Reglamento de la Ley Federal Sobre Metrología y Normalización Ley del Seguro Social Ley Federal de Derechos Ley de Desarrollo Regional y Urbano del Estado de Nuevo León. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. AND CLASS III HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE) IDENTIFICACIÓN ASCE/SEI 7-10 DESCRIPCIÓN MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS FOR BUILDINGS AND OTHER STRUCTURES. Reglamento de la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecológico y la Protección al Ambiente en Materia de Prevención y Control de la Contaminación de la Atmósfera. HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS EXPLOSION-PROOF AND DUST-IGNITION-PROOF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN CLASS I AND II.“DISEÑO POR VIENTO La legislación aplicable pero sin ser limitativa que regirá el proyecto se menciona a continuación: DOCUMENTO Ley General del Equilibrio Ecológico y la Protección al Ambiente. 19-01-2011 Última reforma publicada P. UL 698A UL 698 UL 886 UL 913 UL 1203 UL 1604 UL 1778 INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS RELATING TO HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS OUTLET BOXES AND FITTINGS FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUS FOR USE IN CLASS I.O. Reglamento de la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecológico y la Protección al Ambiente en Materia de Ordenamiento Ecológico. COMISIÓN FEDERAL DE ELECTRICIDAD (CFE) IDENTIFICACIÓN CFE SECCIÓN “C. MONTAJE.1.“DISEÑO POR SISMO MANUAL DE DISEÑO DE OBRAS CIVILES SECCIÓN C.REFINERÍA “GRAL. FABRICACIÓN.4” DESCRIPCIÓN MANUAL DE DISEÑO DE OBRAS CIVILES SECCIÓN C. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. AND III. LEGISLACIÓN APLICABLE. Ley Ambiental del Estado de Nuevo León Ley General de Salud Ley Federal del Trabajo ACTUALIZACIÓN Última reforma publicada DOF 28-01-2011 Última reforma publicada DOF 28-12-2004 Última reforma publicada DOF 29-04-2010 Última reforma publicada DOF 30-05-2000 Última reforma publicada DOF 28-09-2010 Última reforma publicada DOF 03-06-2004 Última reforma publicada DOF 03-06-2004 Última reforma publicada DOF 20-06-2011 Última reforma publicada DOF 29-08-2002 Última reforma publicada DOF 24-05-2011 Última reforma publicada DOF 19-06-2007 Última reforma publicada DOF 30-04-2009 Última reforma publicada DOF 14-01-1999 Última reforma publicada DOF 27-05-2011 Última reforma publicada DOF 18-11-2010 Última reforma publicada P. Reglamento de la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecológico y la Protección al Ambiente en Materia de Áreas Naturales Protegidas. .1.. Reglamento de la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecológico y la Protección al Ambiente en Materia de Registro de Emisiones y Transferencia de Contaminantes. DIVISION 2. Última reforma publicada DOF 10-06-2011 Última reforma publicada DOF 17-01-2006 F. VER.. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE..3. DIVISION 1.

PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. MONTAJE. VER. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. arrendamientos. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. Reglamento de Seguridad e Higiene de Petróleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios. Higiene y Medio Ambiente de Trabajo. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. Ley de Petróleos Mexicanos Reglamento de la Ley de Petróleos Mexicanos Disposiciones administrativas de contratación en materia de adquisiciones. FABRICACIÓN.. VER. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500. DOCUMENTO Reglamento Federal de Seguridad. ACTUALIZACIÓN Última reforma publicada DOF 21-01-1997 Última reforma publicada DOF 28-01-1997 DOF 28-11-2008 DOF 04-09-2009 DOF 06-01-2010 Año 2007 .REFINERÍA “GRAL. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. obras y servicios de actividades sustantivas de carácter productivo de Petróleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios.

LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. MONTAJE.. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”.REFINERÍA “GRAL. VER. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. ANEXO U UMIS (UNIDADES MÍNIMAS INDIVISIBLES) 1 de 6 . VER. FABRICACIÓN.

2 de 6 .

3 de 6 .

4 de 6 .

5 de 6 .

6 de 6 .

FABRICACIÓN. VER.. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500. ANEXO G DOCUMENTACIÓN REQUERIDA POR LAS FUENTES DE FINANCIAMIENTO 1 de 9 .REFINERÍA “GRAL. MONTAJE. VER. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN.

En este sentido. VER. recurre a los mercados financieros para obtener parcial o totalmente los fondos necesarios para financiar las obligaciones derivadas de la ejecución de dichos proyectos y programas. o a quién éste le indique. El objetivo de este Anexo G es el de informar a los Contratistas y Proveedores. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500. Adicionalmente. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. y dado que para la utilización de ciertos instrumentos financieros se requiere de documentación e información detallada y específica sobre los bienes y/o servicios que se están suministrando y financiando. A esta documentación e información se le denomina “Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento” (“la Documentación”). lo cual le permite a Petróleos Mexicanos continuar con el desarrollo de sus proyectos.pemex.REFINERÍA “GRAL. Es importante señalar que el Contratista deberá entregar al (a las) área(s) responsable(s) (“Módulo(s) de Financiamiento”) de Pemex Refinación la 2 de 9 . o a quién éste le indique. los Contratistas y Proveedores deben entregar a Pemex Refinación. (“el Instructivo”) mismo que les fue proporcionado oportunamente. VER. generando más oportunidades de negocio para los Contratistas y Proveedores. El Instructivo vigente también se encuentra disponible en la página Internet de Pemex: (www. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. Introducción Para llevar a cabo el desarrollo de los programas de operación e inversión de Petróleos Mexicanos. Petróleos Mexicanos o cualquier entidad financiera y/o filial que Petróleos Mexicanos designe para tal efecto. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE.com/proveedores/documentacion).. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. FABRICACIÓN. de manera general. la documentación e información correspondiente. sobre la Documentación que debe presentar a Pemex Refinación. MONTAJE. La participación de los Contratistas y Proveedores en la obtención y presentación de la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento es fundamental para la utilización eficiente de estos créditos. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. el “Instructivo de Petróleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento”. detalla de manera específica los formatos y documentos que se deben recabar y presentar. Anexo G: Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento 1. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN.

con la debida anticipación. a que se refiere el presente Anexo G.. 2. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. Asimismo. Estas líneas de crédito constituyen 3 de 9 . que en su caso corresponda. bienes y/o servicios para el cumplimiento del presente contrato. el cual formará parte de la documentación que el Contratista presente para continuar con los trámites de pago de su(s) factura(s). MONTAJE. Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento (documentos y/o documentos electrónicos). DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. el área responsable (“Módulo de Financiamiento”): a) registrará en los sistemas sobre dicho cumplimiento. Si el Contratista ha cumplido con la entrega de la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento. Fuentes de Financiamiento Petróleos Mexicanos puede acceder a diversas fuentes de financiamiento. La Documentación que debe proporcionar el Contratista depende del país de origen de los bienes y/o servicios que se suministren y/o utilicen para el cumplimiento del objeto del presente contrato. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. así como a lo indicado en el “Instructivo de Pet róleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento”. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500. las obligaciones y sus necesidades de información. Pemex Refinación no estará obligado a dar trámite al pago de su(s) factura(s) cuando el Contratista injustificadamente no entregue la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento que corresponda. VER. o a través de cualquier entidad financiera y/o filial que Petróleos Mexicanos designe para tal efecto. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. El Contratista debe considerar las acciones necesarias para la obtención y presentación correcta y oportuna a Pemex Refinación de la Documentación.REFINERÍA “GRAL. con lo que el Contratista podrá continuar con los trámites de pago de su(s) factura(s). a sus proveedores. el Contratista debe informar. ya sea directamente. directa o indirectamente. FABRICACIÓN. o b) emitirá el “Comprobante de Seguimiento de Documentación”. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. VER. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. subcontratistas y a cualquier otra empresa que le suministre.

A continuación se incluye. o con las que potencialmente Petróleos Mexicanos podrá suscribir líneas de crédito. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. PROCURA DE MATERIALES.1 Líneas de Crédito Garantizadas o Aseguradas por Agencias de Crédito a la Exportación (ECA’s) Dado que un porcentaje significativo de los suministros y servicios utilizados en la industria petrolera son de importación. Estas líneas son de uso exclusivo para Petróleos Mexicanos. 2. sin embargo. entre otras en lo que se refiere a la Documentación. MONTAJE. una relación de las Agencias de Crédito a la Exportación. con las cuales se tiene relación. deben utilizarse preferentemente. VER. FABRICACIÓN. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. Nombre Export-Import Bank of the United States Export Development Canada Export Credits Guarantee Department Japan Bank for International Cooperation Nippon Export and Investment Insurance Hermes Kreditversicherungs-AG Guarantee Institute for Export Credits Atradius Istituto per i Servizi Assicurativi e il Credito all'Esportazione Siglas Ex-Im Bank EDC ECGD JBIC NEXI HERMES GIEK ATRADIUS SACE País Estados Unidos de América Canadá Reino Unido Japón Japón Alemania Noruega Holanda Italia 4 de 9 . Es importante señalar que el uso de este tipo de líneas no condiciona a los Contratistas o Proveedores a utilizar bienes y/o servicios de importación. fuentes de financiamiento alternativas a las utilizadas por el gobierno federal.REFINERÍA “GRAL. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500.. la utilización de este tipo de líneas es fundamental para el desarrollo y continuidad de los proyectos de Petróleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios. las cuales por ley. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. VER. las líneas de crédito garantizadas y/o aseguradas por Agencias de Crédito a la Exportación (ECA´s). si el Contratista o Proveedor utiliza bienes y/o servicios importados directa o indirectamente. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. Sobresalen. para fines informativos. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. Petróleos Mexicanos está obligado a financiar el pago de los mismos preferentemente a través de líneas de crédito garantizadas o aseguradas por Agencias de Crédito a la Exportación (ECA’s).

VER. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL.REFINERÍA “GRAL. VER. Export-Import Bank of Korea Export Risk Guarantee Agency Finnvera plc Export Kredit Fonden Oesterreichische Kontrollbank Aktiengesellschaft Exportkreditnamnden Companhia de Seguro de Créditos S. el Contratista debe proporcionar a Pemex Refinación. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. el Contratista se obliga a hacerla del conocimiento de Pemex Refinación . Compagnie Française d’ Assurance pour le Commerce Extérieur Compañía Española de Seguros de Crédito a la Exportación. así como información sobre las personas físicas y/o morales y/o extranjeras que le suministren. Asimismo. la información detallada sobre el país de origen de los bienes y/o servicios que se utilicen para dar cumplimiento al objeto del contrato. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE.A COFACE CESCE K-Exim ERG Finnvera EKF OeKB EKN COSEC Francia España República de Corea Suiza Finlandia Dinamarca Austria Suecia Portugal 3. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. directa o indirectamente. FABRICACIÓN. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. se integra al presente contrato como Anexo F. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. Cédula sobre el País de Origen de los Bienes y/o Servicios. La Cédula sobre el País de Origen de los Bienes y/o Servicios deberá ser requisitada atendiendo las indicaciones contenidas en el “Instructivo de Petróleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento”. dichos bienes y/o servicios. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500. inmediatamente después de que el Contratista tenga conocimiento de la modificación. presentada con anterioridad a la firma del presente contrato. S. en la inteligencia de que Pemex Refinación podrá solicitar al Contratista cualquier aclaración o información adicional relativa a la Cédula a que se refiere esta cláusula.. La “Cédula sobre el País de Origen de los Bienes y/o Servicios”. MONTAJE.A. Mediante esta Cédula. lo que no implicará realizar una modificación al presente contrato. durante la vigencia del contrato. en caso de que la información contemplada en dicha Cédula llegara a modificarse durante la vigencia de este contrato. 5 de 9 .

documentos originales y/o documentos electrónicos de: Facturas. o 6 de 9 . LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. VER. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. El Contratista deberá entregar al(a las) área(s) responsable(s) (“Módulo(s) de Financiamiento”) de Pemex Refinación la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento. los formatos y documentos que se deben recabar y presentar. con lo que el Contratista podrá continuar con los trámites de pago de su(s) factura(s). de manera específica. mismo que les fue proporcionado oportunamente.1 a 4. Documentos de Embarque. el área responsable (“Módulo de Financiamiento”): a) registrará en los sistemas sobre dicho cumplimiento.REFINERÍA “GRAL. se detallan.. Pemex Refinación informará oportunamente al Contratista. Contratos Comerciales.com/proveedores/documentacion). Evidencias de Pago. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. FABRICACIÓN. que en su caso corresponda. La información presentada por el Contratista en dicha Cédula. deberá ser congruente con aquella información técnica y económica incluida en su oferta y en el presente contrato. mediante comunicación oficial. entre otros. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500. se indica. Certificados de Origen. VER. la Documentación según el país de donde procedan los bienes y/o servicios. de manera general. Cartas Aclaratorias. 4. En las secciones 4. En el “Instructivo de Petróleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento”. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE.3 del presente documento. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. Documentación para la Utilización de Líneas de Crédito Garantizadas o Aseguradas por Agencias de Crédito a la Exportación La Documentación depende del país de origen de los bienes y/o servicios y generalmente consiste en copias. El Instructivo también se encuentra disponible en la página Internet de Pemex: (www. (“el Instructivo”). Si el Contratista ha cumplido con la entrega de la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento.pemex. cuál será el (las) área(s) responsable(s) (“Módulo(s) de Financiamiento”) en donde el Contratista deberá entregar la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento correspondiente a este contrato. MONTAJE.

MONTAJE. por lo que. en algunos casos específicos. en archivo electrónico formato Excel. el Contratista acepta que. etc. Pemex Refinación podrá solicitar a el Contratista cualquier modificación..  Certificado del Exportador (“Exporter’s Certificate”) en original. el cual formará parte de la documentación que el Contratista presente para continuar con los trámites de pago de su(s) factura(s). Agencia de Crédito a la Exportación. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. VER. para ciertos casos. b) emitirá el “Comprobante de Seguimiento de Documentación”. VER. de la Dirección Corporativa de Finanzas de Petróleos Mexicanos. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. La Documentación entregada por el Contratista estará sujeta a la revisión detallada del(de los) Módulo(s) de Financiamiento. De la misma forma. Documentación para bienes y/o servicios procedentes de los Estados Unidos de América El Ex-Im Bank de Estados Unidos de América solicita actualmente la siguiente información:  Factura Maestra Electrónica (e-Master Invoice) en archivo electrónico formato PDF.  Copia del conocimiento de embarque marítimo. la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento deberá ser entregada a la persona (Banco Agente. aclaración o información adicional relativa a la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento. Pemex Refinación no estará obligado a dar trámite al pago de su(s) factura(s) cuando el Contratista injustificadamente no entregue la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento que corresponda.REFINERÍA “GRAL.  “Anti-Lobbying Certificate” en original.  Cartas Aclaratorias. Dirección Corporativa de Finanzas.  Datos de los tres documentos anteriores.) que Pemex Refinación le indique oportunamente. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500.1. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. 4. FABRICACIÓN. 7 de 9 . QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. de las ECA´s y/o del Banco Agente correspondiente. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN.

 Otra información necesaria para identificar la procedencia.. Información adicional y/o evidencia documental razonable que pueda solicitar el EDC y las ECAs de otros países. VER. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. Breve descripción de los bienes y/o servicios.        Es importante señalar que el Contratista y/o Exportador deberá entregar la documentación a Pemex Refinación o a quien éste le indique. instrucciones y ejemplos de los documentos antes mencionados. antes del embarque de los bienes o del inicio de la prestación de los servicios. Copia de los Contratos firmados entre el Exportador y la contraparte. 4.2. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500. europeo o asiático. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. 8 de 9 . La información general deberá entregarse. Documentación para bienes y/o servicios procedentes de Canadá. según corresponda. se incluyen los formatos específicos. Nombre y datos de los contactos. Información sobre aspectos ambientales. Evidencia de pago al Exportador. VER. uso y forma de pago de los bienes y/o servicios. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE. mediante archivo electrónico en formato Excel. MONTAJE.REFINERÍA “GRAL. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. de acuerdo con el “Instructivo de Petróleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento”. FABRICACIÓN. Europa y Asia Export Development Canada (“EDC”) así como las ECA’s de los países europeos y asiáticos solicitan la información y documentación siguiente para que Petróleos Mexicanos y/o sus Organismos Subsidiarios pueda hacer uso de los recursos de las líneas de crédito garantizadas por dichas Instituciones:  Nombre completo y dirección de los Exportadores y/o de los Subcontratistas y/o Comercializadores y/o Importadores Mexicanos que utilicen y/o suministren bienes y/o servicios con contenido canadiense. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. En el “Instructivo de Petróleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiario s para la Entrega de la Documentación Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento”. Monto estimado de las importaciones.

3. Europa y Asia. después de analizar la información del Anexo denominado Cédula sobre el País de Origen de los Bienes y/o Servicios. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE.REFINERÍA “GRAL. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. 4. VER. MONTAJE. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”.  En caso necesario. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. se requiere básicamente la misma información que para ECA´s de Canadá. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. sólo se solicitará caso por caso.. Sin embargo.  Copia de las Facturas Comerciales Individuales. VER. 9 de 9 . incluyendo México Documentación requerida por otros Agentes Financieros y/o Petróleos Mexicanos:  En caso de bienes y/o servicios procedentes de México o regiones diferentes a Estados Unidos. Europa y Asia. FABRICACIÓN. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. Documentación para bienes y/o servicios procedentes de otros países. se podrá solicitar lo siguiente:  Mayor información para verificar el origen de los bienes. Canadá.

PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO”. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. ANEXO J DISPOSICIONES EM MATERIA DE SSPA 1 de 26 . LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” MINATITLÁN. VER. VER. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL.REFINERÍA “GRAL. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE.. FABRICACIÓN. MONTAJE. MÉXICO PROYECTO: “MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500.

PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD INDICE CONCEPTO ADMINISTRATIVAS Organigrama de SSPA del Contratista Programa de SSPA del Contratista Política de SSPA Identificación y Cartilla de Capacitación Aula de Capacitación Programa de Capacitación Permisos de Trabajo Suministro de Equipo de Protección Personal Archivo específico de SSPA de la Obra Funciones y Obligaciones del Responsable de SSPA del Contratista Funciones y Obligaciones del Supervisor de SSPA del Contratista Evaluaciones de SSPA SEGURIDAD Almacenamiento. Almacenamiento. Manejo y Uso Adecuado Delimitar Instalaciones Provisionales Restricciones en las Comunicaciones Alumbrado Provisional SALUD Exámenes Médicos a Personal de Nuevo Ingreso Personal Médico para la Obra PUNTO I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 II 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 III 1 2 2 de 26 .SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. Manejo y Uso de Cilindros de gases comprimidos Equipos de Seguridad y Herramientas para la Obra Personal. Equipo y Materiales para Protección Contraincendio Equipo de Protección Personal Respiratoria Trabajos en Espacios Confinados Equipo de Protección Personal para Trabajos Eléctricos Equipos de Izaje y Materiales Delimitar Áreas de Riesgo Indicadores de Viento Transito Interior de Vehículos en Instalaciones de Pemex Andamios Escaleras Excavaciones Personal y Equipo para Rescate Actos y condiciones inseguras Trabajos de Corte y Soldadura Instalaciones Eléctricas Provisionales Orden y Limpieza en las Áreas de Trabajo Materiales y Sustancias Peligrosas.

SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD Bitácora de Servicios Médicos Condiciones Térmicas Elevadas Exámenes Médicos a Operadores de Equipo Baños Portátiles Fosas para drenaje Hielo y Agua Purificada Instalaciones Temporales de Servicios Operadores de Vehículos para Transporte de Materiales y Residuos Peligrosos Vibraciones PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Ruido Emisión de Contaminantes de Vehículos Descarga de Aguas Residuales Gestión Integral de Residuos Atención a las Condicionantes de la Autoridad Ambiental Identificación Indicadores de Accidentabilidad 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 IV 1 2 3 4 5 Figura 1 Tabla 1 3 de 26 .

a la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecológico y la Protección al Ambiente y sus Reglamentos. al Reglamento de Seguridad e Higiene de Petróleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios.. Salud y Protección Ambiental. el Contratista se obliga a corregir estas desviaciones y PEMEX REFINACIÓN tendrá el derecho de interrumpir los trabajos por razones de seguridad. con experiencia en su función y debe conocer los riesgos existentes en el Proyecto. ni su interrupción por estas causas. Salud y Protección Ambiental. que incumpla los requerimientos de seguridad establecidos en este contrato. empleando el personal especializado. en apego a: la Ley Federal del Trabajo. PEMEX REFINACIÓN se reserva el derecho de requerir al Contratista. a la Ley General para la Prevención y Gestión Integral de los Residuos y su Reglamento. Debido a la ubicación del sitio donde se desarrollará la Obra. Normas Mexicanas (NMX´s) y Normas de Referencia de PETRÓLEOS MEXICANOS en materia de Seguridad. Salud en el trabajo y Protección Ambiental para Contratistas y Proveedores de PEMEX REFINACIÓN DG-SASIPA-SI-08200. 4 de 26 .SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. debe dar cumplimiento a los lineamientos.. VER.Construcción-Condiciones de seguridad y salud en el trabajo). PARA LA MODERNIZACIÓN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIÓN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500. además pondrá en práctica sus procedimientos y políticas aplicables en la materia. así como para proponer para efectos de autorización al personal que lo sustituirá. MONTAJE. para sustituir o remover. PROCURA DE MATERIALES. a las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas (NOM´s). El Contratista debe contar con una Política en materia de Seguridad. además de cumplir con las disposiciones establecidas en el presente documento. (en especial la NOM-031-STPS-2011. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD DISPOSICIONES EN MATERIA DE SEGURIDAD. PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO El Contratista realizará toda la Obra objeto de este Contrato en materia de Seguridad. a cuyo efecto el Contratista se obliga dentro de un término no mayor de diez días naturales a partir de la solicitud de PEMEX REFINACIÓN. El horario de trabajo del personal del Contratista estará sujeto a la aprobación de la Residencia de Obra. a la Ley de Aguas Nacionales y su Reglamento. Salud y Protección Ambiental. El Contratista debe tener pleno conocimiento que de incumplir los aspectos señalados en este Anexo. para el contrato. la sustitución o remoción. FABRICACIÓN. Salud y Protección Ambiental de PEMEX REFINACIÓN y al Reglamento de Seguridad. a los Reglamentos y Procedimientos de Seguridad. LÁZARO CARDENAS” DE MINATITLÁN. SALUD Y PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL (SSPA). políticas e instrucciones que en materia de SSPA establezca el Centro de trabajo. al Reglamento Federal de Seguridad. acorde a la de PETRÓLEOS MEXICANOS y difundir ambas políticas a todo su personal. de cualquier persona del Organigrama o de sus subcontratistas para lo Obra. así como los requerimientos que se deriven de los análisis de riesgo de trabajo. así como al de sus Subcontratistas. hasta que se corrija la desviación. sin que el atraso que se origine por cualquiera de estas circunstancias de lugar a prorrogas o diferimientos del programa de ejecución de los trabajos. DE LA REFINERÍA “GRAL. dará lugar al pago de gastos no recuperables o cualquier otro concepto. Higiene y Medio Ambiente de Trabajo. el Contratista. a la Ley General de Salud y su Reglamento. QUE INCLUYE INGENIERÍA DE DETALLE.

Para el caso del Responsable de SSPA. El personal de SSPA del Contratista deberán identificarse usando ropa 100% de algodón color naranja. En este sentido personal de SSPA contratado directamente por los subcontratistas no serán tomados en cuenta en la contabilidad del personal de SSPA que debe proporcionar el Contratista. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD Para garantizar la Seguridad. además de aprobar la evaluación que les aplicará el Área de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra y contar con acreditación vigente de capacitación en materia de SSPA. o bien cuando por el riesgo de los trabajos requiera supervisión de SSPA continua. a su juicio. A efecto de que el Contratista cumpla con lo dispuesto en el primer párrafo del presente Anexo. Salud y Protección Ambiental dentro del área de construcción. Salud y Protección Ambiental durante el desarrollo de la Obra. ADMINISTRATIVAS. presentar a PEMEX REFINACIÓN. El personal de contraincendio deberá usar ropa color rojo y casco rojo. pruebas y arranque de instalaciones industriales. expedida por alguna institución avalada por PEMEX REFINACIÓN. lo anterior para asegurar que la Obra sea dirigida y supervisada en materia de SSPA por personal calificado y con experiencia. El Contratista debe contar con un Organigrama de todo el personal de Seguridad. si el Responsable y los Supervisores de SSPA en Obra designados se encuentran calificados para desempeñar las funciones inherentes a dichos cargos. funciones y responsabilidades. mínima de dos proyectos para Petróleos Mexicanos. 1. con la descripción de sus objetivos generales y metas. quien determinará. debe implementar las acciones pertinentes para que tanto su personal como sus subcontratistas conozcan y den cumplimiento a las disposiciones de SSPA señaladas en este Anexo. difundir a su personal de primera línea y mandos medios (Jefes de área y Supervisores de especialidad) y los avances periódicos (mensuales) de un Programa de Seguridad. En dicho Organigrama debe especificarse con claridad la relación directa del Responsable de SSPA. Tanto el Responsable como los Supervisores de SSPA deben ser del propio Contratista. el Contratista será responsable de realizar las actividades contratadas cumpliendo y sin ser limitativo. con la máxima autoridad del Contratista en la Obra. Por ningún motivo podrá fungir como Responsable de SSPA el Superintendente de Construcción del Contratista. se deberá establecer que el subcontratista y su personal se sujetan a las disposiciones de SSPA señaladas en este Anexo. con todas y cada una de las siguientes disposiciones: I. Salud y Protección Ambiental (SSPA). en el cual se presente su estructura. los cuales deberán ser contratados por el Contratista directamente. prearranque. sus designaciones deberán ser aceptada por la Residencia de Obra con anterioridad al inicio de sus funciones. En las cláusulas del contrato entre el Contratista y sus Subcontratistas. pantalón y camisa de manga larga u overol y casco blanco con franjas laterales color verde con la leyenda “SEGURIDAD”. Salud y Protección Ambiental (SSPA) que participe en la Obra. al menos uno al inicio de la Obra y uno más por cada 50 trabajadores propios y/o subcontratados.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. 2. debe ser profesionista con experiencia en Seguridad. para prevenir 5 de 26 . debe incluir a los Supervisores de SSPA. independientemente de que parte de la Obra sea subcontratada. El Contratista debe elaborar. dicho Organigrama.

Actividades para dar cumplimiento a los objetivos y metas. Para respuesta a emergencias (PRE). analizar y difundir los incidentes con y sin consecuencias. los que de manera enunciativa más no limitativa se relacionan a continuación: 2. mismos que deberán estar apegados a los de PEMEX REFINACIÓN. procedimientos que deberán incluir los requerimientos de SSPA. Para reportar.3. el Contratista debe elaborar sus propios procedimientos de seguridad de acuerdo a la Obra.6.7. Para realizar maniobras con equipos y dispositivos de izaje. Para implantar la Seguridad. 2. mismo que debe presentar a PEMEX REFINACIÓN para su revisión. Este programa debe incluir por lo menos los siguientes aspectos: 2. Revisión de Extintores. Salud y Protección Ambiental. que 2.4. 2. estableciendo medidas preventivas generales y específicas en SSPA para el desarrollo del trabajo. 2.2. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD incidentes a su personal y al de PEMEX REFINACIÓN. evaluar. incluyendo los agentes presentes en el medio ambiente de trabajo y sus alrededores. incluyendo acciones para la reducción de la exposición laboral. 2.4. Tóxicas. así como evitar daños a las Instalaciones de la Obra.4.4.1. las medidas de mitigación. explosión 2. derivados de los trabajos que se desarrollarán durante la Obra. sus riesgos y consecuencias por exposición laboral y su difusión. Así mismo.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. Reactivas. Salud y Protección Ambiental en la Obra.1. verificar y manejar los agentes ambientales. del Centro de Trabajo y al Medio Ambiente. así como las acciones que se deben tomar en caso de una emergencia.5. Campañas de Seguridad y Reuniones de Inicio de Jornada (pláticas de 5 minutos donde se indique a los trabajadores las actividades a realizar y los riesgos de estas y del área donde laboran). respaldada en las Hojas de Datos de Seguridad. incluye evacuación de personal.4.2. Infecciosas y Biológicas) que se utilicen durante el desarrollo del proyecto.4. fuego. El Programa SSPA será complementado con un Atlas de Riesgo del proyecto. Para establecer requerimientos de SSPA para el uso de sustancias químicas (Corrosivas. deberá elaborar el Contratista. Para identificar. entre otros: Pláticas y Prácticas Contraincendio. 2. 6 de 26 .3.4. 2. las rutas de evacuación y puntos de reunión. Pláticas y Prácticas de Salud en el Trabajo (rescate y primeros auxilios). Explosivas. Definición de los criterios aplicables para el control de riesgos potenciales en materia de Seguridad. y riegos ambientales de las sustancias químicas utilizadas esté disponible de acuerdo a la reglamentación emitida por la STPS.4. Manual de Procedimientos Constructivos para ejecutar la Obra contratada. acorde a los riesgos propios de las actividades a realizar y del área de la Obra.4. 2. Para asegurar que la información sobre los riesgos a la salud.

2. 2. Para tareas críticas: 2.14. Para control de acceso a las áreas de trabajo. Para la inspección periódica de herramienta y equipo eléctrico manual. Para trámite y uso de permisos de trabajo de PEMEX REFINACIÓN. instalación y servicio de sanitarios portátiles a los trabajadores.22.4. Seguridad eléctrica.4.4. de fibra óptica. 2. red de tierras].9. de drenajes (químico.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. Para tránsito interior de vehículos en instalaciones industriales. combustibles.9. 2. 2. 2. Para realizar excavaciones y trabajos en excavaciones.4. 2. 2. Entrada segura a espacios confinados. Bloqueo de energía y materiales peligrosos. 2.26. Para suministro de agua purificada. 2. 2.16.13. eléctrica e instrumentos). mecánica. Para almacenamiento y transporte de productos químicos y fuentes radiactivas utilizados (reactivos. 2.9.18.4.4.10. ductos eléctricos. Para suministro.4. 2.4.4. 2. Para uso.4. Para armado. 2. telefónicos. mismo que deberá considerar todas las disposiciones señaladas en el Reglamento DG-SASIPA-SI-08200 de PEMEX REFINACIÓN. 2. Para efectuar maniobras de rescate de personal lesionado. Para realizar trabajos en zonas donde existan equipos y tuberías. 2.9. 2.4.1. Protección contraincendio. 2. 2.4.9.19. Para acceso y transporte de personal en el interior de la Obra. pinturas. 2.12.5. Equipo de protección personal. Apertura de líneas y equipos de procesos.4.4.8. 2.4.4. transporte y almacenaje de cilindros con gases comprimidos.9.3.4. aire y vapor) y de agua contraincendio.15. pluvial y sanitario).7. 2. 2.9.9.4.4.23. Para aplicación de primeros auxilios.4.4.4.4.2.25.21.4. 2. desarmado y uso de andamios. Para pruebas hidrostáticas y neumáticas. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD 2.6.20. tuberías de conducción. de servicios auxiliares (agua.4.4. Delimitación de áreas de riesgos. Para realizar trabajos en zonas donde existan instalaciones subterráneas [entre otras. aceitoso.24. 2.4. Para soldadura y corte con equipo de oxigeno-acetileno.11. solventes). Para coordinar los trabajos de las diferentes especialidades del Contratista (civil. Prevención de caídas. Para trámite y uso de permisos de trabajo del propio Contratista.4.9.4.8.17. en la etapa de energización de 7 de 26 .27.

2. Para estimular y sancionar la actitud del personal. manejo y descarga de aguas residuales. número de empleado. 6. Para el tratamiento. por su propia cuenta y cargo. la cual deberá incluir al menos el nombre del Contratista. centros de control de motores.1 y 6. Para realizar análisis de seguridad de los trabajos (AST). PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD equipos e instalaciones eléctricas (motores. El Contratista será responsable de entregar a la Residencia de Obra las credenciales de los trabajadores que causen baja en un periodo no mayor de tres días hábiles posteriores a la baja.4. El Contratista debe contar. cuartos de control centralizado. El Programa de Capacitación debe incluir. ver Figura 1. sin ser limitativo los siguientes temas.29. que incluya el cumplimiento de los requisitos en materia de SSPA. 2.32. Para el manejo y gestión integral de residuos. dentro de las instalaciones provisionales de la Obra.30. mismos que deberán impartirse con la frecuencia indicada. TEMAS 6. El Contratista debe difundir su política en materia de SSPA para la Obra.4. 5. con el equipo y material requerido para poder impartir la capacitación. 2. así como los datos de a quien informar en caso de algún evento.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO.2 del Programa de Capacitación del numeral 6. de SSPA para las especialidades de trabajos Todo el personal 6.1 Plática de inducción en materia de SSPA y Política de SSPA del Contratista y de PEMEX REFINACIÓN. El Contratista debe proporcionar identificación con fotografía a todo su personal y de sus subcontratistas y registrar en el reverso de dicha identificación los temas 6. 3. el nombre del trabajador.3 Recomendaciones Personal técnico y manual 8 de 26 . con un local para la capacitación del personal propio y personal subcontratado.4. subestaciones eléctricas.4.31. incluyendo las provenientes de lavado y pruebas hidrostáticas de tuberías y equipos. El Contratista deberá tomar las medidas necesarias para que todo su personal y el de sus subcontratistas porten la citada identificación durante su estancia en la Obra. 6. Salud y Protección Ambiental mediante carteles de tipo. 2. así como también mensajes relativos a la Seguridad. información referente a alergias.28. 4. informativo.2 Requerimientos en materia de SSPA de PARTICIPANTES Todo el personal FRECUENCIA 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) PEMEX REFINACIÓN aplicables a la Obra y los estipulados en el contrato. 2. diferentes manuales. misma que será acordada con PEMEX REFINACIÓN. entre otros). número de registro en el IMSS.4. preventivo y restrictivo. Para lavado y soplado de líneas y equipos.

Personal que lo requiera. sistemas y equipos eléctricos que operan a tensiones inferiores a 480 volts.15 Información sobre los Sistemas de alarma por fuego. Todo el personal contraincendio y de las brigada.20 Recepción de motores eléctricos. 6. 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 6. Personal que lo requiera Personal que lo requiera 1 vez al inicio y anualmente 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez antes de iniciar el trabajo Cada vez que se concluya el análisis de un incidente y/o accidente.23 Instalación de portacandado.5 Permiso de trabajo. 6. Personal técnico y manual Personal técnico y manual que lo requiera. Personal que lo requiera. • Para trabajos en atmósferas tóxicas.13 Plan de Respuesta a emergencias.18 Pruebas de campo para la recepción de cables aislados de alta tensión. por atmósferas riesgosas y por emergencias. 9 de 26 . 6. 6. • Hoja de datos de seguridad • Modelo Rombo Todo el personal Personal técnico y manual que lo requiera Personal técnico y manual que lo requiera Personal técnico y manual que lo requiera Personal técnico y manual.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO.21 Reglamento para libranzas en circuitos y equipos eléctricos. etiquetas y doble seguro de desconexión en arrancadores. 6. Personal que lo requiera. 6.12 Prácticas contraincendio especialidad del contrato. 6. sobre la 6. 6. • Rescate y primeros auxilios. Todo el personal Todo el personal Todo el personal Personal que lo requiera.4 Identificación y señalización de riesgos en sustancias químicas. 6. 6.22 Libranza de circuitos. Personal que lo requiera. 6. 6.6 Reglas de Seguridad para efectuar trabajos en espacios confinados. Personal que lo requiera.7 Manejo y Almacenamiento de Materiales Inflamables y Cilindros de Gases Comprimidos. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD 6. 6. Personal técnico. para evitar su recurrencia. 6.8 Uso. 6.17 Pruebas para interruptores termomagnéticos. mantenimiento y pruebas del equipo de protección personal de acuerdo a las actividades a desarrollar. Mandos medios y Supervisores. candados.14 Reglamento de SSPA para Contratistas y Proveedores DG-SASIPA-SI-08200.19 Puesta en servicio de centro de control de motores o de subestación eléctrica.10 Trabajos en altura: • Protección contra caídas.16 Pruebas eléctricas a arrancadores. 6. 6.11 Difusión de incidentes ocurridos durante el desarrollo de la obra y la causa raíz que los originó.9 Selección y uso de equipo de Protección Respiratoria: • Para trabajos en espacios confinados.

Los requerimientos específicos para su llenado serán entregados al Contratista en las reuniones diarias de planeación de los trabajos para el siguiente día. el Programa se puede ampliar según las políticas del Contratista y las necesidades de la Obra. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD 6. en el caso de trabajos críticos.25 Trabajos de corte y soldadura. de la Residencia de Obra y de la Refinería.2 y 6. donde se registren los temas impartidos y las fechas correspondientes con los datos generales del mismo. 6. en las que se informe al personal. Personal que lo requiera.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. según corresponda. para la ejecución de actividades de construcción. con apoyo del Responsable de la actividad a ejecutar y el Supervisor de SSPA.26 Para trabajos de Radiografiado.24 Colocación y retiro de juntas ciegas en líneas y equipos en y fuera de operación. El Contratista deberá programar a su personal para que éste inicie los cursos señalados en los Temas 6. Todos los trabajos deberán realizarse de una manera planeada y ordenada. con una frecuencia no mayor a dos veces por semana. así como la supervisión conjunta de los responsables de SSPA del Contratista.27 Procedimiento para verificar las condiciones de seguridad en el Prearranque. El Contratista debe utilizar los formatos de “Permiso de Trabajo” de PEMEX REFINACIÓN.3 del temario anterior. bajo el control de un responsable de la especialidad del trabajo que se está realizando. A fin de asegurar que el personal obrero identifique y conozca los riesgos particulares de la actividad que le sea encomendada. será necesaria la autorización expresa de la Residencia de Obra para la realización de los mismos. 6. El Programa debe incluir controles administrativos de la selección y capacitación de cada trabajador. así como la frecuencia de capacitación no son limitativos. Todo el material de capacitación en materia de SSPA deberá ser presentado a la Residencia de Obra y autorizado por ésta. el instructor firmará la identificación con fotografía que se menciona en el punto 4 de este Anexo. antes del inicio de labores en la Obra. 10 de 26 .1 de la lista de capacitación será impartida por el personal de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra. una vez que el trabajador haya recibido la plática. impartidas por el responsable de cuadrilla (Cabo). además el Contratista deberá implementar un esquema de pláticas diarias de al menos 5 minutos a todo su personal obrero. 6. debidamente avalados por las instituciones y/o instructores que hayan impartido dicha capacitación e informará a PEMEX REFINACIÓN mensualmente sobre el cumplimiento del programa. Personal que lo requiera Personal que lo requiera Personal Técnicoadministrativo involucrado. 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) Los temas arriba referidos. las actividades que deberá realizar y los riesgos propios de éstas y del área donde se realizarán los trabajos. La Plática de Inducción en materia de SSPA señalada en el Tema 6. Los formatos de permisos de trabajo de PEMEX REFINACIÓN deberán ser impresos y suministrados por el Contratista a la Residencia de Obra para su Administración. 7.

El Contratista debe suministrar a su personal el Equipo de Protección Personal necesario. El Contratista deberá también proveer el equipo complementario. El Contratista debe contar con un archivo específico para hacer acopio de lo relativo a la Seguridad.4. 9.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. lentes de seguridad y calzado de protección con casquillo metálico. Salud y Protección 9. Salud y Protección Ambiental. evitando así los tiempos “muertos”. libranzas. 9. entre otros). monitores. Todo el personal del Contratista y de sus subcontratistas tanto técnico-administrativo como manual deberá utilizar en la obra en todo momento su equipo de protección personal básico.11. Programa de Auditorias Efectivas y de Auditorias de Seguridad. para operadores de vehículos de transporte de materiales y residuos peligrosos. Control de acceso y retiro del almacén de cilindros de gases comprimidos. programa de inspección y ubicación de equipos y material contraincendio (extintores. 9. específico de acuerdo a las actividades a desarrollar (protección facial. Programa de Seguridad. de acuerdo a la normatividad. para todos los trabajadores es: ropa 100% de algodón color naranja (pantalón y camisa de manga larga u overol) con el logotipo de la Compañía.6.7.2. a considerar. para laborar en la Obra.5. Programa de Capacitación de Personal y registros de cumplimiento. pólizas de seguros de vehículos y copia de licencias expedidas por la SCT. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD El Contratista debe programar e informar a los Supervisores de la Residencia de Obra con al menos 3 días de anticipación de los trabajos críticos (interconexiones. 9. cinturones porta herramientas. Análisis de Causa Raíz. 9. Relación de parque vehicular del Contratista y Subcontratistas. auricular y respiratoria. El equipo de protección personal básico. con barboquejo. Ningún trabajo considerado como crítico. Control administrativo que contenga: Relación. Control de entrada y salida de almacén de materiales peligrosos. etc. 9. 9.8.9. casco (naranja) de seguridad. Informes de Investigación y Análisis de los 9. para todo el personal que lo requiera). Copia de los Permisos para el tránsito de equipo pesado en el interior de la Obra.) a fin de que se tramiten oportunamente todos los “Permisos de trabajo” y se verifiquen las condiciones necesarias para la realización del trabajo.1. Programa y Registro del suministro y dotación de equipo de protección personal. podrá efectuarse sin la autorización correspondiente. el cual deberá ser dieléctrico. de la Obra. guantes. 9. Reportes de incidentes con y sin consecuencias que ocurran durante el desarrollo 11 de 26 . prevención de caídas. Salud y Protección Ambiental. excepto para aquellos cuya actividad presente riesgos eléctricos. mismo que deberá contener la información organizada y actualizada de al menos los siguientes temas: 9. Ambiental e Informes mensuales de cumplimiento de las acciones realizadas para la atención de desviaciones.10.3. Copia de los Permisos de Trabajo. 9. hidrantes. al igual que el casco. 8.

descarga de aguas residuales. Copia de la póliza de seguro de responsabilidad civil por contaminación del medio 9. En caso de ocurrir cualquier emergencia en la Obra. El Responsable de Seguridad.13. revisados por la Residencia de Obra. en coordinación con la Residencia de Obra. 12 de 26 . Reporte Semestral de Residuos Peligrosos Enviados para Tratamiento y/o Disposición Final. Trámites ante autoridades (pago de derechos de agua. proceder de acuerdo a lo establecido en el PREO. 9. Resultados de las Auditorias de Seguridad. debe mantenerse informado de la evolución de la misma.12. el informe mensual de avances y entregarlo a la Residencia de obra. y a solicitud de ésta el Contratista deberá presentar las evidencias que le requiera.17. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD mismos. 10. Certificados de inspección de equipos de izaje. este Anexo de “Disposiciones en materia de SSPA”. Copia del Manifiesto de Empresa Generadora de Residuos Peligrosos y Manifiestos 9. la dirigirá. Informes de Seguimiento y Cierre de las Recomendaciones derivadas de los Análisis. etc.1.15. Esta información deberá estar disponible para la Residencia de Obra en todo momento durante la ejecución de la Obra. Permanecer en el Sitio durante la realización de la Obra y verificar que se cumplan las Normas. Elaborar el Programa de SSPA de acuerdo a lo señalado el punto 2.) y demás señalados en el anexo “Permisos y Licencias” de las Bases de Licitación de Entrega. Reporte mensual de Indicadores de Accidentabilidad del Contratista. De ser necesaria la evacuación del personal. el seguimiento al mismo. del apartado I. ambiente. 9. 9.18. 10. de éste documento y coordinar su implementación con los Supervisores de SSPA. uso de bancos de tiro para depositar los residuos sólidos. Elaborar el Plan de Respuesta a Emergencias de la Obra (PRE-O) acorde a los riesgos propios de las actividades a realizar y del área de la Obra. Recepción de Residuos Peligrosos Enviados a Tratamiento y/o Disposición Final. Transporte. Reportes mensuales del cumplimiento de cada uno de los puntos contenidos en 9. de acuerdo a las instrucciones de la Residencia de la Obra. Salud y Protección Ambiental.16.14. auxiliado por los Supervisores de SSPA. (SSPA) del Contratista debe: 10.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. Salud y Protección Ambiental realizadas por PEMEX REFINACIÓN al Contratista y los reportes de cumplimiento de recomendaciones.2. así como actuar en nombre y por cuenta del Contratista en todo lo referente a en materia de SSPA. a través de la Residencia de Obra. 9. 10.3. Procedimientos y Disposiciones en materia de SSPA. incluyendo los de construcción. para en caso necesario.

los carteles relativos a la Seguridad. 10. hasta su total cumplimiento (seguimiento). así mismo los de acceso y pases de salida de vehículos del Contratista. participar conjuntamente con los Supervisores de SSPA y los trabajadores involucrados.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. incidentes (con o sin consecuencias).Integrar el archivo específico de Seguridad. 10.13. permisos de trabajo.7. Mantener actualizada una Bitácora de Seguridad.11. 10. en la investigación. de acuerdo al formato “Indicadores de Accidentabilidad de Compañías Contratistas” (Tabla 1). Tramitar los permisos para el bloqueo de calles en el interior de la Refinería. eléctrico y mecánico.9. originado por maniobras y/o trabajos relativos al desarrollo del Proyecto. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD 10. 10.Suministrar.14. que ocurran durante el desarrollo de la Obra.19 de este anexo.4. análisis y seguimiento de las medidas que se deriven hasta su conclusión y llevar la estadística de Índices de accidentalidad.15.Participar en los Análisis de Seguridad en el Trabajo.Gestionar ante la Residencia de Obra. 10. la cual debe estar disponible siempre para revisión por parte de PEMEX REFINACIÓN. Realizar Auditorias Internas (procedimientos. ya sea en vehículos o caminando. Salud y Protección Ambiental. fabricación. entre otros) al Sistema de Seguridad.6.5.12. anexando un croquis con la ruta alterna propuesta y señalización a utilizar. Reportar inmediatamente a la Residencia de Obra todas las emergencias y los 10.10. así como la información contenida en las Hojas de Datos de Seguridad. 10. de personal.8. 11. en la que registre todos los eventos relevantes relacionados con estas materias. con reportes mensuales. deben: 13 de 26 . 10. Elaborar el Atlas de Riesgo del proyecto.Administrar y verificar el adecuado manejo y gestión integral de los Residuos. así como participar en las Auditorías Externas de SSPA que se realicen a la Obra. considerando los riesgos por el manejo de sustancias químicas utilizadas en la Obra. 10. 10.Reportar mensualmente las actividades realizadas para el cumplimiento de las condicionantes establecidas en el Oficio Resolutivo que en su momento emita la SEMARNAT. los permisos de trabajo que representen riesgo (potencialmente peligrosos). Definir y tramitar conjuntamente con la Residencia de Obra las rutas para el acceso 10. mismas que deberán estar disponibles de acuerdo a lo indicado en el punto II. para su distribución. Salud y Protección Ambiental de acuerdo a lo establecido en el Punto 9 del apartado I. Salud y Protección Ambiental. talleres de. Los Supervisores de SSPA del Contratista. Debe realizar un análisis estadístico de la información presentada por sus supervisores. desde el inicio hasta el término la Obra. Salud y Protección Ambiental. almacén general. de acuerdo a un programa establecido e informar mensualmente al Residente de Obra los resultados obtenidos y las acciones correctivas desarrolladas para atender las desviaciones.

de los eventos relevantes ocurridos 11. de los carteles relativos a la Seguridad.2.4. Mantener informado al Responsable de SSPA. los permisos de trabajo que representen 14 de 26 .12.10. en su área de responsabilidad e informar al Responsable de SSPA los resultados obtenidos y las acciones correctivas desarrolladas para atender las desviaciones. deben mantenerse informados de la evolución de la misma. siempre observe el entorno. para su trámite. y para el bloqueo de calles en la Refinería. verificar y dar soporte al Responsable de especialidad del trabajo en ejecución. 11.9. necesarias para mantenerlas limpias y libres de obstáculos. Salud y Protección Ambiental y asegurar su cumplimiento. sobre la ocurrencia de cualquier 11. por parte de todo el personal. participar en la investigación y análisis de los incidentes y dar seguimiento a las recomendaciones que se deriven de los mismos. elaborar y entregar al Responsable de SSPA. y en su caso proponer las modificaciones necesarias para mejorar el desempeño en materia de SSPA. Conocer y aplicar el Atlas de Riesgo del Proyecto. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD 11. 11. así como las acciones tomadas.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO.1. 11. sus actividades. 11. en su área de responsabilidad.6. para que “antes” de iniciar 11. el cumplimiento del Programa de SSPA.3. De ser necesaria la evacuación del personal. Supervisar la colocación y conservación.13. En caso de ocurrir cualquier emergencia. la realizarán de acuerdo a las instrucciones del Responsable de SSPA. detecte las posibles condiciones inseguras y las reporte para su eliminación ó mitigación. Supervisar el cabal cumplimiento de los permisos para el tránsito de equipo pesado 11. Dar aviso inmediato al Responsable de SSPA.11. la dirección del viento a través de los conos indicadores color naranja. procedimientos y disposiciones en materia de SSPA en todos los trabajos que se realicen. para que se cumplan las normas. Debe generar un reporte donde señalen las desviaciones encontradas en el área de trabajo. Instruir y supervisar al personal bajo su responsabilidad. en sus áreas de responsabilidad. 11. emergencia o incidente en las áreas de su responsabilidad y en su caso aplicar los procedimientos establecidos.7. Instruir y supervisar los trabajos a realizar por el personal de contraincendio. verificando su estricto cumplimiento por parte de todos los trabajadores.8.5. Permanecer durante toda la jornada de trabajo en su área de responsabilidad. Supervisar que el personal accese por las rutas autorizadas y realizar las acciones 11. a través del Responsable de SSPA y proceder de acuerdo a lo establecido en el Plan de Respuesta a Emergencias de la Obra. Realizar continuamente Inspecciones Preventivas de Riesgo. Supervisar 11. Conocer el Plan de Respuesta a Emergencias de la Obra. 11. Para los permisos de trabajo propios del Contratista.

11. Los vehículos que sean utilizados para el transporte y suministro de combustibles dentro de las instalaciones de la obra deberán contar con autorización de la Residencia de Obra. además de separar los vacíos de los llenos.14. el sitio de almacenamiento debe ser de materiales resistentes al fuego y debe contar con señalamientos de seguridad. SEGURIDAD. Supervisar el adecuado manejo y gestión integral de los Residuos.80 m de longitud máximo. Supervisar desde el inicio hasta su conclusión. (potencialmente peligrosos). se realice antes de iniciar actividades. 12. protección respiratoria. pistola) y que de preferencia. Verificar la instalación de “matachispas” en el escape a los equipos de combustión 11. 11. 11. interna. excavaciones. con amortiguamiento. En el caso específico de los permisos de trabajo que tengan continuidad. protección auricular. supervisar el trámite de revalidación. de corte y/o soldadura. para su uso debe incluirse arrestaflama en los equipos de oxicorte. 2. protección ocular. 1. Para su transporte deben utilizarse carritos diseñados ex profeso. donde los cilindros deben estar sujetos por medio de cadenas y/o barandales. con sus capuchones respectivos. El Contratista debe almacenar los cilindros de oxígeno. en lugares secos y ventilados y fuera de las áreas de trabajo. El Contratista debe proporcionar sin cargo económico para el trabajador. todos los trabajos peligrosos en las instalaciones que requieran autorización escrita por parte de PEMEX REFINACIÓN. sujetos en posición vertical e identificados. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD riesgo. II.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. como son entre otros: trabajos en espacios confinados.15. a la hora de comida o al término de la jornada. mientras se les suministra combustible. en interiores no deberá almacenarlos a una distancia menor de 6 metros por tipo de gas. durante el desarrollo de la Obra para verificar el cumplimiento de estas disposiciones y las condiciones estipuladas en el contrato. efectuará Evaluaciones al Contratista en materia de SSPA. PEMEX REFINACIÓN a través de la Subgerencia de Seguimiento. acetileno y otros gases comprimidos que se utilicen en los trabajos de corte y soldadura y otros. en caso contrario separarlos por material divisorio resistente al fuego. y 15 de 26 . extintores y control de acceso y retiro de los cilindros.. Protección Ambiental y Calidad. protección facial. con protección respiratoria. Verificar que se suspenda la operación de los equipos de combustión interna. el equipo de seguridad y herramientas requeridos en óptimas condiciones adecuado para cada actividad que se realice durante el desarrollo de la Obra: arnés de seguridad para el cuerpo. etc. con flama abierta. demoliciones. para lo cual.17. el Contratista otorgará las facilidades necesarias para su desarrollo y participará en las mismas. de tipo eléctrico. Los resultados de estas evaluaciones se darán a conocer por escrito al Residente de Obra.16. así como que esta operación se realice con bomba y manguera con dispensador (válvula ON/OFF. cables de sujeción de 1.

de 20 a 150 libras. ventiladores y/o extractores de aire. los cuales deben ser aprobados por PEMEX REFINACIÓN. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD reemplazará el equipo que se deteriore y/o no cubra los requisitos establecidos por las Normas de Seguridad aplicables. a prueba de explosión y con circuitos protegidos con interruptores de falla a tierra. Como medida preventiva de contraincendio. 3. Tóxicos. equipo de monitoreo para determinar condiciones ambientales seguras (O2. el uso y por tanto la actividad está restringido para personas con vello facial o barba. mascaras. Lo anterior debe permanecer hasta el término de la Obra. mismo que deberá contar con la aprobación de PEMEX REFINACIÓN. comunicación permanente. el equipo y accesorios. se efectuará revisión a los registros de drenaje en las áreas adyacentes a los trabajos de construcción para verificar el nivel de explosividad y en caso de requerirse. conexiones y accesorios deben ser intrínsecamente seguras. necesarios para la realización de trabajos que requieran protección respiratoria (espacios confinados. personal de contraincendio capacitado que formará parte de las brigadas contraincendio. extintores de polvo químico seco y de CO2. El Contratista debe suministrar la protección necesaria para los trabajos en espacios confinados de acuerdo a su procedimiento específico. boquillas de chorro regulable y cierre rápido. reducciones de 2½ a 1½ pulgadas.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. entre otros) en cantidad suficiente. Lo anterior debe permanecer hasta el término de la Obra. la iluminación. El Contratista debe suministrar. CO2. CO. El Contratista debe suministrar desde el inicio de la Obra y hasta el final de las pruebas de comportamiento. sin cargo económico para el trabajador. entre otros. conexiones. entre otros). H2S. 5. observador de entrada/salida al espacio confinado (registro. el equipo de protección personal correspondiente. rescate y evacuación en situación de emergencia. sin cargo económico para el trabajador. así como el equipo requerido para proporcionar la protección contraincendio y de acuerdo a la etapa del proyecto. cuando se realicen trabajos que por su naturaleza puedan ocasionar un incendio. 6. necesario para la realización de trabajos de tipo eléctrico (conexiones de baja. mismos que deberán estar debidamente calibrados. haciendo énfasis en la planeación de las actividades a realizar. media y alta tensión e instalación de equipos. evaluaciones médicas a los trabajadores. se deberá acordar con la Residencia de Obra el apoyo requerido. el conocimiento de los riesgos potenciales o existentes. inflamabilidad. calibrados y certificados para la evaluación de la atmósfera (oxígeno. entre otros). colocación y/o retiro de juntas ciegas. El Contratista debe suministrar. casco y calzado de protección dieléctricos. señalamientos). los cuales deben cumplir con la normatividad correspondiente. en calidad y cantidad suficiente. 16 de 26 . fuentes de alimentación. SO2. equipos autónomos. mangueras de 2 ½ y 1½ pulgadas de diámetro. al menos 2 equipos para cada parámetro. detectores de gases (explosímetros). guantes. bloqueo (tarjeta/candado/despeje/prueba). como son: respiradores. En caso de requerirse la utilización de agua de la red contraincendio de la Refinería en su oportunidad. toxicidad. Explosividad. instrumentos apropiados. ventilación. como son tapetes. llaves. tomar las medidas preventivas necesarias. temperatura). 4. extracción.

tanto en calles como en 10. los límites de velocidad. en el caso de transporte de materiales o residuos peligrosos. En los trabajos de limpieza abrasiva y aplicaciones de recubrimiento anticorrosivo. ganchos. obtener previo al inicio de actividades. eléctricas. el Contratista se obliga a contar con las pólizas de seguro de todos los vehículos.3. las zonas de riesgo derivadas de la ejecución de la Obra. no se permitirá la operación de equipos certificados que tengan observaciones que limiten su capacidad. debiendo en el caso de los equipos de izaje.). PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD 7. El Contratista debe verificar las condiciones de los equipos (grúas.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. Contar con la licencia de conducir/operar correspondiente y vigente. grilletes. y deberá ser sujeto a una verificación previa a cada maniobra (lista de verificación). tablas de carga. se deben instalar mamparas para evitar contaminación por dispersión de partículas. 10. así como las pruebas con carga. separadores. para su acceso en vehículos. compactaciones.4. Dar preferencia a cualquier otro tipo de tránsito (grúas y/o vehículos pesados con carga) y respetar estacionamientos. 10. en cantidad acorde al avance de la Obra. El Contratista debe instalar estratégicamente conos indicadores de viento color naranja. requiere de un plan de izaje. Los vehículos de atención de emergencias (ambulancias y camiones de bomberos) tienen prioridad de paso sobre cualquier otro vehículo. el Certificado de Inspección emitido por una Empresa Certificadora. malacates.1. 10. El Contratista debe delimitar con malla de polipropileno color naranja y letreros alusivos. el monto mínimo de la cobertura por daños al medio ambiente. armado de fierro. con vigencia hasta el término de los trabajos. 8.2. 9. en ese orden. 17 de 26 . montaje de tuberías y almacenamiento de materiales. administrativas y de servicio de PETRÓLEOS MEXICANOS. En caso de que se vaya a certificar en Sitio se deberá notificar al personal de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra para que atestigüe la revisión y las pruebas. excavaciones. siempre tendrán la preferencia. como son: trabajos en altura. Cuando su personal conduzca un vehículo debe observar las siguientes prioridades: 10. cubriendo las responsabilidades derivadas del uso de los vehículos utilizados en la ejecución de la Obra. deberá incluirse la cobertura de daños por la carga. entre otros. etc. Tratándose de transportes de carga. demoliciones. en el que se incluyan las condiciones mecánicas. considerar el color rojo como restrictivo y el amarillo como preventivo. etc. montacargas. El peatón y los ciclistas. en caso de utilizar cadenas y/o cintas de advertencia.) y accesorios de izaje (eslingas. utilizados para el movimiento de equipos y materiales. Adicionalmente. dispositivos de seguridad. electrónicas. todos estos equipos deberán contar con su bitácora de mantenimiento. El Contratista debe cumplir con la normatividad de tránsito interior de vehículos en instalaciones industriales. Toda maniobra que se realice en áreas en operación. estrobos. se establecerá de acuerdo a lo dispuesto en la Ley aplicable. colados.

Los andamios deben desplantarse sobre un piso sólido y nivelado. Portar en el vehículo los documentos reglamentarios de tránsito vigentes (tarjeta de circulación y/o permisos). de redilas y volteo. contrario.3. corrosión severa). para evitar la caída de los mismos y evitar la emisión de polvos a la atmósfera. así como copia legible de la póliza de seguro del vehículo. 10. centrales contraincendio. Verificar además del buen funcionamiento del vehículo (condiciones mecánicas y eléctricas). silenciador. se deben emplear tornillos niveladores que no podrán extenderse mas de 0.13. Las escaleras deben ser diseñadas específicamente para el tipo de andamio con el 18 de 26 . o calzas de madera de 12 x 12 x 2 pulgadas. Transitar por las áreas de la Refinería solo con la autorización correspondiente. perforación. abolladuras.10. 10. corte. Los andamios deben tener capacidad para soportar su propio peso y por lo menos cuatro veces la carga máxima que se le aplique. Los operadores deberán contar con la credencial de identificación señalada en el numeral I.7. vehículos de carga y de emergencia. casas de bombas.11.La capacidad de carga de los camiones no deberá ser rebasada para evitar la caída 10. El Contratista debe instalar andamios metálicos de uso industrial para efectuar trabajos en altura (incluyendo en el interior de excavaciones) que deben cumplir los requisitos de la NOM-009-STPS-2011.6.Colocar lona a los vehículos que realizarán el traslado de materiales pétreos y residuos no peligrosos. quién validará diariamente con tarjetas color verde (que son seguros) o rojas (en proceso de modificación o inseguros). hidrantes. cual se utilizan e instaladas de manera continua desde la base hasta la plataforma 11.8. Utilizar el cinturón de seguridad y verificar que los pasajeros lo usen. en general: 11. Estacionar los vehículos sólo en los lugares indicados (autorizados y siempre en reversa). en caso 11. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD 10.Estacionar los vehículos sin obstaculizar.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO.9. 10.12. 10. 10.3 m. 11. 11. subestaciones eléctricas y vialidades de circulación.5. 10.5. El armado y desarmado de los andamios debe ser realizado por personal con entrenamiento básico y supervisado por una persona experimentada y competente.Los vehículos para el transporte de personal deberán estar acondicionados no 11. 10. Todos los andamios defectuosos deberán marcarse y desecharse. la existencia de extintor. doblado.4 de este anexo.1. de materiales. permitiéndose para este efecto camiones de carga. de cinturones de seguridad y alarma de reversa para grúas.4. debe verificar que las partes no estén alteradas (libres de deformaciones. Antes de iniciar el armado del andamio el Supervisor responsable del trabajo.2. la colocación de matachispas en el escape.

de ancho como mínimo. de altura. la circulación de vehículos. 14. Los andamios que tengan una altura cuatro veces mayor que el ancho de su base no podrán tener ruedas. barra intermedia de protección y rodapié de 0.11. de 1. acordonarlas y humedecer. a la Residencia de Obra. No se deberán realizar trabajos sobre andamios al estar lloviendo ó con vientos 11. para trabajos eléctricos debe utilizar escaleras de fibra de vidrio.80 m. Todo el personal que desarrolle actividades en la plataforma del andamio debe 11. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD de trabajo. utilizar arnés de seguridad para el cuerpo Clase II y doble cable de sujeción con gancho de seguridad. 12.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. 13. Cualquier nivel de trabajo sobre un andamio debe tener plataformas completas para cubrir el nivel. El Contratista debe proporcionar escaleras en buen estado del tipo I y IA. para evitar la emisión de polvos a la atmósfera. Cualquier configuración de plataforma de trabajo distinta a lo antes señalado. metálicas fijadas a la estructura para evitar deslizamientos o cualquier otro movimiento que ponga en riesgo de caída a los trabajadores. En caso necesario se debe instalar cable de vida. a las instalaciones y/o al medio ambiente.6.9. El Contratista debe disponer de equipo y personal capacitado para efectuar maniobras de rescate de personal. No se acepta el uso de andamios de carga como plataformas de trabajo. se deben considerar las instalaciones subterráneas existentes tanto en el área de la excavación como en sus proximidades. deberá ser propuesta con la documentación necesaria.20 m. 15. en todos aquellos trabajos que lo requieran y adherida la información de seguridad (calcomanías). 19 de 26 . El Contratista debe instalar escaleras de acceso en todas las excavaciones de más de 1.15 m. para su aprobación. y deben contar con plataformas de descanso en las escaleras y estar amarrados a estructuras fijas adyacentes. conformada por secciones de 0. queda prohibido el uso de escaleras tipo II y III. todo el material producto de la excavación deberá ser colocado a una distancia no menor a 1 metro del borde de la excavación y solamente en un lado de la misma. así como las afectaciones a y de. 11.7.10. 11. de longitud máximo. de ser necesario el producto de estas. mismo que debe permanecer desde el inicio de la Obra y hasta el final de las pruebas de comportamiento. No se deben mezclar secciones y/o accesorios de andamios de diferentes marcas. de profundidad y ademes dependiendo del tipo de suelo. para carga pesada y extrapesada. con amortiguador de choque. El Contratista debe evitar actos y condiciones inseguras que pongan en riesgo al personal. llevando a cabo Inspecciones Preventivas de Riesgo. mayores a 30 Km/hr. 11. debe contar con barandal de protección compuesto por un pasamanos tubular de 1 metro de altura.8. 11.30 m.

preventivos y prohibitivos) y tener puertas con candados. por lo que deben de ser operados solo por personal calificado. 17. deberá realizarse por el piso. en caso de que se requiera cruzar calles.1. estar aterrizadas. generadores y tableros de distribución. deberán cumplir con los requerimientos que apliquen de acuerdo a la Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-001-SEDE-2005 “Instalaciones eléctricas (utilización)”. mismos que deben estar aterrizados. han demostrado ser fuentes potenciales de accidentes. sobre tarimas de madera que sobrepasen al menos un metro alrededor del tablero. deberán estar pintados de color amarillo y rotulados (rótulos informativos. Todos los equipos y herramientas que por sus características operativas representan un riesgo particular. Los accesorios en los tableros deberán ser para uso a la intemperie. protección acústica en el caso de las de combustión interna. sin empalmes. ni materiales inflamables y combustibles. paredes. contar con matachispas y guardas de protección en sus partes móviles. clavijas industriales con seguro de ¼ de vuelta y cables de uso rudo.2. Los tableros deberán se construidos con estructura de acero ligero (ángulo). 17.7.4. Las instalaciones eléctricas provisionales. las máquinas de soldar deben contar con su tarjeta de identificación. no deben obstruir la circulación de vehículos ni de personas.8. (interruptores termomagnéticos. deben estar rotuladas. grasas. operables los cuales correspondiente. inspección y mantenimiento. El tablero deberá contar con un techo estructural para cubrirlo de la lluvia. El Contratista debe suministrar la protección contraincendio necesaria con material retardante al fuego en los trabajos de corte y soldadura. Ya que los equipos de soldar por su naturaleza y la de las áreas donde se realizan los trabajos. las capacidades de los accesorios serán de acuerdo a la carga que se este utilizando. entre otros). el Contratista y sus Subcontratistas deberán poner especial cuidado en los mismos. no deben estar cerca de registros de drenaje. 17.3. colocar el tablero 17. contar con cajas de fusibles según carga. El área de los tableros deberá estar delimitada con malla ciclón.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. que no exista mezcla explosiva antes y durante la ejecución de los trabajos. deberán contar con los dispositivos de seguridad necesarios de acuerdo a las normas correspondientes y ser operados por personal calificado. 17. Los generadores deberán contar con mecanismos de interrupción accesibles y 17. considerando que: 17. contar con 20 de 26 . clavijas de seguridad de ¼ de vuelta y cables de uso rudo sin empates. se encontrarán señalizados y con el instructivo 17. fondo y techo serán de madera de primera. deben estar perfectamente sujetas y aterrizadas. Las instalaciones eléctricas provisionales en general. cartón. sus 17. así como las condiciones de los equipos de soldar.6 metros. para proteger ductos en operación o por la existencia de materiales inflamables en áreas cercanas al sitio de los trabajos (madera. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD 16.5.6. protegiéndolos con conchas metálicas o de manera aérea a una altura no menor de 7. Se debe verificar con explosímetro.

combustibles. así como un control de acceso. entre otros. con señalamientos de seguridad. quedando bajo su responsabilidad la vigilancia y el resguardo de las mismas. El Contratista debe contratar personal físicamente apto para desarrollar las actividades propias del puesto a ocupar y deberá evaluar su estado general de salud mediante exámenes médicos antes de su contratación (examen de nuevo ingreso). techadas y sobre superficies impermeables dotadas de dique contenedor y con cárcamo para captar derrames. El Contratista debe manejar y almacenar adecuadamente todos los productos químicos. los cuales 21 de 26 . III. 18. Los desechos que se generen en la ejecución de los Trabajos deberán ser retirados del Sitio en un plazo no mayor de cinco Días. que se requieran durante la Obra.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. El Contratista debe mantener ordenada y limpia toda el área de la Obra y las adyacentes. almacenando adecuadamente los equipos y materiales de uso continuo. en caso de requerirse la realización de actividades nocturnas. 22. por lo que de requerir medios de comunicación entre su personal. debiendo estar disponibles para el personal que los maneja. el Contratista deberá proveer radios. solventes. En el área de construcción no está permitido el uso de teléfonos celulares. El Contratista debe instalar un sistema de alumbrado provisional. los desechos orgánicos deben ser retirados diariamente. El Contratista debe instalar y equipar un Consultorio Médico y contar con Ambulancia de urgencias básicas. fuentes radiactivas. El Contratista deberá proveer a la Coordinación de Seguridad de la Residencia de Obra al menos 5 equipos con las mismas características. designando un lugar específico como almacén. y sujetarse a la aprobación por la Residencia de Obra en función de sus características y áreas donde se pretenden emplear. destinada al servicio de pacientes que requieren atención prehospitalaria de la urgencias médicas mediante soporte básico de vida. los cuales deberán ser intrínsecamente seguros. sus cables deben ser de una sola pieza sin empalmes ni remiendos (sólo se aceptan conectores específicamente diseñados para este efecto). 19. 2. reactivos. el cual deberá cumplir con la normatividad aplicable. pinturas. 1. 21. sin que se afecte el avance de la Obra. Todo el personal de SSPA del Contratista (Responsable y Supervisores) deberán contar con equipo de radiocomunicación con una frecuencia exclusiva y acceso a la frecuencia abierta del resto del personal. el cual debe contar con áreas cercadas. así como los residuos peligrosos también deben ser retirados del Sitio diariamente al almacén temporal del Contratista. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD matachispas. con acceso únicamente a la frecuencia de seguridad. El Contratista debe delimitar con malla ciclón todas las instalaciones provisionales que construya en la Obra. 20. no deben cruzar áreas peligrosas ni convertirse en un estorbo para el tránsito de personas ni vehículos y sus partes móviles deben contar con protección. entre otros los rombos de comunicación de riesgos de cada sustancia. materiales diversos. SALUD. En este sitio se debe contar con las Hojas de Datos de Seguridad de los materiales considerados como peligrosos.

mismos que estarán ubicados en forma estratégica dentro del área de construcción. que debe incluir. sin ser limitativo: 2. El Consultorio debe contar con baño y tarja con agua corriente. 2. independientemente de lo señalado en el 5. se deberá contar durante toda la jornada o en el segundo turno. en caso necesario. considerando el total de trabajadores.3 Operador de Ambulancia. accidentes o lesiones de trabajo y casos de primeros auxilios. mismos que deben ser retirados con frecuencia de dos veces por jornada. considerando 1 sanitario por cada 20 personas. El Contratista pondrá a disposición de la Residencia de Obra las evidencias documentales. En caso de utilizar un vehículo para el servicio de limpieza de 22 de 26 . los cuales deben ubicarse estratégicamente en el área de construcción. su traslado al hospital del IMSS o de alguna Institución Médica que preste servicio al Contratista. equipo y material necesario para la auscultación y atención de primeros auxilios a los trabajadores. el Contratista debe verificar la limpieza de los mismos y de la disposición final de acuerdo a la autorización municipal. provocadas por fuentes que generen que la temperatura corporal de los trabajadores sea superior a 38° C.1 Un Médico. En caso de requerirse efectuar actividades después del horario normal de trabajo establecido o si hubiera doble jornada de trabajo. así como el que labora en altura. mobiliario. previo al inicio de las actividades diarias. El Médico debe asentar en una bitácora de Servicios Médicos. tanto del contratista como el de sus subcontratistas. el personal capacitado para dar atención a curaciones y urgencias. Siendo responsabilidad del Contratista la afiliación de todos sus trabajadores al Instituto Mexicano del Seguro Social (IMSS). El Contratista debe contar con los registros de que su personal está en condiciones saludables para su ingreso a la obra. donde exista exposición de los trabajadores a condiciones térmicas. El Contratista debe cumplir con todos los puntos indicados en la NOM-015-STPS-2001. 6. que le sean solicitadas de aquel personal que se encuentre involucrado en un incidente. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD deberán permanecer desde el inicio de la Obra hasta el final de las pruebas de comportamiento. 5. agua purificada. El Contratista debe instalar y mantener hasta el final de la Obra. espacios confinados y equipos energizados. quien decidirá. para todas aquellas actividades a desarrollar. 3. lavamanos y sanitarios portátiles para el personal masculino y femenino en forma independiente. para recibir la atención médica especializada que se llegara a requerir a juicio del médico. toda circunstancia y/o acontecimiento relacionado con los servicios en salud brindados al personal del Contratista y sus Subcontratistas. así como. Los sanitarios deben contar con receptáculos para el manejo de los desechos.10 de la misma.2 Un Técnico en Urgencias Médicas y 2.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. particularmente lo referente a enfermedades. quienes deben ser evaluados por el Servicio Médico del Contratista. 4. esta bitácora debe estar disponible en todo momento al personal de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra. con mayor énfasis para los operadores de grúas y equipo de izaje. con la cantidad mínima antes indicada para dar atención a curaciones y urgencias.

PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD los sanitarios. El Contratista debe cumplir los requerimientos de la normatividad. en el lugar que PEMEX REFINACIÓN le indique. trasladarla y depositarla en el sitio que indique la autoridad municipal. Referente a vehículos automotores. El Contratista deberá instalar fosas para captar las descargas del drenaje sanitario de las oficinas. equipados con sillas. instalaciones eléctricas. 2. ni utilizar hornillas de cualquier tipo ni encender fuego. papel para las manos y tarja con agua corriente con descarga al drenaje sanitario de las instalaciones temporales del Contratista. recolectar los materiales orgánicos e inorgánicos de desecho. IV. comedores y otras instalaciones temporales. adecuadamente ventilados y cerrados para evitar la contaminación con polvos de las áreas de construcción. deberán cumplir 23 de 26 . como son rotomartillos. mismos que deben ubicarse fuera del área de preparación de alimentos y en lugares accesibles. Los contenedores deben mantenerse limpios después de ser retirada la basura. compactadores. de tal manera que todo el personal de campo consuma sus alimentos en ésta área. 11. para operadores de vehículos de transporte de materiales y residuos peligrosos debe contar con licencia vigente expedida por las autoridades de la SCT. lavamanos con jabón. 7. considerando un mínimo de 3 litros por persona por jornada de trabajo. 1. La cantidad de agua dependerá de la fuerza de trabajo con que se cuente para la realización de las Obras. PROTECCION AMBIENTAL. El tipo deberá ser de acuerdo a la normatividad específica y la localización debe ser acordada con la Residencia de Obra. El Contratista debe cumplir con lo establecido en las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas. así como comedores techados con lamina y con piso de concreto. entre otros. alumbrado. relativas a la contaminación por ruido. donde no se debe fumar. El Contratista debe utilizar en las diferentes etapas de la Obra. contenedores herméticos para la basura. El Contratista debe construir sus oficinas temporales. 10. previo acuerdo con la Residencia de Obra. En los contenedores herméticos. misma que debe mantenerse limpia. El Contratista debe contratar personal capacitado y en condiciones saludables para operar la maquinaria y equipo. Se debe verificar la calidad del agua en estos depósitos periódicamente. éste deberá estar equipado para este fin. por separado. equipo y maquinaria en óptimas condiciones de operación. identificados con letreros y colores distintos para la clasificación y separación de la basura. El Contratista debe suministrar agua purificada con hielo para el personal. respecto a los tiempos de exposición del personal que opere equipos que transmitan vibraciones. 9. mesas. mismas que deberán limpiarse periódicamente y ser retiradas al final de la obra. así mismo retirar diariamente la basura de estos recipientes.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. las muestras deben ser tomadas de dichos depósitos. con capacidad suficiente en los turnos establecidos para la fuerza de trabajo máxima esperada. 8. en depósitos limpios con tapa de sello hermético. No se admitirán carpas provisionales. mediante análisis bacteriológicos. deberá contar con las protecciones necesarias para su ingreso a la obra y la autorización del personal de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra.

Esta bitácora deberá estar disponible en todo momento para revisión del personal de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra. El Contratista debe manejar y disponer los residuos que se generen en la Obra de acuerdo a lo previsto en la Ley General para la Prevención y Gestión Integral de los Residuos y su Reglamento y las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas aplicables. los materiales impregnados con hidrocarburos. los cuales deben ser entregados para su disposición a empresas debidamente autorizadas. El Contratista debe cumplir con lo indicado en las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas respecto a la descarga de las aguas residuales que se generen en cualquier etapa de la Obra. botas.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. incluyendo las utilizadas en pruebas hidrostáticas. 3. calzado. como resultado del dictamen que en su momento emita la SEMARNAT y elaborar un reporte escrito para informar mensualmente a la Residencia de Obra de las actividades realizadas para el cumplimiento de dichas condicionantes. 4. así como los que hayan contenido materiales y/o residuos clasificados como peligrosos. ropa de algodón. baterías (acumuladores) de desecho. estopa. El Contratista debe dar cumplimiento a las condicionantes establecidas en el Oficio Resolutivo. de inundación y durante el lavado de maquinaria y equipo. 5. Debe depositar en tambores debidamente identificados. aceites. envases vacíos. entre otros). trapo. guantes. 24 de 26 . PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD con los niveles máximos permisibles de emisión de contaminantes provenientes del escape. Debe asentar en una bitácora el manejo de los residuos peligrosos. de acuerdo a la normatividad aplicable. pinturas y/o solventes (madera.

2 REQUERIMIENTOS SSPA: RESIDENCIA DE OBRA DEPTO. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD Figura 1 IDENTIFICACIÓN CON FOTOGRAFÍA FRENTE PEMEX REFINACIÓN REFINERÍA “GRAL. DE PERSONAL TEMA 6. PROYECTO: NOMBRE: CATEGORÍA: DEPTO.SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO. En el reverso se debe incluir la firma del Personal autorizado para impartir la capacitación en materia de SSPA.1 INDUCCIÓN Y POLÍTICA SSPA: TEMA 6. EMP.: SUPTTE. LÁZARO CÁRDENAS” LOGO CIA. DE CONSTRUCCIÓN RESIDENTE DE OBRA REVERSO FIRMA DEL EMPLEADO EMPRESA O SUBCONTRATISTA: EN CASO DE ACCIDENTE AVISAR A : TEL: VIGENCIA: ALERGIAS: AUTORIZA DEPTO. 25 de 26 .: IMSS: FOTO No. DE CAPACITACIÓN Notas: En el frente de la credencial se deben incluir las autorizaciones del Personal de SSPA del Contratista y de la Residencia de Obra.

Incapacitantes (con más de 24 hrs) Total de Índice de Accidentes Frecuencia Fatales Índice de Gravedad TOTAL Nota. PROTECCIÓN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD Tabla 1 Indicadores de Accidentabilidad de Compañías Contratistas Centro de Trabajo _______________ Mes/año ___________________ Índice de Actos Seguros IAS Compañía Total de Trabajadores en la Instalación Total de Horas Hombre Laboradas Total Accidentes.Los indicadores de Accidentabilidad deberán ser integrados diferenciadamente con el personal de la contratista y los datos de sus subcontratistas en caso de existir estos.. 26 de 26 .SUBDIRECCIÓN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIÓN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIÓN Y AMPLIACIÓN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO.

LAZARO CARDENAS REFINERY SECTION 2 FABRICATION/INSTALLATION .PEMEX REFINACION INVITATION TO BID GRAL.

4.2013-05-03 UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation Page 1 of 7 970086 R601F-1 1. Transmitter Electrical Hook-Up Details – 970086-D669-1 No.2. Transmittersa. 6. Flow Transmitter . Standard Drawing—Orifice Plates 6-112-4.1. Standard Drawing—Thermometer Assemblies 6-107-7. 2. of pressure gauges to be installed. Flow a. 3. Specification—Instrument Checkout 970086 S601T-1. Specification—Instrument Installation 970086 S601N-1. 6-105-7. 2. b. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 970086-D670-20 1. of flow transmitters to be installed – 2 qty. 3. Standard Drawing—Piping Arrangements at Orifice Plates 1.Gas Service w/honed flow section Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-2 No. Specification—Instrument Tubing Installation NOM-001-SEDE-2005 Electrical Installations 1. 2. 3. Standard Drawing—Thermowell and Skin Thermocouple Installation Assemblies 6-111-6. Pressure gaugesPressure Gauge Installations: 970086-D667-14 No. Instrumentation Instrumentation installation and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with the following documents: 1.4 qty. Specifications and data sheets 1. Standard Drawing—Thermowells 6-106-6. UOP standard drawings 1. UOP installation details: Refer to Instrumentation Installation detail examples (all drawings in this section to follow at later date) Work all support hookups in conjuction with Dwg. 5. 970086 S601F-1. . Flow Transmitter (Gas Service) Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-1 No of flow transmitters to be installed – 6 qty. 4. of transmitters – 27 qty. Standard Drawing—Thermocouple head Assemblies 6-108-6.3.

Differential Pressure Transmitter Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-9 No. Differential Pressure Transmitter Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-8 No. c. Differential Pressure Transmitter Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-10 No. Flow Transmitter with steam tracing Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-12 No. d. b. with Rotameters – 2qty. with rotameters – 2 qty. Instrument Wiring Diagram Temperature Element/Transmitter Location 970086-D648 c. of transmitters – 1 qty. 3.4 qty. of transmitters to be installed – 2 qty. Regeneration Tower Temperature Element Mechanical Hook-up953469-606 Sketch C Temperature element mechanical hook-up – 953469-606 Sketch D No.7 qty. Coriolis Mass Flow Meter Mechanical Installation970086 D667-4 – 1qty 970086-D667-2 – 1qty. of transmitters – 2 qty. Temperature Element Electrical Hook-up 970086-D669-18 No. Coriolis Mass Flowmeter Electrical Hookup 970086-D669-5 No. of flow transmitters – 1 qty. Temperature a. with rotameters – 2 qty. of transmitters – 1 qty.2013-05-03 UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation c. of transmitters to be installed.1 qty. 4. 5. Differential Pressure a. Supplementary Wiring Diagram 970086. Pressure Transmitters 970086-D667-18 No. Differential Pressure Transmitter with steam tracing Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-13 No. (2 pairs) d. f. of transmitters – 2 qty.D676 and 970086-D678 e. Flow transmitter with two rotameters Mechanical Installation 970086 D667-7 No. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. of temperature elements . of transmitters. of transmitters – 2 qty. . of temperature elements – 8 qty. Page 2 of 7 970086 R601F-1 Dual Flow Transmitter (Gas Service) installed on one flow element mechanical installation: 970086-D667-3 No. b.

of transmitter support – 2 qty. g. (4 sets of 9 points each) Mechanical Installation of Multi-point thermocouple on Regeneration towerSee 953469-305-05 6. Instrument Support Differential Pressure transmitter with 1 rotameter – V00000-90005-0264 No. i.19 qty. of Skin Temp Elements with Transmitters – 4 qty. of temperature element points. b. (Skin Thermocouples on Heaters will be installed by heater manufacturer) h. Instrument Supports a. Support Hook-Up Single Transmitter on one support Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Skin Temperature Elements Electrical Hook-up – 970086-D669-3 No. . Multi-point temperature detection on Regeneration Tower Electrical Installation970086-D669-8 No.36 qty. Instrument Support Differential pressure transmitter with 2 Rotameters Existing Structure 970086-D670-11 No. of Skin Temperature Elements. f. Skin Thermocouple mechanical Hook-upSee UOP Standard Drawing 6-108 detail B.24 qty. Thermocouple with Temperature Transmitter Electrical Hook-up970086-D669-2 No. c.2013-05-03 UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation d. of temperature elements – 1 pair (2 elements) e. of transmitter supports –2 qty. Skin Temperature Elements with Temp Transmitter Electrical Hook-up970086-D669-4 No. Page 3 of 7 970086 R601F-1 Two temperature elements in one thermowell mechanical hook-up 953469-606 Sketch E 953469-606 Sketch F No. of thermocouples with temperature transmitters.

i. h.2 qty. of instrument supports – 1 qty.970086-D670-10 No. support hook-up 1 rotameter per stand No. Electrical Hook-up 970086-D669-11 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Flow Transmitter at grade support hook-up 970086-D670-1 No. of transmitters – 3 pair (6 transmitters) e.4 g. of skin thermocouples with transmitters. of rotameters.2013-05-03 UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation New structure 970086-D670-2 No. of Instrument Supports needed – 7 Qty (14 transmitters) f. b. Dual Temperature Transmitter Support Hook-Up – 970086-D670-9 New Structure – 970086-D670-9 No. New structure support hook-up 2 rotameters on one stand. of transmitters – 1 qty. 7. Coriolis Meter Horizontal Installation Support Hookup 970086-D670-6 New structure No. of transmitters – 1 qty. Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-6 No. Support Hook-Up Dual transmitters on one support – New Structure 970086-D670-5 No. of transmitters – 1 qty. of transmitters – 12 quantity Page 4 of 7 970086 R601F-1 d. Rotameter a. Single Temperature transmitters support hook-up 970086-D670-2 No. Hydrocarbon analyzera. 8. of instrument supports – 2 qty. Coriolis Meter Vertical Installation Support Hookup 970086-D670-4 Existing structure No. .

Nuclear Level a. Blower Seal Gas Panels a. b. Lock Hopper No. 1 Brackets Fabrication Drawing Lock Hopper No. Oxygen Analyzer a. c. b. Supplementary Wiring Diagram 97008-D681 Page 5 of 7 970086 R601F-1 9.970086-D669-7 Instrument Support Hook-Up – 970086-D670-15 No. d. of switches – 4 qty. d. of Hydrocarbon Analyzers – 2 qty. e. Oil Mist System – a. Valvesa. of valves. Electrical Hook-up for control valves – 970086-D669-10 No. 2 Brackets Fabrication Drawing Supplementary Wiring Diagrams 970086-D672 through D675 13. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. c. Electrical Hook-Up 970086-669-6 No.970086-D667-16 Electrical Hook-up. Mechanical Hook-up 970086-D667-18 Electrical Hook-up 970086-D669-16 Support Hook-up 970086-D670-7 Supplementary Wiring Diagram 970086-D680 12. Pneumatic Installation Details for valves – 970086-D668-1 No. Mechanical hook-up. d. Lift Gas Blower Mechanical Hookup 970086-D667-17 Lift Gas Blower Electrical Hookup 970086-D669-1 Lift Gas Blower Instrument Support Hookup 970086-D670-21 Regen Blower Mechanical Hook-up 970086-D667-15 Regen Blower Instrument Support Hook-Up 970086-D670-14 11. of analyzers – 1 qty.10 qty. c. d. b. b. c. b. . of valves. c.2013-05-03 UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation b. Supplementary wiring diagram 970086-D671 10. Instrument Support Hook-up 970086-D670-16 No.26 qty.

Electrical Installation Details – 970086-D669-9 No. Junction Box Details a. Page 6 of 7 970086 R601F-1 Electrical Hook-up for Solenoid On/Off Valves – 970086-D669-12 No. b. pneumatic hookup970086-D668-2 Stack selector and valves – 2 qty. Supplementary Wiring Diagram 970086-D677 16. c. Supplementary Wiring Diagram 970086-D628 and D629 14. Single Junction Box support – 970086-D670-18 No. of air dryers – 1 qty.2013-05-03 UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation c. Air Dryer Panel a. c. c. of valves – 15 qty. Stack Selector Support Hook-up 9700876-D670-8 18. Support Hookup 970086-D670-17 Electrical Hookup 970086-D669-9 Supplementary Wiring Diagram 970086-D682 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Dust Collector Blowback System – a. 17. d. b. of supports – 6 qty. . Bentley Nevada Monitor for Regeneration Blower a. Dust CollectorTimer Box a. Electrical Hook-Up – 970086-D699-14 Junction Boxes – 12 qty. Dual Junction Boxes support – 970086-D670-19 No. of Dust Collectors – 1 qty. Dust Collector Fines Collection Valves – a. b. of supports – 3 qty. Electrical hook-up 970086-D669-17 No. 15. Support Hookup 970086-D670-12 Electrical Hookup 970086-D669-9 Supplementary Wiring Diagram 970086-D679 19. b. b.

Testing. and Inspection Plan and Record 970086 S999C-0. 601 documents shall take precedence over 701 documents. . Specification—Supplier Document Index 970086 S150-A. Specification—Cross-Discipline Clearance and Accessibility 3. Specification—Documentation for Custom-Designed Goods and Services 970086 S140S-0. the following shall apply: 1. Specification—Examination. 2. Units. except as otherwise noted.4. Conflicting requirements In case of conflicts among documents outlined in this Technical Requisition.2013-05-03 UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation Page 7 of 7 970086 R601F-1 1. Drawings shall take precedence over Specifications. 2. 701 documents shall take precedence over others. 3. Other Instrument installation and related goods and services shall comply with the most recent version. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. and Documents 970086 S140C-0. Project specifications (all drawings in this section to follow at later date) Instrument Design Summary 970086-D601 Instrument Symbol List and General Notes 970086-D603 Instrument Location Plan IFC 970086 D605 through D619 Instrumentation Homerun Cable Schedule 970086-D625 Instrumentation Homerun Conduit Routing Plan 970086-D626 Instrument Junction Box Wiring Diagrams 970086-D628 through D633 Instrument Junction Box Wiring Diagrams 970086-D636 through D641 Instrument Junction Box Wiring Diagrams 970086-D628 through D633 Instrument Junction Box Wiring Diagrams 970086-D644 and D645 Instrumentation Cable Block Diagram 970086-D650 Instrument Junction Box Assembly Drawing Discrete/Analog 970086-D653 Instrument Junction Box Assembly Drawing Thermocouple 970086-D654 Instrument Bill of Material 970086-D660 2. of the following documents: 1. Specification—Language. 5. 970086 S140A-0. 3. 4.

Demolition of existing conduit and cable not being used for replaced or reused instruments shall be taken as far back as per the instrument demolition drawing. Bolded instruments on Mechanical Flow Diagram (MFD) shall be installed and supported.0 ft (2. b. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission. Instrument except PDT/PDI shall be mounted 2. Instrument shall be located so as to maintain clearances required for walkway or access way. 4. or reused) shall have new impulse and/or instrument air tubing installed as per instrument requirements. c. 6. Fabrication 1. 2. General 1. and operation/maintenance of equipment and valve. or in such a manner as to interfere with the future removal or installation of other equipment item or instrument. 1 (FA-511) and Lock Hopper No.0 ft (600 mm) . reused or new) shall be wired to new junction boxes with new conduit and cable. new. 2. 3. Instrument shall be mounted to avoid high vibration. 4.4 m) from process connection. or being reused) shall have new instrument support stands. Instrument cable and instrument air tubing shall be routed through pipeways and areas provided for this routing. New instruments that currently do not exist on the current unit New instruments that are replacing instruments that exist on the current unit. Any new support stand in the existing structure shall be painted and bolted to either the grating or support beam. Scope This document defines technical requirements for instrument installation. etc. All affected instruments (whether being replaced. IEC Other: NOM-001SEDE-2005 NEC 2. Any support stand in the new structure shall be galvanized and bolted either to the grating or support beam. Bolded instruments fall into three categoriesa.8. All affected instruments (whether being replaced. Brackets to attach the new Nuclear Level Instrument to the existing brackets on Lock Hopper No. 3. 5.2013-05-03 Instrument Installation Page 1 of 9 970086-S601F-1 1. Existing instruments that are to be removed from the existing location and installed (reused) in new location. Instrument and support shall not be mounted inline with flanges. All affected instruments (whether being replaced. . new. so as to protect them from damage during plant operation and maintenance. Refer to the Instrument Design Summary IFC (status column) for which instruments fall into what category. 2 (FA-516) shall be fabricated based on UOP supplied drawings. 5. valve packing. Electrical Installation shall conform to all the requirements of the governing code shown below. 3.

for explosion proof installations of instrument loops. Movement of instruments due to thermal expansion shall be taken into consideration when running conduit and instrument air tubing. Cable adjacent to horizontal cable entry shall have a drip loop. Groups B. 16. Instrument installation 4. and Lock Hopper No. Instrument shall be protected from rain. 9. Unless prohibited for other technical reasons. Transmitter manifold. Instruments shall be protected from damage before. d. Fabricator to supply a. shall be supplied assembled to the transmitter.2013-05-03 Instrument Installation Page 2 of 9 970086-S601F-1 7. c. i. Junction Box Cable (non-armored acceptable) PVC coated Galvanized Steel Conduit PVC coated Conduit seals and fittings Flexible conduit (needs to be Explosion proof/Flameproof) Cable label and wire tag Stainless steel tubing and fitting Instrument air tubing and impulse tubing Conduit piping support Instrument and junction box stand Instrument stand and junction box stand name plates Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission. 13. 1 (FA-511). 11. Tagged instrument shall be obtained from UOP. 2 (FA-516) 2.Lock Hopper No. during. g. f. Supply and installation of instrument material shall be accordance with NEC classification: Class I. Electrical Certification for instruments shall be UL and/or FM. . dry. k. where required. Division 1.C. 4.and D except where noted. Nuclear Level bracket drawings for new nuclear level detector and source being replaced on existing equipment. shall not be filled unless otherwise directed by UOP. indoor environment before installation. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided to permit instrument to move without straining cable or tubing. 12. c. 15. h.1. j. All instruments (new or reused) are to be kept in a clean. 8. cable entry shall be from bottom of instrument. 14. UOP a. Scope of supply 1. 10. b. 17. e. Conduit seals. b. and after installation. Stainless steel surface shall be protected from iron filing from nearby grinding and welding.

Minimum slope is 1” per 1’ (25 mm per 300 mm). c.3.. 4.4. Instrument piping and tubing shall not be supported from process piping. LSL-4421(C)] Label for individual wires shall be the tubular heat shrink type. o. and AC power wiring shall be kept separate from each of the other type. instrumentation support installation detail and conduit routing plan. Label shall include de-energized contact state and instrument tag number [e. c. For grounding details refer to electrical drawing package. Sufficient supports shall be installed to maintain instrument piping in a neat manner. 2. Label on individual wires shall be completely on the insulated portion of the wire 5. General Installation Tagged instruments shall be installed as per applicable instrument mechanical installation detail. Instrument wiring 1.2. FT-4430(-)]. No splices are permitted in any wire from the junction box to the instrument. Lock Hopper No. They should be taped back at the instrument. thermocouple wiring. Impulse tubing shall slope continuously down to process connection in gas service and continuously down to the instrument in liquid service. Accessories n. LSL-4421(NO). . 4. a. Thermocouple and analog-instrument conductor shall be labeled at instrument and junction box. b.2013-05-03 Instrument Installation Page 3 of 9 970086-S601F-1 l. d. instrument tracing detail. FT-4430 (+). Instrument piping shall be supported from prefabricated pipe supports. Hardware and consumable items required to complete instrument installation. 6. 3.g. Tubing 1. 4. b. Discrete-instrument conductor shall be labeled at instrument and junction box. b. 2 (FA-516) 4. instrument electrical installation detail.. Tubing shall have support every 3’ (1m). Label shall include instrument tag number and polarity [e. Fabricated nuclear level brackets to attach new instrument on existing brackets on the Reactor. except as follows: a. and any other permanent vibration free structure. Individual wire insulation shall be stripped back about 1” (25 mm) or only as long as required to make a reliable connection.g. Supporting steel m. 24 VDC wiring. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission. 1 (FA-511) and Lock Hopper No. Wire Labels a. Shields / drain wires shall be landed to terminal provided at the junction box. Shields / drain wires are not to be terminated at the instrument. Pocket (low point) shall be avoided. 2.

Label shall be suitable for harsh applications. 4. Refer to piping plan for location of pressure gauge. Take-offs from the sub head (to the air user) should be taken from the top side of the sub-header. Each end user (air consumer) shall have a shut off valve within reach (approximately 1 meter). LCD indicator shall be oriented so that indicator is in correct orientation with respect to grade or grating. The end of each sub-header shall be fitted with a valve and threaded plug to allow condensation to be drained from the sub-header. and will be visible to operations/maintenance workers. Differential pressure transmitter (flow and differential pressure service) 1. Refer to instrument location plan for location of remote indicators.6. . 4.2. The final shut off valve for each air user should generally be below the end user so that the final tubing to the end user will not have a low point pocket. size of at least ten point. Remote indicators 1. f. 4. Refer to piping plan for location of orifice flanges Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission.9.10. d.Orifice plates 1. permanent. 4. Low point pockets shall be avoided. Pressure gauge shall be installed so that indicator is visible from grade or grating. and on white background. 4. Orifice plates and orifice flanges 4.5. c. LCD indicator shall be oriented so that indicator is in correct orientation with respect to grade or grating. 2.10.8.Orifice flanges 1. 2. End users should be above the sub-header in order to avoid low point pockets. Pressure transmitter 1. black. Install plate with side marked inlet facing toward direction of flow. and will be visible to operations/maintenance workers. Label font shall be type written. Remote LCD indicators shall be oriented so that LCD indicators are in a correct orientation relative to grade or grating. 2. Refer to instrument location plan for location of pressure transmitters.10.2013-05-03 Instrument Installation Page 4 of 9 970086-S601F-1 e. Refer to instrument location plan for location of differential pressure transmitters. b. a. For portions of the instrument air header that may be field fit the following guidelines apply. 4. Pressure gauge 1.7. Instrument air piping 1. g. 4. Hand written labels are not permitted. 2.1.

4. Verification that filters are installed upstream of the Coriolis Meter is required.14. Refer to piping plan for location of thermocouples and thermowells.2013-05-03 Instrument Installation Page 5 of 9 970086-S601F-1 4. Refer to mechanical installation drawing for each Coriolis meter.3. 2. Refer to piping plan and instrument plan for location of honed flow sections. The shorter section of meter run shall be installed at the downstream side of the process flange. 4. orifice plate and gaskets to be shipped loose. Nuclear level instruments 1.10.Honed flow sections 1.11. 2. 2 (FA-516) will be fabricated and installed by the on-site fabricator based on UOP supplied drawings. 5. 1 (FA-511) and Lock Hopper No. Refer to piping and instrument plan for location of Coriolis Mass Flow Meters Proper mounting of the senor is required.13. 3. and will be visible to operations/maintenance workers. Refer to instrument location plan for location of nuclear level detectors and switches Nuclear sources ship direct to refiner’s site from manufacturer and will need to be installed on the appropriate vessels. 4. Fabricator to alert UOP in writing if thermowell(s) do not meet this requirement. Refer to support installation drawing for each Coriolis Meter. LCD indicator shall be oriented so that indicator is in correct orientation with respect to grade or grating. Thermocouples. 2. For gas services honed flow sections and shall be installed such that all taping locations are off the top side of the pipeline. 2. Honed flow sections shall be installed with the longer section of meter run at the upstream side of the process flange. For liquid services honed flow section shall be installed so that all taping locations are on the side of the pipe. and will be visible to operations/maintenance workers 3. Temperature transmitters 1. the wet length immersion of the themowells should be a minimum of 2”. Use of pipe mounting brackets supplied by Coriolis Meter Vendor required. Use of mounting kit provided by Coriolis Mass Flow Meter vendor required. Lock Hopper No. Fabricator to note length of themowell and thermowell nozzle when installing all thermowells. 3. fabricator to install 10 mm spacer between orifice flanges. Refer to instrument location plan for location of transmitters LCD indicator shall be oriented so that indicator is in correct orientation with respect to grade or grating. Coriolis Mass Flow Meters 1. 2. Brackets to attach to the new Nuclear Level Instrument (detector and source) to the existing brackets on the Reactor. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission. . 4. For honed flows. 4. For installation on the same level or at an angle of 45° to the line wall. 4.12. thermometer and thermowells 1.

the fabricator shall notify UOP in writing in a timely manner. If a valve is installed with its flow arrow in the correct direction and the valve accessories are facing so that access to the accessories is. 4. or less than optimal. 4. Refer to piping plan for location of ball valves. Refer to instrument location and or piping plan for location 4. 4. . manual or automated. The intent is to assure that the two piece valve is not subjected to stresses from misaligned inlet and outlet flanges. obstructed. 3. Refer to instrument location plan for location. Control valves 4.2. 3. 2.15.Automated and Manual Ball valves 1. Refer to instrument location plan for location Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission.2013-05-03 Instrument Installation Page 6 of 9 970086-S601F-1 4. Refer to piping plan for location of control valves All control valves are supplied with accessories mounted and tubed except as noted. Prior to installing any ball valve in the catalyst path. General 1. 7.1. 4. UOP resident shall witness the proper taper bore has been established. Metal seated ball valves shall not be stroke tested unless agreed to and witnessed by UOP. 2. UOP resident shall witness and photograph the installation to ensure that the analyzer probe is orientated correctly. The manufacture’s supplied gasket shall be used. The alignment shall be to within the dimension defined by the flange bolt hole radius less the radius of the bolt. 6. 5. 4. 2. The probe shall be dry threaded. Manual control station 1. Class I Div 2 area classification has been approved for the oxygen analyzer. Rotameters 1. the alignment of the piping shall be confirmed. 4. If a valve is installed with its flow arrow in the correct direction and the valve accessories are facing so that access to the accessories is. 3.17. obstructed. the fabricator shall notify UOP in writing in a timely manner. or less than optimal. UOP resident shall witness the confirmation of the alignment of inlet and outlet piping flanges.16.15.18. Valves shall be installed so that the flow arrow on the body is in direction of flow in piping. The intent is to assure that the two piece valve is not subjected to stresses from misaligned inlet and outlet flanges. No valve should ever be installed with the top of the actuator pointed toward the grating. 5. Prior to installing any ball valve. Valves shall be installed so that the flow arrow on the body is in direction of flow in piping.15. 5. Do not use Teflon on the threaded portion of the analyzer probe. Oxygen analyzer 1.

Contractor shall inform UOP in writing of irreparable damage that would prevent reuse of flow transmitter. Remove and discard old flange gaskets and bolts. 3. 5. dry. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission.2. Install plate with side marked inlet facing toward direction of flow.20. Care should be taken that valve flange face is not damaged during removal. Care should be taken when removing process connections and removing from instrument stand. dry. Contractor shall inform UOP in writing of irreparable damage that would prevent reuse of rotameters. Refer to UOP junction box support details for support. 3. indoor environment while awaiting installation 2. H2/HC analyzer 1. 3. 4. 4. indoor environment while awaiting installation 2. Store transmitter and bracket together in a clean.2013-05-03 Instrument Installation Page 7 of 9 970086-S601F-1 4. Manifold brackets should be retained for reinstallation on new stand.1.1. Refer to piping plan for location of restriction orifices. Rotameters 1.19. Care should be taken when removing from instrument stand. indoor environment while awaiting installation. Valves 1.1. 4. Refer to instrument location plan for location. Instrument junction boxes 1. 4. Refer to electrical installation specifications (S713F or S712F) 5. 5. 2. Demolition of existing instrumentation 5. Restriction orifices 1. Fabricator to inform UOP in writing of damage to valve flanges and seat that will affect operation of valve. Care should be taken when removing electrical connection and tubing connections at process isolation valve. Replace with new gaskets and bolts. Refer to conduit routing plan for location of instrument junction boxes. Manifold may remain connected to transmitter.21. Store valve in a clean. Care should be taken when removing electrical connection and tubing connections at instrument air header isolation valve. 2. 4. Flow transmitter 1. dry. Store in a clean. Fabricator to build junction box per UOP junction box assembly drawing.1.1. Contractor to contact UOP if valve being reused does not have legible flow arrow. 5.22. 2. Affected instrumentation being removed and reused 5. .3. Conduit 1.

Tubing 1.2. Thermocouple/thermowell shall be removed as an assembly. 3.2. Pemex to inform contractor of disposal requirements. Replace with new gaskets and bolts. 5. Removed Instrumentation shall be transported to a designated location within the Pemex Minatitlan refinery. Contractor to inform UOP in writing of damage to piping flanges that would affect installation and operation of new instrumentation. Remove existing tubing from valves and flow transmitters back to its isolation valve or as far back as possible without interfering with existing instruments.2. 2. Thermocouples/Thermowells 1.1. Instrumentation shall be transported to a designated location within the Pemex Minatitlan refinery with the exception of the nuclear level sources (see item 4). Care should be taken when disconnecting electrical that the thermocouple wires are not bent or broken. Affected instrumentation being removed 5. Written notification of when nuclear level sources will be removed shall be given to Pemex prior to removal. Thermocouple shall be disconnected from electrical and not removed from thermowell before removing thermowell.2. Demolition of existing conduit for instruments that are not being replaced in their current location shall be taken as far back as possible without interfering with existing instruments. 3. Refer to demolition drawings. Instrument stands removed shall be be transported to a designated location within the Pemex Minatitlan refinery. 5. Pemex will be responsible for disposal of all items stored in this designated location.5. 4.1. 2. Care should be taken to preserve thernowell flanges when removing from piping. dry. Instrument stands on the existing structure shall be painted and bolted to either the grating or support beam. Remove and discard old flange gaskets and bolts. Care should be taken to preserve pipe flange faces. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission. Instrumentation being removed and replaced in existing piping 1. Pemex will be responsible for disposal of all items stored in this designated location 5. . 5.2.4.2. 2. Pemex will be responsible for disposal of all items stored in this designated location.4. 5.2. Instrument stands on instrumentation shall be replaced with new instrument stands. Instrument Stands 1. Instrument Wiring 1.3. Instruments being removed and discarded (location of instrument has changed) 1. indoor environment while awaiting installation. The appropriate Pemex official(s) need to be present when nuclear sources are removed.2013-05-03 Instrument Installation Page 8 of 9 970086-S601F-1 5. Thermocouple/thermowell assembly shall be stored in a clean.

Refer to S601N Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission. . Inspection and testing 1.2013-05-03 Instrument Installation Page 9 of 9 970086-S601F-1 6.

0 in.0 kgf/cm ) 0. 2. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.1000.0 psig (7. Continuity between terminations a.10 % of full span 0. c. and tube-fitting check. 0. Successful test will have soft tag verified and visual confirmation that integral indicator illuminated Circuit continuity for solenoids and limit switches shall be checked during valve stroke test from junction box.1. H2O (635 mm) 0. 2.100. shall be functionally checked.0 kgf/cm2) Filtered to less than 10 microns Dew point temperature less than -20°F (-29°C) 2.2013-05-03 UOP Specification Instrument Checkout Page 1 of 3 970086 S601N-1 1. Scope This document defines technical requirements for instrument wiring-continuity test.00 mV 0. 3. b. Wiring Installed wiring shall be checked for the following: 1. Pressure of at least 70 psig (5. except pressure gauge and thermometer.01 mV V DC V AC 1. Ohmmeter or limit switch tester shall be used depending on type of limit switch output. Differential pressure and temperature transmitter continuity shall be checked with smart communicator from junction box.06% of full scale 0.05 kgf/cm ) 0.05 % of full span 0.0 . functional check. Electronic test equipment shall have resolution values less than or equal to the following: a.0 psig (70.05 % of full span 4. Limit switches shall be adjusted so that ZSC (open limit switch) has closed contacts at 100% valve stroke and ZSO (closed limit switch) has closed contacts at 100% valve stroke. . Test equipment and pneumatic supply 1. b. c.0 .15.0 kgf/cm2) 2 2 0. c.01 mA mV DC 0. b.0 psig (1.30 % of full span 0.00 mV 1. Functional check Instrument.10 Hz Resistance Frequency Pneumatic test equipment shall have uncertainties less than or equal to the following values: a. d.0 .0 . 2. e. Microprocessor-based “smart” instrument shall be tested using a portable communicator. b. f. 2-wire Pressure. d. mA DC 0. Pneumatic supply shall have the following characteristics: a.2.25.

Control valve.) shall be checked by shorting the wires at the instrument end and verifying the result at junction box terminal strip.analyzer alarms. Tube fitting shall be tested using tube-fitting manufacturer’s gap inspection or go/no-go gauge in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Isolation from other conductors. b. Tube-fitting check 1. Instrumentation Check List Documentation: The fabricator will advise UOP of checkout schedule Fabricator shall record instrument checkout results on fabricator supplied checklist The fabricator instrument check will include but not be limited to. 3. Throttling-control-valve action shall be confirmed using the following procedure: a. Fitting not in compliance shall be replaced. 3. Energize solenoid and verify valve position against data sheet. verify valve stem moves over range. b. [Solenoid shall be energized if supplied] 2. 2. Incorrect “smart”-instrument span setting shall be corrected. Verify valve position against P&ID with no input signal present .2013-05-03 UOP Specification Instrument Checkout c. except metal-seated ball valve 1. On/off-control-valve action shall be confirmed using the following procedure: a. Metal-seated ball valve shall not be stroked.4. 2. Updating common master set of instrument fabrication drawings with as built information Verification that instrument bulk material is in compliance to UOP specifications and quantity. . Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. including shielding a.3. following: 1. [Solenoid shall be deenergized if supplied] solenoid Using 50% and 100% input. 2. 4. Software tag shall be verified Circuit continuity for other instruments (4 wire instruments. Metal-seated ball valve 1. pressure switches etc. Tube-fitting insertion depth shall be checked in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Other errors shall be reported within five working days. Each wire shall be checked using ohmmeter to verify isolation from all other conductors within junction box including shield drain wires. 2. d. Errors 1. 2. Page 2 of 3 970086 S601N-1 Positioner continuity shall be checked with smart communicator and with valve stroke test with 4-20 mA signal from junction box.5. 2. Verify valve position against P&ID with solenoid deenergized. 2.

Photos to be taken of Oxygen analyzer installation. junction boxes and cable trays complies with installation drawingss.2013-05-03 UOP Specification Instrument Checkout 3. Verification electric power installed from instrument power pan to four wire instruments 5. 4. Direction of flow arrow on control valve bodies same as process flow Visibility of air supply and output gauges Instrument air supply shutoff valve shall be piped within 3 feet of valve air filter regulator and be clear of accessways Bug screens for all solenoids vents provided. c. threads were not prepared with lubricant or tape.g. 7. c. High & low taps connections are correct 10. Verification that local indicators are visible from associated manual valves wherever indicated on the P&ID’s. Page 3 of 3 970086 S601N-1 Verfication that position of instrument installation is clear of accessways and does not infringe on operator access. c. Following to be verified on control valves a. 5. 9. 6. e. b. H2/HC analyzer: a. Verification grounding of instrument. globe.i.e. Photos to verify sample tube and sample exhaust tube are installed and properly oriented. d. b. . b. Measure length of all thermowell nozzles and highlight where thermowell does not extend into piping or vessel 12. O2 Analyzer: a. Verfication that filter is installed on upstream side of Coriolis mass flow meter. ball) as the P&ID. Following to be verified for impulse tubing of transmitters a. d. Verify color code and proper tagging for cables and conductors 11. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Verification that instrument air purge connection for Oxygen sensor installed Verification that nitrogen connection for aspiration of sample installed Verification that Oxygen sensor sample probe and exhaust probee was dry threaded to sample flange. 13. gate. Slope requirement for all the transmitter impulse lines is per the installation drawings Primary isolatation valve installed is same size and valve type (e. Verification that manufacturer supplied sensor gasket was installed. Documentation Fabricator Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) shall be completed and provided. Verification that sampling line from dust removal header and from nitrogen header are within maximum distances specified on the P&IDs 8.

round.2013-05-03 UOP Specification Instrument Tubing Installation Page 1 of 1 970086 S601T-1 1. 2. and free of scratches. 3. Bend shall be made using a tubing bender. Support spacing shall be less than or equal to 1 m. Tubing shall be supported from structural steel or grating. . 5. Tubing support 1. Fitting-manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be available on demand at fabrication facility. Fitting-manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be furnished two weeks prior to beginning work. Union elbow fitting is prohibited. Tubing end 1. 3. Tubing bend 1. Scope This document defines technical requirements for installation of instrument tubing. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 3. Tubing shall be supported as follows: a. Tubing shall be cut square and deburred. 2. 2. Tubing fitting-manufacturer’s instructions 1. c. 6. Tubing span over 6 ft (2 m) shall be continuously supported in tubing tray. Length inserted into compression fitting shall be clean. Distance from bend or fitting to bend or fitting shall be at least 4 inches (100 mm). Sufficient supports shall be installed to maintain instrument piping in a neat manner. Bend radius shall be at least three times tube outside diameter. b. 4. 3. 2. 2. Tubing run less than 1 m long shall have no union. Support shall not be connected to process piping. Tubing union 1. Fitting installation shall comply with the tubing-fitting-manufacturer’s installation instructions. 2.

05) (NOTE 2) - DETAIL Z 17 / 32 ’’ (13.73 0. 3) 1/2 ’’ NPT (NOTE 1) LENGTH STEM SHALL BE BUFFED AND POLISHED 1/4 ’’ (6) 11 BORE SHALL BE CONCENTRIC WITH OUTSIDE DIAMETER WITHIN 10% OF WALL THICKNESS / ’’ 32 + + 0. 2. FLANGE FURNISHED AND FABRICATED BY THERMOWELL SUPPLIER.5) (NOTE 2.002 (8. 3) BORE SHALL BE CONCENTRIC WITH OUTSIDE POLISHED DIAMETER WITHIN 10% OF WALL THICKNESS 1/4 ’’ (6) / ’’ 32 17 11 + + 0. Illinois 60017-5017. FOR SIZE AND CLASS SEE UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION. CONFIRM INSIDE AND OUTSIDE DIAMETER BASED ON TEMPERATURE ELEMENT REQUIRMENTS.05) (NOTE 2) - / 32 ’’ (13. THERMOWELLS 30APR11 REAFFIRMED RED RGP 1/2 ’’ NPT (NATIONAL STANDARD PIPE TAPER THREAD) SEAL WELD 1. 4.5) (NOTE 2.5) DETAIL E SCREWED THERMOCOUPLE / RESISTANCE ELEMENT THERMOWELL DETAIL F SCREWED TEST THERMOWELL SAME AS DETAIL E EXCEPT WITH PLUG AND CHAIN PER DETAIL Z NOTES: 1. 5/8 ’’ 1 1/2 ’’ 1/2 ’’ (16) 1’’ NPT 3/16 ’’ (5) RADIUS CURVE AND TAPER (NOTE 1) ALL THREADS IN FLANGE SHALL BE COVERED BY THREADS ON THE THERMOWELL (CHASE THREADS TO SUIT) 11 TANGENTIALLY LENGTH STEM SHALL BE BUFFED AND / 16 ’’ (17. OUTSIDE DIAMETER: 7/8 ’’ (22) MAXIMUM DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS.5) (13) (38) DETAIL B DETAIL A FLANGED THERMOCOUPLE / RESISTANCE ELEMENT THERMOWELL FLANGED TEST THERMOWELL SAME AS DETAIL A EXCEPT WITH PLUG AND CHAIN PER DETAIL Z 1 1/2 ’’ STANDARD PIPE (38) TAPER THREAD) 7/8 ’’ (22) 5/8 ’’ (16) 1/2 ’’ NPT (NATIONAL 1/4 ’’ (6) CHAIN ATTACHED WITH DRIVE SCREWS 1/2 ’’ (13) 7/8 ’’ 1’’ NPT (22) KNURLED HEAD CURVE AND TAPER TANGENTIALLY 11 3/16 ’’ (5) RADIUS / 16 ’’ (17. 3. . USA STANDARD DRAWING 6-105-7 DATE STATUS APVD AUTHD Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.002 (8.315 (33) ASME B16. SEE UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION FOR LENGTH DATA.5 FLANGE.Revision Indication R UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines.73 0.

3. FOR SIZE AND CLASS SEE UOP 3 / 16 ’’ (5) RADIUS PROJECT SPECIFICATION. 4. SEE UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION FOR LENGTH DATA. THERMOMETER ASSEMBLIES 30APR11 REAFFIRMED RED RGP 1/2 ’’ NPT (NATIONAL STANDARD PIPE TAPER THREAD) ALL THREADS IN FLANGE SHALL BE COVERED BY SEAL 2’’ +3/8 ’’ (50 + 10) 2’’ + -3/8 ’’ (50 + 10) - THREADS ON THE THERMOWELL (CHASE THREADS TO SUIT) 1/2 ’’ NPT (NATIONAL STANDARD PIPE TAPER THREAD) (25) 1’’ THERMOMETER STEM LENGTH (NOTE 1) WELD THERMOMETER STEM LENGTH (NOTE 1) 1’’ NPT 3 / 16 ’’ (5) RADIUS 1’’ NPT ASME B16. THERMOWELL AND THERMOMETER SHALL BE INSTALLED SUCH THAT THERMOMETER DIAL IS NOT IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE. WITHOUT THERMOMETER. USA STANDARD DRAWING 6-106-6 DATE STATUS APVD AUTHD Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Illinois 60017-5017. 5. STEM SHALL BE 3 1/4 ’’ / 32 ’’ (2. WHEN TEST THERMOWELL IS SPECIFIED. FURNISH THERMOWELL ONLY. 2.Revision Indication R UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines.4) 3 1/4 ’’ BUFFED AND POLISHED / 32 ’’ (2. DIAL THERMOMETER COMPLETE WITH THERMOWELL SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THERMOMETER SUPPLIER. WHERE NECESSARY A SWIVEL NECK THERMOMETER MAY BE USED. FLANGE FURNISHED AND FABRICATED BY 7/8 ’’ (22) MAXIMUM 7/8 ’’ (22) MAXIMUM THERMOWELL SUPPLIER. DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS.5 FLANGE. .4) MINIMUM STEM SHALL BE BUFFED AND POLISHED (6) MINIMUM DETAIL A THERMOMETER WITH SCREWED THERMOWELL (6) DETAIL B THERMOMETER WITH FLANGED THERMOWELL DETAIL C SCREWED TEST THERMOWELL SAME AS DETAIL A EXCEPT WITH PLUG AND CHAIN PER DETAIL Z DETAIL D FLANGED TEST THERMOWELL SAME AS DETAIL B EXCEPT WITH PLUG AND CHAIN PER DETAIL Z CHAIN ATTACHED WITH DRIVE SCREWS KNURLED HEAD 1/2 ’’ NPT DETAIL Z NOTES: 1.

DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS. CONDUIT OUTLET BODY SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR THE ELECTRICAL CLASSIFICATION OF THE INSTALLATION. Illinois 60017-5017. . DETAIL E FOR USE WITH MINERAL OXIDE INSULATED STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMOCOUPLE ELEMENT DETAIL F FOR USE WITH RESISTANCE ELEMENT THERMOWELLS 4. INSTALL AS DRIP LOOP. FASTEN THE CAP TO THE BASE BY A SMALL CHAIN ON A SWIVEL. 3. TEMPERATURE SENSOR TERMINAL HEAD ASSEMBLIES 6’’ (150) HEAD AND TERMINAL CONNECTOR 1/2 ’’ CONDUIT NIPPLES MINIMUM LENGTH 1 1/2 ’’ (38) 1/4 ’’ SET SCREW HEAD AND TERMINAL CONNECTOR 1/2 ’’ (13) CONNECT TO THERMOWELL 1’’ SCHEDULE 80 PIPE 30APR11 REAFFIRMED RED rgp 1/2 ’’ CONDUIT NIPPLE 1/2 ’’ NPT (NATIONAL HEAD AND TERMINAL STANDARD PIPE TAPER THREAD) 3/4 ’’ X 1/2 ’’ BUSHING NOTE 3 CONNECTOR NOTE 3 1’’ NPT (NATIONAL NOTE 1 CONNECTOR STANDARD PIPE TAPER THREAD) NOTE 1 3/4 ’’ X 1/2 ’’ BUSHING 1/2 ’’ NPT (NATIONAL TO FIT) 1/2 ’’ UNION (COMPLETE) 1/2 ’’ SCHEDULE 40 PIPE SCREWED INTO HEADER THERMOWELL (FURNISHED IN FIELD LENGTH 3’’ (75) TO 6’’ (150) CONNECTOR 1/2 ’’ UNION (COMPLETE) MINIMUM LENGTH 1 1/2 ’’ (38) DETAIL A FOR USE WITH THERMOCOUPLE THERMOWELLS DETAIL C FOR USE WITH THERMOCOUPLE WELL INSIDE HEATER TUBE HEADER COMPARTMENT NOTE 3 1/2 ’’ SCHEDULE 40 PIPE STANDARD PIPE SCREWED INTO HEADER TAPER THREAD) THERMOWELL 3/4 ’’ X 1/2 ’’ BUSHING CONNECTOR (FURNISHED IN FIELD) NOTE 1 HEAD AND TERMINAL CONNECTOR 1/2 ’’ STAINLESS STEEL COMPRESSION FITTING 1/2 ’’ CONDUIT NIPPLES MINIMUM LENGTH 1 1/2 ’’ (38) FOR USE WITH THERMOCOUPLE WELL OUTSIDE HEATER TUBE HEADER COMPARTMENT CONDUIT OUTLET BODY (NOTE 2) DETAIL D MINERAL OXIDE INSULATED STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH 1/2 ’’ UNION THERMOCOUPLE ELEMENT (COMPLETE) 3/4 ’’ X 1/2 ’’ BUSHING NOTE 3 CONNECTOR CONNECTOR NOTE 1 1/2 ’’ NPT (NATIONAL STANDARD PIPE TAPER THREAD) 3’’ COVER NOTES: NOTE 1 1. USA STANDARD DRAWING 6-107-7 DATE STATUS APVD AUTHD Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. AND A HEAT AND MOISTURE RESISTANT GASKET. 2. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONNECTION ASSEMBLY (BY OTHERS). CAPS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SCREW DRIVER SLOT. 5.Revision Indication R UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines.

ELBOW INSTALLATION IS PREFERRED FOR LINES 6’’ AND SMALLER. SHEATHED TYPE INSIDE DIAMETER OF FLANGED CONNECTION SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 1’’ (25). SKIN THERMOCOUPLE FOR EXTERNAL INSTALLATION DETAIL B . THE ELBOW INSTALLATION SHOULD BE CONSIDERED. 7. INCREASE CLEARANCE FOR VESSEL THERMOWELLS. 2. THERMOWELL AND SKIN THERMOCOUPLE INSTALLATION ASSEMBLIES (NOTE 1) "C" 30APR11 REAFFIRMED RED RGP INCREASE TO 3’’ AS INDICATED 6’’ (150) "C" FOR SMALLER LINES 1’’ CLASS 3000 THREADED ELBOLET FL O W 1’’ LONG WELDING NECK NOZZLE FL O W MINIMUM SIZE 3’’. DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS.5 STANDARD. 5. 6. STUDS MUST BE PROTECTED DURING SHIPMENT OF EQUIPMENT TO PREVENT BREAKAGE THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY THE SHEATH MUST EXTEND OUTSIDE ANY INSULATION IN ORDER TO AVOID EXPOSING THE THERMOCOUPLE LEAD WIRE INSULATION TO EQUIPMENT TEMPERATURES. FOR SMALLER LINES INCREASE TO 3’’ AS INDICATED MINIMUM (NOTE 1) MINIMUM SIZE 3’’. USE THE ECCENTRIC DIAMETER OF WELD TYPE TO AVOID POCKETS. 3/4 ’’ (19) INSIDE DIAMETER THERMOCOUPLE WASHER 1/2 ’’ (13) DIAMETER X 1 1/2 ’’ (40) LONG THREADED STUD WITH WASHER AND 2 HEX NUTS. WHEN INSTALLING REDUCERS IN A TO CLEAR OUTSIDE HORIZONTAL LINE. USA STANDARD DRAWING 6-108-6 DATE STATUS APVD AUTHD Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 1’-0’’ (300) FOR SMALLER LINES INCREASE TO 6’’ AS INDICATED SCREWED FLANGED 1’-0’’ (300) VESSEL AND LINE INSTALLATION DETAIL A NOTES: 1.Revision Indication R UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. FLANGES SHALL BE ASME B16. FOR THERMOWELL INSTALLATIONS WHERE THE FLUID VELOCITY IS A CONCERN. 3. 4. THE STUD AND HEX NUTS SHALL BE THE SAME METALLURGY AS THE EQUIPMENT TO WHICH THEY ARE ATTACHED. "C" DIMENSION SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3’-0’’ (915) CLEAR SPACE FOR REMOVAL OF TEMPERATURE SENSOR. REDUCER REDUCER SCREWED ELBOW INSTALLATION "C" 6’’ (150) FLANGED (NOTE 1) MINIMUM (NOTE 1) "C" 1’’ CLASS 3000 FULL COUPLING OR THREDOLET 1’’ LONG WELDING NECK NOZZLE MINIMUM SIZE 6’’. NOTE: STUDS (NELSON TYPE PREFERRED) SHALL BE WELDED TO THE EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO FINAL POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT IN THE FABRICATOR’S SHOP. Illinois 60017-5017.

5. THE ECCENTRIC ORIFICE PLATE SHALL BE MANUFACTURED SUCH THAT NO PORTION OF THE HOLE SHALL BE CLOSER THAN 1% OF THE PIPE DIAMETER TO THE PIPE WALL. MATERIAL OF RING GASKET AND MATERIAL OF ORIFICE PLATE . IS CONSIDERED SUPPLEMENTARY TO THIS DRAWING. WEEP HOLES ARE ACCEPTABLE BUT ARE NOT REQUIRED. "A" PIPE SIZE "T" FLANGE CLASS (NOTE 3) 150 1’’ 1 1/4 ’’ 1 1/2 ’’ 2’’ 2 1/2 ’’ 3’’ 4’’ 5’’ 6’’ 8’’ 10’’ 12’’ 14’’ 16’’ 18’’ 20’’ 24’’ 1/8 ’’ 1/8 ’’ 1/8 ’’ 1/8 ’’ 1/8 ’’ 1/8 ’’ 1/8 ’’ 1/8 ’’ 1/8 ’’ (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 2 5/8 ’’ 3’’ 3 3/8 ’’ 4 1/8 ’’ 4 7/8 ’’ 5 3/8 ’’ 6 7/8 ’’ 7 3/4 ’’ 8 3/4 ’’ 1 1’’ 13 3/8 ’’ 16 1/8 ’’ 17 3/4 ’’ 20 1/4 ’’ 21 5/8 ’’ 23 7/8 ’’ 28 1/4 ’’ (67) (76) (86) (105) (124) (137) (175) (197) (222) (279) (340) (410) (451) (514) (549) (606) (718) 7 1/8 ’’ 8 1/2 ’’ 9 7/8 ’’ 12 1/8 ’’ 14 1/4 ’’ 16 5/8 ’’ 19 1/8 ’’ 21 1/4 ’’ 23 1/2 ’’ 25 3/4 ’’ 30 1/2 ’’ 300 2 7/8 ’’ 3 1/4 ’’ 3 3/4 ’’ 4 3/8 ’’ 5 1/8 ’’ 5 7/8 ’’ (181) (216) (251) (308) (362) (422) (486) (540) (597) (654) (775) (73) (83) (95) (1 1 1) (130) (149) 7 5/8 ’’ 9 1/2 ’’ 10 1/2 ’’ 12 5/8 ’’ 15 3/4 ’’ 18’’ 19 3/8 ’’ 22 1/4 ’’ 24 1/8 ’’ 26 7/8 ’’ 31 1/8 ’’ (194) (241) (267) (321) (400) (457) (492) (565) (613) (683) (791) 19 5/8 ’’ 20 1/2 ’’ 22 5/8 ’’ 25 1/8 ’’ 27 1/2 ’’ 33’’ 6 5/8 ’’ 8 1/8 ’’ 9 3/4 ’’ 1 1 3/8 ’’ 14 1/8 ’’ 600 900 3 1/8 ’’ 3 1/2 ’’ 3 7/8 ’’ 5 5/8 ’’ 6 1/2 ’’ (168) (206) (248) (289) (359) 17 1/8 ’’ (498) (521) (575) (638) (699) (838) (79) (89) (98) (143) (165) 6 7/8 ’’ 8 1/4 ’’ 10’’ 1 1 1/8 ’’ 1 3 7/8 ’’ (435) 20 1/2 ’’ 22 3/4 ’’ 25 1/4 ’’ 27 3/4 ’’ 29 3/4 ’’ 35 1/2 ’’ (521) (578) (641) (705) (756) (902) (175) (210) (254) (283) (352) 1500 2500 3 3/8 ’’ 4 1/8 ’’ 4 5/8 ’’ 5 3/4 ’’ 6 5/8 ’’ 7 3/4 ’’ 9 1/4 ’’ 1 1’’ 12 1/2 ’’ 15 1/4 ’’ 18 3/4 ’’ 21 5/8 ’’ (86) (105) (1 17) (146) (168) (197) (235) (279) (318) (387) (476) (549) 3 1/4 ’’ 4’’ (83) (102) 4 7/8 ’’ 5 7/8 ’’ 7 1/8 ’’ (124) (149) (181) 8 5/16 ’’ 10 5/8 ’’ 12 3/4 ’’ 15’’ 16 1/2 ’’ 18 1/2 ’’ 21’’ 23’’ 27 1/4 ’’ (21 1) 300 & 600 900 2’’ 2 3/8 ’’ 2 11/16 ’’ (51) (60) (68) 3 3/4 ’’ 4 1/4 ’’ "P" FLANGE CLASS 1500 2500 2 3/8 ’’ 2 3/8 ’’ 3 1/4 ’’ (95) (108) 5 3/8 ’’ 6 3/8 ’’ 7 5/8 ’’ (137) (162) (194) 4’’ 4 3/8 ’’ 5’’ 6 3/16 ’’ 7 1/2 ’’ 9’’ 1 1’’ 13 1/2 ’’ 16’’ (60) (60) (83) (102) (1 1 1) (127) (157) (191) (229) (279) (343) (406) 1 1/16 ’’ 1 3/16 ’’ 1 3/16 ’’ 1 1/4 ’’ 1 7/16 ’’ 1 1/16 ’’ 1 1/16 ’’ 1 1/16 ’’ 1 1/16 ’’ (27) (30) (30) (32) (37) 1 1/16 ’’ 1 1/16 ’’ 1 1/16 ’’ 1 1/16 ’’ (27) (27) (27) (27) 1 5/16 ’’ 1 7/16 ’’ 1 9/16 ’’ 1 9/16 ’’ 1 7/8 ’’ (33) (37) (40) (40) (48) 1’’ 300 & 600 "W" FLANGE CLASS 900 1’’ 1’’ (25) 1 1/16 ’’ (27) (27) (27) (27) 1 1/8 ’’ 1 5/16 ’’ 1 5/16 ’’ 1 9/16 ’’ 1 3/4 ’’ 2’’ 2’’ 2 1/8 ’’ 2 5/16 ’’ (29) (33) (33) (40) (44) (51) (51) (54) (59) (27) 1 3/16 ’’ 1 3/16 ’’ 1 5/16 ’’ 1 7/16 ’’ 1 7/16 ’’ 1 9/16 ’’ 1 7/8 ’’ 2’’ (30) (30) (33) (37) (37) (40) (48) (51) 7/16 ’’ 7/16 ’’ 7/16 ’’ 1/2 ’’ 5/8 ’’ 7/16 ’’ 7/16 ’’ 7/16 ’’ 7/16 ’’ (1 1) (1 1) (1 1) (13) (16) 7/16 ’’ 7/16 ’’ 7/16 ’’ 7/16 ’’ (1 1) (1 1) (1 1) (1 1) 5/8 ’’ 5/8 ’’ 3/4 ’’ 3/4 ’’ 1’’ (16) (16) (19) (19) (25) 1500 (25) (25) 1 1/16 ’’ (27) 5/16 ’’ 2500 300 & 600 "G" PIPE FLANGE CLASS SIZE 900 5/16 ’’ 5/16 ’’ (8) 7/16 ’’ (1 1) (1 1) (1 1) (1 1) 1/2 ’’ 5/8 ’’ 5/8 ’’ 7/8 ’’ 1’’ 1 1/8 ’’ 1 1/8 ’’ 1 1/4 ’’ 1 3/8 ’’ (13) (16) (16) (22) (25) (29) (29) (32) (35) (1 1) 1/2 ’’ 1/2 ’’ 5/8 ’’ 3/4 ’’ 3/4 ’’ 7/8 ’’ 1 1/8 ’’ 1 1/4 ’’ (13) (13) (16) (19) (19) (22) (29) (32) (8) (8) 7/16 ’’ (1 1) 1500 2500 1’’ 1 1/4 ’’ 1 1/2 ’’ 2’’ 2 1/2 ’’ 3’’ 4’’ 5’’ 6’’ 8’’ 10’’ 12’’ 14’’ 16’’ 18’’ 20’’ 24’’ 1/4 ’’ (6) 1/4 ’’ (6) 1/4 ’’ (6) 1/4 ’’ (6) 1/4 ’’ (6) 3/8 ’’ 3/8 ’’ 3/8 ’’ (9. INCREASE PLATE THICKNESS "T" BY 1/8 ’’ (3). . 4. THE ORIFICE PLATE SHALL BE BEVELED ON THE DOWNSTREAM SIDE IN ORDER TO MEET THE MAXIMUM THICKNESS " t " REQUIREMENTS. INLET SHALL BE INDICATED ON TAB FOR RAISED FACE FLANGES ORIFICE PLATES. THIS DRAWING SHALL GOVERN. THE MINIMUM "Y" DIMENSION SHALL BE 4’’ (100) OR SHALL EXTEND BEYOND THE OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF THE FLANGE A MINIMUM OF 2’’ (50). WHICHEVER IS GREATER. INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO) 5167-1. OCTAGONAL RING-SUITABLE FOR FLAT BOTTOM GROOVE.Revision Indication R UOP LLC NOTE: Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.2) LESS THAN 3 d r r FLOW NOTE: DO NOT BEVEL BEVEL ECCENTRIC PER DETAIL D PLATE ORIFICE PLATES. SEE UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION. FOR SURFACE FINISH REQUIREMENTS OF GASKET ZONE. FOR SERVICES ABOVE THIS TEMPERATURE. r r ROUNDED EDGE IS 1/4 CIRCLE FLOW 3/8 ’’ (10) ROD "A" CALCULATION TO DETERMINE d BEVEL PER DETAIL D "G" (c) ORIFICE "A" (d) C FLOW DIAMETER d "P" 3 / ’’ (1. b. 4) 3 / ’’ 32 (2. 3. 3 EDITION.5) (270) (324) (381) (419) (470) (533) (584) (692) NOTES: 1. IF WEEP HOLES ARE USED. VALUES OF " r " MAY BE OBTAINED FROM FLOW MEASUREMENT ENGINEERING C WEEP HOLE (NOTES 2. ECCENTRIC ORIFICE PLATES SHALL NOT BE BEVELED. BUT NEVER SMALLER THAN VALUES / ’’ 32 (2. 2.63 USE (d). THEY SHALL BE INSTALLED AT THE TOP IN LIQUID LINES. USA STANDARD DRAWING 6-111-6 DATE STATUS APVD AUTHD ORIFICE PLATES 08SEP08 REAFFIRMED RED RGP DETAIL C DATA TAB 2’’ (50) 1’’ (25) MINIMUM MINIMUM 1/8 ’’ (3) DATA TAB DETAIL C (NOTE 8) (NOTE 8) QUADRANT EDGE 1/8 ’’ (3) (QUARTER CIRCLE) ORIFICE PLATE THE ANGLE OF THE BEVEL SHALL BE APPROXIMATELY (a) (b) 1 1/4 ’’ (32) MINIMUM DATA TAB DETAIL C "Y" CALCULATION TO DETERMINE 3/8 ’’ (10) TAP NOTE 9 "Y" 45 DEGREES. OMIT WEEP HOLES IF THE ORIFICE BORE DIAMETER IS LESS THAN 1’’ (25). 8. 10. BY RICHARD MILLER.2) LESS 64 THAN INSIDE RADIUS OF PIPE C / 64 ’’ (1. 7. ORIFICE PLATE THICKNESS "T" AS SHOWN IS FOR SERVICE UNDER 650 F (343 C). FOR d/D RATIOS GREATER THAN 0. Illinois 60017-5017. AND AT THE BOTTOM IN GAS OR VAPOR LINES. THEN CONSTRUCTIONS SHOWN IN (b) OR (c) MAY BE USED. 6.5) (9. FOR RING TYPE JOINT FLANGES: a. PITCH DIAMETER "P" AND CONTOUR OF RING CONFORM TO ASME STANDARD B16. 5. DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS. TAG NUMBER LINE SIZE FLANGE CLASS BORE MATERIAL 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines.4) DIAMETER 3 "W" INSIDE DIAMETER TO SUIT PIPE SIZE NOTE: FLOW ARROW STAMPED ON RING "t" NOTE 5 OF "T" LISTED IN THE TABLE. t" OF THE ORIFICE PLATE AT THE ORIFICE EDGE SHALL BE BETWEEN 0.02D. WHERE REQUIRED. IF A CONFLICT OCCURS.005D AND 0.SEE UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION. 4) DETAIL A FOR ASME RAISED FACE FLANGES DETAIL B FOR ASME RING JOINT FLANGES DETAIL D RD HANDBOOK. C "T" INSIDE RADIUS OF PIPE NOTE: PLATE THICKNESS "T" SHOULD EQUAL THE RADIUS " r " AS SHOWN IN (a). THE THICKNESS " (D=PIPE INSIDE DIAMETER).5) (9. IF PLATE THICKNESS EQUAL TO " r " IS IMPRACTICAL. 9.4) DIAMETER WEEP HOLE (NOTES 2.

USA PIPING ARRANGEMENTS FOR ORIFICE PLATE INSTALLATIONS (WITH TAPPED ORIFICE FLANGES) R M K H GLOBE.70. TABULATED DIMENSIONS ARE GENERALLY BASED ON INFORMATION IN THE INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO) 5167-1 AND ALSO AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME). EXPANDER CROSS. THE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE TO THE UPSTREAM FACE OF THE ORIFICE PLATE AND ARE THE MINIMUM REQUIRED. STANDARD DRAWING 6-112-4 DATE STATUS APVD AUTHD Des Plaines. WHEN POSSIBLE THE DIMENSIONS SHOULD BE INCREASED. DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS. CONTROL. OR CHECK VALVE 11JAN12 REAFFIRMED RED RGP ORIFICE PLATE G * TWO PLANE FLOW 10D OR LESS THAN 10D FLOW F VALVE A Z ECCENTRIC REDUCER OR EXPANDER GREATER CONCENTRIC REDUCER OR EXPANDER CONCENTRIC TEE. OR LATERAL WIDE OPEN GATE OR BALL VALVE CONCENTRIC REDUCER ECCENTRIC REDUCER OR *WHEN DISTANCE BETWEEN ELBOWS IS 10D OR LESS. 4. WHEN SEVERAL FITTINGS (OTHER THAN 90 BENDS) ARE UPSTREAM OF THE ORIFICE PLATE.6th EDITION. Illinois 60017-5017. NOMINAL PIPE DIAMETER A D 7D 1 ’’ 2’’ 3’’ 4’’ 6’’ 8’’ 10’’ 12’’ 14’’ 16’’ 18’’ 20’’ 24’’ 10’’ (270) 10D 1’-3’’ (385) 1’-8’’ (510) 2’-6’’ (765) 3’-4’’ (1020) 5’-0’’ (1525) 6’-8’’ (2035) 8’-4’’ (2540) 14D 1’-9’’ (535) 2’-4’’ (715) 3’-6’’ (1070) 4’-8’’ (1425) 7’-0’’ (2135) 9’-4’’ (2845) 1 1’-8’’ (3560) 15D 1’-10’’ (575) 2’-6’’ (765) 3’-9’’ (1 145) 5’-0’’ (1525) 18D 31 D 38D F G H K M R LENGTH OF STRAIGHT RUN Z 5D 7’’ (195) 10’’ (255) 1’-3’’ (385) 1’-8’’ (510) 2’-6’’ (765) 3’-4’’ (1020) 4’-2’’ (1270) 5’-0’’ (1525) 5’-10’’ (1780) 6’-8’’ (2035) 7’-6’’ (2290) 8’-4’’ (2540) 2’-3’’ (690) 3’-10’’ (1 185) 3’-0’’ (915) 4’-6’’ (1375) 6’-0’’ (1830) 5’-2’’ (1575) 7’-9’’ (2365) 10’-4’’ (3150) 15’-6’’ (4725) 4’-9’’ (1450) 6’-4’’ (1935) 9’-6’’ (2900) 12’-8’’ (3865) 19’-0’’ (5795) 1’-2’’ (360) 1’-9’’ (535) 2’-4’’ (715) 3’-6’’ (1070) 4’-8’’ (1425) 5’-10’’ (1780) 7’-0’’ (2135) 8’-2’’ (2490) 9’-4’’ (2845) 10’-6’’ (3200) 1 1’-8’’ (3560) 7’-6’’ (2290) 9’-0’’ (2745) 10’-0’’ (3050) 12’-0’’ (3660) 20’-8’’ (6300) 25’-4’’ (7725) 12’-6’’ (3810) 15’-0’’ (4575) 25’-10’’ (7875) 31’-8’’ (9655) 10’-0’’ (3050) 14’-0’’ (4270) 1 1’-8’’ (3560) 13’-4’’ (4065) 15’-0’’ (4575) 16’-4’’ (4980) 15’-0’’ (4575) 18’-0’’ (5490) 17’-6’’ (5335) 21’-0’’ (6405) 31’-0’’ (9450) 38’-0’’ (1 1585) 36’-2’’ (1 1025) 44’-4’’ (13515) 41’-4’’ (12600) 50’-8’’ (15445) 46’-6’’ (14175) 57’-0’’ (17375) 51’-8’’ (15750) 63’-4’’ (19305) 18’-8’’ (5690) 20’-0’’ (6100) 24’-0’’ (7320) 21’-0’’ (6405) 22’-6’’ (6860)27’-0’’ (8230) 25’-0’’ (7620)30’-0’’ (9145) 16’-8’’ (5080) 23’-4’’ (71 15) 14’-0’’ (4270) 20’-0’’ (6100) 28’-0’’ (8535) 30’-0’’ (9145) 36’-0’’ (10975) 62’-0’’ (18900) 76’-0’’ (23165) 10’-0’’ (3050) NOTES: 1. AT A MAXIMUM ORIFICE DIAMETER RATIO (d/D) OF 0. THE FIRST FITTING CLOSEST TO THE ORIFICE PLATE SHALL BE PER THE TABLE. 3. DIMENSION LINES SHALL BE TO TANGENT LINE OF BEND. 2.Revision Indication R UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road No t e : T h ei n f o r ma t i o n i n t h i sd o c u me n ti sc o n f i d e n t i a l a n d t h ep r o p e r t yo f UOP L L C a n d mu s tn o tb ed i s c l o s e d t oo t h e r so rr e p r o d u c e d i n a n y ma n n e ro ru s e d f o ra n yp u r p o s e wh a t s o e v e rwi t h o u ti t s wr i t t e n p e r mi s s i o n . FLUID METERS . 5. D EXPANDER . THE MINIMUM STRAIGHT LENGTH FROM THE SECOND FITTING (TO THE FIRST FITTING) SHALL BE OF THE DIMENSION LISTED IN THE TABLE FOR THE SECOND FITTING. WHEN BENDS ARE USED INSTEAD OF FITTINGS TO CHANGE DIRECTION.

SOURCE WEIGHT = 59 KG B. Illinois 60017-5017 USA DETECTOR BRACKETS SOURCE BRACKETS 970086 PEMEX MINATITLAN CCR LOCK HOPPER NUMBER 1 POINT LEVEL TRANSMITTER BRACKETS LE/LSHH-1307 DATE REV 03/06/13 0 . PROVIDE BRACKETS WITH SUFFICIENT THICKNESS TO SUPPORT THE FOLLOWING WEIGHTS: A.40 20 20 10 23 Φ9 x2 holes 245 51 200 125 443 410 211 SOURCE BRACKETS 50 140 DETECTOR BRACKETS 15 0 DETECTOR ELEVATION VIEW SOURCE ELEVATION VIEW 150 70 50 105 NOTES: 1. DETECTOR WEIGHT = 7.1 KG 2. INSULATION THICKNESS ASSUMED TO BE 0 MM UOP LLC uop 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines.

1 KG 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. INSULATION THICKNESS ASSUMED TO BE 0 MM 970086 PEMEX MINATITLAN CCR LOCK HOPPER NUMBER 2 POINT LEVEL TRANSMITTER BRACKETS LE/LSHH-1347 DATE REV 03/06/13 0 . DETECTOR WEIGHT = 7. PROVIDE BRACKETS WITH SUFFICIENT THICKNESS TO SUPPORT THE FOLLOWING WEIGHTS: UOP LLC uop A. SOURCE WEIGHT = 59 KG B.40 20 20 10 23 Φ9 x2 holes 245 51 200 125 473 440 211 SOURCE BRACKETS 50 140 DETECTOR BRACKETS 15 0 DETECTOR ELEVATION VIEW SOURCE ELEVATION VIEW 150 70 50 105 NOTES: 1. Illinois 60017-5017 USA DETECTOR BRACKETS SOURCE BRACKETS 2.

Scope This document defines technical requirement for electrical installation. Power system Conduit Feed: 970086-D751 / D752 / D753 Electrical Heater Connections: 970086-D755 Grounding System: 970086-D759 / D760 Control Stations: 970086-D751 / D752 / D753 Lighting System Mounting: 970086-D748 / D749 2. Grounding and Lighting Plans: 970086-D707 thru D721 2. 2.2013-05-03 UOP Technical Requisition Electrical Installation Page 1 of 2 970086 R701F-1 1. 7. 5. Electrical Homerun Conduit Routing Plan: 970086-D727 Electrical Underground Conduit Routing Plan: 970086-D728 Electrical Homerun Cable Schedule: 970086-D735 Substation 3 Electrical Plan: 970086-D706 Electrical Panelboard schedules: 970086-D739 / D740 / D741 / D742 Motor Control Schematics: 970086-D762 / D763 / D764 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 3. 4.2. Welding Receptacle Mounting on Grade and on Deck: 970086-D746 / D747 2. Official Mexican Standard.3 Modification 970086 S712F-0. Standards. NOM-001-SEDE-2005. Specification—Electrical System Installation 970086 S701SS-0. specifications. 6. Electrical Installations (Use) 970086 S701F-0. Specification—Conduit and Conduit Installation 970086 T701F-0. and data sheets 1. Electrical installation Electrical installation and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with the following documents: 2. 5. 5. Specification—Substation No. 3. 6. Electrical Installation Details The following Electrical Installation Details are provided: 1. 6. 4. Power. Electrical Detail Design Drawings The following Electrical Detail Design Drawings are provided: 1. Convenience Receptacles/Socket Outlet Mounting on Grade and on Deck: 970086-D744 / D745 3. 4. Inspection Data Sheet—Electrical Systems 2.3.1. . 2. 7. Technical Data Sheet—Electrical Installation 970086 U701F-0.

Demolition – Electrical Homerun Cable Schedule: 970086-D7735D Demolition – Motor Control Schematics: 970086-D762D Demolition – Motor Drawings: D770D thru D776D Demolition – Air Compressor and Regeneration Heater Drawings: 970086-D777D / D778D 3. Units. 4. 2. Testing. 5. 5. . Specification—Examination. Specification—Preparation of Opening for Overland Shipment 970086 S065. except as otherwise noted. 970086 S059F. Specification—Documentation for Custom-Designed Goods and Services 970086 S140S. Specification—Language. 7. the following shall apply: 1.2013-05-03 UOP Technical Requisition Electrical Installation Page 2 of 2 970086 R701F-1 2. Specification—Module Preparation for Shipment 970086 S140A. Specification—Supplier Document Index 970086 S150. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 6. Other Electrical installation and related goods and services shall comply with the most recent version. of the following documents: 1. Electrical Demolition Drawings The following Electrical Demolition Drawings are provided: 1. 701 documents shall take precedence over others. and Certification 970086 S140C. Drawings shall take precedence over Specifications. 2. Specification—Cross-Discipline Clearance and Accessibility 4. Conflicts In case of conflicts among the documents in this Requisition. 3.4. 4. 3. and Inspection Planning 970086 S999C. Demolition – Single Line Diagram: 970086-D703D 2.

and Instrument power circuits. The Contractor shall adequately protect all electrical items and material from the adverse effects of the environment and activities of his own and subcontractors. PVC coated junction boxes. Hazardous location fittings. This includes furnishing. The conduit and wiring shall be installed from Substation 3 to new and modified CCR electrical installations.2013-05-03 UOP Specification Electrical System Installation Page 1 of 4 970086 S701F-0 1. Receptacle Power. Contractor shall transport all removed/demolished electrical materials and store them at a designated location within Pemex Minatitlan Refinery. Scope This document defines technical requirements for electrical supply and installation. 11. 2. and assembly instructions listed in the manufacturer's installation guide should be vigorously followed. 8. 13. threading. 10. bending. installed by module Contractor for Normal Lighting. hot dipped galvanized steel conduit with PVC coating shall be furnished and installed by Contractor from Substation 3 to new and modified CCR electrical installations. power feeders to these panel boards shall be provided and installed by Contractor on site. All associated existing raceway and cabling for CCM-1 located within Substation 3 shall be disconnected and existing underground cable from Substation 3 to existing CCR module should be abandoned. Modification / Installation 1. All conduit and fittings must be new. 4. New overhead conduit using rigid. installing and connecting all associated raceway. All previously used underground raceway/manholes will not be used for the new CCR electrical installation and should be capped. lighting fixtures. 9. Groups B. cutting. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 7. . Mounting supports and accessories for electrical equipment installations are supplied. 5. All clamping. Overhead conduit shall be installed per conduit routing plan from detail design package. 12. 6. Installation of the PVC Coated Conduit System shall be performed in accordance with the Manufacturer's Installation Manual. cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation. prior to plastic coating must be UL listed. 3. Electrical homerun cable should be furnished by Contractor and installed as referenced in 970086 S701SS-0. Pemex will be responsible for disposal of materials. Emergency Lighting. receptacles and associated electrical materials and supports shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. 2. The PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit must be UL Listed. fabricated and installed by Contractor. Supply and installation of electrical materials shall be in accordance with area classification: Class I. C. D. Electrical panel boards shall be provided by UOP. unused material. Division 1. Conduit entering underground ductbank from demolished heaters and demolished motors shall be cut and capped. Electrical equipment and materials are installed by the Contractor except as noted on drawings.

2. measured from finished surface or grating: Receptacle: Panel: 36 in.4 mm) of location shown on plan drawing. Pendant-mounted light fixture shall be properly supported while hanging to the side during fabrication and shipping. 5. 6. 16. Electrical equipment that is not specified in the design or listed in the bill of materials shall bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual (FM) approval label. A functional illumination test shall be performed for the lighting system. Lighting 1. Conduits shall be supported at 8 ft. switches etc. (1067 mm) 3. Conduit must be supported within 3 ft. 4. 2. Electrical wiring shall be checked for insulation resistance before connections to light fixtures. Lighting fixture and receptacle shall be installed within three feet (914. Ship-loose fixture shall be assembled and strapped to the platform it serves. Mounting height for electrical equipment shall be as follows.25) intervals using hot dipped galvanized unistrut system. 2.5) intervals maximum and clamped together at 4 ft. Grounding 1. (2286 mm) bottom of lamp Lighting fixture (pendant or stanchion): guard Switch / control station: 3 ft 6 in. (900) of each box or fitting. Lighting fixture lamp shall be installed. 15. A megger test shall be performed for each cable spool. Feraloy iron alloy conduit outlet fittings with PVC coating shall be furnished and installed Contractor to install on modules as per the installation detail drawings. (900 mm) 48 in. . 3. Main ground cable shall be installed from grounding station on lower deck of module to grounding stations on upper decks of the same module. 4. Drain fittings shall be installed in all low points of the conduit system including the bottom of pull. All circuits shall be checked for continuity and compliance using a volt-ohm meter. 5. 3. Conduit and wiring for lighting fixtures shall be provided from distribution panel or interface junction box to each fixture. Ground wire penetrating platform shall be provided with rigid galvanized steel or aluminum conduit sleeve with bushings.2013-05-03 UOP Specification Electrical System Installation Page 2 of 4 970086 S701F-0 14. Electrical testing 1. Electrical certification 1. (1220 mm) 90 in. (1. (2. 4. termination and junction boxes. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2. 5. Nameplate for junction box shall designate junction box tag number. panel and circuit number of wiring Nameplate for control stations shall denote tag number and service of equipment controlled Danger labels shall be as follows: a. c. Bolted connection shall be protected against corrosion by wrapping with grease impregnated tape. Electrical nameplate shall be as follows: a. 6. 2. Other labels shall have black characters on a white background. Page 3 of 4 970086 S701F-0 Sufficient length of main ground cable shall be connected to upper deck grounding station to allow for final field connection to lower grounding station on the module above it. Electrical equipment labeling 1. Nameplate attachment hardware shall not void enclosure certification. 6. 9. Support steel for PVC pipe shall be welded to structural steel. (3 mm) thick Nameplate attachment hardware shall be brass or type 300 series stainless steel. Connection between grounding cables shall be compression type connection. Provided for electrical interface junction box and local control station Three layer laminated plastic construction 1. Engraved with straight. 8.0 mm. 4. Danger labels shall have white characters on a red background. ISOLATE ELSEWHERE BEFORE OPENING” Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Welding receptacle junction box Heater interface box State “DANGER LIVE TERMINALS. (100 mm) by 2 in. Be provided for the following: 1. 3. . c. b. (50 mm) by 0. 2.125 in. vertical letters. b. b. 4 in. 7. d.2013-05-03 UOP Specification Electrical System Installation 3. 6. Ground lug or clip shall be as follows: a. Welded to equipment or structural steel Of the same metallurgy as the equipment 7. Branch ground cable serving equipment on platforms shall be installed below module platform. Below under intermediate steel beams if PVC conduit is at a higher elevation than outside steel beams On top of steel in PVC pipe and then ascending to service Above service in PVC pipe or in cable tray and then descending to service 4. 5. b. Branch ground cable serving equipment at grade shall be routed in order of preference: a.

ladders. Conduit and tray risers shall have a minimum clearance of 4 inches (100 mm) from column steel. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Lighting fixture shall have adequate clearance from trolleys. Electrical equipment including lighting fixtures and conduit riser shall be located and oriented. Clearance 1. or ladder support clip.2013-05-03 UOP Specification Electrical System Installation Page 4 of 4 970086 S701F-0 8. 9. 5. 4. so removal of process equipment does not require removal of fixture or electrical raceway. ladder cage. shall be at least 6 inches (150 mm). 2. and insulated services. Support Electrical raceway shall not be supported from ladder. . Clearance between conduit and piping. Electrical equipment and raceways shall have a minimum clearance of 12 in (300 mm) from hot surfaces. and monorails such that removal of process equipment will not require removal of fixture or electrical raceway. cranes. as well as between conduit and equipment. piping. 3.

Pemex will be responsible for disposal of all items stored at this designated location) and all associated existing raceway and cabling located within the substation. . 6. Coordinate this effort with the field effort. cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation within the substation.. Receive. 7. installing and connecting all associated raceway. cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation for the equipment located within the substation Disconnect and remove existing heater controller panels for BH-500 and BH-502 (transport to a designated location within the Pemex Minatitlan Refinery. Disconnect and remove cable from existing 45 kVA transformer (480V-220/127 V) located in CCM-1 to existing CCM-1A. 2. store. 8. Install and connect new VFD for Regeneration Blower GB505 (90 KW). Furnish. installing and connecting all associated raceway.3 Modification Page 1 of 2 970086 S701SS-1 1. 5. Scope This document defines the technical requirements for the modification of existing electrical Substation No. mtal clad 5KV motor starters in Substation No. install and connect new circuit breakers in existing CCM-1A to supply new lighting panel LP-1 and new receptacle panel RP-1 located at the new CCR unit. Receive. handle. handle. Coordinate this effort with the field effort. This includes capping previously used underground raceway which will not be used for the new CCR electrical installation. Furnish. store. This includes furnishing. cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation within the substation. 4. handle. This includes furnishing. Modify existing breakers in existing Square D 5 KV switchgear to provide feed to these starters. This includes furnishing. install and connect new cable from new 45kVA transformer located in new CCM-1. install and connect all associated raceway. Modification / Installation 1. handle.3 for new air compressors GB-507A (260 KW) and GB507B (260 KW).2013-05-03 UOP Specification Electrical Substation No. This includes furnishing. install and connect new heater controller panels BH-500 and BH-502. Install and connect new freestanding. install and connect new motor control center CCM-1 and furnish. Pemex will be responsible for disposal of all items stored at this designated location) and all associated existing raceway and cabling located within the substation. store. store. Disconnect and remove existing motor control center CCM-1 (transport to a designated location within the Pemex Minatitlan Refinery. cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation within the substation. Receive.3 2. 3. installing and connecting all associated raceway. cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation. Receive. installing and connecting all associated raceway.

CCM-1A – Circuit Schedule . 3. 9.3 Modification Page 1 of 2 970086 S701SS-1 3. 8. Demolition – Substation 3 Electrical Plan 2. 5. Demolition – Single Line Diagram Substation 3 Electrical Plan Motor Control Center CCM-1 Plan & Elevation Heater Controllers – Plan & Elevation Heater Controllers – Vendor Schematics & Wiring Diagrams GB-505 VFD – Plan & Elevation GB-505 VFD – Vendor Schematic & Wiring Diagram Existing 5 kV MCC – Elevation 10. 6. 7.2013-05-03 UOP Specification Electrical Substation No. Reference Drawings The following Electrical Detail Design Drawings will be provided when the electrical detail design is complete: 1. 4.

Zinc Coated (GRC). (150 mm) 18 in. Scope This document defines technical requirements for supply and installation of conduit. 2. D 3. separation shall be at least as great as shown in the following table: Power Wiring or Cable Less than 125V @ 20A 125V to 500V @ 200A Over 500V 2. ESPP-6940 and NMX-J534-ANCE. Division 1.5 mm thick Urethane). Millivolts 4 in. and nipple shall comply with ANSI C80. Separation of instrument and power conduits Separation between parallel runs of conduit used for instrument wiring or cable and conduit used for power wiring or cable shall comply with this section. Rigid conduit system shall be certified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Groups B. Separation 1. 3. . 110-to-240-volt instrument circuit for alarm and solenoid shall be considered a type of “Power Wiring or Cable” in this section. If instrument wiring is Type III or if instrument cable is Type VI. overall shielded cable of Type II wire Multipair. separation shall be at least as great as shown in the following table: Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. (900 mm) 4-20 or 10-50 maDC None required 6 in. Wire or cable type shall be as defined in the following table: Type II III IV V VI Description Single. Definitions 1. Supply and installation of electrical materials is in accordance with area classification: Class I.1. Conduit and conduit fittings shall be coated with external 1 mm thick PVC.1. and internal . 3. C. (100 mm) 12 in. elbow. (300 mm) 36 in.2013-05-03 UOP Specification Conduit Supply and Installation Page 1 of 3 970086 S712F-0 1.2. 2. American National Standard for Rigid Steel Conduit . Conduit and conduit fitting 1. coupling. shielded twisted wire pair Multipair cable of Type II wire Multipair. overall shielded cable of Type III wire 3. 4. Rigid conduit. bend. 2. unshielded twisted wire pair Single. (450 mm) If instrument wiring is Type II or if instrument cable is Type IV or V.

On fireproofed beams. Supports are required at bends. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Clearance between conduit and piping. Conduit shall be four inches from fireproofing. (152 mm) 12 in. (200 mm) 24 in. (100 mm) 8 in.2013-05-03 UOP Specification Conduit Supply and Installation Power Wiring or Cable Less than 125V @ 20A 125V to 500V @ 200A Greater than 500V Millivolts 8 in. Drain and breather 1. Support 1. b. . Closed vertical conduit run of length more than 20 ft (6 m) shall have breather at high point. (600 mm) 4. 7. 4. 6. Conduit run shall have drain at each low point. 5. Fasteners used for support of conduit shall be 316 stainless steel. ladder cage. as well as between conduit and equipment. Clearance from conduit to surface and from conduit to location shall be at least as great as shown in the following table: Surface or Location Temperature 113°F to 149°F (45°C to 65°C) Greater than 149°F (65°C) Clearance 6 in. 3. Conduit drain and breather material shall be 300-series stainless steel. 3. (375 mm) 48 in. (1200 mm) Page 2 of 3 970086 S712F-0 4-20 or 10-50 maDC 4 in. Framing channel supports shall be installed in such a manner that the conduits are supported on top of the framing channel. 2. shall be at least 2 in. 3. or ladder support. c. Box for the following shall be supported independently from conduit system: a. d. 2. 6. 2. wherever possible. Routing 1. spacing between conduit supports shall not exceed 7 feet (2. Conduit shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to main columns and beams. (200 mm) 15 in. Supports shall be adequate for the load impose. Selector switch Indicator light Push-button station Receptacle Conduit shall not be supported from piping. (305 mm) 5. ladder. Unless otherwise approved. fittings and fixtures to make conduit system rigid and free from vibrations.14 meters). the design shall permit conduit supports to be installed prior to fireproofing and in such a manner that the conduit does not become imbedded in the fireproofing.

15. Plugs are required in all unused conduit entries. The requirements for conduit installation as defined by NFPA 70 (NEC) for hazardous locations shall be adhered to.2013-05-03 UOP Specification Conduit Supply and Installation Page 3 of 3 970086 S712F-0 7. 7. crimps or other damage to the pipe including flattening of the pipe cross section. 6 full threads engagements shall be provided on each conduit connection. The PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit must be UL Listed. 10. Conduit expansion fittings are required at as shown on conduit riser diagram. 11. 9. 4. Conduit entry into enclosures is bottom and side only. Hazardous location fittings. Conduit fittings are to be installed accessible from grade. perpendicular to the axis of the conduit. Installation of the PVC Coated Conduit System shall be performed in accordance with the Manufacturer's Installation Manual. and assembly instructions listed in the manufacturer's installation guide should be vigorously followed. All clamping. prior to plastic coating must be UL listed. Conduit must be reamed. Explosion proof flexible conduit coupling shall be installed from the conduit system to instrument. 6. and free of internal burrs and rough edges. A conduit fitting or pull box is required for every 180 degrees of bends. Conduit and fitting thread shall be lubricated with a lithium based anti-seize compound such as Crouse Hinds STL8 lubricant (or approve equal). 8. platform or with the use of a portable ladder. Bends shall be of uniform radius and free from cracks. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 12. electric heaters and motors as per the installation details. Cutting structural members to provide passage for conduit is prohibited. PVC coated junction boxes. 2. 3. As a minimum. cutting. bending. receptacles and associated electrical materials and supports shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. 14. threading. All conduit and fittings must be new. 13. Installation requirements 1. and made up tight with wrench work or Spin It tool. 5. Conduit cuts shall be square. lighting fixtures. Field bends shall be made with approved bending tools. . unused material.

series. 90 ºC. G Other: Junction Box Manufacturer: Hoffman stainless steel with hinged ABB CEAG cover. control. 600V Insulation. terminal strips are required. stranded copper conductor. 2 fixture wire Branch-Circuit Conductor Color Hot: Black (A). stranded. stranded Other: SF-1. Phase conductors Neutral Conductor Grounding Conductor Note: Th information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 RHH/Hypolon for #8 up to 500 KCMIL.2013-01-17 UOP Technical Data Sheet Electrical Installation Page 1 of 1 970086 T701F-0 Conduit Type: Rigid Galvanized Conduit with PVC coating Fittings: Crouse Hinds Type EABL. Blue (C). 600V rated. Grounding conductor for electrical equipments shall be green color PVC. Insulation. Felaloy iron body and cover. lighting. EAJT or EAJL. 600 V insulation for #12 to #10 AWG. . 90 ºC. Wire nuts are not acceptable. EABX. stranded XHHW-2. field instrumentation Electrical Connection Thread specification: PG Metric NPT BSP Parallel. Red (B) Neutral: White Ground: Green 1 Remarks For wiring connections inside junction boxes. NEMA 4X Crouse-Hinds as per the Design & MTO 10 Other: Per the design and MTO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 Type: Wire in Conduit THHN/THWN. PVC coated Service: Power. PF.

Examination. tests. written notification of a successful preliminary test shall be provided. test. 3. or other activity. Indicated party or parties shall be notified of the timing of examination. Motor megger test UOP Inspection Data Sheet Electrical Installation PEMEX Page 1 of 1 970086 U701F-0 UOP PEMEX WIT OBS WIT OBS Other Activities 1. A hold point shall be applied to the production schedule. test. Verbal notice shall be provided two workdays prior to examination. test. b. a. Forecast shall include projected dates for witnessed or observed examination. Forecast shall be updated and resubmitted: Weekly Biweekly Monthly Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 2. or activity. Insulation resistance test on all module installed wiring Instrument wiring continuity test Lighting energization and foot-candle measurement of each deck Receptacle circuit testing Notes: 3. test.2013-01-17 UOP Examination or Testing 1. If “WIT” (witnessed) column is selected and if the examination. or other activity. Examination. 4. Written notice shall arrive at UOP ten workdays prior to examination. or other activity may be performed as scheduled if indicated party or parties are not present. b. If “OBS” (observed) column is selected and if the examination. test. Written and verbal notice shall be provided for witnessed or observed examination. Inspection forecast shall comply with both of the following: a. 4. test. . test. c. 1. or other activity. 5. test. or other activity is performed: a. b. or other activity is performed: a. and other activities. or other activity shall be performed with the indicated party or parties in attendance. b. Kickoff meeting with Module shop Electrical fabricator WIT OBS WIT OBS 2. For mechanical running or performance tests.

selector switches. and control panels 6F 0S 7. cable tray) Nomenclature: S . For documents indicated in the Final columns provide an electronic copy and three hard copies. Electrical apparatus vendor data/catalog cut sheets (lighting fixture.number of weeks prior to shipment. 0S 0S 0S 0S 2. 3. 5. 6. D . b Purchaser will indicate in this column the time frame for submission of materials using the nomenclature given at the end of this form. . provide an electronic copy or one hard copy. X – to be provided (X if no due date is established) Notes: 1.number of weeks after receipt of approved drawings. a Proposal drawings and data do not have to be certified or as built.2013-01-17 UOP Documentation Data Sheet Electrical Installation OMM Finalb Note 3 MRB Finalb Note 3 Page 1 of 1 970086 V701F-0 Proposala Note 1 Reviewb Note 2 DESCRIPTION General 1. provide an electronic copy or one hard copy. For documents indicated in the Review column. 4. power distribution panels.number of weeks after firm order. 3. Typical data shall be clearly identified as such. pushbutton station. receptacle outlets. 2. For documents indicated in the Proposal column. Inspection / Test Reports Motor Megger Test Instrument Wiring Continuity Test Cable Spool Megger Test Lighting Energization Photographs of inside of junction boxes. F .

UOP Specification—Pipe Bending 970086 V801P-0. Inspection Data Sheet—Piping Fabrication. Specification—Piping Specialty Items 970086 S801P-0. Assembly.1. Erection. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class B1A1 970086 S8B2A1-2. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class MS2 970086 S8MS7-0.3. Assembly. Piping material line classes 1. 7. of the following documents: 2. 4. ASME B31. 3. Specification—Piping Fabrication. 3. Erection. Erection. 8. Erection. 6. . 970086 S8 Branch-01. and examination of piping. Technical Data Sheet—Piping Line Index 970086 S801FW-10. Scope This document defines technical requirements for the fabrication. 9. Assembly. 5. Process Piping PFI ES-3. References (not attached to document) 1. and Examination 970086 S801L-10. 5.2013-02-12 UOP Technical Requisition Piping Fabrication. Tolerances. Specification—Leak Testing of Piping 970086 T801EL-43. Cold Bending of Pipe & Tube TPA-IBS-98. 2. Piping Piping and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with the most recent version. 6.2. Piping Fabrication Institute—Fabricating Tolerances PFI ES-7. 2. Assembly. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class MS7 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. unless otherwise indicated. and Examination Page 1 of 3 970086 R801F-1 1. UOP Specification – Branch Connection Table 970086 S8B1A1-23. erection. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class M1A1 970086 S8MS1-23. UOP Documentation Data Sheet—Pipe Bending 2. 2. TPA-CBS-98. 3. 5. Induction Bending of Pipe & Tube 2. 7. 4. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class B2A1 970086 S8B2A2-1. Piping Fabrication Institute—Minimum Length and Spacing for Welded Nozzles PFI ES-24. 4. Specification—Piping Welding 970086 S890-0. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class MS1 970086 S8MS2-0. and Examination 970086 U801F-10. Piping Fabrication Institute —Pipe Bending Methods. assembly. 970086 S801F-1.1. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class B2A2 970086 S8M1A1-1. 8. Process and Material Requirements. and Examination 970086 V801F-10. Documentation Data Sheet—Piping Fabrication. Specifications and data sheets 1. 6. Code for Pressure Piping.1. 2.

8. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class PR8 18. Design drawings 1. 970086 S8PR5-1. 970086 S8PR4-01. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class PR36 2. UOP Specification – Nickel and Nickel Alloy Globe Valves 18.4. UOP Specification – Stainless Steel Check Valves 10. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class PR4 15. 9. UOP Specification – Alloy Steel Gate Valves 970086 S8V023 0. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class PR3 14. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class PR24 23. UOP Specification – Nickel and Nickel Alloy Check Valve 2. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class PR1 12. 970086 S8V033 0. UOP Specification – Carbon Steel Globe Valves 970086 S8V005 0. 970086 S8PR6-01. UOP valve code index 1. 970086 S8V035 0. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class PR5 16. . 970086 S8PR24-0. 970086 S8V036 0. 970086 S8V054 0. 6. UOP Specification – Carbon Steel Ball Valves 970086 S8V013 0. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class PR6 17. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class PR17 21. 970086 S8V055 0. 970086 S8MS12-2. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class PR10 19. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class PR2 13.2013-02-12 UOP Technical Requisition Piping Fabrication. 970086 S8PR10-1. 970086 S8PR2-1. and Examination 9. Erection. UOP Specification – Stainless Steel Gate Valves 970086 S8V024 0. UOP Specification – Stainless Steel Check Valves 970086 S8V026 0. Page 2 of 3 970086 R801F-1 970086 S8MS11-23. Piping Plan – (Later) Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. UOP Specification – Bronze and Iron Butterfly Valves 16. 7. 2. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class MS12 11. 970086 S8PR36-12 . UOP Specification – Carbon Steel Gate Valves 970086 S8V004 0.3. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class PR15 20. UOP Specification – Bronze and Iron Check Valves 14. 8-1303-0. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class MS11 10. 970086 S8V037 0. 970086 S8PR8-12. UOP Specification – Piping Material Line Class PR22 22. 970086 S8V003 0. 970086 S8PR3-0. 4. 970086 S8V053 0. 5. 970086 S8PR15-12. 970086 S8V029 0. UOP Specification – Carbon Steel Check Valves 970086 S8V006 0. 970086 S8V034 0. UOP Specification – Bronze and Iron Globe Valves 13. UOP Specification – Stainless Steel Needle Valves 11. UOP Specification – Nickel and Nickel Alloy Gate Valves 17. UOP Specification – Stainless Steel Globe Valves 970086 S8V025 0. Assembly. 970086 S8PR1-2. 970086 S8PR17-1. UOP Specification – Bronze and Iron Gate Valves 12. 3. UOP Specification – Bronze and Iron Ball Valves 15.

4. 2. UOP-generated documents shall take precedence over Piping Fabrication Institute Engineering Standards and Technical Bulletins. Specification—Language.2013-02-12 UOP Technical Requisition Piping Fabrication. Drawings shall take precedence over Specifications and standards. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 6. See Reference document: 970086 R905F-0 Complete. Other Piping fabrication. . 3. assembly. Conflicting requirements In case of conflicts among documents outlined in the Technical Requisition. Specification—Documents for Custom-Designed Goods and Services 970086 S140S. 4. Specification—Cross-Discipline Clearance 970086 S159. and Examination Page 3 of 3 970086 R801F-1 3. Testing. 2. 970086 S140A. Units. and related goods and services shall comply with the most recent version. 5. of the following documents: 1. Specification—Supplier Document Index 970086 S150. Painting Painting of piping shall be provided in accordance with the most recent version. except as otherwise indicated. Erection. unless otherwise specified. Specification—Positive Material Identification for UOP Modular Plants CCR Unit 5. and Inspection Plan and Record 970086 S999C. Specification—Examination. Paint Specifications and Applications. of the following documents: 1. and Documents 970086 S140C. Assembly. examination. erection. the following shall apply: 1.

Contractor shall check the pipe wall thickness to ensure it meets the minimum requirement as established by UOP. 2. and Examination Page 1 of 7 970086 S801F-1 1. For carbon steel and ferrous pipe materials through 9% chrome operating between 20°F (-29 ºC) and 500°F (260 ºC). Fabrication 3. 2. 7. If any existing flanged connection is disassembled the flange face must be inspected. 4.1. . pipe support attachment material shall be the same as the supported pipe. 3.1. Assembly. paint requirements shall be applied up to and 6 inches beyond the weld affected area.1 of ASME B31. All bolting shall be supplied with proper marking per the applicable codes. All bolting shall be provided with Certified Material Test Reports (CMTR). pipe wall thickness must be confirmed to meet the minimum wall thickness.9.3. For new piping or piping components being welded to existing painted piping. 6. Prior to any welding of existing piping. Pipe support attachment The pipeline installation is allowed only after installation and fastening of the support constructions and hangers in compliance with the project requirements. For carbon steel and ferrous pipe material through 9% chrome operating above 501ºF (261ºC). Erection. Welds on existing piping shall not be hydro tested. 3. For other pipe material pipe support attachment material shall be the same as the supported pipe. Examination of welds shall be 100% radiographed or 100% ultrasonically examined per 345. and examination of piping.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Piping Fabrication. pipe support attachment material shall be carbon steel. 3. 3.4 of ASME B16.1. 5. pipe supports of the existing pipe system shall be visually inspected for mechanical integrity by the Contractor. Removed paint shall be tested to confirm that no lead is in the existing paint. Where new piping connects to existing piping. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Pipe support welded attachment (excluding trunnions) 1.5 then it must be machined to acceptable conditions or replaced. assembly. Scope This document defines technical requirements for fabrication. Special Project Requirements 1. erection. The paint shall be removed back 6" from the heat affected zone. If the surface finish does not conform to section 6. If flanged connections are disassembled a new gasket and bolts must be used for reassembly per the corresponding pipe classes. The assembly units and the assemblies of the pipelines shall be arranged at least on two supports (or fixed on two hangers) with their security against tilting and turning. 2.

Seal-welded services Threaded connections to piping. Circumference shall cover at least 1/4 of pipe circumference. reinforcing pad. Materials for trunnion. Pipe support welded trunnion 1. c. . Reinforcing pad and wear pad shall be as follows: a. and Examination Page 2 of 7 970086 S801F-1 3. For NPS 24 and smaller. 2.1. Temperature 3.1. Contaminants Seal-welded threaded joints shall be free of the following substances: 1.4.2. Hydrogen Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.3. Reinforcing pads shall not be used at elbow. Adjustable base trunnion shall be used to accommodate differences in elevation or field tolerances. Assembly. Reinforcing pad and wear pad for pipe support 1. Attached using continuous fillet weld to avoid crevice type corrosion Provided with a 1/4” (6mm) diameter vent hole at the lowest point to drain any environmental moisture. For NPS larger than 24. Length shall be at least 16 inch (406 mm). 2. and gusset shall be the same nominal composition as supported pipe.1. Sealing compound PTFE tape Cutting oil 4. Seal Welding 4.2. b. thickness shall be at least 1/4 inch (6 mm). Clamp material shall be in accordance with the following table: ---------------------------------Pipe Material--------------------------------Carbon Steel (CS)/ Chrome-Moly -20 ºF to 500 ºF (-29 ºC to 260 ºC) 501ºF to 750 ºF (261ºC to 399 ºC) >750 ºF (> 399 ºC) Galvanized CS Galvanized or Coated CS Compatible Material Suitable for Temp. Erection. shall be seal welded if any of the following is contained: 1. d.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Piping Fabrication. 3. except for connection at instrument. Wear pads shall be as follows: a. Stainless Steel (SS) Galvanized or Coated CS SS or Coated CS with Shield SS Other Alloys Galvanized or Coated CS Coated CS Compatible Material Suitable for Temp. 2. thickness shall be at least 3/8 inch (10 mm). b. 3. 3.1. 4. Pipe support clamped attachment 1.

drain plug. Assembly and Erection 5. 2. Piping 1. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.3. 2. Steam. Erection. Pressurized lube oil piping except oil mist system Pressurized seal oil piping except at the connection to mechanical seal end plates 4. 5. Welded joints of pipelines with a diameter up to 50 mm shall be located at least 50 mm from supports and hangers. If the pipe in the process of installation is cut into several parts then it is necessary to apply the stamp corresponding to that of the initial pipe on each new formed part. partition or the ceiling shall be at least 400 mm. and rod-out plug Variable area flow meters and check valves in purge piping Union nut rings Connections to pre-fabricated instrument manifold blocks Instrument tube fittings Miscellaneous connections approved by UOP Thermowells 5. 4. 8. Minimum Spacing 1. Caustic Steam if flange rating is ASME Class 300 or higher.1. fill plug. Piping for instruments Threaded instrument-piping fittings shall be seal welded except for the following connections: 1. The distance from the valve’s flange or the compensator flange to the support.2. 7. wall. 3.1. 6. . and fuel-gas connection shall be from top of horizontal supply header. Connections to instruments Vent plug.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Piping Fabrication. 3. 5. instrument-air. Spacing 5. Assembly. and Examination 2. 2.5. Drain and vent valve Threaded connection on non-instrument-piping drain and vent valve shall not be seal weld the solid threaded pluged. 3.4. Auxiliary piping for equipment Threaded connections of auxiliary piping associated with equipment shall be seal welded in the following services: 1. 2. 4.2. Condensate connection into condensate return header shall be to top of horizontal header. those of pipelines with a diameter over 50 mm shall be located at least 200 mm from supports and hangers. Page 3 of 7 970086 S801F-1 4. hanger.

.4. but no less 100 mm. 5. Assembly. After fabrication and heat treatment. 2. Approval shall be obtained from UOP for chemical-cleaning. 5. 4. These valves shall be disassembled prior to welding.3. 5. or threaded ends requiring seal welds shall not be welded into the line with any softseal material in place. Stainless-steel weld shall be wire buffed or cleaned to remove discoloration after welding. acid-cleaning. Flange bolt holes shall straddle established centerlines. Each flange shall have photographic record of the internal surface for future review. 3. or passivation procedure and application prior to use.5. 5. 2. Contractor to stamp “TB” mark at least three locations on the taper bore flange outer surface with low stress stamp. At least four times the pipe wall thickness At least 1 inch (25 mm) welding toe to toe 5. and 200 mm for nominal sizes of 150 mm and over.1. Branch connections Clear distance between attachment welds for adjacent branch connection fittings shall be all of the following: 1.3 5. socket-welding ends. Page 4 of 7 970086 S801F-1 The distance from a nozzle to transverse seam or to the beginning of rounded bend shall be at least equal to the pipe OD. 3. The distance between circumferential seams connecting inserts to a pipeline shall be at least 100 mm.3. Valves 1. 2.3. foreign material such as sand.6. Para 304. Cleaning of piping 1. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.2. scale.3. 3. weld splatter.2. Piping shall be cleared by air blower before erection.20. and cutting chips shall be removed from inside and outside of pipe spools. The length of straight section between welded joints of two adjacent bends shall be at least 100 mm for nominal sizes below 150 mm. After the welding has been completed the valve shall be reassembled with a new bonnet gasket.2. Girth butt welds Distance between centerlines of adjacent girth butt welds shall be both of the following: 1.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Piping Fabrication. and Examination 3. Soft-sealed ball and plug valves with butt-welding ends. Erection. pickling. At least four times the thickness of the run wall At least 1 inch (25 mm) welding toe to toe At least the dimensions shown in PFI Standard ES-7 At least the dimensions required by ASME B31. Flanged joints 1.4. 4. 2. Threaded joints Pipe threads shall be taper pipe threads (NPT) and shall comply with ASME B1. 5.

Material group Welding process Pipe diameter Welding position 6. b. d. Page 5 of 7 970086 S801F-1 5.1. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 6. Normal fluid service 1. Supplementary examination 6. . If post weld heat treatment (PWHT) is performed. Threaded bronze valves shall not be seal welded.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Piping Fabrication. Use of pipe unions Pipe unions between process vessels. Application of required examination 1. Examination 6. 3. 100 percent radiography of selected welds The work of each welder or welding operator including representative samples from each of the following: 1. b. Material group Welding process Pipe diameter Welding position 100 percent ultrasonic testing (UT) examination may be performed instead of radiography.7.2. Category D fluid service Category D Fluid Service piping shall receive random radiography including the following: 1. 2.8. Personnel qualified in accordance with ASNT Recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A shall perform NDE. 5. Erection. and Examination 2.1. Assembly. 6. Certification of personnel shall be made available upon request. 2.1. piping. 2.2. Bolt coating Alloy steel bolts and nuts shall be coated with Fluorokote #1. Random radiography shall include the following: a.1. c. 4. 3. 3. or equipment and the first block valve are prohibited. At least 5 percent of circumferential butt and miter-groove welds 100 percent radiography of selected welds The work of each welder or welding operator including representative samples from each of the following: a. 2. non-destructive examination (NDE) for final acceptance shall be performed after PWHT.

and Examination 4. General Purpose (Inch) ASME B31. The deviation of the flange sealing surface from the perpendicularity to the pipe or the part axis shall not exceed the values given in Table below.3.. to the actual weld at any time.1. Nondestructive Examination American Society for Nondestructive Testing Recommended Practice No. 5. Results of NDE shall be reported on written forms and provided in the final documentation package. and photographic records shall be maintained by Contractor.20.: 1. 15 0. References The most recent edition and addenda. 6.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Piping Fabrication. No examination shall be performed without a written procedure. Catalyst lines Orifice flanges 6. 6 7. 8. Weld smoothness and flushness Internal surface of weld in following locations shall be ground smooth and flush with inside bore of adjacent pipe. Work of each welder shall be recorded in a log to allow tracebility of each weld and welder who performed corresponding weld. NDE performed shall be recorded on a fabrication drawing mark up to allow traceability of test records. Dimensional examination Dimensional examination shall be performed on both of the following: 1. These welds shall be inspected and signed off by UOP. Assembly. of the following documents are cited in this document. 25 0. except as otherwise specified. 2. 6. 35 0. Pipe Threads. e. . SNT-TC-1A 2001 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 9. Code for Pressure Piping – Process Piping ASME Section V. 7. Taper flange bore Piping to off-module connections The pipeline deviation from the vertical (if no instructions are given in the project) shall not exceed 2 mm per 1 m of the pipeline length.3. Pipe (Part) Diameter (mm) 25-60 60-160 160-400 400-775 Above 750 Deviation (mm) 0. 2.4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) ASME B1. Erection. radiographs.g. 3. 4. Page 6 of 7 970086 S801F-1 NDE shall be performed in accordance with written procedures that conform to ASME Section V. 5 0. NDE to be performed shall be noted on approved fabrication drawings.

Fabricating Tolerances (Reaffirmed 1994) PFI Standard ES-7. Minimum Length and Spacing for Welded Nozzles Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Assembly. . and Examination Piping Fabrication Institute (PFI) Page 7 of 7 970086 S801F-1 PFI Standard ES-3. Erection.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Piping Fabrication.

b. If “OBS” (observed) column is selected and if the examination. 6. and Examination Page 1 of 1 970086 U801F-1 UOP Examination or Testing 1. Forecast shall be updated and resubmitted: Monthly Bimonthly Weekly Biweekly Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 2. 5. 6. . 3. and other activities. test. Examination. 3. test. test. Written and verbal notice shall be provided for witnessed or observed examination. or other activity is performed: a. Inspection forecast shall comply with both of the following: a. For mechanical running or performance tests. A hold point shall be applied to the production schedule. or other activity. 4. 4. Examination. or other activity shall be performed with the indicated party or parties in attendance. b. Verbal notice shall be provided two workdays prior to examination. test. 2. or other activity may be performed as scheduled if indicated party or parties are not present. Indicated party or parties shall be notified of the timing of examination. Leak test PEMEX UOP PEMEX WIT OBS WIT OBS Other Activities 1. Written notice shall arrive at UOP ten workdays prior to examination. WPS and PQR approval Pneumatic testing procedure approval Release for shipment Release for leak test Kickoff meeting WIT OBS WIT OBS If “WIT” (witnessed) column is selected and if the examination. or other activity. 2. tests. a. written notification of a successful preliminary test shall be provided. 3.2013-02-12 UOP Inspection Data Sheet Piping Fabrication. c. or activity. 4. test. Notes 1. test. Erection. or other activity. Forecast shall include projected dates for witnessed or observed examination. Assembly. test. b. test. or other activity is performed: a. b. 5.

Soluble Salt Measurement test report.46. 47. pressure test reports. 32. 20. 18.33. Progress Report including Production Schedule Quality Control Manual Inspection and Test Plan Paint Manufacturer’s Product Data Sheets. and leak test reports). if applicable Approved Deviations Procedures Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) Welding Plan Welder/Welding Operator Qualifications NDT Procedure NDT Personnel Qualification Certificates Material Control and Traceability Procedure Visual and Dimensional Inspection Procedure Hydrostatic and Pneumatic testing Procedures PMI Procedure.42. where applicable. 42. NDT Records & Certificates. 2.32. b Purchaser will indicate in this column the time frame for submission of materials using the nomenclature given at the end of this form. 41. 37. 25. if any (including PWHT. 31. 30. Normalizing and Forming) Hardness Testing Procedure Surface Preparation & Painting Procedure Test Records Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs) for all piping components and welding consumables.40. if applicable. 8. tightness.41. 22. 44. 3. if any (including PWHT.24. 29. 17.34. 16. Leak testing report. 27.29.39. NDE Personnel’s Certificates per ASNT SNT-TC-1A Material Traceability Records Chloride Analysis Certificate of Hydrotest water.2013-02-12 UOP Documentation Data Sheet Piping Fabrication. 9. 12. Erection. Valves Receiving Inspection. Sectional assembly drawing(s).26. 0S 0S 0S 0S X 0S 0S A 0S 24. Welding Logs Air and Soap Bubble test records for pads.36.25.38.43.35. a Proposal drawings and data do not have to be certified or as built. 36. Typical data shall be clearly identified as such. 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S X 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 33. 6.37. 38. Hydrostatic and pneumatic pressure test records including charts & logs. Two years Spare Parts List. sketches. PMI reports if required. 45. Normalizing and Forming).44.30. photos or drawings indicating location and size of repaired areas Inspection Reports Visual and Dimensional Inspection reports Weld ground smooth reports including pictures Hardness inspection reports.31. 4. Material Test Reports (MTRs) and Certificates of Compliance for all valves’ pressure containing components.28. . Repair Records Details of repairs including description.47. 21.48. 34. 35. PMI Reports. Inspection and Test Plan Record Completed Paint Application & Inspection Log. 13. if applicable Heat Treatment Procedures. Assembly. Detailed records of Heat treatment. 26.27. 19. and Examination Page 1 of 2 970086 V801F-1 Proposal Note 1 Review Note 2 Final Note 3 DESCRIPTION General M A X X 2S 2S X X A X A X X X X X X X 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 1. 15. 23. 23. 46.45. 28. 43. Hydrostatic test report. Heat Treatment records if any. 10. 5. 40. Test certificates and inspection reports (including NDT records. 14. 39. 11. 7.

a Proposal drawings and data do not have to be certified or as built. Available for review at manufacturer’s facility upon request Provide Monthly Provide Weekly Per the Purchase Order For documents indicated in the Proposal column. A M W X Notes: 1. Assembly. D .number of weeks prior to shipment. For documents indicated in the Review column. Nomenclature: S . F . 3. b Purchaser will indicate in this column the time frame for submission of materials using the nomenclature given at the end of this form.number of weeks after firm order. and Examination Review Note 2 Final Note 3 Page 2 of 2 970086 V801F-1 Proposal Note 1 DESCRIPTION 0S 0S 48.2013-02-12 UOP Documentation Data Sheet Piping Fabrication. . Typical data shall be clearly identified as such. 2. 49.49. API-598 Certificates. API-607 Certificates if applicable.50. Erection.number of weeks after receipt of approved drawings. provide an electronic copy or one hard copy. For documents indicated in the Final columns provide an electronic copy and three hard copies. provide an electronic copy or one hard copy.

...... The Field Representative ....... and describes requirements that are in addition to those of the Code........................ 7 9. Pneumatic Test ...................... 3 6... Report . 2 4..........4................................................5. in accordance with the Code........Symbol “P” ...................... ASME B31.............................................................................. 1 2... 1 3. Repairs or Additions After Leak Testing4 7..........3............. Pneumatic Test.... Table 1 Notes .. Initial Service Leak Test .. 3 6.................. 4 8...........5....... 4 8.....2. 5 8...........2......Symbol “F” . Process Piping Field Representative................. 5 8...................2......... 1 4.............1 Symbol “P”.2.. Sensitive Leak Test ......5 Supplier.. Testing Selection Basis ......... Test Symbol “F” ........ Scope. 9 1....6................ 3 6.....1........................ 6 9.............3.............. Test Pressure .......................1.5... Test Symbol “P” ...... see Section 4..6.... Test Conditions .........................Symbol “B”... Definitions For the purposes of this Specification....3.. 2... Alternative Leak Test................ Hydrostatic Test.. The leak tests required by the Code are shown in the following table. Service Test....4 Symbol “A”...... 3 5..3........... References ....4.. Define Test Loops.......... Shop Leak Test ....... 3 6.. 7 9.4........ 2 4... Scope This document defines technical requirements for leak testing of piping systems............................ 7 9........... 6 8... General Requirements..........4.... Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.. Prior Work ......... 8 10.....2... see Section 4....3 Symbol “B”...................... Alternative Test .............. 5 8..... Acceptance Criteria ...Symbol “H” ....... see Section 4.. 2 4.......................... 9 11...... Table 1 .......... 4 8........................ Testing selection basis 1.2 Symbol “F”.... Hydrostatic Test .. Status of Instruments During Pressure Test8 10............. 2 4..... see Section 4....Symbol “A” .................... ....... Leak Test Methods ............. 7 9.................1... Pneumatic Testing . Test Symbol “B” .. 4 6..... Painting and Insulation .. Preparation For Test ...................................... Definitions ........3. Test Symbol “H” ..... Sensitive Leak Test............1.. Other Preparation ........... General Requirements ............................. test procedures.... 7 10... 4 6.. see Section 4....2013-02-12 UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping Contents Page 1 of 9 970086 S801L-1 1................................... the following definitions apply: Code.................... 3 4................. The firm hired to do the leak testing 3. The authorized individual representing UOP at the construction site Symbol “H”................

Where a large test volume is involved. b. 2. e. Initial service leak test . 302. Page 2 of 9 970086 S801L-1 2. 4. b. Compressed air shall be dry (-40C dew point) and free of oil. Pneumatic testing should be prohibited for piping of brittle material (e. A sensitive leak test may be used following a primary leak test to meet Code or process requirements.g. Use the pneumatic test only when performing the hydrostatic test is impractical. See Section 8. 4.2. consider how to dispose of the contents of the system after the test. Test methods described here are related to a Test Symbol. can be accomplished when the service fluid is first introduced to the piping system. The hydrostatic test may be considered impractical when piping cannot sustain the weight of water or other test liquid. 323.2.4 The area must be vacated during the test until the pressure is lowered for close inspection. Pneumatic testing may limit Code allowed pressure and temperature excursions.g. and post test requirements for each Test Symbol are described Section 8. cast iron) and all plastics not specified for compressed gas service. c. Pneumatic testing should not be used at an ambient temperature below the design minimum temperature for carbon and low-alloy steel piping. Heating with vacuum drying. Pneumatic. 4. dirt.symbol “P” 1. Pneumatic test . This fluid may be useable for hydrotesting other systems. (See Code.4. Other nonflammable gases (e. If Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.3.4. the preferred test method for Category D Fluid Service piping. Pneumatic Test involves the hazard of disruptive release of energy stored in the compressed gas. Hydrostatic test . Leak test methods 1. Para. and other foreign matter. d. A hydrostatic test is generally preferred over a pneumatic test.symbol “F” Initial Service Leak Test. the procedures to be used. 3. See the Code. 2. b. . or Alternative For process system: a. dry nitrogen) may be used with the Field Representative's approval.. or piping is to contain fluid incompatible with any test liquid. The piping must be water-free after the test.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping Fluid Service Required Tests Category D st Normal Hydrostatic. 4.symbol “H” 1..) Prepare the system properly for the test.2. Conditions for pneumatic testing are: a.2. 2. System shall be dried by one of the following methods: a. Para. The test conditions. Pneumatic testing should be used only after reasonable alternates to test with a liquid have been exhausted.

symbol “A” Alternative Test is based on a Code provision for a situation where neither the hydrostatic nor pneumatic test can be applied. circulate warm air or apply vacuum to thoroughly remove the residual water after hydrostatic testing. Sensitive leak test . Further requirements can be found in the Code. Rather than reverse the preferred order of testing. Pressurize the system to as high as the operating pressure but not more than 150 psig (1035 kPa). The piping must be dry for test “B” to be effective.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping Page 3 of 9 970086 S801L-1 Initial Service Leak Test must be completed as part of a contract. Formal flexibility analysis of the piping system shall be made. 4. “B”. it will ordinarily follow the primary test (“H” or “P”). and spiral groove welds that will not otherwise be leak tested shall be completed. including structural attachment welds. Air should be of the same quality as for a pneumatic test. 2. such as at a tie-in. shall be performed.1. Requirements for Alternative Testing are: 1. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. examination. Sequence of Tests: If test “B” is required. . 4. 2. Alternative test . by the liquid penetrant method shall have been performed. General requirements 6.. 5. A bubble test.) 110% of design pressure Maximum operating pressure. 345.symbol “B” 1. 4.5. shall be complete and in accordance with the applicable specification. longitudinal. Prior work Fabrication and/or installation. Symbol “B”. use of water or air instead of the service fluid may be preferable. not over 150 psig (1035 kPa) The lesser of 15 psig (103 kPa) recommended maximum or 25% of the design pressure See Symbol B 6. 3. Radiography of 100 percent of circumferential. Examination of 100 percent of all other welds. and any required cleaning. except chemical cleaning. The field representative The Field Representative shall approve preparations for and witness all leak tests.6. Sensitive Leak Test is the preferred gas and bubble test when a sensitive leak test is required (in addition to test “H” or “P”) for Code compliance or to minimize fugitive emissions. Test pressure The recommended test pressure for various tests is as follows: Symbol H P F B A Test Pressure 150% of design pressure corrected for temperature (min. Para.2.7. 6. Usually two Test Symbols have to be specified e.g. “H”.

301. Leak testing of shop-fabricated piping shall be performed before shipment. 6. Shop leak test A shop may be either a commercial shop or a shop set up in the field near a work site. . If ambient temperature is not above 40° F (4 C).1. A pneumatic test (“P”). Plant safety rules and personnel precautions shall be observed.6 of the Code. Repairs or additions after leak testing Repairs or additions made following the leak test shall be tested in accordance with Para. Test conditions Before conducting any leak test. considering the need to drain the piping before it freezes.1 and Para. and before start-up. 4. or service (“F”) tests. may be made only with UOP’s specific agreement. and forged fittings and valves not previously tested under this specification shall be left uninsulated and unpainted. 1. 2. the Field Representative must specifically approve the test procedure of hydrostatic (“H”). Protect personnel and property from possible harm of disruptive pressure release. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.7. 6. the test shall be performed prior to priming and painting. For a sensitive leak test.2.) 345. Report The Supplier shall provide the Field Representative with a report in accordance with the Code.4.5.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping Page 4 of 9 970086 S801L-1 6. Hydrotest stops in spring hangers and supports shall remain in place during the hydrotest. Acceptance criteria Piping which is free of leakage for the duration of specified tests shall be accepted. Temporary supports. Testing shall not be performed at an ambient temperature below the design minimum temperature for carbon and low alloy steel piping. Test assemblies at the pressure stated using air unless otherwise directed. all joints and components other than seamless pipe. All joints not previously tested under this specification shall be left uninsulated. 7. Para. 345. spool pieces. Items to be excluded from test shall be removed or blanked. 3.3. pneumatic (“P”). 2. Paragraph (Para. seamless butt welding fittings. Test procedures Leak testing of piping shall be performed after examination and repair are complete. Where a sensitive leak test (“B”) is required.3. Hydrostatic testing shall be done at the test pressure specified on UOP Piping Line Index T801EL. 3. and other preparatory items shall be in place. 8. and if “P” is identified as the test. the conditions listed below shall be met: 1. 8. 5. blinds. 323. See Code.2.

Water used for hydrotesting testing shall be free of suspended solids and biologically inert. close the vents after piping is air-free. Stainless steel systems may require special flush or drying procedures to avoid chloride concentration. Fill piping with vents open. Water temperature shall not be less than 40F (4C) nor greater than 140F (60C). 3. through lines or hoses leading to a discharge or recovery point acceptable to the Field Representative. packing gland. 2.2. . threaded or other joints) not previously examined for leaks according to this specification. Drain the system after the test. 7. If the chloride content is greater than 50 ppm and less than 250 ppm.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping Page 5 of 9 970086 S801L-1 8. 6. Chlorination at a level of 0.5% by weight sodium nitrate solution. Water used for hydrostatic testing in stainless steel piping shall have a chloride content less than 50 ppm. Water from a source approved by the Field Representative as test liquid.4.2. If at any time the person(s) conducting the test is not in attendance. A pressure gauge shall be provided at the low point of the test loop. The Field Representative shall describe the limits of the piping to be tested. A written procedure shall be prepared for each test loop. 3. (110 mm) diameter.4. 8. 2. flange. 8.2. The gauge shall have a dial scale  4-1/2 in. shall be examined. Test symbol “H” A Hydrostatic Test requires that: 1. if designated by the Field Representative.1.6 of the Code. 4. and accompanied by documentation showing it is calibrated within 2 percent at full scale reading. Preliminary test preparation The following requirements apply to all leak tests. approved by the Field Representative including: Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.3. 5. to support the weight of the test liquid. Repairs shall be in accordance with Para. General requirements The Test Symbols listed in the following paragraphs are used to indicate the type of leak test(s) required for each pipeline and/or test loop: 8. or as described by the Field Representative. 6. 5. 4. a range such that the test pressure is within 40-80 percent of full scale. Water with a chloride content greater than 250 ppm shall not be used for hydrostatic testing in stainless steel piping. 1. a sufficient quantity of sodium nitrate shall be added to provide a 0.2 to 1. 345. See also Section 9. Test symbol “P” A Pneumatic Test requires: 1. The preferred water temperature range is between 60F (16C) and 100F (38C). with vents open.0 ppm is recommended to prevent biological attack. Expansion joints shall be tested in accordance with the Code. Each joint (weld.2. the pressure shall be reduced below design pressure. Piping designed for vapor or gas operation shall have temporary supports.

as specified by the Field Representative. 5. Section V. that produces an adherent and persistent film shall be used.7. ready for operation. 8. b. Reduce pressure from 110 percent of design to design pressure. whichever is the lower. Releasing any excess liquid or gas to an acceptable discharge point. pressurize with vents and drains closed. Test symbol “F” A Service test requires: 1. The set pressure shall be test pressure + 50 psig (345 kPa) or test pressure + 10 percent of test pressure. Drain water and condensate before testing. and the Field Representative shall approve a written. The Field Representative shall specify the sequence of tests and any required additional cleaning or drying for each pipeline. 4. Para. An acceptable bubble formation solution.. 3. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Other nonflammable gases (e. check for leaks. 4. 8. shall be completed after the sensitive leak test has been successfully completed. 8. dry nitrogen) may be used with the Field Representative's approval. 4. 2. 3. Test symbol “B” A Sensitive Leak Test requires: 1. insulation. 6. Closing the vents and pressurizing the piping using the source of pressure normal for the service (or the same pressure using water or air).6. 3. 345.5. Hold at steps so that piping strains are equalized.g.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping a. c. 2. dirt. The test pressure shall be as specified by the Field Representative. The piping to be tested shall be fully in place. Minimum piping temperature during the test Page 6 of 9 970086 S801L-1 Method of limiting access to the area in which the piping is being tested Stored energy in the system when at the maximum test pressure Compressed air shall be dry (-40C dew point) and free of oil. in steps in accordance with the Code. qualified procedure. 7. A pressure relief valve shall be provided in the test loop. . Regulated release of pressure after the test. and other foreign matter. Gradually increase pressure in steps to the test pressure. The Supplier shall provide. Test pressure shall be increased. Painting. and evidence of operator qualifications for each type of leak test. in accordance with BPV Code. repair any that are found. Initially pressurize the pipe to 25 psig (170 kPa) or one half the test pressure. Articles 1 and 10.2. 5. whichever is less. 2. etc. Precautions shall be taken against asphyxiation if gas could be released in a confined area. removal of temporary supports. make a preliminary check for leaks and repair all that are found. Vents shall be open for liquid filling. Fill piping with the service fluid (water or air may be substituted for liquid or gas if necessary). and a preliminary check made.

Joints may be painted except where a sensitive leak test is specified by the Owner. a pneumatic test may be used with the Field Representative’s consent. Painting and insulation 1. 345. castings and factory welds (excluding 100 percent radiographed welds) must be accessible for examination. until test pressure is reached. globe and check valve closures are generally capable of being tested at a differential pressure of 110 percent of the valve body rating. Application of tape to the perimeter of the flanges and checking leaks through a punched hole is one method to check flanges. repairing any found. relief valves.4. . Quarter turn valve closures are frequently rated at still lower pressures. 9. decide whether to blind off (if flanged ends) and test each piping segment separately. Potable water may be acceptable even for tests on stainless steel piping. all joints must be checked for tightness before commencing the test. 9. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Para. Repeat the check for leaks.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping 6. UOP must approve of the use of Pneumatic testing. Gate. several pipelines (and possibly equipment items. Raise the pressure in steps of 25 percent of test pressure or 25 psig (170 kPa). The insulation must be left off. Application of bubble solution to welds and to threaded. 2. Test fluid supply 1. bolted. If the test pressure exceeds the valve closure rating. holding for one minute at each step. at which time a final check of all joints shall be made.1. Verify that water of adequate purity will be available in the quantities needed for hydrostatic tests.4. 2. In most instances a single pipeline will be the test loop. whichever is less. both insulation and paint must be left off. Other preparation 9. For hydrostatic and pneumatic tests it is necessary to be able to examine every threaded. 8. but the chloride content shall not be greater than 50 ppm. make a preliminary check for leaks and repair any that are found. For a sensitive leak test. and other joints by a technique which minimizes initial bubbles in the solution shall be made. whichever is greater. Pneumatic testing Because of the high amount of stored energy. Supports and restraints Expansion joints must be fitted with restraints designed for operation. see Code. Define test loops 1.4. 9. and welded joint (excluding welds made by a piping component manufacturer and any welds previously tested to this specification by a manufacturer) for leakage.3. Preparation for test 9. etc. 9. 7.) that cannot stand the test pressure. Page 7 of 9 970086 S801L-1 Initially pressurize to 25 psig (170 kPa) or half the test pressure.2.4. flanged. If there are in-line items (valves. Piping for gas or vapor not designed to bear the weight of hydrostatic test liquid shall be provided with added support. the valve must be tested in the open position.1. Except for welds prevously tested to this specification.2. If additional support is not practical. sensors.3) can be tested as a unit. 9. In some cases. or replace items with a spool and test the whole pipeline.

The air supply required for pneumatic test is equivalent to instrument air. Pressure Transmitters . Flame arrestors Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.except regulators & pressure balanced Control Valves – Pressure balances Flow Instruments . 3. 4. Pressure Gages 16. 5. 2.D/P Cell & Bellows type Flow Instruments – Rotameters Flow Meters . A combustible liquid with flash point ≥ 140° F (60 C) may be used.1. but the potential losses from burning of the liquid must be considered. Rupture disks 23.C/P cell & bellows type 13. Analyzers Control Valves . PSVs . Pressure Regulators 18. Gage Glasses 11. TSVs . and an acceptable means of recovery or disposal must be determined.Flanged 20. 8. 7. Table 1 See Note 6 1.all types 17. Level Instruments .turbine type Flow Indicating Switches .5 2 3 2 X X X X 1 Block & Vent X X X 7 Remove Blankoff Include in Test See Note 10. Pressure Switches 19. Orifice Plates . Level Switches . Flammable liquids with a flash point < 140° F (60 C) are prohibited. 10.D/P elements 15.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping 2. PSVs.float type 14. Status of instruments during pressure test 10. Page 8 of 9 970086 S801L-1 Any selected test liquid should be nontoxic and nonflammable.positive displacement type Flow Meters . 9.vane type X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 4. Thermowells 22. 6.bellows type Flow Switches .displacer type 12.Screwed 21. . Level Instruments . 3.

B31 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Consult manufacturer for bellows stem sealed valves.Do not force reverse flow. Install after hydrotesting and line flushing. all instruments must be drained and process lead lines blown out with air or nitrogen. 2. 3. In preparation for cold weather and during cold weather testing. 6. block and drain instead. ASME Code for Pressure Piping. 5. Table 1 notes 1. Caution . 7. Blinds not required on PSV outlets discharging into system being tested at 15 PSIG or less. Process Piping. Steam traps 25.Do not over-pressure float or displacer. do not test. If in doubt. 4. References The most recent edition. .3-2002. of the following documents are cited in this document. except as otherwise specified. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) ASME B31. All instruments shall be protected from damage due to freezing.2. 11.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping See Note 6 Block & Vent Remove Blankoff X X Page 9 of 9 970086 S801L-1 Include in Test See Note 24. Filter elements 10. Test gag may be used if one is furnished. Caution .

2.0 3. welding operator. Scope This document defines technical requirements for pipe welding. joint type. Welding qualification 1. The location where each WPS will be used shall be provided in either one of the following forms as part of welding procedure approval: a. Flux-Cored Arc Welding (FCAW). AWS A2. Reference to UOP Piping Classification Number.1. with the following restriction: a. 2. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Mode shall not be short-circuiting.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Piping Welding Page 1 of 4 970086 S801FW-1 1. 2. c. Welding process for field fabrication shall not be GMAW. ASME BPVC Section II Part C ASME BPVC Section IX ASME B31.1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1.3 2. with the following restrictions: a.1. American Welding Society (AWS) 1.2. Welding processes Welding processes shall be one of the following: 1. Welding process for root pass of single-sided joint shall not be FCAW. 2. Welding process used for field fabrication shall not be FCAW. 4. Welding process for root pass of single-sided joint shall not be GMAW. and welding procedure shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Section IX. Gas Metal-Arc Welding (GMAW). External shielding gas shall be used. 4.4 AWS A3. General Welding shall comply with the following codes and standards: 2. 3. b. Welder. b. with the following restrictions: a. Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding (GTAW) Shielded Metal-Arc Welding (SMAW). and location of weld Weld map Welder performance qualification records (WPQs) shall be made available upon demand. 4. 3. Approval of WPSs and PQRs shall be obtained from UOP prior to fabrication. . 3. 2. c. SMAW shall not be used for root pass of single-sided joint. b.

6. b. aluminum. bismuth.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Piping Welding 5. cadmium. the following shall apply: a. Wire brush material shall be stainless steel. d. b. 5. Approval of filler metal for joining dissimilar base materials shall be obtained from UOP. zinc. antimony. Filler metal 1.e. Filler metal shall have at least 0. or any harmful compounds thereof. Part C. Page 2 of 4 970086 S801FW-1 Submerged-Arc Welding (SAW). Weld backing bars or back-up rings shall be as follows: a. 3. 3. d. Filler metal shall comply with ASME Section II. Tack weld shall be. Grinding wheel material shall be aluminum oxide or silicon carbide. 4. Ground out and thoroughly cleaned. gallium. Electrode manufacturer certificates shall be provided. c. Using neutral flux. Joint preparation 1. 8. Electrode-material-control procedure shall be made available upon request. If material is stainless steel.04% carbon. Double-welded groove joints shall have root passes back gouged to sound metal before welding the backside. Electrode manufacturer’s certificates shall be made available upon request. a. magnesium. 5. lead. sulfur. Electrode for welding carbon and low-alloy steels shall be low hydrogen. if cracked or broken. If welding P-8 to P-8 material with at least 0. Electrode-material-control procedure shall meet electrode manufacturer recommendations for storage and handling. . Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. if used for joint fit-up 5. the following shall apply: a. 4. tin. d. Space material shall be identical to base metal. Grinding wheel and wire brush shall not have been previously used. Used for alignment or to maintain root spacing only. 2. 6. The same metallurgy as the base metals The same as the higher metallurgy when joining dissimilar metals Removed after use Consumable inserts shall not be used. Made such that it can be incorporated with the root pass. Made using the same electrode used for the root pass. 7. with the following restrictions: a. c.04% carbon. Marking material shall not contain chloride. 2. prior to being fused in with the final weld. c. Filler metal for joining like base materials shall comply with UOP Standard Specification 8-12-4. b. b.

If postweld heat treatment (PWHT) is required. Made by welder qualified to ASME Section IX. . 7. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 6. The internal purge shall confirm a O2 level of less than 2% before welding begins. Preheat and interpass temperatures 1. The interpass temperatures shall be as follows: a. For batch treatment. 7. 9. Cleaning 1. and heat-treated later. 2. Pressure-retaining P-4 materials shall be post weld heat treated. Local postweld heat treatment shall be performed by induction heating or resistance heating. 8. b. a. 9. 2. and tacking.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Piping Welding e. Top and bottom thermocouples shall be installed on nominal pipe size greater than or equal to 6 One thermocouple shall be installed on nominal pipe size less than 6. gouging. allowed to cool. The tensile test results of any PQR for P-4 material shall not exceed 100. b. b. Postweld heat treatment 1. 175C (350°F) for regular grades of 300 series stainless steel Less than or equal to 250°C (500°F) for low carbon and stabilized grades of 300 series stainless steel. Peening shall not be permitted. At least two thermocouples shall be in contact with the materials in each furnace load to monitor the PWHT temperature. 3. Page 3 of 4 970086 S801FW-1 Single-sided groove joint containing over 2% chromium shall be welded using GTAW with argon back purge maintained for at least two passes. Chart records shall be included in final document package provided. Weld and adjacent pipe shall be heated to 315°C (600°F). 8.000 kg/cm2) at room temperature. wrapped with insulation. A continuous record of the temperature indicated by all thermocouples shall be made on chart recorders. The use of exothermic kits is not allowed. one of the following shall be done: a. 5. thermocouples shall be in contact with the components located in both the top and bottom layers or in the hottest and coldest zones of the furnace charge. Weld shall be heat treated before cooling below 150°C (300°F) after welding. 6.000 psi (7. Weld process for root pass of piping requiring mechanical or chemical internal cleaning shall be GTAW. 7. 4. Material requiring preheat for welding shall receive preheat for thermal cutting. A O2 portable analyzer to confirm the environmental conditions of the space is required.

including refractory anchor and hexmesh attachment welds.0. Hardness testing shall be performed in accordance with an approved written procedure.3. 11. . Hardness testing results shall be traceable to the area taken by means of a marked-up drawing. Standard Welding Terms and Definitions Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. rags. Welding and Brazing Qualifications ASME BPVC Section V. Electrodes. 4. scale. Hardness testing shall be performed after PWHT. 3. except as otherwise specified. Standard Symbols for Welding.4. Weld hardness testing 1. a. 3. References The most recent edition and addenda. Hardness testing results and traceability markup shall be included in the final data package. Welding Rods. dirt. Minimum of one hardness reading shall be taken in the center of each weld pass that is subject to hardness test. loose foreign material such as sand. 2. Hardness testing results shall be recorded on a written form. tools. Discoloration shall be removed from stainless-steel welds after welding. Nondestructive Examination American Welding Society (AWS) AWS A2. b. and Filler Metals ASME BPVC Section IX. and cutting chips shall be removed from the inside and outside of the pipe spools. Brazing and Nondestructive Examination AWS A3.2013-02-12 UOP Specification Piping Welding 2. Weld flux shall be removed from all welds. Page 4 of 4 970086 S801FW-1 After fabrication and heat treatment. of the following documents are cited in this document. Process Piping ASME BPVC Section II Part C. weld spatter. ASME Code For Pressure Piping. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) ASME B31. wood. 10. 4.

Flange surfaces shall be coated with either: a.2. Certification 1.4. Metal tags shall be stainless steel or brass.1. b. Hydrostatic Test Certificates are required for Strainers. b. Dry film thickness shall be at least 3 mils. Preparation for Shipping 1. shall be prepared and supplied with temporary storage coating. 1. except socket weld. 2. e. c. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. A rust-preventative grease. 3. Paint shall be suitable for a severe marine environment.2013-01-11 UOP Specification Piping Specialty Items Page 1 of 2 970086 S890-0 1.3. shall be prepared and painted in accordance with the following requirements: a. f. 2. Piping Specialty Items Piping specialty items shall be supplied in accordance with the following guidelines: 1. Material Certificates are required and as a minimum shall include: a. A metal tag shall be attached to each piping specialty item quoting the item tag number: SP-XXX. 1. Materials 1. or butt weld ends. with socket weld. All external surfaces of all Carbon or low alloy steel items. b. in accordance with manufacturer’s standard coating system. A protective coating that is removable with one of the following: Note. 4. Certificates shall include the BUYERS purchase order number and purchase order item number. Materials shall not contain asbestos. Identification Marking Requirements 1. 3. Surface preparation and protective coating 1. Positive Material Identification (PMI) is required for Stainless Steel or Alloy Steel pressure containing components. . All external surfaces of all Carbon or low alloy steel items. Metal tags shall be minimum 1/32 inch (1 mm) thick Metal tags shall be riveted securely wired to the items with stainless steel wire of a minimum diameter of 1/32 inch (1 mm). 2. 1. 2. d. UOP requests to review the vendor’s painting specification for a severe marine environment. Chemical Analysis by Product Mechanical Properties Heat Treatment Statement Non Destructive Test results Heat or Melt Number All certificates shall state the Manufacturers name and location. or butt weld ends.

2. b. wood fiber. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.2013-01-11 UOP Specification Piping Specialty Items Page 2 of 2 970086 S890-0 1. a plastic sheet shall be placed between the coated connection and cover. . or metal covers are used. Isopropyl alcohol. 3. wood-fiber. The gasket surface of the connections shall be covered with either: a. 2. Acetone. or metal covers. If wood. Heavy-duty plastic connection protectors. Bolted or steel-strapped wood. Note.

ITEM SIZE RATING UOP SPEC. ASME Class 600.0 Operating Pressure: 0. Perforated Conical Strainer (short pattern). these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. Socket Weld Connections.2013-01-14 UOP Technical Data Sheet Piping Specialty Items Page 1 of 2 970086 T890-0 1. Blow-Off Outlet. Screens Shall Be A Minimum Of 24 Gauge (0. 33 holes/Sq. 150% open area relative to flow area of same size pipe . Blow-Off Outlet. ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. Titan Model No. ASME Class 600. REV Piping specialty items List NO. Lined With 30 Mesh (567 Micron) And 0. Mueller Model No 862-SS. UOP MFD NO. DESCRIPTION Strainer Shall Be Furnished With Plugged.28 mm) Diameter Wire Type 316 Stainless Steel Mesh And 45 Percent Open Area. Titan Model No. Lined With 30 Mesh (567 Micron) And 0.0239 Inch) Perforated Type 316 Stainless Steel Plate With 5/32 Inch (4 mm) Diameter Staggered Holes At 3/16 Inch (5 mm) Centers And 63 Percent Open Area. 304 SS Perforated plate 1/8” dia.28 mm) Diameter Wire Type 316 Stainless Steel Mesh And 45 Percent Open Area. Strainer Shall Be Furnished With Plugged. Mueller Model No 862-SS. Socket Weld Connections. Screens Shall Be A Minimum Of 24 Gauge (0. in. Proposal to include pressure drop calculations across strainer under the following conditions: Flow medium: Nitrogen Molecular Weight: 28.0239 Inch) Perforated Type 316 Stainless Steel Plate With 5/32 Inch (4 mm) Diameter Staggered Holes At 3/16 Inch (5 mm) Centers And 63 Percent Open Area. pipe (based on 40% perforated plate) 14 Ga.05 kg/cm2 Operating Temperature: 38 oC 0 SP1002 Y-TYPE STRAINER 3/4" 150# M1A1 CL-L502RM1A1-3/4" D106 0 SP1003 Y-TYPE STRAINER 3/4" 150# M1A1 CL-L516RM1A1-3/4" D106 0 SP1005 CONE TYPE STRAINER (START-UP) 6" 150# PR8 RE-L801R-PR86" D111 Note. wt. LINE NO. ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. Cast Stainless Steel. YS82-SS-UOP Or Equal. YS82-SS-UOP Or Equal. Holes on 3/16” centers (40% open area. Mating flange class 150# RF. Cast Stainless Steel.) Line Size 6”. .011 Inch (0.011 Inch (0. Std.

Stainless Steel body. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. . Free floating guided lever drain trap. valve. Recommended Model: Armstrong 11-LD 0 SP1006 Liquid Drainer Assembly 150# B1A1 V-747-B1A1-¾” D115 Note. leverage system and cap.2013-01-14 UOP Technical Data Sheet Piping Specialty Items NPS ¾– Inlet & NPS ½Outlet Page 2 of 2 970086 T890-0 Oil Drainer for the Lift Gas Blower Drains. seat.

of TPA-CBS-98 6.1. Numbering of the following sections and paragraphs corresponds to section and paragraph numbering of PFI Standard ES-24 and defines additions.2. SCOPE This document defines technical requirements for pipe bending. approval of a written bending procedure shall be obtained from UOP.1. Post bend dimensions shall be within the following tolerances: 1. Recommended Standards for Cold Bending of Pipe and Tube.2013-01-16 UOP Specification Pipe Bending Page 1 of 2 970086 S801P-0 1. Cold Bending Methods Cold pipe bending shall follow the requirements of TPA-CBS-98. as modified herein. Requirements of PFI Standard ES-24 that are not revised remain applicable. Bend shall be measured for ovality. of TPA-IBS-98 Cold Bends . 5. revised September 2003.Table 1-2. The acceptance criteria for maximum ovality shall be as follows: 1. 3. LINEAR AND ANGULAR TOLERANCES 5. Induction bends . Bending Procedure Prior to bending of pipe. 3. BENDING METHODS 3. Induction Bending Induction pipe bending shall follow the requirements of TPA-IBS-98.Shall not exceed 8% Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.1. Circumferential butt welds in the arc of a pipe bend are not allowed.1. 4. and revisions to PFI Standard ES-24.3.2. WELDS IN BENDS 1. . 2. 2. 2. FORM TOLERANCES 6. 3. Hot bending Methods 3. Induction bend – Paragraph 9. of TPA-IBS-98 Cold bend .1. INTRODUCTION Pipe bending shall comply with PFI Standard ES-24. deletions.1.Paragraph 9. Recommended Standards for Induction Bending of Pipe and Tube.

Bend shall be subject to measurement of post-bend wall thickness by ultrasonic examination. 4. Brushing shall be performed with clean. 2. Process and Material Requirements Tube and Pipe Association International (TPA) --Standard TPA-CBS-98.2 and Table 1-1. Stainless Steel Pipe 1. pipe I.2. surface of pipe shall be cleaned of residue before surface finishes are applied. Where lubricant is used for internal mandrel. Tools to be used on stainless steel materials shall not have been previously used on carbon or low alloy steel materials. All dirt. b.D. of TPA-CBS-98 8. Grinding tools for stainless steels shall be either: a.1. CLEANING 8. MATERIAL ALLOWANCES 7. Recommended Standards for Cold Bending of Pipe and Tube --Standard TPA-IBS-98. Where lubricant is used for external tool lubrication. Induction bends – Paragraph 9. INDUSTRY CODES AND STANDARDS  Pipe Fabrication Institute (PFI) --Standard ES-24. or silicon-carbide. The acceptance criteria shall be as follows: 1. Recommended Standards for Induction Bending of Pipe and Tube  Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.5 and Figure 5. 6. copper. 9. 2. 3.1. resin-bonded aluminum-oxide. shall be free of residue before material is shipped.Paragraph 9. Tolerances. 5. sand. lead or materials containing lead compounds. austenitic stainless-steel brushes. 2. lubricant and other foreign matter shall be completely removed. . 8. Pipe Bending Methods. Carbon Steel Pipe 1. of TPA-IBS-98 Cold Bends . Mechanical cleaning tools shall be clean and shall not have been used on low melting point materials such as aluminum.2013-01-16 UOP Specification Pipe Bending Page 2 of 2 970086 S801P-0 7. The set of tools to be used on stainless-steel materials shall be clearly marked for stainless steel use only.

12. D .2013-01-16 UOP Documentation Data Sheet Pipe Bending Page 1 of 1 970086 V801P-0 Proposala Review b One copies of data and documents indicated shall be provided. 9. visual. 7. 11. c Vendor shall complete these two columns to reflect his actual distribution schedule and include this form with his proposal. Two copies of data and documents indicated shall be provided. 3.number of weeks after firm order. One copies of data and documents indicated shall be provided.number of weeks after receipt of approved drawings. F . thickness) Inspection Release Note FINAL DOCUMENTATION: As-Built Dimensions Nomenclature: S . Typical data shall be clearly identified as such. 4. 10. . Finalb DISTRIBUTION RECORD Final-Received from Vendor Final-Due from Vendorc Review-Returned to Vendor Review-Received from Vendor Review-Due from Vendorc DOCUMENT CATEGORY and DESCRIPTION X X X X X X X X X X X X 1. 2. 6. 5. Schedule of Work Pipe Bending Procedure TEST PROCEDURES NDE Procedures CERTIFICATION CMTRs Conformity Declaration Test Result (NDE. 8. (X if no due date is established) a Proposal drawings and data do not have to be certified or as built.number of weeks prior to shipment. b Purchaser will indicate in this column the time frame for submission of materials using the nomenclature given at the end of this form.

except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2. Full couplings are permitted. socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted) =SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET). Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 11/2 T RT T RT RT T BS RTB RTS S P BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT RT RT BW BW T RT RT RT RT RT BW T RT RT RT RT BW T RT RT RT RT T RT RT RT T RT RT T RT T BRANCH CODES: T RT BS BW SP =STRAIGHT TEE =REDUCING TEE (For Reducing Tees. . Half Couplings are NOT Permitted. =WELDOLET =Detail Designer to Decide Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.2013-01-31 UOP Specification Branch Connection Table Page 1 of 1 970086 S8 Branch-1 BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4.

21.2013-02-06 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B1A1 Page 1 of 4 970086 S8B1A1-3 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld Neck (Note11) B1A1 GENERAL PROCESS. Class 150 RF. PLE/TSE. Class 150 RF. socket weld.5 for sizes to NPS 24 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. wall thickness to match pipe. ASME B16. NPS 1-1/2. NPS 1 & 1-1/2. ASTM A 105. BW. MSS SP-95. NPS 2 to 24. SCH.5. ASTM A 105. STD.36 NPT taps.5. ASTM A 105.47 Series A NPS 2 to 24.Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min. SCH. Class 300 RF. SCH STD. SCH.5 Class 150 Small Fittings Large Fittings (Notes 5) Branch Outlet Fittings NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. per ASME B16. Elbolet. NPS 30. STD. STD. . SCH. seamless. Class 3000. STD.. ASTM A 105. seamless. Weldolet. Orifice Flanges Weld Neck Gaskets (Note11) For RF Flanges . ASME B16. 80. NPS 2 to 24 ASTM A 105. dimensions per ASME B16.) filler. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. BW. MSS SP-95. per ASME B16.. ASTM A 105.47 Series A flanges For flat face flanges  Compressed non-asbestosThermiculite 715.3 ASME B16. Sockolet. Class 150 FF. SCH. 80. Class 150 RF. SCH.5 flanges.5. PROCESS WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 150 RF -20°F THRU 700°F / -29°C THRU 371°C 0. STD.063 inch (1.11. 160. 1/16" thick NPS 1/2 to 24 – ASME 16. ASTM A 105.. SCH. ASME B16. with jack screws ASME B16.5 mm) KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31. Class 3000.36 NPT taps.20.20. Concentric Swages (Note 8) Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.. ASTM A 105. socket weld. MSS SP-97. full face. PBE. SCH. ASTM A 105. NPS 2 to 24. ASME B16.5. Class 3000.. 80. with jack screws ASME B16. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. NPS 2 to 30. ASTM A 105. ASME B16. NPS 2 to 24. Class 300 RF. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. ASME B16. SCH. NPS 30 for ASME B16.9. MSS SP-97. ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 24 for ASME B16. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. Class 300 RF. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 105. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.

ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. seamless. Class 800. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. NPS 2 to 24. seamless. MSS SP-95. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. seamless. NPS 1 to 12. PBE. Jack Screw. BBE. seamless. socket weld.. 9) Blinds Spectacle Blinds Spacer Ring Blinds Plate Globe Valves (Note 3) Gate Valves (Notes 2. PBE. ASTM A 105. ASTM A 106 Grade B. forged. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 106 Grade B. TFM/Graphite stem seal. ASME B16.. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2. 4) GA-800 GA-802 GA-801 GA-803 GA-100 CH-800 CH-100 CH-102 CH-3080 BA-104 Check Valves Wafer Check Valves Spring Check valve Ball Valve (Max Operating Temp 150° C) Bolting Seamless Pipe Electric Fusion Welded Pipe Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Class 150 RF. 3. BBE. Class 150. ASTM A 105. threaded full length. forged. retainerless. flangeless. 160. Nipples (Note 6. Class 800. Stud Bolts. flanged. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. Class 800. socket weld. Class 300. ASTM A 106 Grade B. forged. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. Class 150 RF. SCH. NPS 2 to 6 Class 150. 160. full port. threaded full length. NPS 12 to 30. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. GL-800 GL-801 GL-100 NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2. flanged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASME B16. 207 bar. MSS SP-95. . SCH. Viton-O-ring seal. Class 800. 80. ASTM A 105. lug type. hex head. POE/TOE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. socket weld. Class 150. forged. Reinforced Teflon seat. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. ASTM A 106 Grade B. socket weld ends. Class 150. PTFE/Graphite body seal. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2. forged. seamless. STD. socket weld x threaded.2013-02-06 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B1A1 Page 2 of 4 970086 S8B1A1-3 Eccentric Swages (Note 8) NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. STD. SCH. ASTM A 105. ASTM A 105. 80. Class 800. TBE. flanged. 160.48. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2. SCH.48. 80. ASTM A 106 Grade B. fire safe design carbon steel body 316 stainless steel ball and stem. ASTM A 193 Grade B7. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.48. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. socket weld. ASTM A 307 Grade B. forged. NPS 12 to 30. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Standard port. PBE. PLE/TSE. SCH. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. NPS 2 to 14. ASME B16. NPS 16 to 30. ASTM A 105. SCH. ASTM A 582 Grade 303 stainless steel body Female pipe thread. NPS 2 to 24. socket weld x threaded. forged. flanged. ASTM A 672 Grade B65 Class 22. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 105. Class 800. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 2 to 24. SCH. SCH. Class 150 RF.

except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2. Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. .2013-02-06 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B1A1 Page 3 of 4 970086 S8B1A1-3 BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 11/2 T RT T RT RT T BS RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW T RT RT RT RT T RT RT RT T RT RT T RT T BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 10) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET ) Full couplings are permitted.

For Reducing Tees.2013-02-06 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B1A1 Page 4 of 4 970086 S8B1A1-3 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note 10 Note 11 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. and purge connections. socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted. Use flat face flanges and full face gaskets to match flat face flanges only. Teflon tape is not permitted. For level connections. forged valves shall have one end socket weld. forged valves shall have one end socket weld. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall have threaded connection seal welded. other end threaded. For drain. forged valves shall have ASME Class 150 raised face flanged ends. . vent. For instrument root valves. Deleted Use of swaged nipples is not permitted when large end exceeds 2 inch NPS. other end threaded. Use thread compound for threaded joints. Short radius elbows shall not be used.

PROCESS WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 300 RF -20°F THRU 800°F / -29°C THRU 427°C 0. SCH.3 ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.2013-01-09 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A1 Page 1 of 3 970086 S8B2A1-2 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld Neck Orifice Flanges Weld Neck Gaskets Small Fittings Large Fittings (Notes 5) Branch Outlet Fittings (Note 7) Concentric Swages (Note 8) B2A1 GENERAL PROCESS. socket weld. MSS SP-95.5 mm) KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 2 to 24. STD.11. SCH. wall thickness to match pipe. SCH. SCH. 80. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min. SCH. seamless. SCH. MSS SP-95.5. .5. ASTM A 106 Grade B. SCH. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB.) filler. 16080. MSS SP-95. SCH. ASTM A 105. Weldolet. Class 300 RF. NPS 1 & 1-1/2.48. 9) Blinds Spectacle Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Sockolet. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/2 to 24. Class 300 RF. seamless. 80160. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. 80.. PLE/TSE. seamless. NPS 1 to 12. ASTM A 106 Grade B. PBE. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. PBE. NPS 2 to 20. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. ASTM A 105. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. seamless. SCH. TBE. ASTM A 105. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASME B16. NPS 1-1/2. ASME B16. seamless. NPS 2 to 24. PBE. Class 300 RF.5 for sizes to NPS 24 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 105. ASTM A 106 Grade B.. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Class 3000. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. ASME B16. with jack screws ASME B16.9. Class 3000. BW. MSS SP-97. MSS SP-95. TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. MSS SP-97. ASTM A 105. seamless. ASME B16. 160. Class 300 RF. POE/TOE. BW. seamless. Elbolet. 80. SCH. 160. per ASME B16.36 NPT taps. socket weld. SCH. STD. ASTM A 105. 80.063 inch (1. Class 3000. Eccentric Swages (Note 8) Nipples (Note 6. ASTM A 105. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. PLE/TSE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.20. 80160.

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASME B16. threaded full length. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. socket weld ends. Class 300. NPS 2 to 24. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. hex head. ASTM A 582 Grade 303 stainless steel body Female pipe thread. ASTM A 105. ASTM A 106 Grade B. Manufacturer’s standard gear operator. Filled Teflon seats. socket weld. Class 300 RF. Standard port. NPS 2 to 24. Class 800. Temp 150° C) Bolting CH-302 CH-3080 BA-104 NPS 2 to 24. Class 800. ASTM A 193 Grade B7. "Fire-Safe" design. STD. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Class 300. Class 300 RF.. Full Port. STD. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. cast carbon steel. ASTM A 105. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. threaded full length. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. forged.BBE BA-304 Seamless Pipe Electric Fusion Welded Pipe Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. forged. Soft-Sealed. socket weld x threaded. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. flanged. ASTM A 105. forged. socket weld. ASTM A 307 Grade B.48. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. lug type. flangeless. ASTM A 105. flanged. ASME B16. ASTM A 105.. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. socket weld. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. 207 bar. All bolts. NPS 2 to 24. SCH. 80. 4) GA-800 GA-802 GA-801 GA-803 GA-300 Check Valves CH-800 CH-300 Wafer Check Valves Spring Check valve Ball Valve (Max Opr. SCH. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. forged. forged. Jack Screw. Class 800. socket weld. ASTM A 106 Grade B. nuts & screws are to be coated with FluoroKote #1 ®. socket weld x threaded. NPS 2 to 24. ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. PBE. Viton-O-ring seal. . Class 300. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Class 800. Class 800. ASME Class 300 flanged RF. SCH. fire safe design carbon steel body 316 stainless steel ball and stem. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. retainerless. NPS 16 to 24. NPS 1/2 to 4. Class 800. Class 300. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.2013-01-09 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A1 Page 2 of 3 970086 S8B2A1-2 Blinds Spacer Ring Blinds Plate Globe Valves (Note 3) GL-800 GL-801 GL-300 Gate Valves (Notes 2. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 2 to 6 Class 300. full port. forged. Temp 150° C) Ball Valve (Max Opr. TFM/Graphite stem seal. ASTM A 105. 316 stainless steel ball and stem. flanged. 3. forged. TFE/Graphite body seal and stem seal. Stud Bolts. BBE. PTFE/Graphite body seal. ASTM A 105. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2. Reinforced Teflon seat. ASTM A 672 Grade B65 Class 22. flanged.48. NPS 2 to 14.

. Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall have threaded connection seal welded. Use thread compound for threaded joints. For instrument root valves. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. forged valves shall have one end socket weld. other end threaded. Deleted Use of swaged nipples is not permitted when large end exceeds 2 inch NPS. and purge connections. vent. For drain. For level connections. Short radius elbows shall not be used. For Reducing Tees. Teflon tape is not permitted. except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2. socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted. forged valves shall have ASME Class 300 raised face flanged ends. forged valves shall have one end socket weld. Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note 10 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number.2013-01-09 BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A1 Page 3 of 3 970086 S8B2A1-2 The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 T RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW T RT RT RT RT T RT RT RT T RT RT T RT T BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 10) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET ) Full couplings are permitted. other end threaded.

SCH. Sockolet. SCH. Class 300 RF.. seamless. NPS 1-1/2. ASME B16.Compressed non-asbestos. SCH.0 mm) KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31. ASME B16. ASTM A 105. ASTM A 105. Class 6000. wall thickness to match pipe. PROCESS WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 300 RF -20°F THRU 800°F / -29°C THRU 427°C 0. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. with jack screws ASME B16. Orifice Flanges Weld Neck Gaskets For raised face flanges:-Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. SCH.125 inch (3.36 NPT taps.5. For flat face flanges:. SCH. STD. ASME B16. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. ASTM A 105. ASME B16. NPS 2 to 24. seamless. BW. Small Fittings Large Fittings (Notes 5) Branch Outlet Fittings NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 2 to 24. SCH.. ASTM A 105. Class 300 RF. ASTM A 105. MSS SP-95. per ASME B16.11. seamless. MSS SP-97. NPS 1/2 to 24. XXS160. MSS SP-97.) filler.21. MSS SP-95.2013-01-09 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A2 Page 1 of 3 970086 S8B2A2-1 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld Neck B2A2 GENERAL PROCESS. ASTM A 105. .5 Class 300. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. MSS SP-95. ASME B16. MSS SP-95. socket weld. SCH. Same as pipe. with jack screws ASME B16.5. ASTM A 105. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. 160. NPS 2 to 24. PBE. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. STD.5.20.9. ASTM A 105. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Class 300 RF. Match Pipe BW. Class 6000. seamless. SCH. XXS160. SCH. Class 300 FF. 160. NPS 2 to 20. Elbolet. 160. PLE/TSE.3 ASME B16. full face. Class 6000. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. PLE/TSE. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. ASTM A 105. NPS 1 & 1-1/2. socket weld. PBE. Class 300 RF. TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. Weldolet. 160. NPS 2 to 24. 1/16" thick NPS 1/2 to 24 – ASME 16. Concentric Swages (Note 8) Eccentric Swages (Note 8) Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. SCH.36 NPT taps.5 for sizes to NPS 24 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. dimensions per ASME B16.

NPS 1/2 to 4. seamless. NPS 2 to 24. Class 800. socket weld. socket weld ends. 4) GA-800 GA-802 GA-801 GA-803 GA-300 CH-800 CH-300 CH-302 CH-3080 BA-104 Check Valves Wafer Check Valves Spring Check valve Ball Valve (Max Opr. ASTM A 193 Grade B7. Class 800. flanged. 207 bar. Class 300. XXS160. NPS 2 to 24. ASTM A 105. Full Port. NPS 2 to 24. Soft-Sealed. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. All bolts. SCH. Class 300 RF. 160. forged. flanged. 160. Class 800. ASME B16. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. Class 300 RF. XXS160. BBE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. PBE. Jack Screw. nuts & screws are to be coated with FluoroKote #1 ®. Class 300. NPS 2 to 24. Class 300. socket weld x threaded. TFM/Graphite stem seal. Standard port. ASME Class 300 flanged RF. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. forged. ASTM A 105. flanged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Blinds Spectacle Blinds Spacer Ring Blinds Plate Globe Valves (Note 3) Gate Valves (Notes 2. SCH. SCH. Reinforced Teflon seat. PTFE/Graphite body seal. TFE/Graphite body seal and stem seal. ASTM A 105. forged. forged.48.48. SCH. flangeless. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. . ASTM A 106 Grade B. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Temp 150° C) Bolting BA-304 Seamless Pipe Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 3. Class 800. Manufacturer’s standard gear operator. 9) NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. GL-800 GL-801 GL-300 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. ASTM A 106 Grade B. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. 316 stainless steel ball and stem. forged. ASME B16. ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. seamless. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 105. TBE. Viton-O-ring seal. cast carbon steel. socket weld. ASTM A 105. Class 300. POE/TOE. (later if needed). socket weld x threaded. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. ASME B16. fire safe design carbon steel body 316 stainless steel ball and stem. ASTM A 106 Grade B. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 106 Grade B. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. ASTM A 307 Grade B. Class 800. Class 300 RF. SCH. NPS 1 to 12.48. Filled Teflon seats. socket weld. retainerless. hex head. seamless. Stud Bolts. ASTM A 105. PBE. full port. threaded full length. NPS 2 to 6 Class 300. flanged. Class 800. lug type. ASTM A 106 Grade B. socket weld. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. ASTM A 582 Grade 303 stainless steel body Female pipe thread. forged. Temp 150° C) Ball Valve (Max Opr. threaded full length. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 2 to 24. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.2013-01-09 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A2 Page 2 of 3 970086 S8B2A2-1 Nipples (Note 6. NPS 2 to 14. forged. "Fire-Safe" design. ASTM A 105.

.2013-01-09 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A2 Page 3 of 3 970086 S8B2A2-1 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

vent. For drain. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 T RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW T RT RT RT RT T RT RT RT T RT RT T RT T BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 10) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET ) Full couplings are permitted.2013-01-09 BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A2 Page 4 of 3 970086 S8B2A2-1 The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4. forged valves shall have one end socket weld. Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall have threaded connection seal welded. Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note 10 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. Teflon tape is not permitted. other end threaded. Deleted Use of swaged nipples is not permitted when large end exceeds 2 inch NPS. Use thread compound for threaded joints. and purge connections. For Reducing Tees. socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted. except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2. forged valves shall have ASME Class 300 raised face flanged ends. For instrument root valves. forged valves shall have one end socket weld. For level connections. other end threaded. . Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Short radius elbows shall not be used.

Class 800. Class 3000. Class 3000. Small Fittings (Socket weld) Small Fittings (Butt weld) (Note 5) Concentric Swages Eccentric Swages Globe Valves (Note 2) Gate Valves (Notes 2) Check Valves Bolting Seamless Pipe CH-880 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. ASTM A 182 Grade F316. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Class 3000. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. socket weld. ASTM A 182 Grade F316/316L. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Class 150. forged stainless steel. PBE or BBE. SCH. Class 800. ASTM A 182 Grade F316/316L. SW or BW. socket weld..2013-01-07 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class M1A1 M1A1 CORROSIVE PROCESS CLASS 150 RF -50°F THRU 700°F / -45°C THRU 370°C 0. 80S. TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. SCH. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. 80S.6 mm) TP 316/316L STAINLESS STEEL ASME B31. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.11. ASME B16. ASME B16. Class 800.063 inch (1. WP 316L WX or WP 316L WU. Class 800. 80S. socket weld x threaded. ASTM A 312 Grade TP316/316L.11.3 ASME B16. ASME B16. Stud Bolts. forged stainless steel. SCH. RF. ASTM A 193 Grade B8 threaded full length.5. dimensions per ASME B16.11. ASTM A 182 Grade F316. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. . socket weld. BW.) filler. ASTM A 182 Grade F316. GL-880 GA-880 GA-881 NPS 1/2-to 1-1/2.9. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 8 heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. forged stainless steel. ASTM A 182 Grade F316/316L. ASTM A 182 Grade F316/316L. ASTM A 182 Grade F316. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. forged stainless steel.20. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. socket weld. SW or BW.5 Page 1 of 2 970086 S8M1A1-1 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Gaskets NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 403 Grade WP316/316L S. ASME B16.

Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. Use thread compound for threaded joints. Short radius elbows shall not be used except for jacketed piping. other end threaded. and purge connections forged valves shall have one end socket weld.. Use butt welded fittings for jacketed piping Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. For instrument root valves. drain.2013-01-07 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class M1A1 Page 2 of 2 970086 S8M1A1-1 BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 3/4 T RT RT 1 T RT 1-1/2 T BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE BS = SOCKOLET (THREDOLET) CLASS 3000 MINIMUM Full couplings are permitted. Teflon tape is not permitted.. . vent.

MSS SP-97. NPS 1/2 to 2. NPS 1/4 to 2.3 ASME B16. ASME B16. STD. BW. threaded. hex/round head. NPS 3 to 30. 160. Class 3000. ASTM A 105. MSS SP-95.5. SCH.11. ASME B16.5. ASTM A 106 Grade B. STD. Threaded. SCH. seamless.11. integral bronze seat. Threaded. ASTM A 105.5 flanges NPS 30. NPS 3 to 24. ASTM A 105. dimensions per ASME B 16. Class 3000.. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Class 3000. for ASME B16. 1/16" thick.36 NPT taps. ASTM A 105. 160. Class 150 RF.. SCH. NPS 30. ASTM A 105. NPS 1/2-1 1/2. ASTM A 105.5 Class 150. NPS 1/4 to 2. Class 150 RF. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. ASME B16.5 mm) CARBON STEEL / BRONZE / DUCTILE IRON ASME B31. threaded.47 series A flanges. for ASME B16. seamless. Compressed non-asbestos.9. Thredolet. SCH STD. STD. ring type. Class 3000. NPS 1/4 to 2. . SCH. NPS 1/4 to 2. Class 300 RF. Weldolet.47 for NPS 30 NPS 1/2 to 2. ASTM A 105. MSS SP-95. with jack screws ASME B16. TBE. punched per ASME B16. ASTM A 105. 160. ASME B16. seamless. SCH. threaded. Elbolet. RF/FF. Class 3000. TBE. MSS SP-83. ASTM A 105. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. MSS SP-97. ASME B16. NPS 3 to 10.063 inch (1. BW. NPS 1/4 to 2. Small Fittings Large Fittings Unions Couplings Plugs Branch Outlet Fittings Concentric Swages Eccentric Swages Nipples NPS 1/2 to 2. ASME B16.2013-01-28 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS-1 Page 1 of 3 970086 S8MS1-3 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Threaded Flanges Weld Neck Orifice Flanges Gaskets MS-1 REFINERY AIR AND WATER CLASS 150 RF/FF -20°F THRU 300°F / -29°C THRU 149°C 0. NPS 1/2 to 2. SCH. NPS 1/4 to 2. ASTM A 105.47 Series A.21 NPS 1/2 to 24. TBE. threaded. ASME B16..5 for sizes to NPS 24. Class 150. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. solid forged steel. ASTM A 105.

SCH. RF. BBE. Class 200. flanged. TBE. Class 150. square head.2013-01-28 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS-1 Page 2 of 3 970086 S8MS1-3 Blinds Spectacle Globe Valves GL-1160 GL-1170 Gate Valves (Note 2) GA-1160 GA-1170 CH-13160 CH-1170 Ball Valves (Note 2) Butterfly Valves Bolting BA-1160 BF-1170 NPS 1 to 12.. raised face. 160. ductile iron body. ASTM B 62 Alloy C83600.. NPS 2 to 12. ASTM A 307 Grade B. ASTM A 672 Grade B65 Class 22. STD. seamless. flanged. flat face. STD. with one ASTM A 563 Grade A heavy semi-finished hexagonal nut. threaded. NPS 1/4 to 2. BBE. Class 150. flanged. Class 150. threaded. Class 150. Machine Bolts. ASTM B 61 Alloy C83600. ASME B16. bronze. NPS 1/4 to 2. ductile iron body. Class 150. forged. ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536. NPS 3 to 12. NPS 1/4 to 2. NPS 1/2 to 2. ASTM A 395. Normalized. threaded. NPS 3 to 14. ASTM A 106 Grade B. ductile iron body. ASTM A 395. NPS 1/4 to 3. SCH. ASTM B 124 Alloy C37700. Class 150. ASTM A 106 Grade B seamless. SCH. NPS 3 to 6. ASTM A 516 Grade 70. Class 150. Check Valves Pipe Electric Fusion Welded Pipe NPS 16 to 30. . Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. ductile iron body. lug type.48. bronze. Nuts and bolts shall be coated with FluoroKote #1 ®. raised face. NPS 3 to 12. or cast ASTM B 584 Alloy C 84400. ASTM B62 Alloy C83600. Class 150. threaded. bronze. bronze. ASTM A 395.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Full couplings are permitted. Ball valves may be substituted for gate valves.2013-01-28 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS-1 Page 3 of 3 970086 S8MS1-3 BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 3/4 T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW T RT RT RT RT T RT RT RT T RT RT T RT T : BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE BS = THREDOLET CLASS 3000 MINIMUM. Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note 1 Note 2 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. .

Class 150. ASTM B 61 Alloy C 83600. bronze. ASTM B 62 Alloy C 83600. Class 3000. NPS 1/4 to 3. ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 4. ASME B16. bronze. DRINKING WATER CLASS 150 RF -20°F THRU 150°F / -29°C THRU 66°C NONE GALVANIZED STEEL / BRONZE / TP316 / MALLEABLE IRON ASME B31.20. . Class 200. hex head/round. malleable iron. threaded. threaded. malleable iron. Class 150. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min. Globe Valves Gate Valves GL-1160 GA-1160 NPS 1/4 to 3.3.48.) filler. threaded. ASTM A 105. NPS 1/2 to 4. NPS 1/4 to 3. galvanized inside and outside. NPS 1/4 to 3. See branch connection table. NPS 1/4 to 4. solid forged steel. ASME B16. galvanized steel 304 or 316 stainless steel can be substituted in lieu of galvanized steel blinds. threaded. per ASME B16. ASME B 16. Class 150. NPS 1/4 to 4. threaded. for use with Class 150 RF Flanges.03 kg/cm2g. bronze.3 100 PSIG / 7. ASTM A105. ASTM B 62 Alloy C 83600. RF. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Class 150. galvanized inside and outside. ASTM A 105. threaded. galvanized inside and outside.11.2012-10-29 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS-2 Page 1 of 2 970086 S8MS2-0 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Threaded Gaskets Small Fittings (Note 2) Branch Fittings Unions (Note 2) Connections Couplings (Note 2) Plugs Blinds Spectacle MS-2 INSTRUMENT AIR. NPS 3/4 to 3. ASTM A 197 with brass seats.39. galvanized. TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. galvanized inside and outside.5. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 normalized . threaded couplings for steel pipe. Check Valves CH-13160 NPS 1/4 to 3. threaded. ASME B16. ASTM A 197. galvanized inside and outside.

ASTM A 338 material is an acceptable substitute for ASTM A 197 material. forged ASTM B 124 Alloy C 37700 or cast ASTM B 584 Alloy C 84400. STD. For fittings. Stud Bolts. SCH.. Pipe NPS 1/2 to 2. ASTM A 106 Grade B. Nuts and bolts shall be coated with FluoroKote #1 ®. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. 80. threaded full length. bronze. TBE.2012-10-29 BA-1160 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS-2 Page 2 of 2 970086 S8MS2-0 Ball Valves Bolting NPS 1/4 to 3. galvanized inside and outside. threaded. TBE. galvanized inside and outside. Note 1 Note 2 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. unions and couplings. SCH. Class 150. ASTM A 106 Grade B seamless. BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 1/2 3/4 1 11/2 2 3 4 BREANCH SIZE 1/2 3/4 1 T T RT RT RT RT RT T RT RT RT RT RT 1-1/2 2 3 4 T RT RT RT RT T RT RT RT T RT RT T RT T BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (or REDUCING FITTING) See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. . NPS 3 to 4. seamless. ASTM A 193 Grade B7.

ASTM A 182 Grade F316. 4) Globe Valves Gate Valves Check Valves Tubing (Note 2) GL-882 GA-882 CH-882 Class 3000. Hydrotest limited by tubing. seamless. Class 800. ASTM A 269 Grade TP316. NPS 5/8 to 1.2012-10-29 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS-7 MS-7 STAINLESS STEEL TUBING N/A -20°F THRU 800°F / -29°C THRU 427°C NONE TP 316 ASME B31. compression type. Class 800. forged. NPS 1/2 to 1. Seal welding of threaded components not required. seamless. ASTM A 182 Grade F316. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.889 mm) wall. . ASTM A 269 Grade TP316. Branch connections are to be made with an equal tee and union reducer. ASTM A 182 Grade F316. Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number.25 mm) wall.035 inch (0. 0. threaded. NPS 1/4 to 1/2. forged. NPS 1/2 to 1. NPS 1/2 to 1.3 Thru 800 psi Page 1 of 1 970086 S8MS7-0 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Small Fittings (Notes 3. ASTM A 182 Grade F316. threaded. 0. threaded. threaded. forged. Parker CPI or Crawford “Swagelok”. forged. Class 800.049 inch (1.

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.11. Class 3000. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. ASTM A 105.5. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. socket weld. SCH. SCH. PBE. STD. PBE. NPS 2 to 24. Sockolet – NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. MSS SP-95. STD. ASTM A 105.3 ASME B16. Class 150 RF. SCH. Class 150 RF. PLE/TSE.2013-02-06 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS11 MS11 STEAM AND CONDENSATE CLASS 150 RF -20°F THRU 700°F / -29°C THRU 371°C 0. Class 3000. 80. SCH. SCH. ASME B16. SCH. NPS 2 to 24. TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. ASTM A 105. MSS SP-95. ASTM A 105. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min. Weldolet – NPS 2 to 24. MSS SP-95. seamless. per ASME B16.. ASME B16.) filler.5. SCH. socket weld. 80.5 mm) KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. MSS SP-95. seamless. ASTM A 105. ASME B16. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. NPS 1/2 to 24.063 inch (1. Class 3000. MSS SP-97. 10) NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Small Fittings Large Fittings (Note 5) Branch Outlet Fittings Concentric Swages (Note 8.9. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB.BW. 10) Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. seamless. STD. 160. Elbolet – NPS 1 & 1-1/2. . MSS SP-97. SCH. 80. seamless. ASTM A 105. PLE/TSE.20. Eccentric Swages (Note 8. BW ASME B16. 160.5 for sizes to NPS 24 Page 1 of 4 970086 S8MS11-3 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld neck Gaskets NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB.

NPS 2 to 24 Class 150 cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. Class 800. NPS 1 to 12. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. SCH. Class 800. Blinds Spectacle Blinds Spacer Ring Blinds Plate Globe Valves (Note 3) Gate Valves (Notes 2. ASME B16. flanged. ASTM A 106 Grade B. 80. Class 800. threaded full length. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. 9. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 16 to 24. Class 800. ASTM A 106 Grade B. lug type. STD. forged ASTM A 105. 10) NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.48. Class 150. NPS 2 to 24. socket weld. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. Class 800. socket weld. TBE.48. NPS 12 to 24. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. SCH. SCH. BBE. SCH.STD. 3) GA-800 GA-802 GA-801 GA-100 Check Valves CH-800 CH-100 Wafer Check Valves Bolting CH-102 Seamless Pipe Electric Fusion Welded Pipe NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Class 150. forged ASTM A 105. retainerless. NPS 2 to 6. ASTM A 106 Grade B. flangeless Stud Bolts – ASTM A 193 Grade B7. PBE. POE/TOE. GL-800 GL-801 GL-100 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. forged ASTM A 105. ASME B16. . NPS 2 to 14.2013-02-06 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS11 Page 2 of 4 970086 S8MS11-3 Nipples (Note 6. seamless. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. seamless. flanged. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Class 150 RF. flanged. ASTM A 106 Grade B. full port. All bolts. forged ASTM A 105. socket weld. Class 150 RF. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. ASTM A 106 Grade B. forged ASTM A 105. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. socket weld x threaded. 160. seamless. Class 150 RF. 80. BBE. NPS 12 to 24. ASTM A 672 Grade B60 Class 21 SCH. nuts & screws are to be coated with FluoroKote #1 ®. socket weld x threaded. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. 160. Class 150.. NPS 2 to 24. socket weld. ASME B16. Class 800. forged ASTM A 105. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.48. SCH. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. PBE.

Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: BRANCH SIZE RUN 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 SIZE 3/4 T 1 RT T 1-1/2 RT RT T 2 BS RT RT T 3 BS BS BS RT T 4 BS BS BS BW RT T 6 BS BS BS BW BW RT T 8 BS BS BS BW BW BW RT T 10 BS BS BS BW BW BW RT RT T 12 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW RT RT T 14 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW RT RT RT T 16 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW BW RT RT RT 18 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW BW BW RT RT 20 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW BW BW RT RT 24 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW BW BW BW RT BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 4) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET) Full couplings are permitted. except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2.2013-02-06 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS11 Page 3 of 4 970086 S8MS11-3 BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4. . Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET 16 18 20 24 T RT RT RT T RT RT T RT T Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 80. . For instrument root valves.2013-02-06 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS11 Page 4 of 4 970086 S8MS11-3 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note 10 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. For Reducing Tees. and purge connections. other end threaded. ¼” Threaded end shall be SCH. For drain. other end threaded. Teflon tape is not permitted. forged valves shall have one end socket weld. Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall have threaded connection seal welded. Use thread compound for threaded joints. Short radius elbows shall not be used. Deleted Use not permitted when large end exceeds 1-1/2 inch NPS. forged valves shall have one end socket weld. vent. socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted.

Class 3000. ASTM A 106 Grade B. ASTM A 106 Grade B. SCH. Small Fittings Large Fittings (Note 5) Branch Outlet Fittings (Note 7) Concentric Swages Eccentric Swages NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 105. . seamless. POE/TOE. ASME B16. STD.5 for sizes to NPS 12 Page 1 of 3 970086 S8MS12-2 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld Neck Gaskets NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 105. ASTM A 105. seamless. ASME B16. MSS SP-95. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. 9) NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. PBE.. PLE/TSE. seamless. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. MSS SP-95. Class 3000. SCH. MSS SP-97. PBE. Class 300 RF.5.48.) filler. 80.5 mm) KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31.20. MSS SP-95. 80. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. SCH. 80160. SCH. seamless. SCH. SCH. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. NPS 1 to 12. 80160. SCH. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB.9. BW. Elbolet. Nipples (Note 6. Weldolet. BW. STD. NPS 1/2 to 12. Class 300 RF. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.063 inch (1. NPS 1 & 1-1/2. Class 150 RF. Class 3000. NPS 2 to 12. SCH. MSS SP-95. ASTM A 105. TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. ASME B16. Sockolet. PLE/TSE. Blinds Spectacle Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. seamless. ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. socket weld. NPS 2 to 12. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. PBE. ASTM A 106 Grade B. 80. STD. 80160. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB.5. TBE. SCH.3 ASME B16. NPS 2 to 6. MSS SP-97. ASTM A 105. seamless. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.2013-01-09 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS12 MS12 STEAM AND CONDENSATE CLASS 300 RF -20°F THRU 800°F / -29°C THRU 427°C 0. seamless. SCH. 80.11. ASME B16.. socket weld. per ASME B16.. 80160. ASTM A 105. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. SCH.

80. NPS 1-1/2 and smaller. NPS 2 to 12. forged. STD. nuts & screws are to be coated with FluoroKote #1 ®. forged. Stud Bolts. 4) GA-800 GA-802 GA-801 GA-300 Check Valves CH-800 CH-300 Wafer Check Valves Bolting CH-302 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS12 Page 2 of 3 970086 S8MS12-2 Globe Valves (Note 3) NPS 1-1/2 and smaller. NPS 2 to 12. BBE. Class 800. Class 800. socket weld. Class 800. Class 800. retainerless. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. socket weld x threaded. Class 800. flangeless. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. forged. socket weld. SCH. threaded full length. ASTM A 105. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. ASTM A 193 Grade B7. ASTM A 106 Grade B. ASTM A 105. flanged. Class 300. NPS 2 to 12. forged. flanged. 3. full port. . ASTM A 105. NPS 2 to 6 Class 300. SCH. NPS 1-1/2 and smaller. NPS 1-1/2 and smaller. flanged. forged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. All bolts. ASTM A 105. ASTM A 105. socket weld x threaded. forged. Seamless Pipe Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.. lug type. ASTM A 105. Class 800. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. NPS 1-1/2 and smaller. NPS 1-1/2 and smaller. socket weld. ASTM A 106 Grade B. Class 300. Class 300. socket weld.2013-01-09 GL-800 GL-801 GL-300 Gate Valves (Notes 2. PBE. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. NPS 2 to 12.

and purge connections. Use thread compound for threaded joints.2013-01-09 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS12 Page 3 of 3 970086 S8MS12-2 BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4. For Reducing Tees. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: BRANCH SIZE RUN 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 SIZE 3/4 T 1 RT T 1-1/2 RT RT T 2 BS RT RT T 3 BS BS BS RT T 4 BS BS BS BW RT T 6 BS BS BS BW BW RT T 8 BS BS BS BW BW BW RT T 10 BS BS BS BW BW BW RT RT T 12 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW RT RT T BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 4) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET) Full couplings are permitted. other end threaded. Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted. For instrument root valves. . vent. is acceptable alternate to WELDOLET for branch outlet fittings. manufactured by WFI. Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET (Note 7) PIPET. Teflon tape is not permitted. Deleted Deleted Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall have threaded connection seal welded. Short radius elbows shall not be used. except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2. forged valves shall have one end socket weld. other end threaded. forged valves shall have one end socket weld. For drain.

ASME B16. 316 SS. Weldolet  NPS 2. TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. RF. flanged. BW. MSS SP-97.25 CR . Class 300. ASME B16. RF. dimensions per ASME B16.9. SCH. MSS SP-97. ASME B16. . 316 stainless steel stem. for use with reinforcement pad. SCH. BW. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.5. Latrolet  NPS 1 & 1-1/2. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. MSS SP-97.3 ASME B16.) filler.5. NPS 1 to 2. ASTM A 182 Grade F11.5 NPS 1 to 2. Note. BW. 80. ASTM A 234 Grade WP11. BW NPS 3 to 8. ASME B16. 160. ASTM A 182 Grade F11 SCH 160. SCH. RF. NPS 3 to 8. MSS SP-97. Class 300. Fittings Branch Outlet Fittings Elbolet  NPS 1 & 1-1/2. BW.5 MO (Notes 2) ASME B31. BW. SCH. 80. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min. SCH. NPS 1/2 to 10. SCH 160. Ball Valves (Note 6) BA-387 NPS 1 to 8.20. SCH.9.2013-01-10 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-1 Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR1-2 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 5) Gaskets PR-1 CATALYST WITHDRAWL LINE WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 300 RF -20°F THRU 1025°F / -29°C THRU 551°C Note 3 1. 80. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. 160. ASTM A 182 Grade F11.0. ASTM A 234 Grade WP11. Stellite or 316 SS with Stellite overlay or 316 SS with metallurgically bonded abrasion resistant coating ball and seat. Class 300. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. 160. Weldolet  NPS 2 ½ to 8.

Branch welds that cannot be radiographed shall be 100% ultrasonically examined. threaded. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts Stud bolts {Over 900°F (482°C)} . BE. shall be 100% radiographed. SCH. Welding neck flanges must be tapered bored where indicated on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams. applicable to 1Cr .1/2 Mo Materials  Pressure retaining components (regardless of size.ASTM A 193 Grade B7. Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note. full length.  Pressure retaining welds. Note 1 Note 2 See UOP Project Specification UOPM S8V000 for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class. BE. thickness or product form) shall be postweld heat treated (PWHT) in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.3.1/2 Mo and 1-1/4 Cr . ASTM A 335 Grade P11. seamless. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 4 heavy semifinished hexagonal nuts.2013-01-10 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-1 Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR1-2 Bolting Stud Bolts { 900°F (482°C) and under} . these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.  The maximum room temperature tensile strength of all pressure retaining components and welds shall be 100. seamless. .  Fillet welds to pressure retaining components shall be ground to a smooth. 4) NPS 1 to 2.000 psi (7030 kg/cm2). ASTM A 335 Grade P11. 160. 80. threaded. Postweld heat treatment (PWHT) shall follow the requirements of ASME B31. Design and Fabrication of piping shall allow for all welds to be ground smooth to match I.ASTM A 193 Grade B16. concave contour.D. SCH. Piping schedules indicated herein include corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. Pipe (Note 3. Maximum temperature 450 Degrees F ( 232 Degrees C). NPS 3 to 8. This is to minimize catalyst attrition.3 and UOP Project specification 801 requirements as listed below. No exemptions from postweld heat treatment are permitted. full length. whether shop or field. of pipe.

3 ASME B16. 160. Weldolet ― NPS 3 to 10. Class 300. RF. . 80. Gaskets Large Fittings Branch Outlet Fittings Weldolet ― NPS 1/2 to 2. BW. RF. 160. Class 300. SCH. ASTM A 105. SCH. ASTM A 105. 160. BW. 160.2013-01-04 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-2 Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR2-1 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 4) PR-2 CATALYST WITHDRAWAL LINE CLASS 300 RF -20°F THRU 550°F / -29°C THRU 288°C NOTE 2 KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31. RF. ASME B16. ASTM A 105. BE. NPS 2 1/2 to 10. ASTM A 106 Grade B. ASTM A 105. threaded. 3) BA-386X NPS 1 to 10. SCH. SCH. Latrolet ― NPS 1/2 to 2. BW. Class 300.9. full length.) filler. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.5.20. B-Ball Valves (Note 5) Bolting Pipe (Note 2. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. SCH. seamless. NPS 3 to 10. NPS 3 to 10. Note. ASME B16.9. 316 Stainless steel ball and stem. NPS 1/2 to 2. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. SCH. BE. SCH. Filled Teflon seated Stud Bolts ― ASTM A 193 Grade B7. BW. flanged. ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 2. MSS SP-97. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. SCH. ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. ASTM A 106 Grade B. 160.5. MSS SP-97. ASTM A 105. seamless. TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. ASME B16. dimensions per ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 10. BW. MSS SP-97. SCH. 80.5 NPS 1/2 to 2. cast Steel. 80. 80.

Piping schedules indicated herein include corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow.D. This is to minimize catalyst attrition. . Welding neck flanges must be tapered bored where indicated on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams. Valve shall be installed where indicated as “B” on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams.2013-01-04 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-2 Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR2-1 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 See UOP Project Specification 970086 S8V000 for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class. Design and Fabrication of piping shall allow for all welds to be ground smooth to match I. Note. of pipe. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

Class 300.9. BW. SCH. ASTM A 105. BW. ASTM A 106 Grade B. 3) NPS 1/2 to 2. 160. . ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. SCH. 80. RF. ASTM A 105. Pipe (Note 2.5. NPS 2 1/2 to 10. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB.80. SCH. Class 300. RF.5 Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR3-0 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 4.20. ASTM A 106 Grade B. ASME B16. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. BW. ASTM A 105.160. ASTM A 105. SCH. RF.3 ASME B16. Bolting Stud Bolts . Fittings Branch Outlet Fittings Weldolet  NPS 1/2 to 2. NPS 2-1/2 to 10.2012-11-02 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-3 PR-3 CATALYST CLASS 150 RF -20°F THRU 850°F / -29°C THRU 454°C NOTE 2 KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31.9. 160. BE. BW. ASME B16. 160. Class 300. per ASME B16. Gaskets Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min. NPS 2 1/2 to 10. 160. ASME B16.80. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. 5) NPS 1/2 to 2.ASTM A 193 Grade B7. full length. ASME B16. All bolts. Latrolet  NPS 1/2 to 2. TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. MSS SP-97. Weldolet  NPS 2 1/2 to 10. NPS 1/2 to 10. SCH. 80.5. ASTM A 105. 160. SCH. MSS SP-97. NPS 1/2 to 2. nuts & screws are to be coated with FluoroKote #1 ®. BE. Class 150. 80.5. SCH. seamless.) filler. RF. SCH. ASTM A 105. ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 2. SCH. seamless. ASTM A 105. BW. ASTM A 105. MSS SP-97. SCH.5. SCH. Latrolet  NPS 2 1/2 to 10. MSS SP-97. threaded. SCH. NPS 2-1/2 to 10. 80. ASME B16. BW. Note.

094” shall be used.2012-11-02 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-3 Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR3-0 Note 1 Note 2 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. a minimum corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0. Piping schedules indicated herein include corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. Use Class 300 flanges to match with Class 300 flanges. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. Design and Fabrication of piping shall allow for all welds to be ground smooth to match I. . Welding neck flanges must be tapered bored where indicated on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams. unless noted otherwise in the project specifications. Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note. This is to minimize catalyst attrition. of pipe.D.

API 590.3 ASME B16. SCH. 80. 80. 80. 80. ASTM A 403 Grade WP304-S. Class 150. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. MSS SP-95. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H. ASTM A 105. socket weld. SCH. Concentric ― NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.3) Fittings Branch Outlet Fittings Swages Latrolet ― NPS 1/2 to 8. ASME B16. SCH. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. SCH. SCH.. Note. ASTM A 53 Grade B or ASTM A 106 Grade B. MSS SP-95.9 NPS 2 to 8. ASME B16. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. PBE. 80. DUR O LOK coupling. heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. ASTM A 105. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.20.9. . ASME B16. ASTM A 105. SCH. Blinds Spectacle Bolting Pipe (Notes 1 & 2) NPS 1 to 8. NPS 1 1/2 and smaller. SCH. seamless. Eccentric ― NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Weldolet ― NPS 1/2 to 8. dimensions per ASME B16. ASTM A 285 Grade C. 80. BW. Couplings (Notes 1 &. Class 150.2013-01-24 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-4 Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR4-1 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: Flanges Weld Neck (Note 3) Gaskets PR-4 CATALYST LIFT LINE CLASS 150 RF -20°F THRU 550°F / -29°C THRU 288°C NOTE 2 KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31. SCH. Stud Bolts ― ASTM A 193 Grade B7. TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. NPS 1/2 to 8. seamless. RF. full length. seamless. threaded. 80. RF. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. forged. NPS 1/2 to 812. PBE.) filler. ASTM A 105. Class 3000. Garfoil flat gasket for High Temp Service.5 NPS 1/2 to 8. 80.5.

1. 1. 1.3. Join pipe sections together as shown on UOP Standard Drawing 8-127 (latest revision) using a TP 304 stainless steel UOP Dur O Lok coupling.4. 1. Note 2 Pipe schedule indicated herein includes corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. a minimum corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0.1 meters) minimum.2013-01-24 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-4 Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR4-1 Note 1 To minimize catalyst attrition. Use long radius pipe bends for all changes in direction with radius as specified on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations.2. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. Use minimum lineal feet (meters) of pipe. . 20 feet (6. Note 3 Note.094” shall be used. this piping is to be fabricated in accordance with the following requirements: 1. to minimize the number of joints. unless noted otherwise in the project specifications. Refer to UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams for piping section requirements and special 110° elbow detail. Flanged connections are to be welding neck with the inside weld ground smooth. No substitution allowed. Use maximum lengths of pipe.

Concentric ― NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600. Fittings for tubing Class 3000 forged threaded compression type ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600 Branch Outlet Fittings Swages ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600. 80. SCH. 80. ASTM A 182 F11 with Inconel 600ASTM B564 UNS N06600 stub ends.5 NPS 1/2 to 1 1/2. socket weld NPS 2 to 8 inch. Class 150. SCH. NPS 1 1/2 and smaller. MSS SP-95. ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. Class 150 RF. Socket Weld. with jack screws ASME B16.20 with Inconel 600 windings and Garfoil® filler. RF. Class 150 RF. SCH. Class 3000.36 NPT taps.36 NPT taps. Eccentric ― NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. with jack screws ASME B16.063 inch (1. seamless. ASTM A 234 Grade WPBB366 Class WPNCI. Gaskets Fittings Spiral wound with in accordance with ASME B16. ASTM A 234 Grade WPBB366 Class WPNCI. ID to match the inside of pipe. SCH.2013-01-10 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-5 Page 1 of 3 970086 S8PR5-1 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: Flanges Flanges Weld Neck PR-5 PROCESS CHLORINATED HOT AIR CLASS 150 RF (NOTE 1) -20°F THRU 1000°F / -29°C THRU 540°C 0. ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600. . 10 inch and larger ASME Class 150 forged lap joint. Orifice Flanges NPS 1-1/2.3 ASME B16.5 mm) Inconel 600 (UNS N06600) ASME B31. ASTM B 366 Class WPNCI. socket weld NPS 2 and larger.. PBE. RF. ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600. seamless. ID to match the inside of pipe. Same as Pipe. MSS SP-95. PBE. Note. 80. Class 150. NPS 2 to 24 ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600. forged.

NPS ½ to 1 ½in. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 4.3. CL 150 RF. OS&Y. hard faced seats.375 in. ASTM A494 Gr. hard faced seats. CL 150 RF. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. Alloy 600 trim. bolted Cap. hard faced seats. ASTM B 167. API 602 NPS 2” to 24”. hard faced seats. Alloy UNS N06600 SCH. NPS 1”. longitudinal welds 100% radiograph per ASME B31. Alloy 600 trim. threaded. HF seat. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet. 80S PBE. Alloy UNS N06600. Alloy 600 trim. hard faced seats. hard faced seats. flexible wedge. Alloy UNS N06600 SCH. Seamless. ASME Class 600 cast socket weld. CL 150 RF. OS&Y bolted bonnet. 0.035 inch (0. OS&Y bolted bonnet. Swing Check.89mm) wall. nuts. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet. Hot rolled.48.34 2” to 12”. GL-6181 GL-1180 Gate Valves (NOTES 3 & 4) GA-6180 GA-1180 GA-1181 Check Valves (Notes 3 & 4) CH-6180 CH-1180 Blinds Spectacle Bolting Pipe (Notes 1 & 2) Nipples Tubing NPS ½ to 1 ½in. Seamless. Swing Check. Note. ASTM A494 Gr CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet cap. Alloy 600 trim. NPS 2 to 6 in. ASTM A494 Gr. ASME B16. flexible wedge. OS&Y. OS&Y. Alloy 600 trim. SCH 5S0. Alloy UNS N06600. NPS 24 18 in and larger. ASTM B 167. fusion welded per ASTM B168. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet. HF seat. Alloy UNS N06600 SCH. ASTM A494 Gr.34 NPS ¾”. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet. ASME Class 600 cast. ½” to 1 ½”. . STD BE. ASME B16. CL 600 SW.2013-01-10 GL-6180 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-5 Page 2 of 3 970086 S8PR5-1 Globe Valves (NOTES 3 & 4) NPS ½” to 1 ½”. ASTM A494 Gr. ASME Class 600 cast socket weld. ASME B16.34 NPS 1 to 8. full length. ½” OD. Stud Bolts ― ASTM A 193 Grade B16. ASTM B 167. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet. OS&Y bolted bonnet. ASTM A494 Gr CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet cap. ASME B16. ASTM B 444 Gr 1. Alloy 600 trim. API 600. ASME B16. 80S PE. ASTM A 285 Grade CA168 UNS N06600. Seamless. CL 150 RF. ASTM A494 Gr. RF. bolted Cap. bolted bonnet. Alloy 600 trim.34 NPS ½” to 1 ½”. bolted bonnet. bolted bonnet. SW X Threaded NPS 2” to 6”. API 590ASME B16.34. Class 150. ASTM A494 Gr. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet. Alloy 600 trim. API 600.

No elastomeric components shall be allowed in the valves. section VIII. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.5. . Where the flange design temperature exceeds the limit of ASME B16.2013-01-10 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-5 Page 3 of 3 970086 S8PR5-1 Note 1 Note 2 All Inconel 600 (Alloy UNS N06600) material shall be supplied in annealed condition. Division 1 of the ASME Code. Each casting shall meet the hydrostatic test requirements of ASTM Specification A 703. the contractor shall verify the flange ratings in accordance with Appendix 2. Note 3 Note 4 Note.

SCH. ASME B16. MSS SP-95. Blinds Spectacle Bolting Seamless Pipe NPS 1 to 8. Concentric ― NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. 80.3 ASME B16.20. Note. Garfoil flat gasket for High Temp Service NPS 1 ½ and smaller. ASME B16. Stud Bolts ― ASTM A 193 Grade B7. SCH. 80. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. SCH.5 NPS 1/2 to 8.5. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. RF. PBE. NPS 1/2 to 8. SCH. ASTM A 105. heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. SCH. Class 3000 forged socket weld NPS 2 to 8. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H. threaded. ASTM A 515 Grade 70. dimensions per ASME B16.9.2013-01-25 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-6 Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR6-1 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: Flanges Weld Neck (Note 3) Gaskets PR-6 CATALYST LIFT LINE WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 300 RF -20°F THRU 550°F / -29°C THRU 288°C NOTE 2 KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31. 80.80. seamless. ASTM A 105. full length. Eccentric ― NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. Class 300. BW. Couplings (Note 1. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB.) filler. ASTM A 105.3) Fittings Branch Outlet Fittings Swages Latrolet ― NPS 1/2 to 8. 80. ASTM A 106 Grade B. . SCH. API 590. 80.80. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min. seamless. PBE. SCH. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. MSS SP-95. RF. DUR O LOK coupling. NPS 1/2 to 128. ASTM A 403 Grade WP 304-S. Class 300..

1. Flanged connection is to be welding neck with inside ground smooth after welding. Refer to UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams for piping section requirements and special 110° elbow detail. Flanges are not allowed except as noted as “FLANGE” on the UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams. Join pipe sections together as shown on UOP Standard Drawing 8-127 (latest revision) using a TP 304 stainless steel UOP Dur O Lok coupling. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. Note 2 Pipe schedule indicated herein includes corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow.094” shall be used. this piping is to be fabricated in accordance with the following requirements: 1. 1. 1.1 meters) minimum. a minimum corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0. No substitution allowed. Note 3 Note. to minimize the number of joints.2013-01-25 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-6 Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR6-1 Note 1 To minimize catalyst attrition.5. 1. . unless noted otherwise in the project specifications.4. 20 feet (6. Use minimum lineal feet (meters) of pipe. Flanged connections are to be welding neck with the inside weld ground smooth.1. Use maximum lengths of pipe.3. Use long radius pipe bends for all changes in direction with radius as specified on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams. The flanged connection is to be inspected by the UOP chief operator before assembly. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations.2.

Elbolet. Sockolet. ASTM A 105. ASME B16. NPS 1/21/4 to 1-1/2. Small Fittings Large Fittings (Notes 5) Branch Outlet Fittings Concentric Swages (Note 8.5. MSS SP-97.063 inch (1.. NPS 2 to 24 ASTM A 105. SCH. BW. 12) Eccentric Swages (Note 8. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2. SCH. Class 3000.) filler.5. Class 300 RF. socket weld. with jack screws ASME B16. ASTM A 105.5 for sizes to NPS 24.20. NPS 2 to 30. PLE/TSE. ASME B16. NPS 1-1/2. seamless.11. NPS 2 to 24. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB.2013-02-06 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-8 Page 1 of 4 970086 S8PR8-2 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld Neck (Note11) Orifice Flanges Weld Neck PR-8 GENERAL PROCESS CLASS 150 RF -20°F THRU 700°F / -29°C THRU 371°C 0. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. NPS 1/21/4 to 1-1/2.3 ASME B16. ASME B16.. SCH. ASTM A 105. NPS 30. 80. BW. 80. . NPS 1/2 to 24 for ASME B16. NPS 2 to 24. Class 3000. SCH. STD. 12) Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. ASME B16. NPS 30 for ASME B16. ASME B16.47 series A for NPS 30 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. SCH STD.36 NPT taps. 16080. ASTM A 105.5 flanges. Class 300 RF. Class 150 RF. ASTM A 105. 16080. PBE. 80. wall thickness to match pipe. Class 300 RF.47 Series A flanges NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. SCH. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB.20. STD. SCH. ASTM A 105. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.36 NPT taps. ASME B16. STD. MSS SP-97. SCH. Weldolet.. Gaskets (Note11) Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min. ASTM A 105. Class 150 RF. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. SCH. seamless. ASTM A 234 Grade WPB. STD. SCH. MSS SP-95. PBE. MSS SP-95.. per ASME B16.5 mm) KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31. ASTM A 105. TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. PLE/TSE. ASTM A 105. Class 150 RF. socket weld. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2.5.47 Series A NPS 2 to 24. Class 3000.9. MSS SP-95. seamless. with jack screws ASME B16. SCH. per ASME B16. seamless. NPS 1 & 1-1/2. ASME B16. MSS SP-95. 80.

Class 800. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB.5 mm) orifice. 80160. flangeless. ASTM A 105. forged. NPS 16 to 30.48. integral-bonnet needle valve. ASTM A 106 Grade B. 3. female pipe thread.187 in (4. PBE.. socket weld. socket weld. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized.48. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. socket weld. Viton-O-ring seal. 80. 9.48. 4) GA-800 GA-802 GA-801 GA-803 GA-100 CH-800 CH-100 CH-102 CH-3080 NE-3080 Check Valves Wafer Check Valves Spring Check valve Needle Valves (Temp Limit 250°F (120°C)) Bolting Stud Bolts. ASTM A 307 Grade B. flanged. flanged. socket weld x threaded. Class 150. 0. 80. ASTM A 106 Grade B. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. ASTM A 105. ASME B16. 12) NPS 1/21/4 to 1-1/2. seamless. Class 800. SCH. threaded full length. POE/TOE. forged. Class 800. Class 300. socket weld. straight through rising plug valve. ASTM A 106 Grade B.063 in (1. BBE. Jack Screw. STD. NPS 2 to 6 Class 150. ASME B16. flanged. ASTM A 193 Grade B7.2013-02-06 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-8 Page 2 of 4 970086 S8PR8-2 Nipples (Note 6. forged. Bar stock globe-type metering valve. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. ASTM A 105.175 in (4. hex head. retainerless. forged. NPS 12 to 30. ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized. SCH. NPS 12 to 30. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. male pipe thread. NPS 1/4. SCH. ASTM A 105. ASTM A 105. SCH. 316 SS body. GL-800 GL-801 GL-100 NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2. regulating stem. forged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.8 mm) orifice. BBE. lug type. Seamless Pipe Electric Fusion Welded Pipe Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 582 Grade 303 stainless steel body Female pipe thread. NPS 2 to 14. forged. flanged. threaded full length. NPS 1/4. Class 150. Class 150 RF. Class 800. Class 800. ASTM A 105.. PBE. NPS 2 to 24. 80160. Class 800. SCH. NPS 1/21/4 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 105. TBE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/4. SCH. STD. Blinds Spectacle Blinds Spacer Ring Blinds Plate Globe Valves (Note 3) Gate Valves (Notes 2. seamless. female pipe thread. seamless. 316 SS body. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. 316 SS body. full port. ASTM A 106 Grade B. 0. socket weld x threaded. forged. NPS 2 to 24. Class 150 RF. Class 150 RF. 207 bar. ASTM A 106 Grade B.4 mm) orifice. Class 150. ASTM A 672 Grade B65 Class 22. NPS 1 to 12. . 0. NPS 2 to 24.

except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2. Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. . Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 11/2 T RT T RT RT T BS RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW T RT RT RT RT T RT RT RT T RT RT T RT T BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 10) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET) Full couplings are permitted.2013-02-06 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-8 Page 3 of 4 970086 S8PR8-2 BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4.

For drain. Deleted Use of swaged nipples is not permitted when large end exceeds 2 inch NPS. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Use flat face flanges and full face gaskets to match flat face flanges only. forged valves shall have one end socket weld.2013-02-06 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-8 Page 4 of 4 970086 S8PR8-2 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note 10 Note 11 Note 12 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. Teflon tape is not permitted. socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted. Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall have threaded connection seal welded. other end threaded. For level connections. ¼” NPT end connections are allowed & shall be SCH 80. For Reducing Tees. Short radius elbows shall not be used. forged valves shall have ASME Class 150 raised face flanged ends. Use thread compound for threaded joints. . vent. For instrument root valves. forged valves shall have one end socket weld. other end threaded. and purge connections.

dimensions per ASME B16. RF. ASTM A 182 Grade F11.2012-12-19 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-10 Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR10-1 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 7) Gaskets PR-10 CATALYST LIFT LINE WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 300 RF -20°F THRU 1025°F / -29°C THRU 551°C Note 2 1. Stud bolts {Over 900°F (482°C)} .20. SCH. threaded. RF. cast steel. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. full length. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. GA-820 GA-821 GA-320 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. threaded. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.) filler. full length.25 CR . 80. SCH. forged. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. SCH. Note. SCH. ASTM A 234 Grade WP11.5. forged.5 NPS 1/2 to 12. . flanged. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min. MSS SP-97. SCH.9. 80. seamless.5 MO (Note 3) ASME B31. NPS 2 to 12. BW. ASTM A 217 Grade WC6. socket weld x threaded.ASTM A 193 Grade B16. BW. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 4 heavy semifinished hexagonal nuts. Fittings (Note 4) Branch Outlet Fittings Gate Valves (Note 5. Class 800. TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. 80. Class 800. ASME B16. Stud Bolts {900°F (482°C) and under} . with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. ASTM A 335 Grade P11. 6) Bolting Pipe NPS 1/2 to 8. ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 8. 80. PEBE.0.ASTM A 193 Grade B7. Class 300. socket weld. NPS1 1/2 to 12.3 ASME B16. Class 300. 80 Weldolet  NPS 1 1/2 to 10.

Pipe schedule indicated herein includes corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. concave contour. whether shop or field.3. and purge connections. unless noted otherwise in the project specifications.  The maximum room temperature tensile strength of all pressure retaining components and welds shall be 100. Branch welds that cannot be radiographed shall be 100% ultrasonically examined. thickness or product form) shall be postweld heat treated (PWHT) in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31. In addition the flanges must be tapered bored to a depth of 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) as required to match the ID of all connecting piping and valves.3 and UOP Project specification 801 requirements as listed below. applicable to 1Cr . Short radius elbows shall not be used. forged valves shall one socket weld end and other threaded end Welding neck flanges are to be bored to suit schedule of pipe. Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note.000 psi (7030 kg/cm2).1/2 Mo Materials:  Pressure retaining components (regardless of size. shall be 100% radiographed. No exemptions from postweld heat treatment are permitted. .1/2 Mo and 1-1/4 Cr . vent. Postweld heat treatment (PWHT) shall follow the requirements of ASME B31. a minimum corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0. forged valves shall have one socket weld end and other threaded end For instrument root valves.  Pressure retaining welds.094” shall be used.2012-12-19 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-10 Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR10-1 Note 1 Note 2 See UOP Specification 970086 S8VCI for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. For drain. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.  Fillet welds to pressure retaining components shall be ground to a smooth.

RF. BW.. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min. BW. NPS 2. SCH. 316 SS. Stellite or 316 SS with Stellite overlay or 316 SS with metallurgically bonded abrasion resistant coating ball and seat. 160.9. dimensions per ASME B16. ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. MSS SP-97. ASTM A 234 Grade WP11WPB. 160. 80. MSS SP-97. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. ASME B16.5 MO (Notes 2) ASME B31. Note.) filler. Fittings Branch Outlet Fittings Elbolet  NPS 1 & 1-1/2.0. BW. 160. ASME B16. 80. BW.2013-01-24 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-15 Page 1 of 3 970086 S8PR15-2 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 5) Gaskets PR-15 CATALYST WITHDRAWL LINE WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 600 RF -20°F THRU 1025°F / -29°C THRU 551°C Note 3 1. SCH. RF. Ball Valves (Note 6) BA-680 NPS 1 to 8. Weldolet  NPS 2 ½ to 8. NPS 1/2 to 10. ASTM A 234 Grade WP11. Class 600. SCH. ASME B16. SCH. BW.3 ASME B16. flanged. 80.20. NPS 2 ½ to 8. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. Class 600. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. SCH.5. 316 stainless steel seat. 160 BW. Weldolet  NPS 2. SCH. ASTM A 182 Grade F11.5. SCH. SCH. RF. 160. ASME B16. Class 600. ASTM A 182 Grade F11.9. MSS SP-97. TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. .9. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.5 NPS 2. NPS 2 ½ to 8. ASTM A 234 Grade WP11.25 CR . socket weld.

ASTM A 335 Grade P11. full length.ASTM A 193 Grade B7. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 4 heavy semifinished hexagonal nuts. SCH.ASTM A 193 Grade B16. ASTM A 335 Grade P11. threaded. seamless. Note. seamless.2013-01-24 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-15 Page 2 of 3 970086 S8PR15-2 Bolting Stud Bolts { 900°F (482°C) and under} . BE. threaded. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. 4) NPS 1/2 to 2. SCH. 160. 80. . full length. BE. NPS 2 ½ to 8. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts Stud bolts {Over 900°F (482°C)} . Pipe (Note 3.

Branch welds that cannot be radiographed shall be 100% ultrasonically examined. a minimum corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0. whether shop or field. Welding neck flanges must be tapered bored where indicated on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams. This is to minimize catalyst attrition. unless noted otherwise in the project specifications. of pipe.2013-01-24 UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-15 Page 3 of 3 970086 S8PR15-2 Note 1 Note 2 See UOP Project Specification 970086 S8V000 for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class. Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note. shall be 100% radiographed. thickness or product form) shall be postweld heat treated (PWHT) in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31. Maximum temperature 450 Degrees F ( 232 Degrees C). No exemptions from postweld heat treatment are permitted. Postweld heat treatment (PWHT) shall follow the requirements of ASME B31. Piping schedules indicated herein include corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. Design and Fabrication of piping shall allow for all welds to be ground smooth to match I.3 and UOP Project specification 801 requirements as listed below.  The maximum room temperature tensile strength of all pressure retaining components and welds shall be 100. applicable to 1Cr .3.000 psi (7030 kg/cm2).  Pressure retaining welds.D. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations.094” shall be used. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. concave contour. .  Fillet welds to pressure retaining components shall be ground to a smooth.1/2 Mo and 1-1/4 Cr .1/2 Mo Materials  Pressure retaining components (regardless of size.

3 ASME B16. BW. ASME B16. NPS 2 1/2 to 8. Stud bolts -ASTM A 193 Grade B16.5. SCH. SCH. 80. Class 600. BW. threaded. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 4 heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. ASME B16. BW. SCH. RF. SCH. BW. BW. MSS SP-97. Class 600. Weldolet  NPS 2 1/2 to 8. Class 600.2012-12-14 UOPM & ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-17 Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR17-1 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 5) Gaskets PR-17 CATALYST LIFT LINE WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 600 RF -20°F THRU 1025°F / -29°C THRU 551°C Note 3 1. SCH. full length. 80. NPS 1/2 to 8. 160. 80. Fittings Branch Outlet Fittings Elbolet  NPS 1 & 1-1/2.25 CR . seamless. Weldolet  NPS 1/2 to 2. Blinds Spectacle Bolting NPS 1 to 10. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. ASTM A 234 Grade WP11. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. Thermiculite TM 835 filler. RF. nuts & screws are to be coated with FluoroKote #1 ®. 4) NPS 1/2 to 2. . ASME B16. BE. NPS 2 1/2 to 8.20. SCH. NPS 1/2 to 2. ASTM A 234 Grade WP11. 160.9. ASME B16. TP316 inner and outer ring. per ASME B16. MSS SP-97. seamless. ASTM A 387 Grade 11. SCH. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. NPS 2 1/2 to 8. SCH. Class 6000. BE. ASTM A 335 Grade P11. 160.9. All bolts. 160. Pipe (Note 3.5 NPS 1/2 to 2. ASME B16.5 MO (Note 2 and 6) ASME B31.0. SCH.48. Note. RF. ASTM A 335 Grade P11.5. Spiral wound TP316 winding. 80. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. 160ASTM A 335 Grade P11.

. This is to minimize catalyst attrition. Branch welds that cannot be radiographed shall be 100% ultrasonically examined.1/2 Mo Materials  Pressure retaining components (regardless of size. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations. unless noted otherwise in the project specifications. except that there shall be no exemptions from impact testing and the test temperature shall be the lower of the design minimum metal temperature and 0°F (-18°C). Piping schedules indicated herein include corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. The test pecimens shall be supplied in the same heat treated condition as the new pipe. thickness or product form) shall be postweld heat treated (PWHT) in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31. a minimum corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0. The percentage limits are weight percent. Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Requirements Applicable to 1 Cr-1/2 Mo and 1 1/4 Cr-1/2 Mo Materials for Services with Operating Temperatures Over 825°F (440°C): a. whether shop or field. concave contour.094” shall be used.015% and 0.2012-12-14 UOPM & ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-17 Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR17-1 Note 1 Note 2 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number.3. applicable to 1Cr . components and welds.3 and UOP Project specification 801 requirements as listed below.3. Postweld heat treatment (PWHT) shall follow the requirements of ASME B31. of pipe. Note.  Pressure retaining welds.  The maximum room temperature tensile strength of all pressure retaining components and welds shall be 100. The product analysis content of tin and phosphorous for pressure retaining components and welding consumables shall be less than 0. shall be 100% radiographed. No exemptions from postweld heat treatment are permitted.D. b.1/2 Mo and 1-1/4 Cr . Design and Fabrication of piping shall allow for all welds to be ground smooth to match I. Impact tests shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.  Fillet welds to pressure retaining components shall be ground to a smooth. Charpy V-notch impact testing is required for all pressure retaining longitudinally fusion welded pipe. Welding neck flanges must be tapered bored where indicated on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams.000 psi (7030 kg/cm2).012% respectively.

ASTM A 182 Grade F11. ASTM A 182 Grade F11.125 Inch ANSI Class 300 forged raised face welding neck. Welding same schedule as pipe. or Vogt SW-12321.1/2Mo materials. DSI 4111-C8. DSI 4211-C8. or Stockham Triangle A. Gaskets Fittings Globe Valves Gate Valves Bolting Pipe Note . Velan W-2074B-05TY.3822V-U. 2 1/2 inch to 10 inch welding neck bored to suit pipe. ASTM A 217 Grade WC6. Illinois 60017-5017 • USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 8-1303-0 PAGE 1 Approved Authorized R .uop 25 East Algonquin Road • PO Box 5017 • Des Plaines. 2 1/2 inch to 6 inch Class 300 cast flanged. or Vogt SW-12351. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. Poyam 45BW-2R12-U. However. Poyam 4GBP-2R12-U.Revision Date REVISED PIPE CLASSES PR-22 OF 1 NOTE . ASTM A 182 Grade F11. ASTM A 234 Grade WP11 or WP11-W. Service Process with Hydrogen Temperature Range -20°F thru 1025°F / -29°C thru 551°C Flanges Material and Rating 1 1/4%Cr-1/2%Mo Class 300 RF Pressure Range Per ANSI B16. Spiral wound per API 601 except with flexible graphite filler. Over 900°F (482°C) . Smith 800 KOOOW. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. 1. See UOP Project Specification 801 Piping for notes applicable to 1 1/4Cr . 2 inches and smaller shall be no less than Schedule 80. ASTM A 217 Grade WC6.stud bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B16 threaded full length with 2 ASTM 194 Grade 4 nuts. 900°F (482°C) and under . Smith G80 KOOOW.5 Corrosion Allowance 0. 2 inch and smaller Class 800 forged socket weld. 2 inch and smaller socket welding. Branch connection welding fittings.3822V-U.stud bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B7 threaded full length with 2 ASTM A 194 Grade 2H nuts. ASTM A 335 Grade P11 seamless. 2 1/2 inch to 10 inch Class 300 cast flanged. Velan W-2054B-05TY. Contractor to calculate wall thickness. Class 3000 forged socket weld.These data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. or Stockham Triangle A. 2 inch and smaller Class 800 forged soket weld.

SCH.3 ASME B16.36 NPT taps. Class 300.11. Small Fittings Large Fittings Branch Outlet Fittings Elbolet  NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 182 Grade F304H. seamless. 80S. ASTM A 182 Grade F304H. BW. ASTM A 403 Grade WP304H S. BW. ASTM A 182 Grade F304H. Class 3000. ASME B16. WP 304H WX or WP 304H WU. MSS SP-97. socket weld. Class 300. 80S. MSS SP-97.20. RF. 80S. ASTM A 403 Grade WP304H. PBE. SCH.063 inch (1. RF. SCH. NPS 2.9. ASME B16.2012-10-29 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-24 PR-24 PROCESS HOT AIR CLASS 300 RF -20°F THRU 1300°F / -29°C THRU 704°C 0. 40S. PBE. 80S. seamless. . MSS SP-97. per ASME B16. RF. ASTM A 182 Grade F304H. MSS SP-95. SCH. Swages Concentric  NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. 80S.36 NPT taps.6 mm) TP 304H / TP 316 STAINLESS STEEL ASME B31. Note. SCH. ASTM A 182 Grade F304H. ASTM A 403 Grade WP304H. Thermiculite TM 835 filler. Gaskets Spiral wound with TP304 SS winding. ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 12. BW. NPS 2.5. 40S.9. Sockolet  NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. SCH. Class 3000. Class 300. ASTM A 182 Grade F304H.5. 80S. NPS 3 to 12. ASME B16. Class 300. SCH. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. BW. RF. ASTM A 182 Grade F304H. 80S. WP 304H WX or WP 304H WU. RF. ASTM A 182 Grade F304H. ASTM A 403 Grade WP304H S.5. Weldolet  NPS 2. socket weld.5 Page 1 of 3 970086 S8PR24-0 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld Neck NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Eccentric  NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Weldolet  NPS 3 to 10. NPS 3 to 12. 40S. with jack screws ASME B16. Orifice Flanges Weld Neck NPS 1-1/2 & 2. 304 stainless steel inner ring. ASME B16. ASTM A 182 Grade F304H. SCH. Class 300. ASTM A 182 Grade F304H. SCH. SCH. SCH. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASME B16. MSS SP-95. 40S. Class 3000. with jack screws ASME B16. NPS 3 to 12.

ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. Class 300. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. ASTM A 240 Grade TP304H. ASTM A 312 Grade TP304H. 80S. Class 300. cast stainless steel. cast stainless steel. ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. threaded.48. NPS 2 to 12. socket weld. NPS 3 to 12. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASME B16. RF. Stud Bolts  ASTM A 193 Grade B8M Class 2. SCH. full length. RF. flanged. ASME B16. hard faced seat. RF. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 8M heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. ASME B16. NPS 2 to 6. Class 800. SCH. Class 800. NPS 2. flangeless.2012-10-29 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-24 Page 2 of 3 970086 S8PR24-0 Nipples Blinds Spectacle Blinds Spacer Ring Blinds Plate Globe Valves (Note 2) GL-883 GL-381 Gate Valves (Note 2) GA-883 GA-884 GA-381 Check Valves (Note 2) CH-883 CH-381 Wafer Check Valve (See Note 2) Bolting CH-383 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. full length. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. SCH. 316 SS trim. threaded. ASTM A 240 Grade TP304H. flanged. NPS 1 to 12. PE. NPS 12. Note. ASTM A 312 Grade TP304H. RF. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. cast stainless steel. socket weld x threaded. lug type. seamless. NPS 12. Seamless Pipe NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. socket weld. flanged. BE. ASTM A351 Grade CF8M retainerless. NPS 2 to 12. cast stainless steel.48. RF. . BE. NPS 2 to 12. ASTM A 240 Grade TP304H. Jack Screw  304/316 stainless steel. forged stainless steel. forged stainless steel. Class 300. 40S. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Class 300. SCH. PBE. 80S. ASTM A 312 Grade TP304H. socket weld. 80S.48. hex head. ASTM A 312 Grade TP304H. RF. forged stainless steel.. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. Class 800. Class 800. ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. Class 300. Class 300. forged stainless steel. Class 300.

2012-10-29 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-24 Page 3 of 3 970086 S8PR24-0 BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE Connections on headers and pieces of equipment shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch. All 316 stainless steel material shall have a 0. Short radius elbows shall not be used. Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. Teflon tape is not permitted. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 3 4 6 8 10 12 T BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW T RT RT BW T RT RT T RT T BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE BS = SOCKOLET ( THREDOLET ) CLASS 3000 MINIMUM Full couplings are permitted. . Use thread compound for threaded joints.04% minimum carbon content. Note.

40S with jack screws ASME B16. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF SCH. Thermiculite steel inner and outer ring. 0. ASME B16. ASME B16. NPS 2 1/2 to 12. per ASME B16. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. NPS 30.2013-01-24 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-36 Page 1 of 4 970086 S8PR36-2 Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 2.47 type A . 316 stainless Small Fittings (Note 2. SCH 160.47 Series A for NPS 30 NPS 1/2 to 2.160 ASME B16. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300H RF SCH. Note. 0.11. ASME B16. Spiral wound TP316 winding.20.375.125 inch ( 3. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF SCH.375. NPS 30. NPS 2 1/2 to 12.36 NPT taps. BW. Orifice Flanges Weld Neck (Note 2) NPS 2. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF SCH.160 with jack screws ASME B16.5.5. 0.5. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. ASME B16.Wt. NPS 20 to 24.Wt. ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 24.5 for sizes to NPS 24.Wt. per ASME B16. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF SCH.2 mm) TP 316H STAINLESS STEEL ASME B31. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF SCH.36 NPT taps. 3.5. 7) NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.25.40S ASME B16. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300H RF SCH. .47 Series A TM Gaskets 835 filler. 7) PR-36 CATALYST TRANSFER & PROCESS REGENERATION GAS CLASS 300 RF -20°F THRU 1100°F / -29°C THRU 593°C 0.3 ASME B16. NPS 14 to 18.

Latroletper MSS SP-97 NPS 1.9. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH. 7) Concentric.0. . WP 316H WX or WP 316H WU. SCH. 5. BW Weldoletper MSS SP-97 NPS 2. ASME B16. SCH. 7) NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 403 Grade WP 316H S. WP 316H WX or WP 316H WU. ASTM A 403 Grade WP 316H S. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.48. Eccentric.9. SCH. 0. seamless BBE. Class 300 RF. BW. ASME B16.25. BW.48. SCH. 0.375. NPS 14 to 18.375. ASME B16. BW Swages (Note 2. Class 300 RF. seamless BBE. SCH. 160. NPS 20 to 30. ASME B16. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH. ASTM A 403 Grade WP 316H S. SCH. MSS SP-95. BW NPS 14 to 18. ASTM A 312 Grade TP316H SCH. seamless POE/TOE.0.160. ASTM A 312 Grade TP316H. Blinds Spectacle (Note 2) Blinds Spacer Ring (Note 2) Blinds Plate (Note 2) NPS 1 to 24. NPS 2 1/2 to 12. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH. 160. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH. MSS SP-95. BW. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.160. ASTM A 403 Grade WP316H.40S. NPS 20 to 24. 7) NPS 2.25 Wt. NPS 12 to 24. WP 316H WX or WP 316H WU. ASME B16. ASTM A 240 Grade TP316H. BW.375 Wt. 40S. Nipples (Note 2. NPS 12 to 24. Class 300 RF. ASME B16.9. WP 316H WX or WP 316H WU. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. BBE. 6. Stub-Ins Reinforced (Note 2) Branch Outlet Fittings (Notes 2. 3.160. BW Weldoletper MSS SP-97 NPS 2 1/2 to 12.160. 7) NPS 14 to 18. ASTM A 240 Grade TP316H. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH. ASME B16. SCH. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.48. ASTM A 403 Grade WP 316H S.0.0. SCH. ASTM A 358 Grade TP316H Class 1. ASTM A 403 Grade WP316H.9.2013-01-24 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-36 Page 2 of 4 970086 S8PR36-2 Large Fittings (Note 2.25. ASTM A 358 Grade TP316H Class 1. BBE. SCH. 160 seamless PBE. ASTM A 240 Grade TP316H. Note. BW NPS 20 to 24.

ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. forged stainless steel. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. cast stainless steel ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. Class 800. full length. NPS 14 to 18. SCH. NPS 10 to 12. cast stainless steel. RF. flanged. Class 800. socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. 40S BBE. ASTM A 358 Grade TP316H Class 1. 0. Jack Screw. . forged stainless steel. 160 BBE. 304/316 stainless steel. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. 40S BBE.25 Wt. Stud Bolts. NPS 2 to 6. RF. hex head. forged stainless steel. NPS 20 to 40. NPS 2 to 12. ASTM A 312 Grade TP316H SCH. socket weld. socket weld x threaded. socket weld x threaded. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Note. BBE. Class 800. cast stainless steel ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. flanged. Class 800. Class 300. ASTM A 193 Grade B8M Class 2 threaded full length. ASTM A 312 Grade TP316H SCH.375 Wt. RF.2013-01-24 GL-883 GL-884 GL-381 Gate Valves (Note 7) GA-883 GA-884 GA-381 Check Valves (Note 7) CH-883 CH-381 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-36 Page 3 of 4 970086 S8PR36-2 Globe Valves (Note 7) NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Bolting Seamless Pipe (Note 2 & 6) Electric Fusion Welded Pipe (Note 2) NPS 1/2 to 2. SCH. with two ASTM A 194 Grade 8M heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. Class 300. BBE. flanged. ASTM A 358 Grade TP316H Class 1. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. socket weld. Class 800. Class 300. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. threaded. NPS 2 1/2 to 12. SCH. 0. NPS 2 to 12. forged stainless steel. forged stainless steel. ASTM A 358 Grade TP316H Class 1.

these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. use double random length of pipe as applicable.04% minimum carbon content. Short radius elbows are acceptable only where space considerations dictate and only if the design pressure of the piping system is within the ASME B16. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 T RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW BW T RT RT RT RT BW T RT RT RT RT T RT RT RT T RT RT T RT T BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 7) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET ) CLASS 3000 minimum Full couplings are permitted. Teflon tape is not permitted.2013-01-24 UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-36 Page 4 of 4 970086 S8PR36-2 BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE Connections on headers and pieces of equipment shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch. except for steam tracer leads which may be 1/2 inch. . Socket Weld connections are not permitted on Catalyst piping. Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number All 316 stainless steel material shall have a 0. To minimize the number of joints.28 allowable pressure ratings. Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note. Weldolets may be replaced by a stub-in with reinforcement pad where weldolet is not available. Use thread compound for threaded joints.

Class 800. API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr.2/6. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. hand wheel operator. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with antiextrusion rings. bolted bonnet.2012-10-05 UOP Specification Carbon Steel Gate Valve Page 1 of 2 970086 S8V003-0 1. solid plain wedge. bolted bonnet. bolted bonnet. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Crane 47-XU Newco 11F-CB2 Powell 1503-C2 Poyam 22SBW-1R8 Velan F-0064C-02TY Walworth 5202-F GA-300 Crane 33-XU Newco 13F-CB2 Powell 3003-C2 Poyam 22SBW-2R8 Velan F-1064C-02TY Walworth 5206-F GA-800 Bonney HL-11-SW Newco 18S-FS2 Smith 800-OOOOW Velan W-2054B-02TY Vogt SW-12111 DSI-4111-A8 Bonney HL-11-SW/T Newco 18S/T-FS2 Smith 800-OOOOU Velan C-2054B-02TY Vogt TSW-12111 DSI-4101-A8 Bonney H-11-SW Newco 18S-FS2FP Smith 888-OOOOW Velan W-2064B-02TY Vogt SW-13111 DSI-4161-A8 GA-801 GA-802 Note. Class 800. bolted gland. Class 300. bolted gland. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). full bore. API 602. ASTM A 105.3 Ra facing. hard faced seats). bolted bonnet. hard faced seats). hard faced seats). raised face. NPS 1/2 to 2. API 600. Gear operator above 10 NPS NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. bolted gland. API 600. smooth 3. forged. hard faced seats). socket weld ends. API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr. bolted gland. hand wheel operator. Class 800. solid plain wedge. solid plain wedge. ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). bolted bonnet. ASTM A 105. smooth 3. cast steel. socket weld x female threaded.3 Ra facing.. . solid plain or flexible wedge. API 602. API 602. corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr. hard faced seats). API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr. NPT. raised face. solid plain or flexible wedge.2/6. forged. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with antiextrusion rings. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y).. forged. flanged. cast steel.. Class 150. ASTM A 105. hand wheel operator. ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. socket weld ends. NPS 1/2 to 2. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. Hand wheel operator up to 14 NPS Gear operator above 14 NPS NPS 2 to 24.. bolted gland. Gate valves CODE NUMBER GA-100 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 24. flanged. corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings.. Hand wheel operator up to 10 NPS. API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr.

forged ASTM A 105. .2/6. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). DSI 2131-A8 bolted gland.. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. bolted bonnet.3 Ra facing. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. hard faced seats). smooth 3. hand wheel operator. Class 300. API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr. solid plain wedge. Newco 13F-FS2-INT API 602.2012-10-05 GA-803 UOP Specification Carbon Steel Gate Valve Page 2 of 2 970086 S8V003-0 NPS 1/2 to 2. Vogt 363 flanged. Note. raised face. Class 800 body.

NPS 2 to 6. API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr.3 Ra facing. plug type disc. NPS 1/2 to 2. reduced bore. ASME B16. handwheel operator. plug type disc. cast steel. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Crane 143-XU Newco 21F-CB2 Powell 1531-C2 Poyam 22GBP-1R8 Velan F-0074C-02TY Walworth 5275-F GL-300 Crane 151-XU Newco 23F-CB2 Powell 3031-C2 Poyam 22GBP-2R8 Velan F-1074C-02TY Walworth 5281-F GL-800 Bonney HL-31-SW Newco 28S-FS2 Smith G80-OOOOW Velan W-2074B-02TY Vogt SW-12141 DSI 4211-A8 Bonney HL-31-SW/T Newco 28S/T-FS2 Smith G80-OOOOU Velan C-2074B-02TY Vogt TSW-12141 DSI 4201-A8 GL-801 . API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr. raised face.2/6.. bolted bonnet. bolted gland. straight pattern. bolted gland. API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr.34. reduced bore. hard faced seats). forged. Globe valves CODE NUMBER GL-100 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 6. Note. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. socket weld ends. ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. flanged. bolted bonnet. socket weld x female threaded NPT. hard faced seats). Class 800. ASME B16. straight pattern. smooth 3.2012-10-05 UOP Specification Carbon Steel Globe Valve Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V004-0 1. bolted bonnet. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. straight pattern. corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. ASME B16. bolted gland. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. hand wheel operator. Class 300. bolted bonnet. straight pattern. hard faced seats).. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y)..2/6.3 Ra facing. hard faced seats). Class 150.. ASTM A 105.34. bolted gland. ASME B16. Class 800. smooth 3. plug type disc. forged. ASTM A 105.34. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr. plug type disc. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). . hand wheel operator. NPS 1/4 to 2. cast steel. raised face.34. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). flanged. hand wheel operator.

410 SS overlay body seat.3 Ra facing. raised face. . bolted cover. NPS 1/2 to 2.34. lug type. dual Goodwin BFR-015-C-E-U-P-R-Y-E plate design. NPS 2 to 20. Stellite seat. forged.. 410 SS overlay body seat.2/6.3 Ra facing. API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr. ASME B16. API 594. Goodwin BFR-030-C-E-U-P-R-Y-E dual plate design.. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. ASME B16. retainerless. Inconel X750 springs. flanged. lug type.2/6. Class 800.34. smooth 3. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Crane 147-XU Newco 31F-CB2 Powell 1561-C2 Poyam 22RBA-1R8 Velan F-0114C-02TY Walworth 5341-F CH-102 NPS 2 to 24. serrated raised Crane Duo Check II H30SPF-169 face ends. Inconel X750 springs. smooth 3. Class 150. Bonney HL-51-SW Newco 58S-FS2 Smith B80-OOOOW Velan W-2024B-02TY Vogt SWB-701 DSI 4511-A8 CH-300 CH-800 Note. bolted cover. ASTM A 105.2/6. ball type. Class 300. socket weld ends. flanged. reduced bore.3 Ra facing. Class 150. API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr. cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB body. Check valves CODE NUMBER CH-100 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 20. API 594. bolted cover. cast steel. ASME B16. Crane 159-XU Newco 33F-CB2 Powell 3061-C2 Poyam 22RBA-2R8 Velan F-1114C-02TY Walworth 5344-F CH-302 NPS 1-1/2 to 24 Class 300. ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. ASTM A 216 Grade WCB body. 410 SS plates and pins. hard faced seats). retainerless. swing type. smooth 3.3 Ra facing. swing type. smooth 3. 410 SS plates and pins. ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. serrated raised face Crane Duo Check II H15SPF-169 ends.2012-10-05 UOP Specification Carbon Steel Check Valve Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V005-0 1. hard faced seats). raised face. 304 SS ball.34 cast steel.2/6. cast steel.

Ball valves CODE NUMBER BA-104 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Filled Teflon seats certified to API 607.3.3 (125/250) Ra facing. raised face. MSS-25.2012-10-05 UOP Specification Carbon Steel Ball Valve Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V006-0 1. Full Port. B16. Jamesbury 9300-31API 598 ASME B16. fire safe design meeting requirements of API 607-4 and BS 6755-part 2. Standard port. Reinforced Teflon seat certified to API 607. PTFE/Graphite body seal.5.2/6. socket weld ends. ASME B31. MSS SP-72 cast steel. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. Soft-Sealed. API 607.34. 316 stainless steel ball and stem. ASME Class 300. ASTM A 216 Grade WCB. carbon steel body 316 stainless steel ball and stem. Manufacturer’s standard gear operator. smooth 3. MSS SP2236-XTZ -1-M10/Q 25. TFE/Graphite body seal and stem seal. flanged. API 598. lever operator. TFM/Graphite stem seal. . RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Jamesbury 2236-XT-1 BA-304 NPS 4. Note. "Fire-Safe" design.

API 602.2/6.. socket weld ends. cast steel.. raised face. solid plain wedge. .2/6. ASTM A 217 Grade WC6. solid plain wedge. bolted bonnet. hand wheel operator. ASTM A 217 Grade WC6. Class 600. forged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.. API 600. ASTM A 182 Grade F11 Class 2.2012-10-05 UOP Specification Low & Intermediate Alloy Steel Gate Valve Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V013-0 1. Gate valves CODE NUMBER GA-320 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 12. API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr. Class 800. flanged. hard faced seats). bolted bonnet. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. FULL BORE. API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr. hand wheel operator. forged. bolted gland. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr. ASTM A 182 Grade F11 Class 2. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. Class 800. Class 800. hard faced seats). hard faced seats). socket weld ends. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. solid plain or flexible wedge. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). cast steel. corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. bolted bonnet. API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr. solid plain wedge. ASTM A 182 Grade F11 Class 2. hand wheel operator. bolted gland. bolted gland. NPS 2 to 12. solid plain or flexible wedge. hard faced seats).. bolted gland. flanged. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings.3 Ra facing. socket weld x female threaded. smooth 3.3 Ra facing. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). raised face. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Powell 3003-P140/P100WC6 Poyam 4SBW-2R8 Velan F-1064C-05TY GA-620 Powell 6003-P140/P100WC6 Poyam 4SBW-3R8 Velan F-2064C-05TY GA-820 Bonney HL-19-SW DSI 4111-C8 Velan W-2054B-05TY Vogt SW-12321 GA-821 Bonney HL-19-SW/T DSI 4101-C8 Velan C-2054B-05TY Vogt TSW-12321 GA-822 Bonney W-19-SW Velan W-2064B-05TY Note. bolted gland. API 602. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). hand wheel operator. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. hand wheel operator. corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. API 602. API 600. Class 300. bolted bonnet. NPT. bolted bonnet.. hard faced seats). smooth 3. forged.

solid plain wedge. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS. hand wheel operator. hand wheel operator. raised face.04% C Min. cast. Class 800. Class 800. API 602. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Cooper 115 OIC S151G Ladish 8275 Powell 2456-C3 Poyam 12SBF-1R12 Velan F-0064C-13MY Cooper 130 Ladish 8375 OIC S301G Powell 2467-C6 Poyam 12SBF-2R12 Velan F-1064C-13MY GA-381 GA-880 Bonney HL-18-SW OIC 8GT-6-SW Velan W-2054B-13MY Vogt SW-12401 DSI 4111-D12 GA-881 Bonney HL-18-SW/T OIC 8GT-6-SW/T Velan C-2054B-13MY Vogt TSW-12401 DSI 4101-D12 Bonney HL-18-T OIC 8GT-6-T Velan S-2054B-13MY Vogt 12401 DSI 4121-D12 GA-882 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.2/6. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. API 602. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). bolted bonnet. ASTM A 182 Grade F316.2012-10-05 UOP Specification Stainless Steel Gate Valve Page 1 of 2 970086 S8V023-0 1. Gate valves CODE NUMBER GA-180 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 12. bolted bonnet. ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. female threaded NPT both ends.2/6. API 600. socket weld x female threaded. hard faced seats). forged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. hard faced seats). solid plain wedge. bolted bonnet. hard faced seats). outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. forged ASTM A 182 Grade F316. bolted gland. socket weld ends.3 Ra facing. bolted gland. bolted gland. Class 300. flanged. forged. hard faced seats). smooth 3. hand wheel operator. ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. bolted gland. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS. API 600. hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. flanged. solid plain wedge.. Class 150. . outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). solid plain or flexible wedge.. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS. raised face. API 602. 0. ASTM A 182 Grade F316.3 Ra facing. Class 800. bolted bonnet. bolted bonnet. hand wheel operator. solid plain or flexible wedge. hard faced seats). cast. NPS 2 to 12. smooth 3. bolted gland.

bolted bonnet. . Class 800. solid plain wedge. forged. forged. Class 800. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). socket weld x female threaded NPT.04% C Min. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS. hand wheel operator. Page 2 of 2 970086 S8V023-0 Bonney HL-18-SW OIC 8GT-6-SW Velan W-2054B-13MY DSI-4111-D12 GA-884 Bonney HL-18-SW/T OIC 8GT-6-SW/T Velan C-2054B-13MY DSI 4101-D12 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission. corrosion-inhibited dieformed flexible graphite packing with antiextrusion rings. bolted gland.04% C Min. API 602. 0. solid plain wedge. API 602. 0. bolted bonnet. hard faced seats). ASTM A 182 Grade F316.. bolted gland. hard faced seats).2012-10-05 GA-883 UOP Specification Stainless Steel Gate Valve NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings.. hand wheel operator. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS. socket weld ends.

corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Class 300. hand wheel operator. hard faced seats). raised face. bolted gland. bolted gland. corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. bolted bonnet. plug type disc. hand wheel operator. NPS 2 to 6.04% C Min. smooth 3. hand wheel operator. Globe valves CODE NUMBER GL-180 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 6. forged. cast. reduced bore. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. Class 150.. 0. bolted gland. ASME B16. Class 800. plug type disc. forged. ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. socket weld ends. cast. straight pattern. straight pattern.34.04% C Min. flanged.34. Class 800.3 Ra facing. plug type disc. bolted bonnet. hard faced seats). outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). bolted bonnet. hand wheel operator. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS. bolted gland. plug type disc. reduced bore. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS.2/6. bolted bonnet. plug type disc. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. hand wheel operator. bolted bonnet.3 Ra facing. smooth 3. Class 800. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). straight pattern. hard faced seats). corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS. ASME B16. socket weld ends.34. ASME B16. hard faced seats). outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. raised face. . ASTM A 182 Grade F316. flanged. straight pattern. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y).34.34. ASME B16.2/6. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. forged. reduced bore. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. ASME B16. hard faced seats). straight pattern. female threaded NPT both ends.. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Cooper 215 Ladish 7272 OIC S152G Powell 2475-C3/2629-C3 Poyam 12GBP-1R12 Velan F-0074C-13MY GL-381 Cooper 230 Ladish 7372 OIC S302G Powell 2447-C6 Poyam 12GBP-2R12 Velan F-1074C-13MY GL-880 Bonney Forge HL-38-SW OIC 8GL-6-SW Smith G80-HAOOW Velan W-2074B-13MY Vogt SW-12501 DSI 4211-D12 Bonney HL-38-T OIC 8GL-6-T Smith G80-HAOOO Velan S-2074B-13MY Vogt 12501 DSI 4221-D12 GL-882 GL-883 Bonney HL-38-SW Smith G80-HSOOW Velan W-2074B-13MY DSI 4211-D12 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.2012-10-05 UOP Specification Stainless Steel Globe Valve Page 1 of 2 970086 S8V024-0 1. 0. bolted gland.

hard faced seats). plug type disc. ASME B16. . reduced bore.34. forged. Class 800. socket weld x female threaded NPT. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. Page 2 of 2 970086 S8V024-0 Bonney HL-38-SW/T Velan C-2074B-13MY DSI 4201-D12 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission. 0. hand wheel operator. corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings.2012-10-05 GL-884 UOP Specification Stainless Steel Globe Valve NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.04% C Min. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). bolted gland. bolted bonnet.. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS. straight pattern.

serrated raised face ends. 316 SS plates and pins. cast ASTM A351 Grade CF8M body. ASME B16. serrated raised Crane Duo Check IIG15CPF-385E face ends.2/6. ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. 410 SS overlay body seat. lug type.2/6. Crane Duo Check II H30-CPF-772 Goodwin BFR-030-S-M-M-P-R-Y-M CH-381 CH-383 Crane Duo Check II H30 CPF-385E Goodwin BFR-030-S-S-U-P-R-Y-S CH-880 Bonney HL-58-SW OIC 8CH-6-SW Smith B80-HSOOW Velan W-2024B-13MY DSI 4511-D12 Vogt SW-718 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission. flanged.3 Ra facing. Class 300.. bolted cover.3 Ra facing. smooth 3. retainerless. socket weld ends. raised face.04% C Min. API 594. Class 150. cast. lug type. smooth 3. 0. hard faced seats). forged. Class 300. API 594.2/6.. smooth 3. spring loaded. bolted cover. 316 SS plates and pins. ASME B16.3 Ra facing. ASME B16.2012-10-05 UOP Specification Stainless Steel Check Valve Page 1 of 2 970086 S8V025-0 1. smooth 3. ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. swing type.34. cast stainless steel. Inconel X-750 springs. 304 SS ball and spring. . dual plate design. Cooper 330 Ladish 5372 OIC S303G Powell 2346-C6 Poyam 12RBA-2R12 Velan F-1114C-13TY CH-382 NPS 2 to 24. reduced bore. dual plate design.2/6. cast ASTM A351 Grade CF8M body. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Cooper 315 Ladish 5272 OIC S153G Powell 2342/2633 Poyam 12RBA-1R12 Velan F-0114C-13MY CH-183 NPS 1 1/2 to 24. Stellite seat. smooth 3.2/6. cast. 410 SS overlay body seat. ASTM A351 Grade CF8M body. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. Hardfaced seat). Goodwin BFR-015-S-S-U-P-R-Y-S lug type. 0. 0. ASTM A 182 Grade F316.04 C-min. swing type. Class 150.34. retainerless. bolted cover. Inconel X-750 springs. flanged.3 Ra facing. Class 800. serrated raised face ends. Class 300.34.04 C-min. Monel plates and pins. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS..3 Ra facing. Monel overlay body seat. Inconel X-750 springs. ball type. dual plate design. NPS 2 to 24. Check valves CODE NUMBER CH-180 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 12. API 594. raised face. NPS 2 to 12. .

Class 800. Class 800. spring loaded. ball type. Bonney HL-58-SW OIC 8CH-6-SW Smith B80-HSOOW Velan W-2024B-13MY DSI 4511-D12 Vogt SW-718 CH-3080 NPS 1/4 to 1. 304 SS ball and spring.2012-10-05 CH-882 UOP Specification Stainless Steel Check Valve NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 182 Grade F316H. 0. 3000 psi. ASME B16. female threaded NPT both ends. spring loaded.. spring loaded.34. bolted cover. forged. 304 SS ball and spring. female threaded NPT both ends. reduced bore. Stellite seat. ASTM A 182 Grade F316. . ASME B16. reduced bore. ball type. socket weld ends. 303 Stainless Steel.04% C Min. bolted cover. Buna-N O-ring seal. Circle Seal 259T-XPP Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission. forged.34. Bonney HL-58-T OIC 8CH-6-T Smith B80-HAOO0 Page 2 of 2 970086 S8V025-0 Velan W-2024B-13MY DSI 4521-D12 Vogt 718 CH-883 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2.

Ball valves CODE NUMBER BA-386 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 1 to 8. Lever or handwheel operated (Manual). smooth 3. ASME B16. (316L SS acceptable alternate). "Fire-Safe" design.2013-01-04 UOP Specification Stainless Steel Ball Valve Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V026-0 1.3 Ra facing.5. Full Port. flanged. Manufacturer's standard. 304 SS / Flexible Graphite. MSS SP-25. ASME Class 300. 316 stainless steel. Rating/Facing: Stem: Seats: Ball: Gaskets: Stem Seals: Actuator: Leakage: Inspection/Testing: RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS: Neles-Jamesbury 6300-EH008-3600-ML 9300-EH008-3600-ML Note. 316 stainless steel. MSS SP-72. Filled Teflon certified to API 607. raised face. Soft-Sealed. API 598. API 607. Manufacturer's standard testing. CONSTRUCTION: Body: Cast ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. Temperature limit shall not exceed 450 °F (232 °C) for filled Teflon. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. . Graphite. B16.2/6.34.

2012-10-05 UOP Specification Stainless Steel Needle Valve Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V029-0 1. Type 316 Stainless Steel. . these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. F. 5000 psig at 100 Deg. PTFE stem packing. Needle valves CODE NUMBER NE-3080 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 1/4. compression ends. metering type. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Hoke 2315F4Y NE-5080 NPS 1/4. 3000 psig at 100 Deg. straight pattern. Needle Valve. Parker CPI V6AR-SS Note. 316 Stainless Steel blunt stem. Needle Valve. ASTM A 182 F316 body. F. PTFE stem packing.

Teflon packing. flanged. TP410 SS seat rings. Ductile iron ASTM A 395 body and bonnet. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). bronze faced. . these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. flat face. Note. outside screw rising stem.1. bronze stem.5 Ra facing. ASME B16. Gate valves CODE NUMBER GA-1160 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 1/4 to 3 Class 150. ASME B16.10. solid wedge. bolted bonnet. MSS SP-80. threaded. Teflon packing. bronze solid wedge. bronze solid wedge. MSS SP-70. Powell 1414 bronze. bronze ASTM B 62 Alloy 836 body and bonnet. ASTM B 62 Alloy 836 body and Williams 142F bonnet. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Crane 431-UB Lunkenheimer 3151 Milwaukee 1151 Nibco T-135 Powell 2714 Stockham B-120 GA-1170 NPS 3 to 24. bronze stem. grooved 6. bronze stem. non-rising stem. rising stem. union bonnet. Teflon packing. Class 150. bronze seat rings.24. Class 150. iron disc. flanged.2012-10-05 UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Gate Valve Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V033-0 1. Handwheel operator up to 14 NPS Gear operator above 14 NPS Nibco F-637-31 Walworth W9726-F GA-1161 NPS 4 & 6.3/12. ASME B16. bolted flanged yoke-bonnet.

bronze. bronze stem. female threaded NPT both ends.5 Ra facing. solid bronze disc or iron bronze faced. flat face. Class 150. grooved 6. bolted bonnet.3/12. ASTM B 62 Alloy 836 body and bonnet. bronze stem. Teflon packing. MSS SP-85. Globe valves CODE NUMBER GL-1160 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 1/4 to 3. Teflon plug type disc. bronze seat rings. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Crane 7 TF Milwaukee 590-T Nibco T-235-Y Powell 150 Stockham B-22T GL-1170 NPS 3 to 6. union bonnet. . Class 150. Ductile iron ASTM A 395 body and bonnet. MSS SP-80. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y).1.2012-10-05 UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Globe Valve Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V034-0 1. Teflon or Graphite packing. Nibco F-738-31 Note. flanged. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. ASME B16.

1. ASTM B 61 Alloy 836 body and cap. Y-pattern. Check valves CODE NUMBER CH-1170 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 3 to 24. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Nibco F-938-31 Walworth W9928-F CH-13160 Crane 36 Milwaukee 510-T Nibco T-433-Y Stockham B-345 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission. solid bronze disc.10. bronze. flat face. . bolted cap. Class 150. MSS SP-71.3/12. Ductile iron ASTM A 395 body and cap.2012-10-05 UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Check Valve Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V035-0 1. screwed cap. iron bronze faced. horizontal swing type. horizontal swing type. grooved 6. bronze disc. flanged.5 Ra facing. female threaded NPT both ends. ASME B16. ASME B16. MSS SP-80. cast iron seat rings. NPS 1/4 to 3. Class 150.

Manufacturer's standard. Rating/Facing: Stem: Seats: Ball: Stem Seals: Actuator: Leakage: Inspection/Testing: RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS: Conbraco Industries.34. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.2012-10-05 UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Ball Valve Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V036-0 1. MSS SP-110. Teflon (TFE) Lever or handwheel operated (Manual). Brass. female threaded NPT both ends. CONSTRUCTION: Body: Forged Brass ASTM B 124 Alloy UNS No. B1. Manufacturer's standard testing. Brass (Chromium plated acceptable alternate). Reduced Port.1. or Cast Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy UNS No. ASME Class 150. C84400. Apollo 70-100 Series Crane 9302 Nibco T-585-70 Smith 125-T Watts B-6000 Stockham S216-BR-RT Note. MSS SP-25.20. . Teflon (TFE). Ball valves CODE NUMBER BA-1160 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 1/4 to 2. Soft-Sealed. Inc. C37700. ASME B16.

luberized bronze bushings. ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536 body. TP316 SS or 17-4PH SS shaft and pins. . bronze disc. Butterfly valves CODE NUMBER BF-1170 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 24. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. BUNA-N resilient seat. RECOMMENDEDVALVE MODELS Centerline Series 200 Keystone 122/129 Nibco LD 2100 Mueller Steam 52-U Note. MSS SP-67. Ductile iron. API 609. lug type.2012-10-05 UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Butterfly Valve Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V037-0 1. Class 150. Latch lock handle for sizes up to 6" Enclosed weatherproof gear operator for 8" and over.

API 600. Gate valves CODE NUMBER GA-1180 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 24. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C.2013-01-15 UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Gate Valve Page 1 of 2 970086 S8V053-0 1. cast. rising stem. hard faced seat. integral seat. Class 300. handwheel operator. bolted bonnet. Alloy 600 trim. API 600. bolted bonnet. Cooper 130 RF GA-3182 GA-3183 Cooper 130 RF Note. rising stem. bolted bonnet. cast. solid plain wedge. hard faced seat. bolted bonnet. integral seat. flexible wedge. flanged. cast. solid plain wedge. API 600. NPS 1. bolted bonnet. bolted bonnet. handwheel operator. flanged. Class 300. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600. . rising stem. NPS 1. cast. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). RF. Graphoil packing and gasket. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C . Graphoil packing and gasket. RF. Class 300. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C. handwheel operator. integral seat. Class 150. bolted bonnet. integral seat. API 602. Graphoil packing and gasket. NPS 1/2 to 1 1/2. bolted bonnet. flanged. socket weld end Cooper 3381-X/SE x screwed end NPT. solid plain wedge. bolted bonnet. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). solid plain wedge. NPS 2 to 6. handwheel operator. Graphoil packing and gasket. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). Alloy 600 trim. cast. Class 150. socket weld ends. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Cooper 115RF Xanik G-B-015-R-CY4060H-F Cooper 115RF Xanik G-B-015-R-CY4060H-F Cooper 3381-X GA-1181 GA-3180 GA-3181 NPS 1/2 to 1 1/2. handwheel operator. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). RF. bolted bonnet. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). flexible wedge. Graphoil packing and gasket. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C. Graphoil packing and gasket. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). API 602. handwheel operator. rising stem. flanged. cast. Class 300. RF. API 602. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600.

cast. Alloy 600 Xanik G-B-06-W-CY40trim. bolted bonnet. cast. Class 600. Cooper 3611X ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600. . flexible wedge. hard faced seat. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). outside screw & yoke 60H-H (OS&Y). corrosion-inhibited dieformed Graphite packing with braided antiextrusion rings Cooper 130RF Page 2 of 2 970086 S8V053-0 Xanik G-B-03-R-CY40-60HF GA-6180 NPS 1/2 to 1 1/2.2013-01-15 GA-3184 UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Gate Valve NPS 2 to 6. corrosion-inhibited die-formed Graphite packing with braided anti-extrusion rings Note. hard faced seat. API 602. Class 300. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C. flanged. socket weld. RF. bolted bonnet. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. API 600.

GL-3180 GL-3181 GL-3183 GL-6180 GL-6181 Note. bolted bonnet. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2. ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C. rising stem. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet. integral seat. Class 600.34. bolted bonnet. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). hard faced seat. flanged. solid plain wedge. cast. ASME B16. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2.34. Class 150. cast. Alloy 600 trim. W-CY40-60H-H or equal bolted bonnet. raised face. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. ASME B16.34. socket weld Cooper 4301-X ends. Class 300.34. hard faced Xanik Fig Number: B-B-03seat. socket weld X Threaded Cooper 4601-X/SE Ends. Alloy UNS N06600 Xanik Fig Number: B-B-06body/bonnet. Globe valves CODE NUMBER GL-1180 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS NPS 2 to 6. handwheel operator. Graphoil packing and gasket. cast. Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet. bolted bonnet. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). corrosion-inhibited dieformed Graphite packing with braided antiextrusion rings. outside screw & yoke (OS&Y). rising stem. NPS 2 to 6. Cooper 230 cast. . cast. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2. handwheel operator. raised face. Class 300. ASME Cooper 215RF B16. hard faced seat. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. equal corrosion-inhibited die-formed Graphite packing with braided anti-extrusion rings. Alloy 600 trim. hard faced Xanik Fig Number: B-B-015seat. Alloy UNS N06600 Xanik Fig Number: B-B-06body/bonnet. outside R-CY40-60H or equal screw & yoke (OS&Y). Class 300. Alloy 600 trim. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1. Class 600. ASME B16. NPS 2 to 6. socket weld Cooper 4601-X ends. bolted bonnet.34.2012-10-30 UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Globe Valve Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V054-0 1. corrosion-inhibited die-formed Graphite packing with braided anti-extrusion rings. outside R-CY40-60H or equal screw & yoke (OS&Y). cast. integral seat. ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C. Graphoil packing and gasket. solid plain wedge. ASME Cooper 230RF B16. NPS 3/4. corrosion-inhibited dieformed Graphite packing with braided antiextrusion rings. Alloy 600 trim. ASME B16.34. W/T-CY40-60H-G-H or bolted bonnet.

ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600.34. Cooper 330-RF CH-3180 CH-3181 CH-3182 NPS 2 to 10. Graphoil packing and gasket.34. hard faced seat.2012-10-30 UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Check Valve Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V055-0 1. ASME Cooper 315RF B16. these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data. Class 300. bolted cap. ASME Xanik W-B-03-R-CY40-60H B16. cast. ASME B16. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C. NPS 1/2 to 4.34. ASTM A 494 Grade CY40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600. raised face. Alloy 600 trim. cast.34. Incoloy 800 trim. swing check. ASME B16. bolted cap NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. hard faced seat. bolted cap Cooper 2601-X Xanik W-B-06-W-CY40-60H CH-6180 Note. swing check. Alloy 600 trim. Swing type. ASME Xanik W-B-015-R-CY40-60H B16.34. ASME Class 300 cast raised face flanged.34. spiral wound with Incoloy 800 windings cap gasket. integral seat.34. Class 150. socket weld Cooper 2301-X ends. socket weld. bolted cap NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2. swing check. ASME Cooper 330RF B16. ASME B16.34. Check valves CODE NUMBER Ch-1180 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS NPS 2 to 12. Incoloy 800 ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C body/ bonnet cap. Class 300. ASME B16. incompliance with ASME B16.34. Class 600. . hard faced seat. cast. Alloy 600 trim. ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600. cast. raised face.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification .

The University of Texas at Austin. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. or standards organizations. application. PIP’s copyright notices must be clearly indicated and unequivocally incorporated in documents where an Authorized User desires to provide any third party with copies of the Practice.g. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. suppliers and contractors with copies of the Practice solely for Authorized Users’ purposes. contractors. Construction Industry Institute. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. Texas 78759. These purposes include but are not limited to the procurement process (e. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500). PRINTING HISTORY November 1994 Issued January 1999 Revision January 2000 Technical Correction February 2011 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds . While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. as attachments to requests for quotation/ purchase orders or requests for proposals/contracts) and preparation and issue of design engineering deliverables for use on a specific project by Authorized User’s client. PIP Member Companies and Subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. administrative. Authorized Users may attach addenda or overlays to clearly indicate modifications or exceptions to specific sections of PIP Practices. such laws or regulations must be followed. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. This Practice is subject to revision at any time. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. Austin.. Authorized Users may provide their clients. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). Changes or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP.

............................ 2 1..... 9 Fabrication ..........2 Scope .... 2 2.. 7 Performance ........................ Definitions .2 Industry Codes and Standards ............. 8 Products and Materials . 2 2...................... 5 4....3 4............ 15 Handling...1 Process Industry Practices ............... and Delivery ........1 Purpose ......COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification Table of Contents 1..............................2 4... 8 Connections .4 4..................................... References .........................6 4..... Requirements..................................8 Quality Control ...................7 4........................ 2 2....... 14 Galvanizing .... 5 Submittals ...... 17 Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 18 ..................................... 5 4..5 4........... 2 1............. 2 2...................... Shipping.....................................3 Government Regulations ......... 4 3......................1 4............ Introduction......

Short titles are used herein where appropriate. Structural and miscellaneous steel are as defined in AISC Code of Standard Practice.Specification for Structural Steel Buildings – AISC Steel Construction Manual – AISC Detailing for Steel Construction ASTM International (ASTM) – ASTM A1 . This Practice does not include requirements that may be applicable for structures that require special seismic detailing.1 2. except as otherwise noted. connections. 2.Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service – ASTM A108 . detailing.Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars.Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification Industry Codes and Standards American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) – AISC 303 . fabricating.2 Scope This Practice describes the requirements for material.1 Purpose This Practice provides requirements for the fabrication of structural and miscellaneous steel.PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 1. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used. and Sheet Piling – ASTM A36/A36M . Introduction 1. ColdFinished – ASTM A123/A123M .Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products Page 2 of 18 Process Industry Practices . Carbon and Alloy. 2.2 Process Industry Practices (PIP) – PIP STS05130 . Welded and Seamless – ASTM A106/A106M . Black and HotDipped.Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges – ANSI/AISC 360 . and delivery of structural and miscellaneous steel.Standard Specification for Steel Bar.Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Tee Rails – ASTM A6/A6M . Steel.Standard Specification for Pipe. Zinc-Coated.Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel – ASTM A53/A53M . References Applicable parts of the following Practices and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. Shapes. 1. Plates. galvanizing.

Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts.Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon.Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement – ASTM A307 .Standard Specification for Structural Bolts.COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification – ASTM A143/A143M . Classes 10.Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers (Metric) Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 18 . Alloy Steel.Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies – ASTM A385/A385M . M164) – ASTM A325M .Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric) – ASTM A572/A572M .Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts – ASTM A563M .Standard Specification for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings – ASTM A786/A786M .3. 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (AASHTO No. 60.Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Crane Rails – ASTM A780/A780M .Standard Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic-Field or Eddy-Current (Electromagnetic) Examination Methods – ASTM F436 . Steel.Standard Specification for Structural Bolts. and Ultra-High Strength – ASTM B695 . Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric) – ASTM A384/A384M .Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes – ASTM A1011/A1011M .9 and 10.000 psi Tensile Strength – ASTM A325 .Standard Specification for Structural Bolts. Steel.Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers – ASTM F436M . Heat Treated. and Alloy Steel Floor Plates – ASTM A992/A992M . Carbon.Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing – ASTM A563 . LowAlloy. High-Strength Low-Alloy. Heat Treated. M253) – ASTM A490M .Standard Specification for Steel.9. Hot-Rolled. 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (AASHTO No.Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel – ASTM A759 . Sheet and Strip. Structural.Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes – ASTM A501 .Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip) – ASTM A490 . High-Strength Low-Alloy. High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. for Structural Steel Joints (Metric) – ASTM A500/A500M .Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs.Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel – ASTM E376 .

120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength – ASTM F2280 .PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 – ASTM F606 .Standard Specification for “Twist Off” Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies. Direct Tension Indicators. US Department of Labor. 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength – ASTM F2329 . Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts. Washers. Heat Treated.Standard Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners.Specification for Welding of Industrial and Mill Cranes and Other Material Handling Equipment – AWS QC1 .1M .Structural Welding Code .Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use With Structural Fasteners (Metric) – ASTM F1852 . shall apply. Screws. Steel.Steel – AWS D1. Washers.Standard Specification for Zinc Coating. Washers.3/D1. Nuts. Steel. Hot-Dip.Structural Welding Code . and Rivets – ASTM F606M . and Rivets (Metric) – ASTM F959 . Heat Treated.Metal Bar Grating Manual Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) – RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts Steel Deck Institute (SDI) – SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks.Standard Specification for “Twist Off” Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies.1M .Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners – ASTM F959M .Sheet Steel – AWSD14.Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors National Association of Architectural Metals Manufacturers (NAAMM) – NAAMM MBG 531 . Form Decks and Roof Decks Steel Joist Institute (SJI) – SJI Standard Specifications and Load Tables 2.1/D1. and Special Threaded Fasteners American Welding Society (AWS) – AWS D1.3M .1/D14.3 Government Regulations Requirements by state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the structural steel is to be erected. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) – OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 – OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926 Page 4 of 18 Process Industry Practices .Standard Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners.

The products.1 Quality Control 4. and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the fabricator. manufacturer: The party who produces and warrants the performance of the products. and performance of the civil works. and data sheets. The inspector shall be qualified by training and experience and hold certifications or documentation of their qualifications. materials. including codes. foundations. professional engineer: An engineer.COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification 3. Requirements 4. installations. materials. that the purchaser or engineer of record has transmitted or otherwise communicated. and workmanship furnished by the fabricator.1. and/or items provided in accordance with the contract documents. inspector: The party responsible for verifying the quality of all materials. tests and possibly include shop drawings to assist in proper application. materials. purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the fabricator. either by incorporation or reference. design drawings. installation and/or use. studies. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. engineer-designed connections: Structural steel connections which are designed by the engineer of record and detailed in the contract documents. quality. and qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents. sketches. Process Industry Practices Page 5 of 18 . 4. specifications. structure. The purchaser may be the owner or the owner’s authorized agent. engineer of record: Purchaser’s authorized representative with overall authority and responsibility for the engineering design. The engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the work is to be constructed. and/or items are manufactured in a controlled process using standard codes. specifications. The term fabricator shall apply also to the fabricator’s subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s). other than the engineer of record licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the steel is to be erected.1 Unless approved by the engineer of record. Definitions contract documents: Any and all documents. practices. Category STD. fabricator: The party responsible for providing fabricated structural and miscellaneous steel in accordance with the contract documents. owner: The party who owns the facility wherein the structural steel will be used. and appurtenances described in the contract documents. fabricator shall participate in the AISC Certification Program and be designated an AISC Certified Plant. the inspector shall be retained by the fabricator. The term manufacturer shall apply also to the manufacturer’s subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s). and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents. Also known as structural engineer of record in AISC Code of Standard Practice.

1 or AWS QC1 or shall be trained by and working under the supervision of an AWS Certified Welding Inspector. Alternate material tracking procedures may be used if approved by the purchaser.1.5 4.13 All welding shall be inspected in accordance with AWS D1. Each piece of mill material shall be legibly marked with the heat number.1. Alternate material tracking procedures may be used if approved by the purchaser.1 and when applicable AWS D14.1.7 4. The purchaser has the right to inspect all materials and workmanship and shall have unrestricted entry to the fabricator’s shop at all times while work is being performed.1.1. This document shall provide details of how compliance with the requirements in this Practice and the design drawings shall be achieved. 4.10 Bolted connections shall be inspected in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts. A written Material Handling Procedure. 4.1.3 The fabricator shall be solely responsible for quality control of all materials and workmanship. Quality Control Program.9 4. 4.1. Mill material with specified minimum yield strength higher than 36 ksi (250 MPa) shall be marked with the color designated in ASTM A6/A6M. Inspectors shall be qualified and certified as AWS Certified Welding Inspectors in accordance with the provisions of AWS D1. length and mill identification marks in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M.2 4. Welding of rigging and under the hook lifting devices shall be inspected in accordance with AWS D14. Inspectors shall be qualified and certified as AWS Certified Welding Inspectors in accordance with the provisions of AWS D14.1 or AWS QC1. heat number and fabrication mill order number shall be transferred to the remnant.1.11 Welding procedures and individual welders shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1. plus fabrication mill order number. or unsuitable materials and workmanship.4 4.1. 4.PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 4.1 and when applicable AWS D14.1.1. However. the purchaser reserves the right to require requalification of any questionable procedure before the start of fabrication. defective.1. For material other than ASTM A36/A36M. The purchaser may reject improper.1.14 Certified mill test reports for each heat of structural steel and each lot of high strength bolts shall be available for review by the purchaser. Alternate material tracking procedures may be used if approved by the purchaser. All materials and workmanship rejected shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the purchaser. 4. and Inspection Procedures document shall be provided. Page 6 of 18 Process Industry Practices .8 4.1.12 Welding procedures previously qualified for the purchaser may be used without requalification. size of section.1.6 4. inferior. grade.1. the appropriate specification number.

2. Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) f.1. shop drawings. the following documents shall be submitted to the purchaser for record purposes: a.5 Erection and Shop Drawings a.1. a bolt list.COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification 4.15 The purchaser may require a quantity of representative samples of bolt assemblies to be used for testing. As a minimum.3 4. b. Shop drawings and erection drawings shall be prepared in accordance with the AISC documents listed in Section 2. Records of Quality Control inspection test reports requested by the purchaser c. Erection drawings shall reference the corresponding design drawings. and final erection drawings shall accompany the first shipment of each release. Final engineering calculations for each fabricator-designed connection sealed and signed by the responsible Professional Engineer d. 4. Work shall not proceed without approval: a. Quality Control Program and Inspection Procedures d.2. Shop drawings shall clearly show the specification and grade of steel to be used. 4.2 Submittals 4. 4. or yard area. Erection and shop drawings shall be grouped in sets and identified separately for each building.4 Process Industry Practices Page 7 of 18 .1 The following items shall be submitted to the engineer of record for approval.2. structure. d. Final erection and shop drawings b.2.2 Welder(s) qualification records Final erection drawings. and field bolt lists shall be sent to the persons responsible for managing construction at their field office by way of next day delivery before shipment of steel. if requested by the purchaser 4.2. shop drawings shall reference the corresponding erection drawings.16 The purchaser reserves the right to inspect and reject all galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM E376. Checked engineering calculations for each fabricator-designed connection c. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) e. Records of calibration or recalibration performed on the tools or equipment used during the work. Testing in accordance with ASTM F606/F606M shall be at the purchaser’s expense. 4. c. A shipping list (including total weight of release and weight of shipment).2. Checked erection and shop drawings b.

4. section properties. Pipe shall be ASTM A53 Type E or S. The purchaser’s purchase order number shall be shown on all erection and shop drawings. g. and test methods covered by this Practice which yield equivalent quality and performance. they may be substituted only with prior written approval by the purchaser. ASTM unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. plates.ASTM A325/A325M Type 1 or ASTM A490/A490M. unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. including areas to be masked.ASTM F436/F436M 4. j. design. Shop drawings shall state the welding electrode to be used. AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. Washer . These lists may be shown on either the shop drawings or separate sheets.PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 e. Structural tubing shall be ASTM A501 or ASTM A500 Grade B. Erection drawings shall clearly show the mark number and position for each member.4. Shop drawings and erection drawings shall be prepared using a three dimensional steel modeling and detailing software system. and length of field bolts and other fasteners for each connection shall be provided.3 Performance 4. k. A bolt list and list of other fasteners showing the number.4. h. 4. Erection drawings shall clearly identify pretensioned and slip critical high strength bolted connections. angles.5 Page 8 of 18 Process Industry Practices .4 Products and Materials 4. applicable portions of OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 and Part 1926. and ladders shall be included in the same three dimensional model as main structural steel and detailed using the same system. shall be noted on the shop drawings.3 4. and other shapes shall be ASTM A36/A36M. Grade B or ASTM A106 Grade B. Surface preparation and shop applied coatings. or standards exist for the materials. High strength bolt assemblies shall be as follows: a. codes. Bolt . l.3. size. i. In the event that drawing revisions are necessary. f. and any other applicable federal. Mark number system shall be agreed upon in advance with purchaser. grade. All miscellaneous steel such as handrail. stairs.2 4. If local specifications. Structural channels.3.1 4. bars.4. state or local regulations.1 All work shall be in accordance with the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel Buildings and Bridges.2 4.4 4. the shop drawings shall clearly be clouded showing all changes of the latest revisions.4. Structural wide flange shapes shall be ASTM A992/A992M. if specified on the design drawings b.

COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification c.ASTM F1852 or ASTM F2280.13 Steel joists shall be in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications and Load Tables.4.1. AWS D1. Direct Tension Indicator (D.11 Welded steel bar grating and grating stair treads shall be ASTM A1011/A1011M. 4. Roof Decks and Cellular Deck Floor Systems with Electrical Distribution.9 Process Industry Practices Page 9 of 18 . (For example. Unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.1). all connections not fully detailed on the design drawings shall be fabricatorselected. Heavy Hex Nut . if specified in Contract Documents.3 (including Table 3. Type B.5.7 4. Bolt . with an electrode strength of 58 ksi (400 MPa) minimum yield strength and 70 ksi (480 MPa) minimum tensile strength. Form Decks.) washers .1 General 4. . Commercial Steel (Type B).5./yd.4.T. or fabricator-designed. use E70XX for SMAW.ASTM A759 4. Grating stair treads shall have abrasive or checkered plate nosing. if specified in Contract Documents d.12 Steel deck shall be in accordance with the SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks.10 Checkered floor plate shall be ASTM A786/A786M Pattern 4 or 5 and ASTM A36/A36M.1 Section 7.I. Welding filler metal shall be AWS D1.) Crane rails shall be as follows: a.4. unless serrated is specified.4. Twist-off type bolt assemblies . 4. ER70S-X for GMAW.5 Connections 4. low hydrogen.ASTM A1 b.ASTM A307 Grade A Heavy Hex b.4. Top surface of bearing bars shall be plain. galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and NAAMM MBG 531.1 4.1 Section 3. 4. Rails 60 to 84 lb.ASTM F436/F436M c.1./yd.5. 4.4.ASTM A563/A563M Grade DH 4.8 Headed studs shall be ASTM A108 Grade 1010 through 1020. F7XX-EXXX for SAW. .ASTM F959/F959M.2 All connections shall be engineer-designed.ASTM A563/A563M Grade A 4.4. Washer . fabricator-selected. Heavy Hex Nut . and E7XT-X for FCAW. e.6 Standard bolt assemblies shall be as follows: a. 4. Rails 104 to 175 lb.4.

4.5.PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 4.2. combined bolt tension and shear. A request to deviate from the specific details of any engineerdesigned connection shall be in writing. sizes. Fabricator-selected connections shall be those for which engineer of record has authority and responsibility for the design adequacy and fabricator has authority and responsibility for the detailing. arrangement. with written approval of the engineer of record.3.5. 4. Approval of this submittal constitutes acceptance by engineer of record of design responsibility for the structural adequacy of the changed detail. block shear. local bending.5.5.5.2.3 4.4 Page 10 of 18 Process Industry Practices .1 4.1 4.3 4. This information shall be shown on shop drawings. coped beam capacities. Fabricator-selected connections shall be simple connections (shear only.4 Fabricator-Designed Connections 4.5. and bracing) and shall take into account all applicable limit states.4. Fabricator-designed connections shall be designed and detailed to equal or exceed the required strength shown on the design drawings or as provided in the contract documents.2 4. and lengths for each individual member or part to be joined.3 4.2 4. A professional engineer shall design or supervise the design of all fabricator-designed connections and be responsible for the structural adequacy. Fabricator-designed connections shall meet all requirements of the contract documents. Such changed details shall also be clearly shown on shop drawings.2. columns.3.4.4. including bolt shear. but not the detailing.3. The approval by engineer of record of shop drawings detailing fabricator-selected connections constitutes acceptance by engineer of record of design responsibility for the structural adequacy. girders. Engineer-designed connections shall be only those connections fully detailed on the design drawings provided by purchaser. etc. or negligible bending moment). the design shall consider the entire joint (including beams. These connections shall be detailed by selecting standard details from the accepted standards listed in Section 2.3 Fabricator-Selected Connections 4.5. dimensions. In all cases.5. web buckling.2 and shall meet all other requirements in the contract documents. of the approved fabricator-selected connections.2 4.5.5.5. and shall be furnished as shown.2 Engineer-Designed Connections 4.5.5. prying action. showing all fastener sizes. and all connection material and weld types. quantities and grades.1 Engineer-designed connections will be fully designed and detailed on the design drawings provided by purchaser.

5. AISC Steel Construction Manual.5. detailing.5.9 4. 5/8-inch (16 mm) or smaller diameter shall be permitted for ladder.5.5. Connection design shall be in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts.10 Slip-critical type connections A325-SC shall be used if noted on the contract documents.5 4.5.5.5.5. column flanges.5.5.5. and for elements of other members involved shall be designed and furnished as required. The minimum available strength of all bolted.COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification 4. High-strength bolted connections shall be bearing type A325-N with threads included in the shear plane. as noted in the contract documents.5. and fabrication of bolted connections shall be in accordance with either AISC’s Allowable Strength Design (ASD) or Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) method.7 4.3 4.6 4. purlin. 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter ASTM A325/A325M high-strength bolts shall be used in all bolted structural connections.1 4. stair tread.4 4.2 4. and AISC Detailing for Steel Construction. girt.5 Bolted Connections 4.8 4. framed beam connections shall be the member end reaction shown on the design drawings.5.5. Unless otherwise noted on the design drawings.5.4.5.6 4.5.5. or mixed bolted and welded.5 Stiffeners for column webs.5. Review of shop drawings detailing fabricator-designed connections and engineering calculation sheets by engineer of record does not relieve the fabricator of responsibility for both the structural adequacy and detailing of connections designed by the fabricator.5. ASTM A307 bolts larger than 5/8-inch (16 mm) shall not be permitted. Process Industry Practices Page 11 of 18 . 4. Checked engineering calculations for each fabricator-designed connection shall be sealed and signed by the responsible professional engineer who designed or supervised the design of the connections. all shop drawings containing fabricator-designed connections shall be sealed and signed by the responsible professional engineer.4. ASTM A307 bolts. and handrail connections. The minimum number of bolts in a framed beam connection shall be two bolts. ASTM A325/A325M bolts larger than 3/4-inch (20 mm) diameter shall not be used without specific written approval of the engineer of record.5.4.5.4. If required by the contract documents. Design.5.5. door frame.7 4.8 4.

all bolt holes shall be standard holes as defined by AISC 360. 4.20 A minimum of 5% extra quantities of each bolt size and length.5. 4.2 Page 12 of 18 Process Industry Practices .5.11 Unless otherwise specified on the design drawings or permitted by the following paragraphs.5.5. 4.5.13 For framed beam slip-critical connections.5.14 Unless otherwise approved by engineer of record. and fabrication of welded connections shall be in accordance with either AISC’s Allowable Strength Design (ASD) or Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) method.5.5. the long direction of the slot shall be perpendicular to the load direction.5. lifting lugs and other below 4.21 Mechanically galvanized bolts or nuts shall not be interchanged with hot dipped galvanized nuts or bolts.19 All bolt lengths shall be determined in accordance with the Commentary on Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts. 4. 4. Welded connection design shall be in accordance with AISC 360. 4. 4.5. AISC Steel Construction Manual.PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 4. direct tension indicator washers shall be in accordance with ASTM F959/F959M and shall be installed according to the washer manufacturer’s published specifications. horizontal short slotted holes as defined by AISC 360 may be used in the outstanding leg of clip angles if approved by engineer of record.5.5. 4.5. as noted in the contract documents.5.5.12 For framed beam bearing connections. detailing. and AISC Detailing for Steel Construction. including nuts and washers.5.16 Hardened washers shall be provided under all bolt heads and/or nuts adjacent to any ply with oversized or slotted holes. 4.5. 4.5. respectively. 4.5. 4. 4. oversized or horizontal short slotted as defined by AISC 360 holes may be used in the outstanding leg of clip angles if approved by engineer of record.6.5.18 If used.5. Welding for monorails.17 For standard holes.23 All nuts for high-strength bolts shall be wax-dipped to reduce torque during installation. 4. Appendix C.6. shall be provided for field erection.5.5.1 Design.5.5.5. Table C2.15 Slotted or oversized hole dimensions shall be in accordance with Table J3.22 All column splices shall be field bolted and shall be in accordance with AISC Detailing for Steel Construction.5.24 Each bolt component shall be clearly marked with the component manufacturer’s identification. a minimum of one hardened washer shall be supplied with each bolt.5.3 of the AISC 360.5.5.6 Welded Connections 4.5.

7. unless otherwise indicated on design drawings or approved by engineer of record.5. Welds shall be continuous.8. Subpart R – Steel Erection. Unless otherwise noted on the design drawings. 4.8 Bracing Connections 4. Provide additional bolts or connection devices where required to comply with OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926.7.5.1.8 4. all field connections shall be bolted and all shop connections shall be either bolted or welded.5. All bracing connections.5.3 4.e.3 The minimum available strength of all welded framed beam connections shall be the member end reaction shown on the design drawings.4 4.5.6 Process Industry Practices Page 13 of 18 .8. 4. connections for pre-assembled bracing and truss members shall be designed for the required strength shown on the design drawings.2 4. Unless otherwise shown on the design drawings.5.4 4. All gusset and stiffener plates shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm) minimum thickness.8.5.7.5.5. All cross bracing shall be bolted at intersections with one bolt minimum for angles and two bolts minimum for tees.6. The available tensile strength of the member shall be calculated using the gross cross section of the member.5.1 4.5. Minimum fillet weld size shall be AISC minimum or 3/16 inch (5 mm).6.5 4.5.6 4.1 4.7.5.3 4. for structural welds. A minimum of two bolts per connection shall be provided. but not less than 50% of the available tensile strength of the member.5.5.6.8.7 Shop and Field Connections 4.COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification the hook devices required for lifting or rigging shall conform to AWS D14.6.5 4.6.. All locations of no-paint or areas requiring full masking or strip masking shall be noted on the shop drawings. Erection clips for field welded connections shall be provided. epoxies).5. All run-off bars and extension tabs shall be removed unless otherwise noted. Seal welds shall be 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum fillet weld. including gusset plates.8.6.5.5. all contact surfaces shall be masked unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.4 4.2 4.8. shall be designed in accordance with the AISC 360 and AISC Steel Construction Manual.7 4. whichever is larger. To ensure electrical continuity if shop applying non-conductive coatings (i.

the following working points shall be used: a. notched-free. If performing shop assembly work. Shop splices.6 Page 14 of 18 Process Industry Practices . or building codes.7 4. state or local laws.5 4.6. For vertical bracing at the intersection of a column. the working point shall be the intersection of a horizontal line 5 inches (125 mm) below the top flange if the brace is above the beam. 4.1. All re-entrant corners shall be shaped. For the connection of V-braces to nominal beams 12 inches (300 mm) or larger. all vertical bracing and knee bracing shall have gusset plates on column centerlines.6.9.PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 4. Gusset plates for vertical or horizontal bracing members and single-plate shear connections for beams shall extend outside fireproofing a sufficient length to make the connection with the fireproofing in place.1 4.5. For the connection of V-braces to nominal beams 10 inches (250 mm) or smaller.2 4. substitutions of member sizes.1 All fabrication shall be in accordance with the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges and the AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.6.9.5. 4.6. and the centerline of the bay. and brace. shall be fabricated with natural mill camber in the up position. the tolerances shall not exceed those specified in AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.6 Fabrication 4.5.3 4. the gusset plate shall be connected to both beam and column.2 Connections for members fireproofed with concrete shall be detailed to minimize blockouts in shop applied fireproofing. except cantilevers.6.5.3 4.9 Connections for Concrete Fireproofed Members 4. beam. 4.4 4. All beams. unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.8. All welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.6.9. the working point shall be the intersection of the horizontal centerline of the beam and the centerline of the bay.8.8 Unless otherwise noted on the design drawings. Handrails shall not be connected to fireproofed columns. c. b. The work point shall be the point at which the beam and column centerlines intersect. Unless otherwise noted on the design drawings. to a radius. or changes in details or dimensions shall not be permitted without written authorization from engineer of record. or 5 inches above the bottom flange if the brace is below the beam.5.5.

1.6. and handrails shall be shop assembled in the largest units suitable for handling and shipping. ASTM A325/A325M bolts and corresponding nuts and washers .ASTM A123 b.7.6.2.8 4.6.ASTM B695 or ASTM F2329 c.COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification 4.ASTM F2329 or ASTM B695 4.2. shall be galvanized.7 All pieces shall be clearly marked with a permanent identifying erection mark number. ASTM A36/A36M threaded bar or ASTM A307 bolts and corresponding nuts and washers . with a minimum of one hole per panel. loose mill scale and other foreign matter shall be removed. 4.6.7. and crane rails. A minimum of two fasteners per panel shall be used at each support. Platforms.1 It shall be the fabricator’s responsibility to safeguard against embrittlement and warpage in accordance with ASTM A143 and ASTM A384.12 Undimensioned grating/checkered plate openings shall be cut in the field by others.7. weld flux. and hardware shall be in accordance with the following ASTM specifications: a. The fasteners shall be supplied with 5% extra to cover losses.2 Fabrication 4. 4.6.9 4. all sharp corners.7.1 General 4.14 Checkered plate shall have 1/2 inch (12 mm) diameter drain holes provided for each 20 square feet (2 square meters) of area.6. Method and location of marking shall be approved by purchaser. with a minimum of four per panel. Fabrication details shall be in accordance with ASTM A385 to allow for the creation of high quality zinc coatings. Steel shapes and plates . 4.6. plates.2 4. all materials.7.13 Joints perpendicular to the span of grating and checkered plate flooring shall be permitted only over support members.7. except ASTM A490 bolts.1 Unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.10 The method for fastening grating shall be as specified on the design drawings. slag. Before surface preparation. Ladder cages shall be shop assembled on ladders. ASTM A490M bolts.2 Process Industry Practices Page 15 of 18 . 4. stairways.7 Galvanizing 4.1. weld spatter. 4.6.11 Grating/checkered plate openings dimensioned on the design drawings shall be cut and banded in the shop as shown on the design drawings. burrs (including bolt hole burrs). 4. 4. Galvanizing of steel shapes.

08 mm) and contain a minimum of 65% zinc dust by weight.2.7.7. Before repair of damaged galvanized coating.2.4 4.7.05 mm to 0.7. the defects shall be repaired by redipping the member in the zinc bath. Nuts shall be tapped oversize in accordance with ASTM A563/A563M.4.7.4.3 4.7 4. No single repair is greater than 2 square inches (1300 mm ) Galvanizing of Steel Hardware 4.7.4. oil.PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 4.4. Any nonadhering galvanizing shall be removed to the extent that the surrounding galvanizing is integral and adherent. No single repair is greater than 12 inches (300 mm) long.7. Vent holes shall be provided for piping or tubular assemblies as required by ASTM A385.1 4. shall be mechanically galvanized by the indicator manufacturer in accordance with Class 50 of ASTM B695.5 4.3. Total damaged area is less than 1% of the total coated area of the member being repaired 2 b. Nut threads shall be retapped after hot-dip galvanizing to provide proper fit.4.7. drilling and welding shall be performed before galvanizing. exposed substrate metal shall be cleaned to bright metal and free of all visual rust. Potential problems that require a modification in design shall be brought to the attention of the purchaser before proceeding.7. cutting.7. Cold repair using an organic zinc rich coating shall be permitted if the following conditions exist: a.2.1 4.2 4.2 4.7. if used.3 4.3 If practical.3. or grease. Any damage to galvanizing shall be repaired in accordance with ASTM A780. The edges of tightly contacting surfaces shall be completely seal welded.3 4.2.7. Page 16 of 18 Process Industry Practices .6 4. the dry film thickness shall be 2 to 3 mils (0.2. Weld slag shall be removed before galvanizing.5 For coating applied for a cold repair.4 Repair 4.7.7.7. If surface defects exceed 2% of a member’s area.4 c. 4.3. Direct tension indicators.

3 4. Flux.10 Correction of excessive warpage that exceeds ASTM A6/A6M criteria shall be performed by press straightening if possible. heavy ash. grating. etc. shall be as follows: a. Adequate protection shall be provided for threads on sag rods and any other threaded components to prevent damage during shipping and handling. bolt ends) shall be repair galvanized in accordance with this section.4.7. storage. and handrail) e. 4.8.4. Shipping.COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification 4. Second tier columns and its framing. Loose base plates b.6 All bolts.7. or filing as required.7. or heavy dross inclusions shall be removed by brushing.7.7. Railcars and/or trucks shall be loaded and cribbed so they can be readily unloaded by others.8. Steel embedded in concrete c. Erection bolts d.8.6 Hot repairs shall be made in the shop if any of the following conditions exist: a.9 Hot repair shall be made using zinc alloy rod or powder manufactured for the repair of galvanized steel.8.7 4.. unless otherwise noted in the contract documents or arranged by the purchaser. The delivery sequence for the fabricated steel.5 4. Any single repair is at least 2 square inches (1300 mm2) in area c. 4. or shipping before receipt by the purchaser. 4. grinding. Galvanized steel which has been rejected shall be stripped. weatherproof containers.8 Handling.8. washers.e. regalvanized.4. and submitted again for inspection.4. 4. and Delivery 4. Railcars and/or trucks shall be loaded in such a manner that continuous drainage is assured. First tier columns and framing for all its levels (including stairs.7.8.4.7. Any single repair is 12 inches (300 mm) long or more 4. All steel and its coatings shall be protected from any damage caused by handling.12 If galvanized tension control bolts are used.1 Delivery of steel shall be in the order needed for erection. and nuts shall be packaged and delivered in rigid (not cardboard). 4. Total damaged area is greater than 1% but less than 2% of the total coated area of the member being repaired b.8 4.11 The application of localized heating to straighten shall be approved by engineer of record. all bare steel surfaces (i.2 4. Process Industry Practices Page 17 of 18 .4.4 4.4.

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 4.8 All materials and documentation shall be delivered to the job site in good condition.8. All materials and documentation will be inspected by the purchaser immediately upon receipt to determine that all items included in the bill of materials have been supplied. The purchaser reserves the right to reject all damaged or below quality material or documentation. to assure that all documentation has been received.8.9 Page 18 of 18 Process Industry Practices .7 4. 4. and to check for any damage.8.

COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification .

These purposes include but are not limited to the procurement process (e. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The University of Texas at Austin. Construction Industry Institute. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. administrative.g. Austin.. This Practice is subject to revision at any time. suppliers and contractors with copies of the Practice solely for Authorized Users’ purposes. PRINTING HISTORY November 1994 Issued December 1998 Revision February 2002 Technical Correction February 2011 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds . The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). such laws or regulations must be followed. Authorized Users may provide their clients. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. Changes or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500). as attachments to requests for quotation/ purchase orders or requests for proposals/contracts) and preparation and issue of design engineering deliverables for use on a specific project by Authorized User’s client. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. Authorized Users may attach addenda or overlays to clearly indicate modifications or exceptions to specific sections of PIP Practices. Texas 78759. PIP’s copyright notices must be clearly indicated and unequivocally incorporated in documents where an Authorized User desires to provide any third party with copies of the Practice. PIP Member Companies and Subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations. application.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. contractors. or standards organizations.

. Definitions .................1 Purpose ...... 3 4.......................... 2 2................ 2 2........................................1 General ........ 4 4... 2 1...........2 Products and Materials ........ Requirements..................... 4 4............ 6 Drawing STS05130-01 – Field Located and Field Fabricated Grating Openings Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 10 ........... 2 2..............1 Process Industry Practices . Introduction....COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification Table of Contents 1........................ 6 4.......................................... 3 3.....3 Government Regulations ............................... 2 1.......3 Execution .............. References .....................2 Industry Codes and Standards ..... 2 2..........................2 Scope ......

Structural Welding Code – Steel ASTM International (ASTM) – ASTM A307 . Steel. Introduction 1. and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. erection. 2. except as otherwise noted.9. Classes 10.Epoxy Grout Specification – PIP STS05120 . 2. Short titles are used herein where appropriate.2 Industry Codes and Standards American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) – AISC 303 . Heat Treated. and field inspection of structural and miscellaneous steel.PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 1.Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs. Structural and miscellaneous steel are as defined in AISC Code of Standard Practice. for Structural Steel Joints (Metric) Page 2 of 10 Process Industry Practices . The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used. handling.3. Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric) – ASTM A490 .Specification for Structural Steel Buildings – AISC Steel Construction Manual American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE) – ASSE A10.Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification 2.1M .Standard Specification for Structural Bolts. Alloy Steel. 60.Standard Specification for Structural Bolts.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) – PIP STS03600 . 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (AASHTO No. industry codes and standards.Safety Requirements for Steel Erection – American National Standard for Construction and Demolition Operations American Welding Society (AWS) – AWS D1. 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (AASHTO No. assembly.Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts. M253) – ASTM A490M . M164) – ASTM A325M .9 and 10.Cementitious Grout Specification – PIP STS03601 . 1.1/D1.2 Scope This Practice describes the requirements for the receipt.Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges – ANSI/AISC 360 .1 Purpose This Practice provides the requirements for structural and miscellaneous steel erection.Standard Specification for Structural Bolts. References Applicable parts of the following Practices. Heat Treated.13 . Steel.000 psi Tensile Strength – ASTM A325 .

that the purchaser or engineer of record has transmitted or otherwise communicated. and appurtenances described in the contract documents. and performance of the civil works. and workmanship furnished by the erector. engineer of record: Purchaser’s authorized representative with overall authority and responsibility for the engineering design. design drawings. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) – OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 – OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926 3. The engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the work is to be constructed. shall apply. The term erector shall apply also to the fabricator’s subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s). The term manufacturer shall apply also to the manufacturer’s subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s). sketches. materials. specifications. Department of Labor. materials. practices. erector: The party responsible for erecting structural and miscellaneous steel in accordance with the contract documents. installation and/or use. The inspector shall be qualified by training and experience and hold certifications or documentation of their qualifications. including codes. Definitions contract documents: Any and all documents. the inspector shall be retained by the erector.COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) – RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts Steel Deck Institute (SDI) – SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks. specifications. Also known as structural engineer of record in AISC Code of Standard Practice. Form Decks and Roof Decks Steel Joist Institute (SJI) – SJI Standard Specifications and Load Tables 2.3 Government Regulations Requirements by state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the structural steel is to be erected. and/or items provided in accordance with the contract documents. manufacturer: The party who produces and warrants the performance of the products. and data sheets. either by incorporation or reference. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. The products. quality. installations. foundations. tests and possibly include shop drawings to assist in proper application. U. and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents. owner: The party who owns the facility wherein the structural steel will be used.S. Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 10 . studies. and/or items are manufactured in a controlled process using standard codes. inspector: The party responsible for verifying the quality of all materials. structure. materials. and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the erector.

defective.1. Inspectors shall be qualified and certified as AWS Certified Welding Inspectors in accordance with the provisions of AWS D1.10 The purchaser may reject any improper.1.1. The inspector shall inspect all materials. and qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents.1. erector shall participate in the AISC Certification Program and be designated an AISC Certified Erector. 4. Requirements 4. or unsuitable materials.1 General 4. Page 4 of 10 Process Industry Practices .1.4 4.1. The purchaser shall have the right to inspect all materials.PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 professional engineer: An engineer. and workmanship and shall have an unrestricted right of access to the work areas.1. A complete up-to-date set of erection drawings at the jobsite shall be maintained.1 Quality Control 4. and workmanship to ensure conformance with all requirements of this Practice and the contract documents. installations. installations. installations.1. and workmanship.2 4.1.1.1.11 Rejected materials.1 Unless approved by the engineer of record. other than the engineer of record licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the steel is to be erected. inferior.3 4.1. shall be provided. 4.1.8 4. A written Quality Control Program and Inspection Procedures document that shall provide details of how compliance with the requirements of this Practice and the shop and erection drawings shall be achieved. Category ACSE.1.1. All welding shall be inspected in accordance with AWS D1. The purchaser may be the owner or the owner’s authorized agent.1.1.1. 4.1.5 4. installations.1.1.1.1 or AWS QC1 or shall be trained by and working under the supervision of an AWS Certified Welding Inspector.1. purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the erector.1. Welding procedures and individual welders shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1. installations. and workmanship shall be repaired or replaced in accordance with the purchaser’s instructions at no cost to the purchaser.7 4.1. Bolted connections shall be installed and inspected in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts.6 4.9 4. The erector shall be solely responsible for the quality control of all the erector-supplied materials. and workmanship.

greater than 50 tons (45 metric tons).3.2. larger than 2.COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification 4. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) d. Process Industry Practices Page 5 of 10 . Applicable portions of OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 and Part 1926 d. state. or local requirements 4. Work shall not proceed without approval.3.2 Submittals 4. Quality control program and inspection procedures c.2. Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) e.3 Performance Requirements 4.1.1.12 Inspection tools and tool calibration records for tools used shall be maintained and available for examination by the purchaser.1.1.1 Safety 1.1. A written assembly lift plan. the following documents shall be submitted to the purchaser for recording purposes: a. or if required by the contract documents.1 The following items shall be submitted to the engineer of record for approval. 1.2 Assembly Lift Plan The erector shall be responsible for assuring that all preassemblies that are not specifically shown or noted on the design drawings to be preassembled before lifting shall maintain structural integrity during lifting.1.1. 2. Calibration or recalibration performed on the tools or equipment used during the work 4.1. shall be provided for assemblies larger than 50 feet (15 meters) in one direction. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel Buildings and Bridges (AISC 303) c. Any other applicable federal. Welder(s) qualification records f. A written safety program shall be provided that addresses the safety measures that shall be used during steel erection work. prepared by a professional engineer. Safety program b. Quality control inspections and test results b.000 square feet (186 square meters) in the plan area.2 Assembly lift plan(s) as required by the purchaser or OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart R If requested. The safety program shall be in accordance with the requirements of: a. The contract documents b. 4. 4. a.

2 Any circumstances discovered that affect progression.3.1 All materials shall be received.3. unloaded. deterioration.1 Receiving. stored. municipal.3. performance. Unless otherwise specified. or completion of the work activities shall be immediately reported to the purchaser in writing. and other foreign matter. and a description of the rigging to be utilized. the structural calculations that prove structural stability of the assembled components during lifting operations. damage. the occurrence shall be immediately reported to the purchaser in writing.1.3. or documentation are missing or otherwise defective. Materials shall be kept free of dirt.2.3 Execution 4.3. The drawings and other contract documents b.1. all materials shall be in accordance with PIP STS05120. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel Buildings and Bridges (AISC 303) c. verification of the capacity capabilities for any cranes utilized in the lift. Erection of structural steel shall be in accordance with: a.1. and that all documentation has been received. The assembly lift plan shall contain detailed data on the extent of the lifted assembly. If any damage is discovered. 3. Review of the assembly lift plan by the purchaser does not relieve the erector’s responsibility for the safe erection and/or lifting of any component.3. location and positioning of the cranes. or local regulations or codes 4. or any other item. These may 4.2. 4. its weights. 4. structural assembly.1 Page 6 of 10 Process Industry Practices . OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 and Part 1926 d.2 4.PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 2. all materials shall be inspected immediately after receipt to ensure that the materials are not damaged. that all items on the packing list have been supplied. and Storage 4.2 Products and Materials Unless otherwise specified.1. or staining.2 Erection 4. Applicable state. grease. components. The assembly lift plan shall demonstrate that the proposed lift shall be performed safely and that the assemblies being lifted shall remain free from distortion or undue bending. or any parts.3 4. 4.3.3.4 4. and maintain structural integrity during the lift. and otherwise handled in a manner that prevents distortion. Inspection.

3.10 Erection of steel deck shall be in accordance with: Process Industry Practices Page 7 of 10 . the foundations and other connection points shall be checked to confirm their location.2.3. debris.2.6 4.8 4. The requirements of the Steel Deck Institute (SDI) b. protect existing structure from weather.2.5 Temporary erection loads or permanent loads shall not be placed on any incomplete portions of the structure being erected unless it can be demonstrated by analysis that the contemplated action is safe.3. The joist manufacturer c.2.2. elevation. OSHA 29 CFR 1926 Subpart R 4. Lifting of painted or galvanized structural members shall be performed with a nonabrasive choker. This responsibility shall also extend to temporary bracing required to ensure safe and stable conditions of partially completed structural assemblies.1 During construction. and condition.2.3 Structural Stability 4. 4. 4. The deck manufacturer c.2.3 Any damage caused during erection shall be reported to the purchaser in writing. OSHA 29 CFR 1926 Subpart R 4. install and locate all temporary bracing and/or guy cables to maintain the partassembled structure in a stable condition under a combination of construction and wind loads.3. It shall be the erector’s responsibility to specify. A daily record.3. Loose timbers.2. The requirements of the Steel Joist Institute (SJI) b. metal sheeting.COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification include. bolt buckles. ensuring that no part shall be overstressed during construction activities.3. and temporary scaffolding shall be kept restrained or removed from work areas.3. or incomplete or unacceptable work of other contractors affecting the work. by piece number. a. orientation.11 Where connecting to existing structures.3.4 4.9 4.7 4. tools.2. Corrective measures shall be completed as directed by the purchaser at no cost to the purchaser. the erector shall be responsible for maintaining the structure in a stable condition.3. Erection of steel joists shall be in accordance with: a. but are not limited to. Before commencing work.3.3. discrepancies between the erection/shop drawings and the delivered steel members. incorrectly fabricated steel members. of all material erected shall be maintained. 4.3.

they shall be loosened before grouting.3 4.3. If structural joints are made using high-strength bolt assemblies. Cut off exposed edges of grout at 45 degrees along the edges of base plates after grout has acquired its initial set. Shims or wedges shall be provided where required..5.2 4.5 Bolted Connections 4.4.3. etc.4. All bolts shall be as noted on the shop drawings. tension control.5. methods of installation.3. the bolts shall be tightened to a snugtight condition.5 4.5.4 4.5 4.) to structural steel members. Anchor bolts shall be fully tightened to the specified tension only after the base plates have been grouted and the grout has sufficiently set in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. and inspection methods shall be in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts and the contract documents.1 4.4. anchor bolts shall be tightened to the specified tension. 4.4 Setting Base Plates 4.2 The structure shall be plumbed.4. handrail assemblies. If ASTM A307 bolt assemblies are used for connecting appurtenances (i.3 4. pipe supports.4.PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 4. If required in the contract documents.3. types of wrenches to be used. The column base plates shall be set and shimmed to correct positions. erection drawings.3. gates.3.7 4. the materials. If used.3.1 4. base plates shall be grouted in accordance with PIP STS03600 or PIP STS03601.4.3.6 Page 8 of 10 Process Industry Practices .3. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.5.4.3. Grout shall fill any anchor bolt sleeves and/or shear key openings.5. ASTM A490/A490M bolts and galvanized ASTM A325/A325M bolts shall not be reused.3.2 4.5.3. Mechanically galvanized bolts and nuts shall not be intermixed with hot-dip galvanized nuts and bolts.3. and locations as shown on the erection drawings.4 4. or other contract documents.e. The top of bearing surfaces and the bottom of base plates shall be cleaned. elevations.3.3.3.6 4. and braced before any final bolted or welded connections are made and before grouting of base plates.3. If setting nuts are used. leveled. direct tension indicator (DTI) washers shall be installed according to the washer manufacturer’s published specifications.

Seal welds shall be 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum fillet weld. for structural welds.6 4. Drift pins shall not be driven with such a force as to damage adjacent metal areas.7.7 Bolts that have been pretensioned shall be color coded.7.5 4.3.3.6.1 4.3 4.8 Steel Joists 4. shimming. all welds shall be continuous. All welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1. Minimum fillet weld size shall be AISC minimum 3/16 inch (5 mm). die punched.3. Modifications or repairs to steel joists shall not be performed without prior written approval of the engineer of record.8. One filler plate up to 1/8-inch (3-mm) thickness may be used in spaces between members to be bolted. and other contract documents.6.3 4.3. Fit-up bolts and drift pins shall not be used to bring improperly fabricated members and parts into place (springing).4 4.7 Correction of Errors 4. erector shall follow the welding procedure provided by the engineer of record. Field welding or bolting joists to supporting steel framework shall be in accordance with the SJI specifications for the type of joists used.3.6 4.7.3.5 4.3. or otherwise marked on the ends indicating that the bolts have been properly tensioned and are ready for inspection. Holes in connections that misfit by more than 1/16 inch (1 mm) shall be corrected as directed by the engineer of record.7. the erection/shop drawings.2 4. chipping. Welds to connection plates embedded in concrete shall be deposited in a sequence that minimizes distortion of the embedment to plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) of flat or true.7.1. The engineer of record’s approval shall be required for filler plate requirements greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm).3. packing.3. and made by reaming or drilling only.3.6.6 Welded Connections 4.3.COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification 4. gouging.1 4. burning.6. filling. whichever is larger.6.3.8. 4. Unless approved otherwise by the purchaser.6.2 Process Industry Practices Page 9 of 10 . If the contract documents require welding to existing facilities that were constructed before 1963 and/or using steel other than ASTM A36. or drift punching shall not be permitted.1 4. Enlargement of holes shall be made only when approved by the engineer of record. Unless approved by the engineer of record.3.2 4.3. or wedging shall not be permitted to correct faulty work.5.3.4 4. Flame cutting.3.3.3.7.

3. Page 10 of 10 Process Industry Practices .PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification COMPLETE REVISION February 2011 4. 4.11.12.10. Floor Plate and Grating 4.3.3. 4. 4.3 4.3.2 All sags.2 If two or more stud welding guns are operated from the same power source.1 4.3 All galvanized bolt assemblies tightened against shop-applied paint shall be painted. 4.3.4 Where twist-off bolt assemblies are used.11.10.9.3. 4.3. deformations.2 All erection damage to shop-applied paint coatings shall be repaired in accordance with the purchaser’s coating specification.12 Coating Repairs 4.3. 4. 4.3 If damage has occurred to shop-applied coatings on metal decking. the guns shall be interlocked so that only one gun can be operated at a time to ensure that the power source has fully recovered from making one weld before another weld is started.10.1 All erection damage to hot-dip galvanized coatings shall be repaired in accordance with PIP STS05120.12.1 All shear stud attachments shall be welded in strict accordance with the stud manufacturer’s recommendations for welding procedure and welding equipment.3.12. The grating and floor plate shall be fastened in accordance with the design drawings.11.3. All field-cut floor plate or grating openings requiring toe plate protection or banding shall be installed in accordance with detail STS05130-01.3.12.3 All ceramic insulators shall be removed from the base of the studs after welding.3. holes. and other irregularities shall be repaired.10 Metal Decking for Floors and Roofs 4.3.3. A minimum of four fasteners per panel shall be used. 4.3.2 4.9 Use of power-driven or powder-actuated fasteners in the diagonal and bottom chord members of the joists shall not be permitted.3. 4. ends of bolts shall be coated to match the steel coating system.8.11 Shear Connectors 4.1 Floor and roof deck sheets shall be installed in accordance with the deck manufacturer’s installation instructions and the contract documents. field touch-up shall be in accordance with the decking manufacturer’s recommendations.3.9.

.

April 2002 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STF05511 Fixed Industrial Stairs .

All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. Changes.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. reaffirmed. overlays. Construction Industry Institute. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at www. The University of Texas at Austin. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. addenda. or standards organizations. or withdrawn. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. contractors. administrative. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. such laws or regulations must be followed. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. Texas 78759. or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500). this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. application. This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will be reviewed every 5 years. Austin. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named.pip. PIP will not consider requests for interpretations (inquiries) for this Practice.org. This Practice will be revised. Not printed with State funds . To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations.

....................... 6 Section B-B .............................1 Purpose .........................................................................................April 2002 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STF05511 Fixed Industrial Stairs Table of Contents 1............................. 11 Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 11 ............2 Industry Codes and Standards ..............1 Process Industry Practices ................................... 3 3................................................................ 10 Detail 5......... 8 Detail 3..................... 5 Section A-A ..................................... 2 1............................... 11 Detail 6................ 2 2................ 10 Section E-E ................................................... 2 2.................................................................... 7 Detail 1................ Introduction ............................2 Scope................................... 2 1. 9 Detail 4. Design . 2 2............... 2 2...................... 9 Section D-D......... 6 Section C-C..................................................................................................... 8 Detail 2....3 Government Regulations ........... References ................................................ 3 List of Details Plan at Landing ..........................

Introduction 1. References Applicable requirements in the following PIP Practices. Details comply with NFPA 101 . Any conflicts or inconsistencies between this Practice and the design drawings or other contract documents shall be brought to the attention of the buyer for resolution. 1.2 Scope This Practice contains the design details for fabrication and installation of typical OSHA-regulated stairs for open structures and miscellaneous platforms for regular operational access/egress.Safety Requirements for Workplace Floor and Wall Openings. and Railing Systems • American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) – ASTM A307 .Life Safety Code for Industrial Occupancies. Short titles will be used herein when appropriate. and standards shall be considered an integral part of this Practice.1 .Angle Railing for Walking and Working Surface Details 2.Pipe Railing for Walking and Working Surface Details – PIP STF05521 .2 Industry Codes and Standards • American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE) – ANSI A1264. Stairs. This Practice also provides process industry companies with design guide information to be used in specifying and designing fixed industrial stairs.Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification – PIP STS05130 .1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) – PIP STS05120 . codes.Erection of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification – PIP STF05520 . These details are to be issued to fabricators supplying these stairs and to the erectors for use in installation. except as otherwise noted. 2.1 Purpose This Practice provides the fabricator and erector with a standard fixed industrial stair design to be used in process industry facilities. 2.PIP STF05511 Fixed Industrial Stairs April 2002 1.Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners Page 2 of 11 Process Industry Practices . The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used.

The user should determine whether local codes exist that should be applied to this Practice. All welds shall be smooth. and sealed.3 Government Regulations Federal standards and instructions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and any additional requirements by state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the stairs are to be installed shall apply. Subpart D . • U.Life Safety Code 2.7 For 20 people or fewer. For 50 or more people. Department of Labor.1 The project design drawings and data sheets specify the location. Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 11 .2 3.5-kN) concentrated live load applied to the stair stringers or a uniform load of 100 psf (4. Stair treads shall resist a 300-lbs (1. and 42 deg. orientation.0 feet (3. Stair design is based on a moving 1000-lbs (4.7 m). and any changes to the requirements of this Practice. Stair width shall be 30 inches (75 cm) unless noted otherwise. the minimum width shall be 22 inches (56 cm). The engineer shall check the stair width against NFPA 101 requirements according to total occupant load served by the stairway. NFPA 101 has the following requirements: • • • 3. Fabrication shall comply with PIP STS05120.3 3.6 Stairs shall be installed at angles to the horizontal plane of between 30 deg. special fabrication details. the minimum width shall be 36 inches (91 cm). 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) – OSHA 29 CFR 1910.April 2002 PIP STF05511 Fixed Industrial Stairs • National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) – NFPA 101 . All structural material shall be steel and shall comply with PIP STS05120 unless noted otherwise.33-kN) concentrated load applied at mid span.5 3. the minimum width shall be 44 inches (112 cm). continuous.Walking-Working Surfaces 3.8 kPa) applied to the stair assembly. and arrangement of stairs for regular operational use.4 3. Design 3. Maximum height between landings shall not exceed 12. For 21 to 49 people.S.

4 cm).1) 8 (20. Erection of stairs shall comply with PIP STS05130.9) 10.6 32.4) 10 (25.11 Page 4 of 11 Process Industry Practices .4) Nominal Tread Width (inches [cm]) 12 (30.9) 11 (27.5 (16.7) 10 (25.5) 12 (30.9 3.8 cm) shall be used where stairs service areas other than industrial equipment access or where more than 20 people will use the stairs as a means of egress.) 30.7 40.5 (19.8) 7.5 38.9) 11 (27. Galvanizing (when required) shall be done after fabrication and in accordance with PIP STS05120.5) 12 (30.6) 9 (22.9) 11 (27.4 42 Rise (inches [cm]) 6.3) 8. Maximum riser height shall be 9 inches (22.5 (26.5) 7 (17.8 Minimum tread depth shall be 10 inches (25. Some rise/tread combinations within the permissible range are as follows: Angle to Horizontal (deg.9) Tread Depth (inches [cm]) 11 (27.PIP STF05511 Fixed Industrial Stairs April 2002 3.4) 10 (25.9) *A minimum tread depth of 11 inches (27. 3.5 (21. Stair assemblies shall be coated after fabrication in accordance with the design drawings and the specifications governing the project.10 Stair railing shall comply with the requirements of PIP STF05520 or PIP STF05521.9 cm) and a maximum rise height of 7 inches (17.9 cm).5) 11 (27. 3.5* 35.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

and Backfill Specification .COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 Process Industry Practices Civil PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation. Excavation.

Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500). or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. PRINTING HISTORY March 1996 Issued May 2001 Complete Revision April 2007 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds . The University of Texas at Austin. Changes. contractors. Austin. such laws or regulations must be followed. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. addenda. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. administrative. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. overlays. Construction Industry Institute. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. Texas 78759. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. or standards organizations. application. This Practice is subject to revision at any time.

........................ Requirements.................. 3 2.... 4 4..... 2 1................ 3 4. 9 4........ 2 2..... Definitions .... Introduction.......... Excavation...................1 Process Industry Practices ... References ....................2 Materials – Fill and Backfill .......................1 Purpose ...............3....... 4 4........................COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 Process Industry Practices Civil PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation.................. 2 1. 2 2.........2 Scope................... and Backfill Specification Table of Contents 1............. 2 3................2 Industry Codes and Standards ................ 10 Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 17 .......... 2 2.......................... Construction..................................1 General ................3 Government Regulations..

Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method – ASTM D2922 . except as otherwise noted.Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates – ASTM D422 . Introduction 1. and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used.400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) – ASTM D1140 . and Backfill Specification COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 1. 2. excavation. excavation.Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12. Short titles are used herein where appropriate. and management of earthen and organic materials during the site preparation.Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56. Excavation. and therefore revision markings are not provided.1 Purpose This Practice provides the requirements for site preparation.Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils – ASTM D698 .Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) – ASTM D2937 .2 Scope This Practice describes the requirements for excavation. This document is a complete revision of PIP CVS02100.Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method – ASTM D1557 . References Applicable parts of the following Practices.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) – PIP CVS02700 .Controlled Low-Strength Materials ASTM International – ASTM C136 .Underground Gravity Sewers Specification 2. 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards American Concrete Institute (ACI) – ACI 229R .000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2700 kN-m/m3)) – ASTM D2167 . placement. inspection. industry codes and standards.Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than the No. and backfill phase of a construction project.PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation. 200 (75-m) Sieve – ASTM D1556 . and backfill.Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the DriveCylinder Method Page 2 of 17 Process Industry Practices . 1.

materials.S. tools.S. and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents.COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) – National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit (or a permit issued by a state agency approved by the EPA as a substitute for the NPDES permit) – National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit for Construction Activity – Storm Water Management for Construction Activities 3.Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction – ASTM D4253 . equipment. and appurtenances described in the contract documents. Plastic Limit. The engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the work is to be constructed.Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density – ASTM D4318 . structure. excavation. quality.Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table – ASTM D4254 . Excavation. Definitions engineer of record: Purchaser’s authorized representative with overall authority and responsibility for the engineering design. or other legal agreement over the project site purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the constructor. Department of Labor. and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the constructor owner: The party who has authority through ownership. lease. Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 17 . and Backfill Specification – ASTM D3740 . the term constructor shall apply also to the constructor’s subcontractor(s) and vendor(s). either by incorporation or by reference.Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit. including design drawings. contract documents: Any and all documents. and backfill in accordance with the contract documents. foundations. that purchaser or engineer of record has transmitted or otherwise communicated. and performance of the civil works. Unless otherwise noted. fill. supervision. and labor for performing site preparation. and Plasticity Index of Soils 2.3 Government Regulations U.Safety and Health Regulations for Construction U. constructor: The party responsible for supplying the materials. The purchaser may be the owner or the owner’s authorized agent. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) – OSHA 29 CFR 1926 .

2.1. During construction.1 General 4. 3. During an audit by the purchaser.PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation. The name and qualifications of the proposed inspection/testing firm(s) shall be submitted along with the constructor’s proposal for purchaser’s approval.1.3 and 4.1. 4. If the purchaser furnishes the testing and inspection. all lines and grades shall be provided by the constructor for constructor’s operations. After starting from horizontal and vertical control furnished by the purchaser. Requirements 4.1(2) shall be responsible for QC inspection and testing to ensure that the work meets the requirements of this Practice and the contract documents. the constructor shall not be relieved of the responsibility to meet all requirements of this Practice and the contract documents. The constructor shall be solely responsible for the accuracy of survey work performed.1.1. 2. The inspection/testing firm shall perform tests as outlined in Section 4. If completed work is not in accordance with this Practice. as part of the QC program. any inspection and test reports. 2. a qualified independent inspection/testing firm in accordance with the criteria of ASTM D3740 shall be retained to perform the work identified in Sections 4. and Backfill Specification COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 4.1.1. Excavation.1.1.1.2 Surveying 1. 4. and/or engineering analyses and calculations associated with the scope of work shall be provided upon request. The inspection/testing firm required in Section 4.1.1 General 1. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.4 or as otherwise specified in the contract documents.1.1. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.1. 4.1 Quality Control 4. 4.4 of this Practice. a quality control (QC) program shall be instituted that will verify or ensure that the work performed under the contract meets the requirements of this Practice and the contract documents.3 Inspection 1. the constructor shall be responsible for repairing or reconstructing the deficiencies to meet this Practice and the other contract documents. Page 4 of 17 Process Industry Practices .1. the purchaser shall have access to all the constructor’s facilities and records for the purpose of conducting performance inspection/audits. 3.

or ASTM D1140 b.4 Testing 1. Rubber balloon method in accordance with ASTM D2167 d.e. one in-place moisture content and one density test shall be performed on every lift of fill. 7. the field density testing shall be performed at the following frequencies: a.1. Excavation. Tests of gradation. density. For granular soils that do not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship. General fill – one test every 5000 square feet (460 square m) of each lift 6. ASTM D422. the control tests shall be performed again with the new material. One Modified Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D1557 or one Standard Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D698 2. Process Industry Practices Page 5 of 17 . the following in-place dry density and moisture content testing (i. Structural fill under foundations and building slabs – one test every 1000 square feet (90 square m) of each lift b. further placement of fill shall not be permitted. These tests shall include the following: a. and moisture content shall be performed for each type of fill material. Structural fill under roadways. 4. Until the required dry density has been achieved. plasticity.COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation. One liquid and plastic limit determination in accordance with ASTM D4318 c. 3. and relative density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254.1. and Backfill Specification 4. Nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D2922 c. Road base and sub-base – one test every 2000 square feet (180 square m) of each lift d. One standard sieve analysis in accordance with ASTM C136. area pavement and parking areas – one test every 2000 square feet (180 square m) of each lift c. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. index density. Sand-cone method in accordance with ASTM D1556 b. Drive-cylinder method in accordance with ASTM D2937 5. Backfill of trenches (for utility lines or foundations) – one test for every 50 linear feet (15 m) of each lift e. field density testing) on compacted fill shall be performed using one of the following methods: a. If the type or the source of fill material changes. As a minimum.. unit weight. railroads. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.

During the performance of the work. all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect and preserve utilities scheduled to remain. and Backfill Specification COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 8. property markers. 6. and duct banks) and personnel engaged in excavation activities during construction. 8. 11.) shall be carefully maintained during excavation. barricades. work stoppages may be required until utilities are identified and until the owner provides specific direction. compaction. 4. before earthwork begins. shrubs.. 9. etc..1. temporary service lines shall be installed with owner’s approval. 2. 3.g. and all other vegetation in the areas beyond the designated excavation area. foundations.g. and other protective measures required for the safety of personnel and the premises shall be installed and maintained in good condition. The engineer of record may approve a decrease in the number of tests once a compaction procedure has met project requirements. This includes areas that are seeded until such time that the vegetation prevents erosion. 5. Temporary fences. Excavation. guardrails. If other utility locations become evident as earthwork progresses. 4. Any damage to structure. Unless otherwise specified. During earthwork. 10. Unless otherwise shown in the contract documents. 7. utility lines. electrical.5 Protection 1. All reference points (e. benchmarks. and earthwork.PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation. If preservation and protection are impractical. lights. backfilling. Bracing and shoring shall be used to protect excavations adjacent to existing underground installations (e. or graded areas caused by erosion shall be repaired to the original condition at no cost to the purchaser. If a reference point is damaged during performance of the work. Page 6 of 17 Process Industry Practices . 9. the constructor shall take proper and efficient measures to reduce dust and to prevent dust from harming individuals and damaging adjacent properties and equipment.1. The constructor shall be responsible for avoiding damage to and preserving trees. piping manholes. the purchaser shall locate and mark all known utilities within the project limits or note them in the contract documents. the reference point shall be repaired or replaced at the constructor’s expense in accordance with the requirements of the owner. The number of field density tests shall be increased if a visual inspection determines that the moisture content is not uniform or if the compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain the specified dry density. excavation under foundations shall not be permitted.

Excavation. the constructor shall submit proposed methods and details to the purchaser for review before beginning excavation.2. 4. and Backfill Specification 4. size.COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation. A statement attesting that the constructor’s work is in accordance with the requirements of this Practice and the contract documents b..2. shoring and sheeting) is required. Accurately recorded as-built locations of project-installed underground utilities b. Indication of the sequence and method of installation 4.1. sketches.e.2. Informal daily “pass” or “fail” reports c. d.2 The constructor shall provide the following submittals to the purchaser. These formal reports shall include density and moisture content test logs.2. the constructor shall provide the following submittals to the purchaser: a.1 The testing/inspection firm shall provide the following submittals to the purchaser and constructor: a. Tie-in points/interferences encountered during project construction 4.6 If required by an authority having jurisdiction. in writing. Process Industry Practices Page 7 of 17 .1.5 If dewatering of an excavation is required.2. At earthwork completion.2. Supporting calculations prepared by a registered professional engineer c. elevations.4 If excavation bracing (i. indicating location of tests by coordinates and elevation and any appropriate comments. and slope gradients. the constructor shall provide a soil erosion control plan and/or a storm water runoff pollution prevention plan.1. Description of the materials and shoring system to be used d.1. Indication of whether any components will remain after filling or backfilling e. 4. The plans shall be provided to the purchaser and the appropriate authority.1. Written approval shall be furnished by the purchaser before proceeding with intended blasting operations.3 The constructor shall notify the purchaser.2 Submittals 4. Sources and test results of all borrow materials used for fill 4. not less than five (5) days in advance of any blasting operation.1. and/or details b. as appropriate for the utility and as required by the purchaser: a. Plans. all density and moisture content test logs and comments compiled and submitted for permanent project records e. Data shall include horizontal dimensions. Formal weekly reports including all test logs and comments.1.

1. Permits for blasting shall be obtained from authorities having jurisdiction.4.1. The constructor shall submit copies of blasting permits to the purchaser and shall obtain written permission from the owner before explosives are brought to the site or before drilling is started. 2. state. 4. other USEPA documents such as Storm Water Management for Construction Activities.1.1 Soil that is spilled or washed onto paved areas or streets shall be removed daily from the surface.3.. Explosives shall be stored. a written rock-blasting safety plan shall be submitted for owner’s approval. 3.1. Permits shall be provided at no additional cost to the purchaser. and used in accordance with local regulations and with the owner’s safety practices.1.g.1 General 1.1.1. a work permit shall be obtained from the owner before performing any earthwork. 4. If rock blasting is required.5. Page 8 of 17 Process Industry Practices . All areas shall be maintained using temporary erosion and sediment control measures during construction until the constructor is relieved by the purchaser or until permanent measures are completed and functioning in a satisfactory manner. 2. and local codes and with any safety requirements of the owner.1 Contaminated Soils 1.5 Clean Up 4. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 2.4. terms of the NPDES General Permit for Construction Activity.4 Safety 4. 4. If unexpected soil contamination is encountered during the work. 5. All procedures and work shall be in accordance with local. 2.2 Rock Blasting 1. The constructor shall be responsible for all blasting operations.PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation.2 Erosion/Sediment Control 1. the work shall be stopped and the owner shall be notified immediately. and Backfill Specification COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 4.3 Environmental 4. and federal regulations (e.3. Excavation. state.1. These criteria shall be addressed in the rock-blasting safety plan. or specific project permit). handled. 4. All work shall be in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926 and any other applicable federal. Known contaminated soils within the construction limits shall be managed in accordance with a contaminated soil management plan provided by the owner before the start of excavation. 4.

3.2 All borrow material and all supply sources shall be approved by the owner.3. designated borrow areas.4. 4. Excavation.3 Fill and backfill shall contain no rocks or stones larger than 3 inches (75 mm) and shall be free of frozen lumps.2 Materials – Fill and Backfill 4. 4.1.2. or ditches or onto adjacent property shall be removed daily. CLSM shall be in accordance with ACI 229R. 4. or silt.1.2.4.2.2. 4. ice. clay.2.COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation.2. contamination. sand. snow. 4.69 and 1. organic matter. and 4.7.2. trash.2 Unless otherwise specified. simple visual inspection only shall be required for field testing. chunks of highly plastic clay.3 Structural Fill Material 4. 4.2.4. 4.1 Basic Requirements 4.1 CLSM or “flowable fill” may be substituted for either structural fill material or general fill material.2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.38 Mpa). Constructor shall provide measures to prevent recurrence.2.2.2 Soil that is spilled or washed into drains. Liquid limit – 40 maximum b. or off-site sources in accordance with the requirements of Sections 4.1.3 The mix design shall be proportioned to produce a 28-day compressive strength between 100 and 200 psi (0.5. and Backfill Specification 4.2.1 Fill and backfill to be used as structural fill shall be gravel. or other unsatisfactory material.2 Except for sands or gravels that exhibit no plasticity characteristics. pretested using the actual raw materials. 4.3. 4. and approved by the engineer of record before use on the project. the structural fill material shall be in accordance with the following requirements: a.3.1.2. fill and backfill materials shall be from either on-site excavation. pipes.1. or a mixture of these constituents.7 (2). Plasticity index – 6 through 20 4. where approved by the engineer of record.4 Unless otherwise specified. 4.2.2.2.3.4.2. Process Industry Practices Page 9 of 17 .2 General Fill Material Fill and backfill to be used as general fill shall be material capable of being compacted to the requirements of 4.4 Liquid limit and plastic limit shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D4318. gutters.2.4 Controlled Low-Strength Material (CLSM) 4.1. 4.

4. removal. 2. rubbish. 4.3. and other vegetation in the areas designated for clearing and grubbing shall be removed to the bottom of their root zone. 3. roots.1.2 Stripping 1.3. areas designated for clearing and grubbing shall be cleared. stumps. and satisfactory disposal of all topsoil and soil containing organic material. Reusable materials shall be stockpiled as necessary for the constructor’s operations in areas approved by the purchaser.1. 4.3. the area shall be cleared of all debris. marring. and other landscape features specifically designated in the contract documents for preservation shall be carefully protected from abuse. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. parking areas. Depressions made by clearing and grubbing operations shall be filled with suitable material and compacted to conform to the adjacent surface of the original ground. Before any soil is removed. and other unsuitable material. trees. topsoil shall be removed to full-depth or as specified in the contract documents. During construction operations.20 feet (+60 mm) of the elevations shown in the contract documents. 5.1 Site Preparation 4. stumps. trees. logs. Rock encountered through cut sections shall be excavated to 1 foot (0. or damage. 2. Except for trees and shrubs in areas designated in the contract documents for preservation.3. shrubs.3.1 Clearing and Grubbing 1. Trees and other vegetation outside the construction area shall not be damaged in any manner. Clearing and grubbing shall consist of the removal and satisfactory disposal of trees. vegetation. Such stripped materials shall not be used as structural fill material under any circumstances. Page 10 of 17 Process Industry Practices . General area grading shall be completed to within a tolerance of +0. 6.PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation. Excavation. and building areas shall be excavated or filled to subgrade elevations shown in the contract documents. 2.3 m) below subgrade elevation and shall be backfilled to the proper elevation.3 Rough Grading 1.1. but shall not be uniformly high or low. Roads. 3. and Backfill Specification COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 4. 4. Stripping shall consist of the excavation. 3. Construction 4. Unless otherwise directed by the engineer of record.

3.7. etc. grades. 3. etc.COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation.1 Structural Excavation 1. 4. and elevations as noted and as required for formwork. grades. and duct banks shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02700. Lean concrete shall have a mix design proportioned to achieve a minimum 28-day compressive strength 1. Over-excavation at footings may be backfilled with lean concrete or CLSM in accordance with Section 4.3.2 Earthen Structures 1.2. Structural excavation shall include excavations for footings. basements.2. 2. 6. 4. grade beams.000 psi (6. 2. catch basins.2. Unstable soil in the slopes shall be removed. or other circumstances prevent satisfactory performance of the work.2. After completing grading operations and before grassing operations.3. If soft.3. Structural excavation shall be performed in accordance with the contract documents to the dimensions. 3. 5. pits. retaining walls. the graded areas that are not to be further improved shall be overlaid with topsoil of a compacted thickness of 4 inches (100 mm) minimum. Side slopes of excavations shall be cut true and straight and shall be graded to the proper cross section.3 Trenching Trenching for underground pipe. 4. and Backfill Specification 4. If unsatisfactory field conditions caused by rain. compressible soil is encountered at footing grades as shown in the contract documents. manholes. 4. inclement weather. Over-excavation shall be backfilled with suitable material and compacted in accordance with Section 4.2 Excavation 4. the soft soil shall be removed and replaced with structural fill. 4.3.7. 5.9MPa). rock excavation shall consist of excavation of boulders or pieces of Process Industry Practices Page 11 of 17 . The bottoms of excavations shall be graded to the elevations and configurations in accordance with the contract documents.3. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. Earthen structures include permanent work items such as ponds. and cross sections in accordance with the contract documents. and the slopes properly prepared. earthwork operations shall be suspended after consultation with the engineer of record and the purchaser.4 Rock Excavation 1. 4.4. Excavation. Excavation for earthen structures shall be made to the lines. ditches. canals. conduits.2.

The constructor is solely responsible for designing and constructing stable. including utility trench excavation depth.3. slope inclination. blasting operations shall be managed in accordance with the rock-blasting plan (see Section 4. All other excavation shall be earth excavation.4.3. which cannot be excavated with heavy equipment.4.1 Drainage of cuts. be constructed in accordance with the OSHA guidelines. or excavation depth.3. 2. 4. whether they be utility trenches. exceed those specified in local. bedded deposits.3 Storage or stockpiling of material shall not be permitted on a completed subgrade. or bench the sides of the excavations as required to maintain stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. 209 (October 1989).5 Excavation Safety It is mandated by federal regulation Volume 54. or rock in ledges. In no case should slope height.1 Material shall be stockpiled as specified by the owner.3 Stockpiling 4.2.4 Stockpiling of contaminated soils shall be in accordance with an owner approved contaminated soils management plan or as specified by the owner. 4.PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation.2). 4. 4. If blasting is not permitted. graded.3.1. No. surcharge embankments. slope. temporary excavations and should shore. spoil areas.3.3. “Construction Standards for Excavations. basement excavation or footing excavations. state. the United States Department of Labor. The constructor’s “competent” representative. and Backfill Specification COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 detached rock measuring 1 cubic yard (0.3. 4. fills. If unexpected hard rock is encountered during the work. Excavation. stockpiles.76 cubic m) in volume or greater. 29 CFR.2 Stockpiles shall be placed. Subpart P” that excavations. mechanical breakers.3. or mechanical drills with nonexplosive demolition agents. part 1926.3. as defined in 29 CFR Part 1926. and federal safety regulations. If blasting is permitted and required. and borrow areas shall be maintained at all times to prevent ponding of surface water following rainfall by providing Page 12 of 17 Process Industry Practices . Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) .3.650 to 652 should evaluate the soil exposed in the excavations as part of the constructor’s safety procedures. excavations. and conglomerate deposits so firmly cemented that they present all the characteristics of solid rock. 4.3. 3.4 Drainage 4. rock shall be excavated with mechanical rippers.3. the work shall be stopped until a blasting plan is developed or until the owner provides specific direction. and shaped for proper drainage. 4.

b. 4.5.5 Disposal of Excess and Waste Materials 4. snow. Excavation.1 Areas to receive fill.3.4 Burning of combustible materials shall be done only with the written approval of the owner and only if permitted by local authorities.3. ice.g.3.5.3 A surface seal (e.3. and/or pumping systems as required in each respective site area.3. Site shall be drained so that it is free of standing water.1 If practicable. 4. 4.3.4. or pavement or areas to be used in the future to support structural loads as shown on the contract drawings shall be free of roots. all suitable materials removed by excavation shall be used as fill.5 Saturated soil shall be disposed of as specified by owner or shall be reconditioned to be in accordance with this Practice.4 Soil that becomes saturated shall be removed completely or as specified by the engineer of record.3.3. 4. hand operated rollers or plate compactors may be used instead upon approval by the owner.5. 4. 4. swales. and Backfill Specification temporary ditches.6.3.3.5.3.4. stripping. c.3 Material unsuitable for fill and debris removed by clearing. 4.6 Preparation of Areas for Fill or Loading 4..4. and excavation shall be removed to a disposal area approved by the owner. 4. 4.2 Temporary drainage facilities shall be removed at the completion of the project or as specified by the owner. culverts. Top 6 inches (150 mm) scarified and recompacted Process Industry Practices Page 13 of 17 . foundations. Soft soils removed and replaced with structural fill d.2 Areas shall be prepared for fill or loading as follows: a. grubbing.COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation. trash.3.4. Proof-rolled – crossing the area repeatedly and methodically with a heavy (10-ton (9 tonne) minimum weight) rubber-tired roller or a loaded dump truck Comment: In enclosed areas or tightly spaced areas. or other foreign material and shall not be frozen. sealing with a smooth drum roller) shall be performed as required to prevent saturation during wet weather or temporary shutdown of operations. where access by heavy equipment is limited and where the subgrade soils have previously been subjected to loads from existing structures and the structures have performed satisfactorily. 4.6.2 Excavated material in excess of that required for normal embankment construction shall be stockpiled within the construction limits or shall be placed in a designated spoil area beyond the construction limits as specified by the owner.

Comment: Clean granular soils with less than 10% fines may exhibit such behavior.3.7.3. 4.6. in the contract documents.7. moisture conditioning. and recompacting of the upper soils and chemical stabilization or other methods of improving soil conditions before the placement of fill or other loading. 4.PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation. or 95% of the maximum Standard Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D698. where granular soils exist that do not exhibit well-defined moisturedensity relationship.3 The density of the top 6 inches (150 mm) in areas for fill and loading shall not be less than 90% of the maximum Modified Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D1557. shall be compacted to at least 80% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254.3.4 Compacting shall begin only after the fill or backfill has been properly placed and after the material to be compacted is at the proper moisture content. the excavation of natural soils to key the new fill into the underlying soil. Use of the equations in the ASTM’s is required.3.5 Unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.1 Unless otherwise shown in the contract documents.3.3 Before placement of fill or backfill. Where otherwise indicated on design drawings 4.3. geotechnical engineers will use both Relative Density and Proctor densities methods to choose the highest density for proper compaction. 4. the engineer of record may also require.7.3.2 All other areas not designated above may be filled or backfilled using general fill. over-excavation. In some instances. Comment: The 90% Modified Proctor equivalent to 95% Standard Proctor is a conservative value as a study of 53 soils showed an average of 87% Modified Proctor was equivalent to 95% Standard Proctor. Excavation. 4. Beneath or immediately surrounding foundations b. 4.6. Comment: On sloping sites. in the contract documents.4 The density of the top 6 inches (150 mm) in areas of fill and loading.3. provided that the specified compaction is achieved for the full depth: Page 14 of 17 Process Industry Practices . It is important to use both the wet and dry methods of determining Maximum density. and parking areas c. the following areas shall be filled or backfilled using structural fill: a. Beneath slabs. railroads.6.3. and Backfill Specification COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 Comment: The engineer of record may require.7.7 Filling and Backfilling 4.7. material shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding the following criteria. roadways. the area to receive the fill shall be prepared in accordance with Section 4. 4. area pavement.

b. If approved by the engineer of record in writing. pits.7.7. General fill shall be compacted to at least 85% of the maximum Modified Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D1557. Excavation. 2. Structural fill shall be compacted to at least 90% of the maximum Modified Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D1557.3. general and structural fill materials shall be placed in lifts of 4 inches (100 mm) maximum in loose depth. General Fill Compaction Densities a. or 90% of the maximum Standard Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D698. 3. and Backfill Specification 1. 4. fill and backfill layers shall be uniformly compacted in accordance with the following density and moisture content requirements: 1.6 Compaction shall be performed with equipment compatible with soil type.8 Compaction by water jetting or flooding shall not be permitted. The moisture content of the material being compacted shall be within +3% of the optimum moisture content in accordance with the applicable ASTM D1557 or ASTM D698.2 m) or greater beyond the sides of the structures. but with handoperated equipment to a distance of 4 feet (1. Process Industry Practices Page 15 of 17 . b. Granular soil used as general fill that does not exhibit well-defined moisture-density relationship shall be compacted to 70% to 75% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254.3.7.9 Fill and backfill adjacent to structures such as retaining walls. without additional cost to the purchaser. Unless otherwise approved by the purchaser.7 Unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. Fill materials shall be conditioned as necessary to achieve the required moisture content. 4. chemical stabilization may be used if modification of liquid limit and plasticity index are necessary to obtain satisfactory compaction.3. General fill shall be placed in lifts of 12 inches (300 mm) maximum in loose depth. or 95% of the maximum Standard Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D698. 4. Structural fill shall be placed in lifts of 8 inches (200 mm) maximum in loose depth. Structural Fill Compaction Densities a.3. Granular soil used as structural fill that does not exhibit welldefined moisture-density relationship shall be compacted to at least 80% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254. 3. 2. 4.7. and basements shall not be compacted with heavy equipment. for hand-operated compaction equipment.COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation. 4.

4 Backfill of base course shall comply with Sections 4. If base course materials are clean granular material and Relative Density is the standard.3. an approved dewatering system shall be installed and operated when necessary to lower the groundwater.3. or removing material and then reshaping and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. 4.8. Compaction shall be to at least 95% of the maximum Modified Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D1557.3.6 and 4.3. 4. and stripped in accordance with Sections 4. 4.8. lines.2.1.12 Compacted surfaces of fill and backfill shall be finish-graded to the cross sections.3.7.3. free of voids.8. compacted condition until it is covered by other construction. the design of the dewatering system shall be the responsibility of the constructor.3. 4. grades.2 If required for construction. 4.9.6 If specified by the contract documents.PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation.8.1 The base course for roads. 4.7.3.3. 4.11 Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the purchaser. base course material shall be structural fill material in accordance with Section 4.3. 4.3.8. geosynthetic materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and/or as detailed in the contract documents. grubbed. 4.5 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. and elevations as specified in the contract documents.3.9.7.2 The existing ground to the toe of fill slopes shall be cleared. or 100% of the maximum Standard Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D698.8.3.10 To prevent unnecessary eccentric loading on a structure or foundation. Excavation.1.3 Excavation of areas in cut shall be in accordance with Section 4. parking areas. every effort shall be made to place backfill materials symmetrically and in uniform layers.9 Dewatering 4.3.8. and other areas to be surfaced shall be prepared in accordance with this section.8.2.3.3. adding. and Backfill Specification COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 4.3.1 and 4. compact to 85% of relative density. with the following exception. 4.9.9 The base course shall be maintained in a smooth. 4.3. true-to-grade. before excavation.2. backfill around or over cast-in-place concrete shall not be permitted until the concrete has attained 75% of its specified strength. and to the required elevation. 4.7 The compacted base course shall be shaped to a smooth and even surface.1 All dewatering methods and disposal of water shall be approved by the engineer of record.8 Any deviation greater than ½ inch (12 mm) in cross section or ½ inch (12 mm) in length as measured with a 16-foot (5-m) straightedge shall be corrected by loosening.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.3.3.3.7.8 Installation of Base Course 4.3. Page 16 of 17 Process Industry Practices . 4.8. 4.

4.3. protective swales. 4.9. 4.3.9. 4.7 Excavations for foundations and other underground installations shall not be used as temporary drainage ditches.3.8 At all times during construction. Process Industry Practices Page 17 of 17 . trenches.3.COMPLETE REVISION April 2007 PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation. and Backfill Specification 4.3.9. pumps. ample means with which to remove and properly dispose of all water from every natural source entering the excavation shall be provided and maintained.9.9.3.9.4 Constructor shall be responsible for any effects of dewatering on adjacent facilities.9 Any water to be discharged that is potentially suspect of quality shall be tested for water quality to determine whether the water can be disposed of through the natural waterways or whether it shall be contained for treatment. Excavation. or other purchaser approved measures. 4.5 Surface water shall be prevented from flowing into excavations by installing ditches.6 All diverted and pumped water shall flow to existing drainage.

COMPLETE REVISION November 2004 Process Industry Practices Civil PIP CVI02720 Sewer Details .

administrative. or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. application. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. or standards organizations. PRINTING HISTORY April 1999 Issued November 2004 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds .pip. such laws or regulations must be followed. overlays. addenda. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations. Changes. contractors. reaffirmed. The University of Texas at Austin. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. PIP will not consider requests for interpretations (inquiries) for this Practice. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. Austin.org. This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will be reviewed every 5 years. or withdrawn. Texas 78759. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. Construction Industry Institute. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. This Practice will be revised. Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at www.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500). and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use.

.....Process Sewer........Precast Circular Storm Water Inlet CVI02720-13 . 2 3.....................2 Scope.................Manhole Sections and Details CVI02720-10 .......COMPLETE REVISION November 2004 Process Industry Practices Civil PIP CVI02720 Sewer Details Table of Contents 1.. Concrete Manholes with Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTP) Liner CVI02720-07 ......... Storm.................. References .Concrete Manhole Tops and Bases CVI02720-09 ....Sanitary Concrete Drop Manhole CVI02720-04 ..Sanitary or Storm Sewer Concrete Pipe or Precast Manholes CVI02720-03 .............Process Sewer..... 2 CVI02720-06 ...................... 2 2.......Process Sewer........... Concrete Manholes with Chemical Resistant Coating CVI02720-08 .. Concrete Manholes with Chemical Resistant Brick Lining Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 16 ......Process Sewer. 2 1..1 Process Industry Practices ....... 2 1.. 2 2.1 Purpose ......2 Industry Codes and Standards ...........Sanitary..Precast or Cast in Place Rectangular or Square Storm Water Inlet CVI02720-12 .......... 3 Drawings: CVI02720-01 ....“Catch Basin” Option Sewer Pipe Connection Detail 2...Typical Manhole Fire and/or Vapor Seal CVI02720-11 ............ Introduction .... or Process Sewer Fabricated HDPE Manhole CVI02720-02 ........... Requirements ....... HighDensity Polyethylene (HDPE) Lined Manholes CVI02720-05 ...

and storm water inlets for underground gravity sewer systems. details for fire and vapor seals. catch basins.Underground Gravity Sewers Specification – PIP STS03001 . chemical resistant brick liners.Site Preparation. Excavation. and Backfill – PIP CVS02700 . and chemical resistant coatings are also provided. 1.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) – PIP CVS02100 . catch basins. Pipes and Laterals • American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) − AASHTO . 2. except as otherwise specified. reinforced thermosetting resin (RTP) liners.Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe.2 Industry Codes and Standards • American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) − ASTM A48 . Introduction 1.Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections − ASTM C923 . and sealed slab and equipment drains are provided.Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert.2 Scope This Practice includes details for concrete pipe and high-density polyethylene (HDPE) manholes.Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification 2. Storm Drain. storm water inlets. Short titles will be used herein where appropriate. References Applicable parts of the following Practices and industry codes and standards shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used.Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures. 2.PIP CVI02720 Sewer Details COMPLETE REVISION November 2004 1. Details for HDPE liners.Standard Specification for Highway Bridges . Using Rubber Gaskets − ASTM C478 .1 Purpose This Practice provides the installer with standard details for sewer manholes.Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification – PIP STS03600 .Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings − ASTM C76 . and Sewer Pipe − ASTM C443 . In addition.

all concrete shall be in accordance with PIP STS03001. Unless specified otherwise. all structures shall be designed for an AASHTO HS20 loading in accordance with AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges.4 3.3 3. Bedding and backfilling requirements for piping shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02700 and PIP CVS02100. Unless specified otherwise. Requirements 3. and type of manholes and catch basins.5 The project design drawings shall specify the location.COMPLETE REVISION November 2004 PIP CVI02720 Sewer Details 3. Unless specified otherwise. all grouting shall be in accordance with PIP STS03600. orientation.2 3. Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 16 .1 3.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 Process Industry Practices Civil PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification .

contractors. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. application. or withdrawn. reaffirmed. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. Changes. PIP will not consider requests for interpretations (inquiries) for this Practice. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. or standards organizations. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at www. PRINTING HISTORY April 1995 August 2000 Issued Complete Revision October 2004 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds . This Practice will be revised.pip.org. administrative. such laws or regulations must be followed. Texas 78759. This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will be reviewed every 5 years.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. overlays. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations. The University of Texas at Austin. Austin. Construction Industry Institute. addenda. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500).

.................2 Scope...5 General ............. 2 2.................................. 5 Construction................2 Industry Codes and Standards ........................................ 14 Considerations for Existing Facilities .Bedding Methods for Trench Conduits ..... 8 Exfiltration Test ......... Requirements ............ 4 Materials ..................1 Process Industry Practices ........................2 4....................................4 4.............. 2 2............................. 3 4....................................1 4........... Introduction .1 Purpose ..... 2 1.....COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 Process Industry Practices Civil PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification Table of Contents 1.....................3 Government Regulations .... 4 4....... 3 3...... Definitions .................... 2 1...... 2 2......................... 14 Figure A ................................. References........ 15 Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 15 .................... 2 2.......3 4...................

The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used.Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification 2. and Culvert Pipe – ASTM C76 . and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. Short titles will be used herein where appropriate.Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Page 2 of 15 Process Industry Practices . Requirements for pipe. Requirements for pressurized pipe. and Backfill Specification – PIP CVI02720 .Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings – ASTM C443 . Storm Drain.Sewer Details – PIP STS03001 . and Sewer Pipe – ASTM C425 .Site Preparation.Civil Design Criteria – PIP CVS02100 . Storm Drain.Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel – ASTM A74 . 1. Introduction 1. References Applicable parts of the following Practices. industry codes and standards. and testing of underground gravity sewers. and industrial process sewers are included. 2.PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 1.2 Industry Codes and Standards • American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) – ASTM A36 .1 Purpose This Practice provides requirements for the installation contractor for fabricating and installing underground gravity sewers.Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert.2 Scope This Practice describes the requirements for materials. double-contained. Excavation. storm. 2.Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings – ASTM C14 . installation. manholes.Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer. Using Rubber Gaskets – ASTM C478 .Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe. and appurtenances for sanitary. and emission-controlled industrial process sewers in environmental applications are not included.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) – PIP CVC01015 . except as otherwise noted. inlet structures.Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections – ASTM C564 .

3 Government Regulations • Occupational Safety and Health Administration – 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P .Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications – ASTM D1785 . 80. and 120 – ASTM D2564 .Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals – ASTM D3350 . backfill. Extra Strength.Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe. Schedules 40.Excavations 3. including work executed through the use of sub-contractors Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 15 . either by incorporation or by reference. and made part of the legal contract or purchase order agreement between purchaser and supplier supplier: The party responsible for performing excavation.Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems – ASTM D2855 . Definitions contract documents: Any and all documents.COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification – ASTM C700 . and Sewers – ASTM D422 .Standard Test Method for Particle . Storm Drains. and pipe installation.Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings – ASTM D3212 .Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe • American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) – AASHTO M 36 .Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts.to 1200-mm Diameter (for Storm Sewers and Culverts) 2.Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe. including design drawings. and Perforated – ASTM C969 . 300.Interim Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe.Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials – ASTM D2321 .Size Analysis of Soils – ASTM D1248 . Metallic Coated for Sewers and Drains – AASHTO M 294 . Standard Strength. that purchaser has transmitted or otherwise communicated.Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe.Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials – ASTM F477 .Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines – ASTM C1433 .

all materials and workmanship and shall have unrestricted entry to the fabrication shop at all times work is being performed.15 Purchaser inspection shall not replace the supplier’s quality control procedures and responsibility for compliance with all applicable requirements for the material.1 Sewers shall be fabricated.2. all affected materials shall be removed and the work shall be reinstalled in accordance with this Practice.1. 4.1. 4. pipe and/or fitting installation.1. 4. or backfill.1. and local jurisdictions. state.1. Certification that an OSHA-defined excavation-competent person (ECP) shall oversee all excavation Page 4 of 15 Process Industry Practices .1. fabrication.1.1. and procedures specified in this Practice. 4.1.1 The following documentation shall be submitted to the purchaser 2 weeks before installation: a.PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 owner: The party who owns the facility wherein the underground gravity sewer will be installed purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the supplier. if at any time during installation and testing. at purchaser’s expense.3 Purchaser can reject improper.1 Quality Control 4. The purchaser may be the owner or the owner’s authorized agent.4 All defective materials and workmanship shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to purchaser.6 Unless directed otherwise by purchaser. Fabrication drawings and instructions for the installation of pipe and appurtenances b. standards.1 General 4. and installation. with codes. 4.2 Submittals 4. or defective materials and workmanship at any stage of production.1.1. inferior.1. weather or any other factor causes the degradation of the pipe foundation. installed. flowable fill: An engineered blend of materials (controlled low-strength material) used as self-leveling and self-compacting backfill and bedding standard dimension ratio (SDR): The ratio of the pipe outside diameter (inches) to the minimum wall thickness (inches) 4.1.1. Requirements 4. and tested in accordance with this Practice. and with all applicable codes and regulations of the controlling federal. bedding.2 Purchaser shall have the right to inspect. 4.

4. 4. and wrapped carbon steel) that are Process Industry Practices Page 5 of 15 .3. 4.1.1. the owner shall verify that the applicable permit will allow intermittent non-storm flows into storm sewers.1. and any other hazardous conditions shall be required in areas specified by owner.1.4.2 As-built documentation showing location. line.1.COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification c. open flames. or manholes in connection with trench dewatering activities. the soil management plan shall be developed by supplier and approved by owner before the start of excavation activities.1 Pipe and Joints 4.2.3 Hazardous and hot work permits for chemical exposure.2 Materials 4.4. 4.3. Certification in writing that the materials to be used under the contract satisfy all the requirements of the project. including any special rules that may be in effect at a specific site.4 All excavation and trenching shall be in accordance with OSHA standards and owner’s local requirements and guidelines (as applicable) for the following: a.3 Excavated material shall be managed in accordance with a soil management plan. 4. Documentation of all trench work requiring an ECP d.1 Field construction activities on owner’s property shall conform to owner’s safety requirements.2 Good housekeeping practices shall be maintained in and around the work site throughout the duration of the work.4 Unless provided by owner. and grade of newly installed sewer systems shall be submitted to purchaser within 4 weeks after installation.1.1.1 All sewer outfalls are required to be permitted by applicable regulations.4. 4. Shoring.2. potential explosive mixtures. catch basins.1. testing.4. spark-producing mechanical equipment.2 Before discharging any liquid into drains.3.3 Safety 4. 4.1. bracing.1.4 Environmental 4. and/or sloping wall construction b. 4. 4.2. coated. Permitting and confined space entry requirements 4.1.3. Marking and flagging open excavations c. or other activities for which liquids need to be disposed.1 Specifications for materials other than those listed in the following section (such as welded.1.

4.5 Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic (PVC) Pipe . Concrete sewer pipe 10 inches (250 mm) and smaller shall be in accordance with ASTM C14 (class as specified in the contract documents) non-reinforced. or tongue and groove sewer pipe.1.Rigid Pipe 1. Concrete sewer pipe 12 inches (300 mm) and larger shall be in accordance with ASTM C76. 3.Flexible Pipe 1.2.2. 2.2 Concrete Pipe/Reinforced Concrete Pipe (CP/RCP) . 4.1. 4. Joints shall be compression type in accordance with ASTM C425. 2. Joints may be sealed with cement grout if the service is for storm sewer lines that are 24 inches (600 mm) in diameter and larger.Rigid Pipe 1. reinforced sewer pipe (class and wall as specified in the contract documents). Joints shall be sealed using elastomeric “O” rings in accordance with ASTM C443 unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. CSP shall be connected with locking corrugated coupling bands of the design indicated in AASHTO M 36. 4. Page 6 of 15 Process Industry Practices .2. 2. VCP shall be used only to the extent required to tie into existing VCP systems. bell and spigot. 3. Alternative materials should be selected for new piping installations.1. using cement in accordance with ASTM D2564 or shall have elastomeric ring gaskets in accordance with ASTM D3212.PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 required for the project shall be as specified in the contract documents.1. 3. “Coupling Bands” section.3 Corrugated Steel Pipe (CSP) .Flexible Pipe 1. CSP shall be metallic-coated (galvanized) pipe in accordance with AASHTO M 36 (sheet metal thickness and corrugation size as specified in the contract documents). Connecting bands shall be coated in accordance with the pipe coating requirements. 4. Joints shall be solvent cemented in accordance with ASTM D2855. VCP shall be extra strength in accordance with ASTM C700. unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. PVC pipe 12 inches (300 mm) or less in diameter shall be minimum schedule 40 pipe in accordance with ASTM D1785.4 Vitrified Clay Pipe (VCP) . 2.2.

Wall thickness shall be specified as follows: NPS 4 – 16 inches 18 – 48 inches SDR 17 32. Cell Class PE345434C minimum. O-Ring gaskets shall be used and shall consist of ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM).COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification 4. socket fusion welded.7 High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe . with a standard dimension ratio (SDR) as specified in the contract documents. or polyisoprene as required for the service intended.8 Reinforced Concrete Box (RCB) Sections . expansion.1.2. The appropriate table of section requirements from the listed ASTM standard shall be used for the design loading specified in the contract documents.1. manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M 294. 2.2.1. 4. Joints shall be butt fusion welded. unless specified otherwise in the contract documents. silicon. Cast DISP and fittings shall be hub and plain end coated service weight in accordance with ASTM A74.Rigid Pipe 1. If a restrained joint is required.2. The coupling shall be designed with closure plates and sealing pads for installation and a leak-proof seal. 2. or flanged. RCB sections shall be in accordance with ASTM C1433 unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.2. 2. it shall be accomplished with restraining rings welded to the exterior of the pipe and a restraining-type coupling. 4. Alternate joining method shall consist of arch-band split sleeve couplings made of carbon steel conforming to ASTM A36 or stainless steel grade 304L or 316L.Flexible Pipe 1. Couplings shall allow for angular deflection. push-on type in accordance with ASTM C564. nitrile. 3. 3. 5. Joints shall be neoprene sleeve gasketed. HDPE pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from virgin highdensity polyethylene resin. HDPE mechanical coupling joints are also acceptable if approved by the purchaser.5 4. and vibration if required. 4.Flexible Pipe 1.Rigid Pipe 1.1. Joints shall be pre-formed plastic gasket-type joint sealant. CPP and fittings shall be bell and spigot type. Process Industry Practices Page 7 of 15 .6 Cast Ductile Iron Soil Pipe (DISP) .9 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (CPP) . in accordance with ASTM D3350. Bell shall be an integral part of the pipe.

pipelines.2 Precast concrete manholes shall conform to ASTM C478.3. Joints shall be sealed using elastomeric gaskets in accordance with ASTM F477 unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. Permitting and confined space entry requirements d.1. See PIP CVC01015 for manholespacing criteria. 4. 3. 4. Handling and storing excavated materials 4.1.3.2 Manholes. 4.3.1 Manholes and inlet structures (catch basins) shall be precast (monolithic) with integral bottom. 4.2.3. 4.2. 4.3 HDPE plate used for manholes and inlet structures shall be manufactured from virgin high-density polyethylene resin in accordance with ASTM D1248-IIIC5-P34 pipe grade resin.2.2. Shoring.2 Proper care and protection shall be provided to prevent damage to all existing facilities (e. 4.2.2.2.2 Trench Excavation 4.PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 2. Page 8 of 15 Process Industry Practices .1.2. and/or sloping wall construction b.2.2 Pipe materials shall be inspected before installation.2.1 Receiving and Handling 4.2.2. 4. Employing excavation-competent person (ECP) e.1 All excavation and trenching shall be made in accordance with PIP CVS02100. etc.1 Care shall be taken during handling and storage so as not to damage or to cause stresses or deformation in pipe materials. foundations. Inlet Structures.2. Pipe shall be Type S with a smooth inner liner unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. OSHA standards.5 Site-built concrete manholes shall be in accordance with the contract documents.g.. and Covers 4.3.4 HDPE pipe components used for manholes and inlet structures shall be as specified in Section 4.3 Construction 4.2. bracing.3 Cast-in-Place Concrete Cast-in-place concrete used for sewers shall be constructed in accordance with PIP STS03001. services. Any damaged materials that are not acceptable to purchaser shall be rejected and replaced at no cost to purchaser.7 (this Practice).) on. 4.3.2. Marking and flagging open excavations c. Frames. and owner’s local requirements and guidelines (as applicable) for the following: a.

4. If practical.5 Trench width shall be as narrow as possible while still permitting proper access for bedding and assembly of the pipe. or below the surface of the area where excavation and backfill operations are to be performed. etc.g.6 If rock or other unyielding material is encountered.3.) 4.2.2. however. such soils shall be removed.3. structures.3. in no case shall it be wider than the conduit diameter times 1. foundations.3. Only as much trench shall be opened as can be safely maintained by available equipment. piping. 4. maximum trench width from bottom of the trench to 12 inches (300 mm) above the pipe shall be 4/3 the nominal diameter of the pipe plus 8 inches (200 mm). The resulting over-excavation shall be backfilled with suitable material to the specified grade.3 Underground obstructions (e. The space between the conduit and trench wall shall be wider than the compaction equipment used in the conduit zone.2. 2.2. (See bedding requirements specified in this Practice.3.11 Flexible Conduit 1.8 The bottoms of trenches or bedding material (as applicable) shall be firm and graded to provide uniform bearing of the pipe.3.3.2..COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification above.3. 4.4 Trench depth shall be based on the specified invert of the pipe plus the bedding requirements as specified in this Practice and in the contract documents.2. the bottom of the trench shall be over-excavated 1/6 of the pipe diameter but in no case less than 4 inches (100 mm).2. 4. 4.g. 4. Comment: Flexible conduit requires stable trench walls to assure proper embedment of pipe and compaction of the bedding materials. bell holes shall be manually excavated after the trench bottom has been graded.2.9 If pipe joint diameter exceeds pipe outside diameter (e. Process Industry Practices Page 9 of 15 ..10 Erosion control measures shall be incorporated as required by applicable regulations and by owner’s requirements. 3. bell and spigot piping). All trenches shall be backfilled as soon as practicable but not later than the end or each working day.3.7 If unacceptable soil is encountered.) shall not be removed or altered without owner’s approval. as determined by owner. 4.2.5 plus 12 inches (300 mm). 4.

4. suction and discharge lines.3. Page 10 of 15 Process Industry Practices . rubble.3 Dewatering 4. shale. If sheeting is to be cut off.3.6 Water shall not be allowed to accumulate in excavations.3 If required by owner. 2. boulders. All material shall pass a 1/2-inch (12. the length of open trench shall be limited to that which can be dewatered with methods and equipment available. 4. 4.5 inches (40 mm) are encountered in the trench bottom.3.3. and all other dewatering system components. 4. cuts shall be made a minimum of 1. whalers. Subsurface water flowing into excavations shall be removed by pumping or if possible by gravity drainage.13 If ledge rock. 4.3. the trench shall be excavated to a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm) below the bottom of pipe elevation. hard pan.PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 4. If trench wall supports such as sheeting are required.3.5-mm) sieve and shall be at least 90% retained on No. debris.4. sumps. Rangers. 200 (75 microns) sieve as determined in accordance with ASTM D422.3. it shall be treated as a permanent structure and treated against biological degradation. 4.8 The trench shall not be used as a temporary drainage ditch.3.1 Equipment necessary to collect and discharge water away from excavations.3. 3. 4. The excavated materials shall be replaced with proper embedment material.2. these supports must be left in place to preclude loss of support for the pipe. or other unyielding material. shall be provided.5 Dewatering methods shall be used to minimize softening of the soil supporting the pipe and changes in soil characteristics that are detrimental to subgrade stability. installed. a means of desilting the water before disposal shall be provided.3. and braces shall be left in place as required to support cutoff sheeting. If timber sheeting is used.2 All water encountered shall be disposed of in such a manner that property is not damaged and no nuisance or health menace results. 4.2.3. 4.7 Surface water shall be diverted away from the work area as directed by owner.3.3.12 Wall Supports 1.3.3. or stones larger than 1.3.5 ft (450 mm) above the crown of the pipe.3.3. such as pumps.3.3. and maintained.4 At any time. cobbles. 4.3.4 Bedding 4.1 Bedding material shall be granular and well graded. 4.

4.7 Bedding for box culverts shall conform to one of the following classes.3 Bedding material shall be compacted to a density approximately that of the undisturbed site soil materials or as specified in the contract documents.4. Class C bedding shall be used if no class is specified in the contract documents.requires placing the pipe on fine granular material cradle extending up to the sides of the pipe a distance not less than 1/6 of the pipe outside diameter.3. a. The trench shall then be filled to 1 ft (300 mm) over the top of the pipe with granular material in 6-inch (150-mm) layers and compacted to fill all the space around the pipe. 4.allows the pipe to be placed on the bottom of the trench with no effort to shape the trench to fit the pipe. Class C bedding shall be used if no class is specified in the contract documents.5 Localized loading and differential settlement shall be minimized where the pipe crosses other utilities or subsurface structures or in areas having special foundations such as pile caps or sheeting. or other owner-approved means.3. b. 4. pneumatic tamper. 4. 4. Class D . Class C . Compacted granular material shall be placed Process Industry Practices Page 11 of 15 . Class A . See Figure A for details. 4.ordinary bedding . The trench shall then be filled to 6 inches (150 mm) over the top of the pipe with granular material placed and compacted to fill all space around the pipe.4.3.impermissible bedding . A cushion of bedding shall be provided between the pipe and any such point of localized loading.requires embedment of the lower part of the pipe in plain or reinforced concrete of suitable thickness and extending up to the sides of the pipe a distance not less than 25% of the pipe outside diameter. a.concrete cradle bedding .3.requires the pipe to be placed on the fine granular materials foundation extending up to the center line of the pipe. d.4.4. c.3.first class bedding . Fill shall be placed around the pipe.2 Bedding material shall be placed under and equally along both sides of the pipe in uniform layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) loose depth to a height of the centerline of the pipe and compacted by hand.6 Bedding shall conform to one of the following classes. Class B bedding shall be obtained by installing the box section on a minimum thickness of fine granular material of at least 2 inches (50 mm). Class B .4.COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification 4.4 If compacted.3. the pipe bed shall provide uniform bearing for the bottom of the pipe (see trenching requirements specified in this Practice).

catch basins.6.5.3.3. Class C bedding shall be obtained by placing the box section on a flat trench bottom.5 Pipe Laying and Jointing 4.5 Pipe laying and joining shall be carried out in a dry trench. A lubricant recommended by the pipe manufacturer shall be applied to the joint materials.3. 4. each acceptable length of pipe shall be carefully placed to the line and grade specified and nested in the bedding in such a manner as to provide uniform support throughout its entire length. Lightly compacted fill shall be placed on each side of the box section and up to 6 inches (150 mm) over the top of the box.3 Pipe types other than those with spigot or tongue ends shall be laid in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations or instructions.3.10 HDPE pipe shall be welded by experienced.5. qualified welders. 4. the pipe shall not be disturbed in any manner.2 Pipes with spigot or tongue ends shall be laid with spigot ends pointing in the direction of flow.5. All welds shall be fusion welds except at manholes. or D bedding material.5.3. The spigot shall have full bell penetration. CLSM shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02100.5. 4.4.3. where extrusion welds are permitted. 4.3.3. 4.6 Backfilling 4.5. 4.1 Pipe shall be laid beginning at the lowest point in trenches. 4. 4.3.4 Pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and kept clean and sound. b.1 Backfill and compaction material shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02100 and this Practice and shall be similar to in-situ material. and other defects before installation.6 Each length of pipe shall be inspected for loose gaskets.8 Flowable fill (controlled low-strength material.11 Manholes.5.3. dry boxes.3.3. CLSM) may be used for Class B. etc. shall be constructed in accordance with PIP CVI02720.3.5. 4.PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 on each side of the box section and up to at least 1 ft (300 mm) over the top of the box. cracks. C.12 Bell and spigot joints shall be clean and dry.8 If pipe laying is suspended. 4. Page 12 of 15 Process Industry Practices .5. the ends of the pipe shall be kept closed and sealed to keep out soil and foreign materials. 4.3.5.9 After the joints have been made.5.7 After inspection. 4..3. 4. 4.5.3.

3. 4.7 Embedment shall not be compacted by running over the materials with earthmoving equipment. and compaction requirements shall be in accordance with the contract documents.3.3.9 To preclude potential floatation of the installed conduit.3. 4.8 Flowable fill (CLSM) may be used for backfill material if specified in contract documents. determined to be compatible with pipe and suitable to prevent migration of adjacent soils. 4. 4. backfill material shall be placed along the sides of the pipe with care to prevent movement of the line or grade. installation shall be in accordance with the recommendations given in Table 2 of ASTM D2321.3.5 Material in the area between the bedding and the underside of the conduit shall be worked in and tamped before placing and compacting the rest of the embedment. shall be maintained over the top of conduit before allowing vehicles to traverse the conduit trench.6.3.COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification 4.2 The trench shall be backfilled and compacted to a density equal to that specified on the contract documents or equal to that of the adjacent in situ material.3.3. 4.3.6.7.3. 4. a minimum depth of backfill over the top of conduit of at least 24 inches Process Industry Practices Page 13 of 15 .6.4 Embedment materials shall be placed into the trench.2 If embedment materials are not specified in the contract documents.6. Class II or Class III materials shall be in accordance with Table 1 of ASTM D2321. 4.3. 4.7.3 As soon as possible after pipe joints are made.3.4 Joints shall be left exposed until completion of leak testing.7.6.6.3.3. whichever is greater.5 Backfilling of trenches shall be completed immediately after testing. 4. 4.6 Backfilling shall be compacted in a manner that avoids displacement or damage to the pipe.8 To preclude damage to the installed conduit and disturbance of the conduit embedment. 4.3.7 Construction machinery or vehicles shall not be allowed to pass over the trench until the trench is backfilled and compacted sufficiently to prevent damage to the pipe. using methods that will not disturb or damage the conduit.7.7. 4. 4.3.7. 4.7. materials.3 If embedment installation requirements are not specified in the contract documents. 4.7. a minimum depth of at least 24 inches (600 mm) or 1 pipe diameter of cover.7 Embedment of Flexible Conduit 4.3.6.1 Embedment configuration.6 Compaction equipment shall not be allowed to contact the conduit and damage the conduit wall.7.

4. 2.5 m) above the top of the pipe. 400-ft (122-m) maximum length at a time. If required.5 m) above the top of the pipe.00039 liters/mm diameter/m/hour) 4. Sections of pipe shall be filled.1 Setup 1. 2.no measurable amount b. Water shall be allowed to stand for 4 hours. Sanitary sewers . Page 14 of 15 Process Industry Practices . Maximum allowable exfiltration shall be as follows: a. 4.g. Considerations for Existing Facilities 4.1 4.0.2 Procedure for Process and Sanitary Sewers 1. 3. The section of pipe to be tested shall be plugged at the downstream end of pipe (e. a standpipe shall be used to bring the water level to 5 ft (1. The lateral pipe in the section being tested shall be plugged with removable stoppers.4 Exfiltration Test 4. 3.5.5.3 4. 5. Open ends of existing sewers that are cut or abandoned in place shall be securely closed with a plug or wall of concrete having a minimum thickness of 3 pipe diameters. Manhole shall be refilled and the drop shall be measured after 1 hour.4. satisfactory temporary bypass facilities shall be provided.2 If construction of new sewers interferes with existing sewers.. 4.5 Exfiltration testing of storm sewers shall be done in accordance with ASTM C969. 4.PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 (600 mm) or 1 pipe diameter of cover over the pipe. shall be maintained. with water to the top of the manhole but not less than 5 ft (1. Process sewers .0008 gallons/inch diameter/ft/hour (0. as at a manhole). whichever is greater.4. Exfiltration shall be measured at a manhole.

4 Plain Lf = 2.8 Reinforced A s = 0.COMPLETE REVISION October 2004 PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification Figure A .8 4/3 Bc+ 8 inches (200 mm) min.9 Densely compacted backfill 12 inch (300 mm) min.5 Concrete GRANULAR FOUNDATION CLASS "D" L f = 1. L f = bedding factor FLAT SUBGRADE Depth of bedding material below pipe D d (min. 12 inch (300 mm) min.) 27 inches (690 mm) 3 inches (75 mm) & smaller 30 inches (760 mm 4 inches (100 mm) to 60 inch (1. Compacted granular material d CONCRETE CRADLE CLASS "C" Lf = 1.0% L f = 4.1 Lightly compacted backfill H 6 inch (150 mm) min. Bc Compacted granular material 1/6 B c d Bc Loose backfill GRANULAR FOUNDATION Legend Bc = outside diameter H = backfill cover above top of pipe D = inside diameter d = depth of bedding material below pipe As = area of transverse steel in the cradle or arch expressed as a percent of area of concrete at invert or crown. H 6 inch (150 mm) min.Bedding Methods for Trench Conduits CLASS "A" Reinforced A s = 1. 1 1/4 Bc CLASS "B" Lf = 1.53 m) 66 inches (1.4% Lf = 3. Bc Bc 1/4 Bc 1/4 D max.68 m) 6 inches (150 mm) & larger Process Industry Practices Page 15 of 15 .

COMPLETE REVISION October 2011 Process Industry Practices Civil PIP CVI02350 Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and Typical Details .

Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. PIP Member Companies and Subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities..g. administrative. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. These purposes include but are not limited to the procurement process (e. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The University of Texas at Austin. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. as attachments to requests for quotation/ purchase orders or requests for proposals/contracts) and preparation and issue of design engineering deliverables for use on a specific project by Authorized User’s client. or standards organizations. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500). This Practice is subject to revision at any time. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. Authorized Users may provide their clients. PUBLISHING HISTORY July 2006 Issued as CVI02000 October 2011 Complete Revision and Renumbering Not printed with State funds . Texas 78759. application. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. suppliers and contractors with copies of the Practice solely for Authorized Users’ purposes. Construction Industry Institute. contractors. Authorized Users may attach addenda or overlays to clearly indicate modifications or exceptions to specific sections of PIP Practices. such laws or regulations must be followed. Austin. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations. this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. PIP’s copyright notices must be clearly indicated and unequivocally incorporated in documents where an Authorized User desires to provide any third party with copies of the Practice. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). Changes or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users.

......Area Paving Details Construction Joint CVI02350-14 ...Area Paving Details Free Edge CVI02350-16 ...Miscellanous Details Headwall for One Culvert CVI02350-23M .....Area Paving Details Free Edge with Curb CVI02350-17 ............... 3 Industry Codes and Standards ..... 3 1.......2 2.......Area Paving Details Isolation Joint CVI02350-12 ........1 1......... 3 Process Industry Practices .........Roadway Details Contraction Joint CVI02350-02 .1 2...............Area Paving Details Expansion Joints CVI02350-11 . 3 3.......Miscellanous Details Headwall for One Culvert (Metric) CVI02350-24 ... 3 Scope ........Miscellanous Details Guardrail Assembly (Metric) CVI02350-21 . 4 Drawings CVI02350-00 .................19 Reserved CVI02350-20 ...Miscellanous Details Headwall with Wings for One Culverts CVI02350-24M ..2 Purpose ....... 3 CVI02350-13 .........Miscellaneous Details Headwall for Two Culverts 2..Miscellanous Details Guardrail Details (Metric) CVI02350-22 ..Roadway Details Doweled Expansion Joint CVI02350-03 ...COMPLETE REVISION October 2011 Process Industry Practices Civil PIP CVI02350 Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and Typical Details Table of Contents 1..........Roadway Details Doweled Construction Joint CVI02350-04 . Introduction..... Abbreviations...Miscellanous Details Guard Posts CVI02350-23 .Miscellanous Details Guardrail Details CVI02350-21M .. References .....Roadway Details Doweled/Keyed Joint CVI02350-05 ..Area Paving Details Transition CVI02350-15 ....Area Paving Details Saw Cut Contraction Joints Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 4 ..............General Notes CVI02350 01 .......Miscellanous Details Headwall with Wings for One Culvert (Metric) CVI02350-25 ..09 Reserved CVI02350-10 ..Miscellanous Details Guardrail Assembly CVI02350-20M ......

Miscellaneous Details Headwall for Two Culverts (Metric) CVI02350-26 .Miscellaneous Details Headwall with Wings for Two Culverts (Metric) Process Industry Practices Page 2 of 4 .COMPLETE REVISION October 2011 CVI02350-25M .Miscellaneous Details Headwall with Wings for Two Culverts CVI02350-26M .

The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used. 2. Short titles are used herein where appropriate.Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs.Site Preparation. area paving. guard rails and headwalls. General notes are provided to supplement the requirements shown on design drawings and project specifications. 1. guard posts. Area paving details are for 4.Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 4 . Zinc-Coated.and 6-inch concrete paving intended for pedestrian and light vehicular traffic.1 Purpose This Practice provides typical details for construction of roadways and area paving for use in conjunction with design drawings and project specifications. Abbreviations commonly used on design drawings are also listed in this Practice. 2.Standard Specification for Pipe. 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength – ASTM A992/A992M .Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware – ASTM A307 .1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) – PIP CVS02100 .Concrete Typical Details (STI03310 -00 General Notes) – PIP STS03001 .2 Scope This Practice provides typical details for roadway paving.Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification 2.Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel – ASTM A53/A53M . and Backfill Specification – PIP CVS02350 . Steel. Welded and Seamless – ASTM A153/A153M . Introduction 1.Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification – PIP STI03310 . except as otherwise noted.2 Industry Codes and Standards ASTM International (ASTM) – ASTM A36/A36M . References Applicable parts of the following Practices shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. Black and HotDipped. Excavation.PIP CVI02350 Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and Typical Details COMPLETE REVISION October 2011 1.

= TOP OF TOC = TOP OF CONCRETE TOG = TOP OF GROUT OR TOP OF GROUND TYP = TYPICAL VERT = VERTICAL W/ = WITH W/O = WITHOUT WP = WORK POINT WWR = WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT @ = AT C AB = ANCHOR BOLT B = BOTTOM BC = BOLT CIRCLE BM = BENCH MARK BO = BOTTOM OF BOC = BOTTOM OF CONCRETE BOT = BOTTOM C/C = CENTER TO CENTER CB = CATCH BASIN CJ = CONTRACTION JOINT CL = CENTERLINE CLR = CLEAR OR CLEARANCE CMP = CORRUGATED METAL PIPE COL = COLUMN CONC = CONCRETE CONST = CONSTRUCTION CONT = CONTINUOUS COORD = COORDINATE CTRD = CENTERED DB = DRY BOX DET = DETAIL DIA = DIAMETER DISCH = DISCHARGE DWG = DRAWING DWL = DOWEL EA = EACH EF = EACH FACE EJ = EXPANSION JOINT EL = ELEVATION (HEIGHT) ELEV = ELEVATION VIEW EQ = EQUAL OR EQUALLY EW = EACH WAY EXIST = EXISTING FDN = FOUNDATION FF = FAR FACE FG = FINISH GRADE FIN = FINISH FL = FLOW LINE FS = FAR SIDE = CENTERLINE = DEGREE OF CURVATURE = INFLECTION ANGLE O = DIAMETER Process Industry Practices Page 4 of 4 . = NUMBER NS = NEAR SIDE NTD = NOTED NTS = NOT TO SCALE OC = ON CENTER OD = OUTSIDE DIAMETER OPNG = OPENING OPP = OPPOSITE P = PROJECTION PC = POINT OF CURVATURE PI = POINT OF INTERSECTION PROJ = PROJECTION PT = POINT OF TANGENCY PVI = POINT OF VERTICAL INTERSECTION QTY = QUANTITY R = RADIUS RAD = RADIUS PCP = REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE REF = REFERENCE REINF = REINFORCING REQD = REQUIRED ROW = RIGHT-OF-WAY RR = RAILROAD SCH = SCHEDULE SIM = SIMILAR SPA = SPACE OR SPACES SPCD = SPACED SPCG = SPACING SPEC = SPECIFICATION SQ = SQUARE STA = STATION STD = STANDARD SUCT = SUCTION SUPT = SUPPORT SYMM = SYMMETRICAL UON = UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED T = TOP THD = THREAD THK = THICK TO.PIP CVI02350 Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and Typical Details COMPLETE REVISION October 2011 3. Abbreviations FTG = FOOTING GA = GAUGE OR GAGE GALV = GALVANIZED HORIZ = HORIZONTAL HP = HIGH POINT HPFS = HIGH POINT FINISH SURFACE HW = HEADWALL ID = INSIDE DIAMETER IE = INVERT ELEVATION INV = INVERT ELEVATION L = LENGTH LF = LINEAR FEET LG = LONG LOC = LOCATION LP = LOW POINT LPFS = LOW POINT FINISH SURFACE MAX = MAXIMUM MES = MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL SUPPORT MH = MANHOLE MIN = MINIMUM MISC = MISCELLANEOUS MPS = MISC PIPE SUPPORT MS = MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORT N = NUMBER NF = NEAR FACE NO.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 Process Industry Practices Civil PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification .

To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations. contractors. PIP’s copyright notices must be clearly indicated and unequivocally incorporated in documents where an Authorized User desires to provide any third party with copies of the Practice. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. suppliers and contractors with copies of the Practice solely for Authorized Users’ purposes. These purposes include but are not limited to the procurement process (e. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. application. The University of Texas at Austin. Authorized Users may attach addenda or overlays to clearly indicate modifications or exceptions to specific sections of PIP Practices.g.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. such laws or regulations must be followed. PRINTING HISTORY April 2002 Issued July 2012 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds . 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500). Authorized Users may provide their clients. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. This Practice is subject to revision at any time. Texas 78759.. PIP Member Companies and Subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. Austin. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. or standards organizations. Construction Industry Institute. administrative. Changes or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. as attachments to requests for quotation/ purchase orders or requests for proposals/contracts) and preparation and issue of design engineering deliverables for use on a specific project by Authorized User’s client.

...................................................................... Introduction............. 4 4...2 Materials ......... and Base Course .............. 8 2............................ References ...1 Process Industry Practices ..... 4 4........................... Requirements ......... 6 4... 2 3......... 2 1............................... Definitions ...........COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 Process Industry Practices Civil PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification Table of Contents 1................. 2 4.......... 2 1.......... 3 Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 15 ..... 2 2..........................2 Industry Codes and Standards ....................1 Quality Control/Assurance ....3 Subgrade Preparation.. 2 2........ Subbase.2 Scope ................................. 4 4.....4 Surfacing ........1 Purpose ...

and quality control/assurance of roadways and area paving within plant boundaries and for access roadways from public roadways to plant facilities.700 kN-m/m3) – ASTM D1883 . Introduction 1.PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 1. 1.Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (MediumCuring Type) – ASTM D2028/D2028M .Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete – ASTM C989/C989M Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars – ASTM D977 .1 Purpose This Practice provides requirements for construction of roadways and area paving within plant boundaries and for access roadways from public roadways to plant facilities.Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (SlowCuring Type) – ASTM D2027/D2027M . Excavation.Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (RapidCuring Type) Process Industry Practices Page 2 of 15 .Site Preparation. and Backfill Specification – PIP STS03001 .2 Scope This Practice describes minimum requirements for material.Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of SmallSize Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine – ASTM C618 .Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory Compacted Soils – ASTM D2026/D2026M .Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and Typical Details – PIP CVS02100 .Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates – ASTM C131 .1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) – PIP CVI02350 .000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2. 2. 2. References Applicable parts of the following Practices and industry codes and standards shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. construction.2 Industry Codes and Standards ASTM International (ASTM) – ASTM C33/C33M . The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used. except as otherwise noted.Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt – ASTM D1557 . Short titles will be used herein where appropriate.Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification 2.Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56.

and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the constructor engineer of record: Purchaser’s authorized representative with overall authority and responsibility for the engineering design. equipment. design drawings.Standard Practice for Selection and Use of Emulsified Asphalts – ASTM D5249 . The engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the work is to be constructed. foundations.Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods – ASTM D3282 .Standard Specification for Backer Material for Use with Coldand Hot-Applied Joint Sealants in Portland-Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints – ASTM D6084 . studies.Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) – ASTM D2726 .PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 – ASTM D2041/D2041M .Standard Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt Binder – ASTM D6938 .Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways or Airports – ASTM D2950/D2950M . inspector: The party responsible for verifying the quality of all materials. practices. materials. and data sheets that the purchaser has transmitted or otherwise communicated. The term constructor shall apply also to the constructor’s subcontractor(s) and vendor(s).Standard Test Method for Elastic Recovery of Bituminous Materials by Ductilometer – ASTM D6373 . and workmanship furnished by the constructor. and appurtenances described in the contract documents. quality.Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction – ASTM D3628 .Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non-Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures – ASTM D2940/D2940M . supervision. tools. contract documents: Any and all documents including codes. and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents.Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures in Place by the Electromagnetic Surface Contact Method 3. and performance of the civil works.Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) – ASTM D7113/D7113M . installations. The inspector shall be qualified by training and experience Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 15 .Standard Practice for Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes – ASTM D3381 . and labor for the installation of the roadway and area paving work in accordance with the contract documents. sketches. structure. Definitions constructor: The party responsible for supplying the materials. specifications. either by incorporation or reference.Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures – ASTM D2487 .

1.2.2.1.2.2 Water 4. 4. Requirements 4.2 Source for locally available water suitable for construction shall be obtained from the owner.2. Water shall be fresh and not brackish or from the ocean. 4. or other deleterious substances.2 Certified laboratory test data for the materials and products to be used in the work shall be submitted to the purchaser for approval at least 15 days prior to shipping of materials and products.2. water used in construction shall be free of salts.1. 4. 4.1.1.2 The performance or lack of performance of the tests and inspections by purchaser’s inspector shall not be construed as granting relief from the requirements of this Practice or the other contract documents. acids.2. alkalis. The purchaser may be the owner or the owner’s authorized agent. an inspection and testing agency will be retained by the purchaser to perform field and laboratory testing and/or evaluations to verify compliance of the work with the requirements of this Practice and to ensure the achievement of the intents and purposes of the work.1 Quality Control/Assurance 4.1 General General requirements for soil and aggregate classification shall be in accordance with ASTM D2487. and ASTM D3282. 4. ASTM D2940/D2940M. lease.1.3 Results of the quality control tests required during the performance of the work shall be submitted to the purchaser within 48 hours of completion. or other legal agreement over the site wherein the roadway and area paving will be used purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the constructor.PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 and hold certifications or documentation of their qualifications.1. oils.1 A written Quality Control Program document that provides details of how compliance with the requirements of this specification and contract documents will be achieved shall be submitted to the purchaser for approval at least 15 days before start of construction. Process Industry Practices Page 4 of 15 .1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.1.1 Quality Control and Submittals 4. organic matter.2 Quality Assurance 4.2.2.1.1 Unless approved by the engineer of record.1. 4. 4. 4. the inspector shall be an independent party retained by the purchaser. owner: The party who has authority through ownership. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.2 Materials 4.

4.2.2.2. the asphalt binder shall not be polymer modified unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.2 If the temperature spread for the performance grade specified is 92°C or greater.2.3 Water used for concrete construction shall be in accordance with PIP STS03001.4. 4.4.5 Emulsified asphalt shall be in accordance with ASTM D977 and ASTM D3628.3 The aggregate shall have a soaked California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of 80% minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM D1883. or slag. 4. clay coatings. Base and Untreated Gravel Surfaces 4.2. crushed stone.3.3. The performance grade provided shall be as specified in the contract documents.2. lumps of clay. unless otherwise approved by the engineer of record. 4.2.3.3.3 A dense-graded mix-type shall be provided unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 4. the Performance Grade provided shall be PG 64-22.2. or other objectionable matter. 4.2. Performance graded (PG) binder shall meet the requirements of ASTM D6373.3. 4.5 Aggregate for Asphaltic Concrete Paving 4. 4. 200) sieve.2.4. 4. If the temperature range is less than 92°C. 4.3 Asphalt 4. 4.2. Process Industry Practices Page 5 of 15 .1 Asphaltic concrete paving shall be in accordance with the Superpave system.5. or ASTM D2028/D2028M. or grade RC-70 or grade RC-250 in accordance with ASTM D2028/D2028M.5.4 Aggregate gradation for untreated gravel surfaces shall conform to base requirements of ASTM D2940 except that a minimum of 8% shall pass 75 μm (No. and shall be in accordance with ASTM D2940/D2940M.2. 4.2 The aggregate materials shall be free from organic matter. an elastic recovery test in accordance with ASTM D6084 shall be provided and the binder shall be polymer modified.4 Aggregate for Subbase.2.PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 4.1 Aggregate for asphaltic concrete paving shall be determined by the Superpave mix design process unless otherwise approved by purchaser.2.3.2 A dense graded mix-type shall be provided. If no performance grade is specified.7 Asphalt cement for tack coat shall be viscosity grade AC-20 in accordance with ASTM D3381.2.4. ASTM D2027/D2027M.4 Cutback asphalt shall be in accordance with ASTM D2026/D2026M.6 Liquid asphalt for prime coat shall be grade MC-70 or grade MC-250 in accordance with ASTM D2027/D2027M.2.2. and a percentage of wear not greater than 45% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131.2.3.1 Materials for aggregate pavement base and subbase (if required) shall consist of durable and sound crushed gravel. 4.

Process Industry Practices Page 6 of 15 . Pozzolans and ground granular blast slag (GGBS) are allowed as replacement for cementitious material or a portion of the fine aggregate in accordance with ASTM C618 and ASTM C989 respectively.8 Backer rod material shall be in accordance with ASTM D5249.9 The constructor shall select the final mixture proportions that best meets the construction methods and performance criteria.2.6.3.6.1 Materials for concrete construction shall be in accordance with PIP STS03001.6.2 Fill material. 4.7 Burlap shall weigh 9 oz/yd2 (305 g/m2) minimum and be clean and free of substances that can be harmful to freshly placed concrete. stripping.2. d. Deviations shall be approved by the engineer of record. 4.6 Concrete 4. Type I or Type III.2.6.3 Subgrade Preparation. and construction drainage shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02100.1. Portland cement replacement shall be at a ratio of 1:1 with fly ash or GGBS up to a maximum of 20%.2.3. Alkali reactive aggregates are not permitted.4 Coarse aggregate grading shall be as shown in ASTM C33/C33M.1 Clearing.2. 4.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.3 Subgrade preparation for base and subbase course placement shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02100.1 Subgrade Preparation and Subbase 4.2.1.2. 4.2.6. c. Air entrainment of approximately 5% to reduce concrete cracking/deterioration shall be included in the mix design if specified in the contract documents for projects where freeze/thaw is a concern. and testing shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02100. 4. the mixture shall attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4.6.5 mm) for the surface layer and 1 in (25 mm) for the intermediate/binder and base courses unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 4.PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 4. Subbase.000 psi (28 MPa). 4. b. 4. compaction. removal of waste.3 The nominal maximum aggregate size shall be 1/2 in (12.5. grubbing.2. 4.2.1.2. Size 67. 4.6.3.6.6 Cold applied joint sealant shall be in accordance with design drawings.2 Concrete mix design in accordance with PIP STS03001 shall be used for concrete pavement with the following modifications: a. and Base Course 4. 4.3.6. 4.5 Hot applied joint sealant shall be in accordance with design drawings. source of borrow.

2 Base Course 4. 4. the upper surface of in situ subgrade soils shall be stabilized after stripping is complete in accordance with requirements specified in the contract documents.1. 3 in (75 mm) in diameter minimum. Process Industry Practices Page 7 of 15 .1. through the base course. Thickness measurements shall be taken by making test holes. The average thickness of the base course. each trip offset by at most one tire width of the roller. Proof roll at least two complete passes. 3. 4. 4.1.1. 4. Base course shall be placed in accordance with PIP CVS02100.3. 4.1. 2. rolling or elastic rebound (springing).10 Unacceptable material shall be removed and replaced in accordance with PIP CVS02100.3.3. The thickness of the base course should be measured at intervals of 500 yd2 (420 m2) maximum of completed base course.8 Proof roll the compacted subgrade with a 25-T (222 kN) pneumatic tire roller or a fully loaded dump truck.3. If the measured thickness is greater than 1/2 in (13 mm) thicker than specified. Operate the roller at a speed between 2 and 6 mph (3 and 10 kph).3. the measured thickness shall be considered to be equal to the specified thickness plus 1/2 in (13 mm) for determining the average. determined by computing the average of the depth measurements. Observe for visible deformations such as rutting.4 Unless otherwise specified. Substantial cracking or lateral movement shall be considered unacceptable. shall not under run the specified thickness by greater than 1/4 in (6 mm). unless otherwise shown on the design drawings. Aggregate base course shall not be constructed when atmospheric temperature is below 35ºF (2ºC).1. or if other weather conditions may detrimentally affect the quality of the base course. the layer shall be carried 1 ft (300 mm) minimum beyond the width of the base course. the thickness of the subbase (if required) shall be 4 in (100 mm).3.2.3.3.2. The moisture content of the subgrade should be near optimum. 4. 2.3. 5.9 Rutting or springing movement greater than 1 in (25 mm) shall be considered as unacceptable.7 Where shown and specified in the contract documents.5 If a subbase layer is specified in the contract documents. cracking.2 Thickness Requirements 1. geotextile and/or geogrid shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions.PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 4. No single base course thickness measurement shall have a deficiency greater than 1/2 in (13 mm). 4.1.3.1 New Construction 1. 4. 4.6 Where shown in the contract documents.

4.2 Pavement shall be constructed on a previously completed and approved subgrade. 4.2.1. Air temperature shall be above 40ºF (4ºC) for duration of the application of prime coat. rolling.3.4. or other weather conditions shall be corrected in accordance with the specified requirements. or existing pavement as shown on the design drawings.4. 2.1. Air temperature readings shall be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. 2. 4. 4.2 Gravel Pavement 4.3. and watering as necessary to maintain the base course in proper condition.1. and recompacting affected areas. 4.3 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement 4.1.3 Density Test Test base course to the density specified in PIP CVS02100 in accordance with ASTM D6938. rainfall. 4.4.2.2. 3. Test every 2000 ft2 (180 m2) of each lift and a minimum of one test each day base material is placed. 4. or concrete as shown on the design drawings.PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 6. shaping. Areas of base course damaged by freezing. All debris. 4. Correct thickness deficiencies by scarifying. After construction has been completed.1 Paving surfaces shall be gravel. tack coat. 4. or interfere with placement operations.4. adding mixture of proper gradation.4. subgrade and base.4 Maintenance 1. the base course shall be protected until final acceptance. and excess material shall be removed from the jobsite after completion of base course. and asphalt surface courses.1 Compaction shall be continued until 95% of maximum dry density is achieved in accordance with ASTM D1557 and verified in the field using nuclear density testing in accordance with ASTM D6938.4. asphalt.4 Surfaces shall be finished such that positive drainage is provided. Process Industry Practices Page 8 of 15 .4.1 General 4.3 The surface of the area to be paved shall be clean and kept from accumulating materials that would contaminate the mixture.4. rubbish. reblading. or other appropriate density test method approved by the engineer of record.1 General 1.2 Sampling of compacted mixes from the roadway shall be in accordance with ASTM D3282. Protection shall include drainage.3. 4.4 Surfacing 4.2.4. prevent bonding.

4. 4. and asphalt surface courses shall not be applied in unsuitable weather conditions. dust. Process Industry Practices Page 9 of 15 . 5. the vertical face shall be cleaned to remove foreign substances and coated with liquid asphalt at a rate of approximately 0. and depressions in the existing asphaltic concrete course shall be cleaned out down to the hard surface and dried.2 Prime Coat 1.4. Apply prime coat at a rate not less than 0. After the subgrade or base has been prepared and compacted. manholes. and the asphaltic concrete surface shall be thoroughly swept clean. 2. Asphalt for the prime coat shall be of medium curing type cutback asphalt. Unsuitable weather shall include the following conditions: a. Asphalt that is discolored. The tack coat shall be applied in advance of the asphaltic concrete paving operation under the following conditions: a. indicating the bitumen has been overheated. Damaged prime coat shall be repaired immediately.25 gal/yd2 (1. shall not be used. If the asphalt is not entirely absorbed by the base course within 24 hours. 5. 4.3. Holes. Where asphaltic concrete paving is to be placed against the vertical face of an existing pavement. 4.14 L/m2). or other debris is being deposited on the underlying surface 4. gutters. tack coat. 3. uniform coat of liquid asphalt.15 gal and not more than 0. the prime coat shall be applied and permitted to cure 24 hours minimum before new asphaltic concrete paving is placed.3. Wind that is blowing at such a rate that proper bonding cannot be achieved because sand. Rain c. and other structures where asphaltic concrete paving is to be placed against shall be covered with a thin. Prime coat. excess asphalt shall be blotted with light.PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 3.33 gal/yd2 (0. Placing asphaltic concrete over existing pavements b. Between asphaltic concrete courses if more than one asphaltic concrete course is used 2. dry sand.5 L/m2) of surface.3 Tack Coat 1. 6. Wind that is blowing at such a rate that proper compaction cannot be attained because of cooling of the mixture d. ruts. The surfaces of curbs. Dense fog b.7 to 1.

Debris shall be removed from the tack coat before HMAC is applied. Apply tack coat at a rate not less than 0. Asphalt for the tack coat shall be rapid curing cutback. The minimum roadway surface temperatures are shown in Table 1. equal lifts consisting of a leveling-up course and a surface course shall be placed. but not so far in advance that the tack coat becomes covered with dust or other foreign substances. The HMAC temperatures shall be within the following requirements from production to finish rolling.2 L/m2) of surface. 4. and cross section. Process Industry Practices Page 10 of 15 . Compacted to form an even surface 4. grade. Lightly coated with rapid curing type cutback asphalt b. 5. Broken surfaces in the existing asphaltic concrete course shall be repaired as follows: a. a. Table 1. 6.4 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete (HMAC) 1. The paver shall also be capable of providing a smoothly struck finish with uniform density and texture. Breakdown rolling: 320-275°F (165-135°C) c.4.PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 3. Minimum Roadway Surface Temperatures Minimum Roadway Surface Temperatures High Temperature Binder Grade PG 64 PG 70 PG 76 Subsurface Layers or Night Paving Operations 45°F (7°C) 55°F (13°C) 60°F (16°C) Surface Layers Placed in Daylight Operations 50°F (10°C) 60°F (16°C) 60°F (16°C) 4. 2. Maximum production temperature: 350°F (177°C) b. true to line.3.05 gal/yd2 (0. In no case shall the maximum production temperature be more than 350°F (177°C). Filled with surface asphaltic concrete c. Finish rolling: 200-150°F (93-66°C) 3. HMAC shall be placed to the required width and thickness. Intermediate rolling: 275-200°F (135-93°C) d. If the specified thickness of finished paving is greater than 3 in (75 mm). 6. The tack coat shall be applied sufficiently in advance of the placement operation of the asphalt mixture to permit volatiles to evaporate from the asphalt cement. 5.

10. c. 9. A sufficient amount of material shall be placed to assure the specified pavement thickness after compaction. 3. 8. If the specified thickness of paving is 3 in (75 mm) or less. Surface density of pavement shall be tested using electromagnetic surface contact methods in accordance with ASTM D7113/D7113M or with nuclear density methods in accordance with ASTM D2950/D2950M. Paving shall be discontinued if unable to achieve the specified density prior to the mixture cooling to 175°F (79°C). Each HMAC layer shall be placed as continuously as possible to minimize joints. 2. Joints shall be made in such a manner as to create a continuous bond between the old and new pavement construction courses.4. 4. Tests shall be performed on each lane of paving at a minimum of 250 ft (75 m) intervals. longitudinal joints in successive courses shall be offset by 6 in (150 mm) minimum. Before placement continues. Process Industry Practices Page 11 of 15 . If the pavement construction involves two or more courses. Each test shall consist of an average of four readings at each test location. Joints that are not completed before the previously laid mixture has cooled to a temperature of 140 F (60 C) shall be coated with liquid or emulsified asphalt just before paving is continued. 4. Compaction shall be continued until further compaction cannot be obtained and all compactor marks are eliminated. finished paving shall be placed in one layer. the paver shall be positioned on the transverse joint so that sufficient hot mixture can be placed to create a joint after compaction that is in accordance with the required smoothness. b. Compaction tests results shall average between 92% to 97% with no test result below 91%.PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 7.5 Joint Construction 1. If the placing of material is discontinued or if material in place cools to less than 140 F (60 C). the edge of the previously placed pavement shall be trimmed to a straight line perpendicular to the paver and cut back to expose an even vertical surface for the full thickness of the course. a. Actual bulk density for full depth of compacted HMAC in accordance with ASTM D2726 shall range between 92% and 97% of theoretical maximum density in accordance with ASTM D2041/D2041M. The average thickness of the course or of combined courses shall be within 1/4 in (6 mm) of the specified thickness. 5. a joint running perpendicular to the direction traveled by the paver shall be made.3. When placement continues.

2.000 impulses per minute. b. 3. At least three flange to vertical face braces.000 to 8.4. Forms shall have a depth equivalent to the edge thickness of the pavement and shall be straight and free from warp. 4. 5. and joined together neatly and tightly. strike off. 7.4. 4. Internal paving vibrators on paving machines shall vibrate at 5.000 impulses per minute. The slip form paving machine shall be equipped with the following: a. c.4.4 Concrete Pavement 4. and designed and constructed so no spreading or appreciable slumping of the concrete occurs.PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 4. Saws shall be equipped with blade guards and guides to control alignment and depth. Process Industry Practices Page 12 of 15 . Single spud vibrators shall vibrate at a minimum of 7. including the impact and vibration of the finishing machine. consolidate. 4. 3. strength. A positive interlock system to stop all vibration and tamping elements when forward motion of the machine stops. 2. Vibrators to consolidate the concrete for the full width and depth of the course placed in a single pass. Paving saws shall be capable of sawing fresh concrete.2 Forms and Form Setting 1. Size.4. Forms shall be set on firm. screed. 6. Forms that show a deviation greater than 1/4 in (6 mm) in line or 1/8 in (3 mm) in grade shall be reset or replaced. solid sub grade that is in accordance with required grade and alignment specifications. and float finish the freshly placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine to produce a dense and homogeneous pavement requiring minimal hand finishing. The minimum length of a section of forms used on tangents shall be 10 ft (3 m). Fixed-form paving shall use screeds designed for striking off manual fixed-form concrete pavement conforming to the proper cross section.1 Equipment 1. Mixing plant capacity shall be based on the size of the job and paving capacity to avoid shutdowns and minimize ‘cold’ joints. and stability of forms shall be sufficient to resist movement when subjected to the pressure of concrete placement. pin pockets with pin anchoring keys.000 impulses per minute.4. and pins shall be used for each 10-ft form section. Surface pan type vibrators shall operate at a minimum of 4. 5. Slip-form pavers shall be designed to spread. Flexible forms or wooden forms that bend to the required arc may be used on curves with a radius of 150 ft (45 m) or less. Automatic controls to control line and grade from either or both sides of the machine.

Process Industry Practices Page 13 of 15 .4 Curing 1.4. 5.PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 8. 4. whichever is greater. After the concrete is at least 4 days old and has reached a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi (21 MPa) or 75% of the specified minimum 28-day compressive strength. 6. Curing concrete pavement shall comply with the provisions of PIP STS03001. Concrete surfaces subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be re-sprayed unless protected by sheeting. 3. Forms shall be marked at locations where reinforcing is discontinued and saw cutting is required for contraction joints. Pavement placement shall use either slip-form paving or fixed-form paving methods.300 kg). Broom finish walks and small areas. the following precaution shall be taken: The concrete shall be placed at the coolest temperature practicable. equipment with wheel loads exceeding 5.3 Execution 1. 2.000 lb (2. Test entire surface before initial set and correct irregularities or undulations before finishing. and the temperature of the concrete when placed shall not exceed 90°F (32°C).4. Finishing tools shall be kept in good condition. Pavement shall be closed to vehicular traffic until the concrete is at least four days old and has reached a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi (21 MPa) or 75% of the specified minimum 28-day compressive strength. Pavement placement shall comply with the provisions of PIP STS03001 where applicable. when the maximum daily air temperature is likely to exceed 85°F (29°C). 8.4. 9. Surface shall not have irregularities greater than 1/8 in (3 mm) when checked with a 10-ft (3-meter) straight edge held parallel to the centerline of the pavement. In addition to the provisions of PIP STS03001 for hot weather placement. a construction joint shall be installed in accordance with the details shown in PIP CVI02350 at the location of the nearest contraction or expansion joint.4. Excess concrete beyond the location of the construction joint shall be removed. 2. After the concrete has reached the specified minimum 28-day compressive strength as verified by the tests.000 lb (2. 4. the pavement may be opened to limited traffic with wheel loads not to exceed 5. whichever is greater. Finish pavement with broom or artificial turf drag.300 kg) may be permitted on the pavement. 7. If paving operations are discontinued for more than 30 minutes. 4.

4. Before sawing a joint. If purchaser agrees. or lean concrete bases shall be a minimum of one-third pavement thickness. Maintain a uniform consistency in consecutive batches of concrete. 2.4.PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 3.5 Quality Control/Quality Assurance 1. see PIP CVI02350 for detail for reinforcing re-entrant corners to reduce cracking. Joint cuts shall be a minimum of one-fourth pavement thickness. Locations and results of cylinder strength testing shall be recorded.4 in (100 mm) or less 4. 3. Joints shall be located as shown on the contract documents and constructed as specified in PIP STS03001.4. soil-cement. Joints in pavements placed on lime-treated. 6. 2.4.7 Jointed Reinforced Concrete Pavement (JRCP) 1. the concrete shall be examined closely for cracks. Process Industry Practices Page 14 of 15 . Protect joint construction while placing concrete to avoid interference with the function of the joint. ties. 3. 4. 2. 5. Strengths shall be as specified in the mix design section of this specification. Joints shall align with existing or adjacent joints where possible. Pavement sections which have more than 10% of cylinder tests that fall below the specified minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be removed and replaced.4. 4. Sealant materials for joints shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. additional strength tests may be performed at constructor’s expense to determine if there is an alternative to pavement removal. Unless otherwise specified in contract documents. Use following slumps for the placement method used: SLIP-FORMED .4. 4. 3. and the joint shall not be sawed if a crack has occurred within 10 ft (3 m) from the planned joint location. 5. Quality Control/Quality Assurance shall be in accordance with PIP STS03001. and dowels shall be placed as shown in the contract documents.2.5 in (65 mm) or less FIXED-FORMED . 4. Areas where the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period shall be immediately re-sprayed. Re-entrant corners commonly occur at footings or inlets. Reinforcement installation shall be in accordance with PIP STS03001. Reinforcement. Sawing shall be discontinued when a crack develops ahead of the saw cut.6 Joint Construction 1.

Stainless steel wire c. Protect all bar steel reinforcement left protruding from the slab for any extended period from deterioration caused by exposure. 8. 2.4. Dowels shall be aligned perpendicular to the joint. epoxy. Arrangement of splices and splice lap lengths shall be as shown in the contract documents. 6. or plastic-coated wire 4. Do not bend bar steel reinforcement or subject to loading or forces that distort the steel or weaken the bond to the concrete. 10. Nylon. Skew may be varied to fit area geometry. Bar chairs shall be sufficient in strength and number to hold the steel reinforcement in position during construction.8 Jointed Plain Concrete Pavement (JPCP) 1.4. 3. parallel to each other and parallel with the bottom and top surfaces of the pavement. Use one or more of the following materials to tie coated bars: a. 5. 9. Transverse contraction joints in roadway paving shall be sawed on a skew of one unit longitudinal to six units’ transverse. and materials that do not damage or cut the coating. 7. Dowels shall be securely supported on chairs. Tie coated bars using procedures. Place the bar steel reinforcement after properly preparing the sub grade.PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2012 4. Reinforcing bars or welded wire reinforcing shall not be used in JPCP except at re-entrant corners. Place the longitudinal bars on top of the transverse bars and firmly tie or fasten together at each intersection. Process Industry Practices Page 15 of 15 . Purchaser-approved plastic or nonmetallic material b. Install dowels or tie bars at joints as shown in the contract documents. Support the assembled bars on bar chairs at a depth shown in the contract documents. equipment. Dowels or tie bars shall only be used in JPCP if shown in the contract documents.

COMPLETE REVISION October 2012 PIP STF05501 Fixed Ladders and Cages Fabrication Details .

PUBLISHING HISTORY November 1994 Issued December 1999 Revision August 2000 Technical Correction February 2002 Technical Correction October 2012 Complete Revision .

............ Requirements ...........................2 2.......... References ............. Introduction ..........2 4..............................COMPLETE REVISION October 2012 PIP STF05501 Fixed Ladders and Cages Fabrication Details Table of Contents 1..... Definitions .............3 Drawings Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 4 .....2 3............

2 Industry Codes and Standards Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs. 60.PIP STF05501 Fixed Ladders and Cages Fabrication Details COMPLETE REVISION October 2012 1.1 1. Definitions contract documents: design drawings: engineer of record: Process Industry Practices Page 2 of 4 .3 Government Regulations Regulations 29 CFR 1910 Subpart D (Walking-Working Surfaces) 3.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) Concrete Typical Details Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification 2. References 2.2 Purpose Scope 2.000 psi Tensile Strength 2. Introduction 1.

PIP STF05501 Fixed Ladders and Cages Fabrication Details COMPLETE REVISION October 2012 ladder fabricator: owner: purchaser: structure/platform engineer: structure/platform fabricator: vessel engineer: vessel manufacturer: 4. Requirements PIP STS05120 PIP STF05501-01PIP STF05501-11 PIP STF05501-03 Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 4 .

PIP STF05501 Fixed Ladders and Cages Fabrication Details COMPLETE REVISION October 2012 PIP STF05501-03 PIP STF05501-02 PIP STF05501-03 ASTM A36/A36M PIP STF05501-01 PIP STS05120 OSHA Regulations 29 CFR 1910 Subpart D ASTM A307 PIP STS05120 Process Industry Practices Page 4 of 4 .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

COMPLETE REVISION July 2008 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification .

The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Construction Industry Institute. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. The University of Texas at Austin. or standards organizations. Austin. Changes. administrative.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. Texas 78759. PRINTING HISTORY November 1996 Issued June 2002 Complete Revision July 2008 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds . this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. addenda. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. This Practice is subject to revision at any time. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). overlays. contractors. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations. such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. application. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500).

...........................4 4......................................................1 4.9 General . 4 Materials ............... 3 Field Quality Control of Grout ..........2 4....................... 3 Testing .. Definitions ............................ 2 2...............1 Industry Codes and Standards ...........6 4..........................................2 Scope.......................................................... 2 1............ 2 2.... Introduction............. 2 3............... 2 4................2 Government Regulations................... 5 Installation of Grout ......7 4...... 7 Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 6 .......................................................1 Purpose .. 6 Curing .............. 2 2...... Requirements.....8 4...... 5 Preparation for Grouting ..........5 4........................ References ...COMPLETE REVISION July 2008 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification Table of Contents 1................. 3 4............. 4 Safety..................................................3 4..... 3 Submittals ..... 2 1...............

sketches. including codes.1 Purpose This Practice provides the requirements for “non-shrink” cementitious grout materials and installation. 2. and labor for the installation of the grout in accordance with the contract documents. shall apply. and installing “nonshrink” cementitious grout materials. and made Page 2 of 8 Process Industry Practices . [ 50-mm] Cube Specimens) – ASTM C827 – Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures – ASTM C1090 – Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens of Hydraulic-Cement Grout – ASTM C1107/C1107M . contract documents: Any and all documents. Hydraulic Cement Grout (Nonshrink) 2. Short titles will be used herein where appropriate. Definitions constructor: The party responsible for supplying the materials. equipment. except as otherwise noted.Standard Specification for Packaged Dry. References Applicable parts of the following Practices. 2. and data sheets.2 Government Regulations Federal standards and instructions of the U. industry codes and standards. specifications. the term constructor shall apply also to the constructor’s subcontractor(s) and vendor(s). design drawings. and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. Introduction 1.1 Industry Codes and Standards ASTM International (ASTM) – ASTM C109/C109M. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used. tools.Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. that the purchaser or engineer of record has transmitted or otherwise communicated. practices. studies. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).2 Scope This Practice describes the requirements for supplying. either by incorporation or reference. 1. including any additional requirements by state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the grout is to be installed. OSHA Part 1910 3. including the following: – Code of Federal Regulations. supervision. S. testing. Unless otherwise noted.PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2008 1.

and supervision and shall perform all operations necessary for the formwork.2 4. placing. and curing of “nonshrink” cementitious grout. hereafter referred to as grout. specifications. The purchaser may be the owner or the owner’s authorized agent.2. installations.3 4. and other contract documents shall be brought to the attention of the purchaser for resolution before the work begins. owner: The party who has authority through ownership. installation and/or use.3 Testing 4. 4. 4. labor. Notwithstanding the constructor’s responsibility for quality. Any conflicts or inconsistencies between this Practice. lease.1 The constructor shall furnish all equipment. including those items or installations provided by any of the constructor’s subcontractors or vendors.1 After initial prequalification. the grout manufacturer shall provide a technical representative who shall be on-site to review the grouting set-up procedures and the grouting manufacturer’s instructions with those who will actually be doing the grouting. the grout manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations. tests and possibly includes shop drawings to assist in proper application.1. finishing. the design drawings.1. and workmanship. where indicated by the contract documents.COMPLETE REVISION July 2008 PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the constructor grout manufacturer: The party who produces and warrants the performance of the grout provided in accordance with the contract documents.2 Field Quality Control of Grout 4. proper mixing.2 4. Unless otherwise noted. Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 8 . 4. This requirement may be waived by the purchaser or as otherwise specified in the contract documents. The grout is manufactured in a controlled process using standard codes.2. grout shall be sampled and tested if required by the contract documents. Requirements 4. the term grout manufacturer shall apply also to the grout manufacturer’s subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s).1 The constructor shall be solely responsible for the quality control of all constructor-provided materials. The purchaser reserves the right to make inspections at any time during mixing of the materials and during execution of all grout work. The technical representative shall remain at the grouting site as long and as often as required to ensure that the grout manufacturer’s installation instructions are being followed.2. or other legal agreement over the site wherein the grout will be used purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the constructor. materials.1 General 4.3.

4.3.4. and inspection.1 Unless noted otherwise in the contract documents. The literature and certified test data shall include the product’s compressive strength. and other requirements in accordance with this Practice. Cubes that remain at the site shall be tested as follows: a. shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and approval. If testing is required by the contract documents. identification of foundation of grout placement.6 Compressive strength of cubes shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M and shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1107/ C1107M. grout type. and compressive break strengths.3.3.PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2008 4. mixing.3 4. b. One set of test cubes shall be transported to the testing laboratory after the initial set and tested at 24 hours. Reports shall contain the date of grout placement. adhesive properties.4. foundation temperature at time of grout placement. curing. locating joints.5.3. and associated hazards shall be reviewed with all grouting personnel. flowability.3 4.2 4. dimensional stability. 4. placement.3 Page 4 of 8 Process Industry Practices . the grout manufacturer’s literature. and aprons shall be worn by those personnel mixing and placing the grout. Goggles or face shields.2 4.3. and certified test data for the grout shall be submitted to the purchaser. consistency. the constructor shall submit to the purchaser copies of all inspection and test reports.5 Safety 4. Test cubes shall be in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M.2 4.4. the cubes shall be transported to the testing laboratory for compressive strength testing.5.1 The constructor shall be responsible for compliance with the safety requirements specified in the contract documents and by the grout manufacturer. protective gloves. The program shall include procedures for all forming. One cube set shall be tested at 7 days and the other cube set at 28 days. design compressive strength. A minimum of fifteen days before installation. including joint details. describing in detail how compliance with this Practice shall be ensured.5 Three sets of three test cubes shall be made in the field each day that grout is mixed and placed. c.4 4. 4. air temperature at time of grout placement. 4.5. a written quality control program. Grout Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) shall be available. The remaining cubes shall be cured in the field for 3 days in the same way as the placed grout is cured.4 Submittals 4. testing. handling. material safety data sheets. At the end of 3 days.

5.2 Grout materials shall be packaged in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M.7 Preparation for Grouting 4. 5000 psi (34 Mpa)).5 4. in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Process Industry Practices Page 5 of 8 .6.6 Dust masks or respirators (in accordance with MSDS requirements) shall be worn by those personnel exposed to the grout or aggregate prior to mixing.4 4.2.2.3 Mixing Water Mixing water shall be potable and free of oils.6. a.2. 4.5 Cementitious grouts shall not shrink and shall expand no more than 4. Materials 4.2. and other deleterious materials.3 Grout materials shall require only the addition of potable water. New concrete foundations shall be cured for 7 days minimum before surface preparation unless otherwise approved by purchaser. measurable amounts of water soluble chlorides.7 All materials and tools shall be stored in a clean. Grout Materials 4.1 Foundation preparation shall be in accordance with the grout manufacturer’s written instructions and the following.1 4. 4.0 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C827 (before set) and no more than 0.6 All manufactured grout materials shall be delivered to the job site in original unopened packages and shall be stored in accordance with the grout manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. 4.1 All grout materials shall be proportioned products. 4. and organized manner.6. Soap and water shall be available for periodic hand cleaning.6.COMPLETE REVISION July 2008 PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification 4.5. 4. organics. the manufacturer’s instructions shall take precedence. 4.2 All materials shall be provided in accordance with the contract documents and this Practice. and shall not contain metallic substances.2. 4. admixtures shall not be added to the grout without approval of the purchaser and the grout manufacturer. acids.2. alkalines.6.6.2.8 Unless specified in the contract documents. or other substances that may be potentially harmful to concrete or steel reinforcement.6.6. dry.3 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C1090 (after set). 4.6.6. aluminum powder. should the need arise. If there is a conflict between the manufacturer’s instructions and the following.7.2.4 Compressive strength shall be in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M (minimum 28-day compressive strength.6.

etc.5 All metal surfaces of base plates and equipment bases which are to be in direct contact with the grout shall be free of oil. oil-free air. 4. 4.1 Grout shall be stored. and cured in accordance with the grout manufacturer’s written requirements and at temperature ranges that are consistent with the grout manufacturer’s recommendations. water. Unless otherwise shown in the contract documents. Scarifying the surface with a needle gun or bushing tool or sandblasting to remove laitance from the foundation is unacceptable. The foundation must be kept free of contamination by oil. A bond breaker in accordance with the grout manufacturer’s recommendations shall be applied to the surface of the formwork in contact with the grout. the foundation shall be prepared by chipping away all laitance (poor quality concrete) and oilsoaked or damaged concrete down to exposed fractured coarse aggregate. Joints in grout shall be located in accordance with the contract documents or as recommended by the grout manufacturer. dirt. When the surface chipping is complete. as they could damage the structural integrity of the foundation. c. such as jackhammers. 4. 45° chamfer strips at all exposed grout corners.7. These shall be glued in position prior to the grout placement with silicone rubber (RTV) or elastic epoxy seam sealant (liquid rubber). Forms shall not be attached to the foundation using power nailing. d. c.4 4..3 4. Unless otherwise shown in the contract documents. Concrete must be removed in this chipping process down to a depth to permit 1 inch (25 mm) minimum grout (or the grout thickness specified in contract documents) between the concrete and the bottom of of the base or sole plate.PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2008 b.7. Concrete chipping and removal shall not be performed with heavy tools.7. d. b.7. Grout forms shall be sealed to prevent grout leakage. grease.2 Grout Forms a. grout forms shall have minimum 3/4-inch (19 mm). dry.8 Installation of Grout 4. and other foreign substances. Protective sheeting (such as sheets of clean polyethylene) shall be used to cover the prepared surfaces when work is not in progress. Bitumastic or room temperature vulcanizable (RTV) silicone rubber can be used for this purpose. A chipping hammer with a chisel bit is the preferred tool for this purpose. after it has been prepared for grouting. In the areas that will be covered by grout. placed.8. mixed. Grout forms shall be built of materials of adequate strength and securely anchored and sealed to withstand the liquid head and forces developed by the grout during placement. expansion joints shall be made from 1-inch (25 mm) thick closed-cell neoprene foam rubber (polystyrene may also be used). the foundation shall be thoroughly swept and air-blown free of all dust with clean. The constructor Page 6 of 8 Process Industry Practices .

Dry packing shall be used only where there is adequate accessibility.g.10 If grout is placed through grout holes.8.9 4.8. A liquid head pressure shall be maintained at the first access hole until a head pressure has been established at the next hole. Grout placement shall continue from the next hole in a similar fashion. Comment: For some grouts. Anchor bolt sleeves for rotating equipment. reactor skirts.8. particular installation methods are restricted or prohibited by the grout manufacturer. Comply with the manufacturer’s special requirements for grouting done outside of this temperature range.5 4. Grouting shall be quick and continuous to avoid segregation.3 Grouting shall be performed with ambient temperatures and mix temperatures between 40°F (4°C) and 90°F (32°C) unless otherwise permitted by the grout manufacturer. grout shall be placed in such a manner that does not inhibit movement between sliding surfaces. understanding. shall be filled with a non-bonding moldable material prior to grout placement.8.12 If grouting around sliding surfaces. flowed. the grout shall be placed into one hole continuously until the grout has passed a second hole. or pumped into place in accordance with the grout manufacturer’s written instructions for the specific grout being installed.4 4.9 Curing The following shall be adhered to unless the grout manufacturer specifies otherwise: Process Industry Practices Page 7 of 8 .11 All voids in anchor bolt sleeves (except for rotating equipment) shall be cleared of all foreign material and completely filled with grout. 4. manufacturer’s written instructions shall be strictly followed. etc. the grout shall be cut back to the lower edge of the baseplate after it has reached its initial set.8. 4. and complying with the grout manufacturer’s instructions. Concrete surfaces in contact with the grout shall be saturated surface dry (saturated with clean water before grout placement with the surface of the concrete damp but free from standing water).8. or other equipment shown on drawings.8 4. exchanger supports. 4.7 4. unless shown otherwise on the drawings. unless otherwise indicated in the contract documents. or premature initial set. Where forms are not used.13 All voids that remain after removal of temporary shims shall be filled with the same grout material. Therefore. The cutback shall be at a 45° angle. (e.8.COMPLETE REVISION July 2008 PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification shall be responsible for reading.8. 4.6 4. All grout shall be placed in only one direction to prevent trapping air.).2 Grout shall be dry packed. bleeding.8. Retempering of grout by adding water after stiffening is not permitted.8.8. 4. 4. Grout shall be applied in the thickness specified in the contract documents.8. 4.

9.1 4.4 Page 8 of 8 Process Industry Practices . The wet rags or burlap shall be covered with plastic to prevent excessive evaporation. Moist curing can be achieved by applying wet rags or burlap to the exposed surfaces. 4. Moisture loss must be prevented by keeping the exposed surfaces wet for 7 days minimum or by application of a curing compound.3 4.3 Forms shall remain in place for 24 hours minimum after completion of grouting.2 4.9. Temperature of the grouted base and concrete foundation shall be maintained between 40°F (4°C) and 90°F (32°C) for 3 days minimum after the initial set. The wet rags or burlap shall be rewetted as necessary to maintain moistness.PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification COMPLETE REVISION July 2008 4.9. Equipment shall not be placed in service before the grout has attained 80 percent of the specified 28-day design compressive strength.9.9.

COMPLETE REVISION November 2006 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STF05530 Grating Fabrication Details .

Austin. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500). All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. overlays. or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. This Practice is subject to revision at any time. Construction Industry Institute. administrative. Texas 78759. contractors. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. addenda. such laws or regulations must be followed. application. PRINTING HISTORY March 2001 Issued November 2006 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds . Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. or standards organizations. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. Changes. The University of Texas at Austin. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named.

.......... Typical Grating Panel Layout Detail 8... Definitions ....................................1 Purpose ............ References ........................ Requirements ....... Typical Clearances at Perimeter of Floors Detail 10........................ Circular Openings Detail 5............. Grating Opening at Interior Column Detail 2................. 2 2...............COMPLETE REVISION November 2006 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STF05530 Grating Fabrication Details Table of Contents 1.... 2 Drawings 2....... 2 2....3 Fabrication...... 2 3........ 3 4..... Grating Opening at Base Plate Detail 3...1 Process Industry Practices..................... 3 4. Introduction .......2 Materials......... 3 Detail 1. Typical Grating Panel Fastener Arrangement Detail 9.1 General................. Toe Plate Banding at Openings for Equipment Detail 7.......2 Scope .................. 3 4........................... Typical Clearances at Railing Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 9 .......................... Grating Opening at Corner Column Detail 4... 2 1.............. 2 1........................... Toe Plate Banding at Opening for Pipe Support Detail 6......2 Industry Codes and Standards.................. 2 4.....................

Page 2 of 9 Process Industry Practices . High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability 3.2 Scope This Practice describes the requirements for fabrication of grating for typical platforms and is intended to be issued to fabricators supplying grating. studies. The engineer of record shall be a professional engineer as defined by these practices. practices. and appurtenances of the project. Carbon. The edition in effect on the date of contract shall be used. Sheet and Strip. including codes. structure. design drawings. specifications. foundations. Introduction 1.2 Industry Codes and Standards ASTM International (ASTM) – ASTM A36/A36M . 2. except as otherwise noted.Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel – ASTM A1011/A1011M . industry codes and standards.PIP STF05530 Grating Fabrication Details COMPLETE REVISION November 2006 1.Standard Specification for Steel. quality. materials. and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. sketches. 1. and performance of the civil works. Structural.Angle Railing for Walking and Working Surfaces Fabrication Details – PIP STS05120 . and data sheets. engineer of record: Purchaser’s authorized representative with overall authority and responsibility for the engineering design.Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification 2. References Applicable parts of the following Practices. Definitions contract documents: Any and all documents.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) – PIP STF05520 .1 Purpose This Practice provides structural steel fabricators with standard grating details for the fabrication of grating in process industry facilities. and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the fabricator. Hot-Rolled. Details are provided that show the configurations for openings in the grating and typical details for grating arrangement and clearances. that the purchaser or engineer of record has transmitted or otherwise communicated. either by incorporation or reference. 2. Short titles are used herein where appropriate.Pipe Railing for Walking and Working Surfaces Fabrication Details – PIP STF05521 .

2.2.1. Fabricator shall be solely responsible for quality control of all materials and workmanship.1 All equipment. The metric equivalent for grating shall be as specified in the contract documents as applicable. Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 9 . Fabricator shall comply with all safety requirements specified in the contract documents.2 All grating shall be fabricated in accordance with PIP S S Details 1 through 10 of this Practice.3 4.3. Grating shall be fabricated in accordance with Federal Standards and Instructions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).4 4.1.3 4. 4. Requirements 4.3.1. materials. Materials 4. 4.2 4.2. The purchaser may be the owner or the owner’s authorized agent.2.1 General 4.2. with plain 3/16-inch x 1-1/4-inch bearing bars on 1-3/16-inch spacing center-to-center with cross bars on 4-inch spacing center-to-center. the fabricator shall provide a minimum of 5% extra quantity of fastener assemblies.1.1 4. 4. In addition. the materials for grating shall be in accordance with PIP S S . Unless otherwise specified. including any additional requirements by state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the grating platform is to be erected.COMPLETE REVISION November 2006 PIP STF05530 Grating Fabrication Details fabricator: The party responsible for furnishing fabricated structural and miscellaneous steel purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the fabricator.2 Unless otherwise specified. The fabricator shall provide a minimum of two fastener assemblies per support beam per panel. The metric equivalents for bars and plates used for banding and toe plate banding shall be as specified in contract documents as applicable. Fastener assemblies shall be as specified in the contract documents.3 Fabrication 4. steel grating shall be rectangular welded type. and The location and limits of grating and the direction of the span of grating bearing bars shall be in accordance with the contract documents. with a minimum of four fastener assemblies per panel.1 4. and supervision shall be provided and all operations necessary for the fabrication of grating platforms shall be performed in accordance with the contract documents. Banding and toe plate banding shall be steel in accordance with AS M A A M or AS M A A M.4 4. labor.

8 4.3. Clearance allowances shall be provided for fitting grating panels together. for penetrations.9 Page 4 of 9 Process Industry Practices .. stops shall be provided at each side of the panel ends as shown in Detail 7. the weight of each removable fabricated grating section shall not exceed 350 pounds (160 kgf). Openings and cutouts in grating panels for piping. for toe plates.4 4.3 At joints in the grating floor system. 4.3. Grating joints shall be permitted only at supports.3. Where butting grating panel ends occur. Grating shall have 1-inch (25-mm) minimum bearing on supporting steel.3.3.3. and equipment shall be banded as indicated on the following details and the contract documents. cross sections of bearing bars for grating panels shall be aligned with cross sections of abutting panels to maintain spacing symmetry. structural members.7 4. etc.PIP STF05530 Grating Fabrication Details COMPLETE REVISION November 2006 4. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.3.6 4.5 4. conduit. Edges of removable grating panels shall be banded. edges of grating panels other than removable panels need not be banded. and shall be in accordance with Details in this practice and the contract documents. If grating areas are shown as removable in the contract documents.

Toe Plate Banding at Openings for Equipment Detail 7 .Typical Clearances at Railing .Grating Opening at Base Plate Detail 3 .Toe Plate Banding at Opening for Pipe Support Detail 6 .Typical Grating Panel Layout Detail 8 .Circular Openings Detail 5 .Grating Opening at Corner Column Detail 4 .Typical Clearances at Perimeter of Floors Detail 10 .Grating Opening at Interior Column Detail 2 .Drawings Detail 1 .Typical Grating Panel Fastener Arrangement Detail 9 .

This page is intentionally left blank. .

.

.

.

.

.

COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification .

this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. overlays. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. or standards organizations. addenda. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). This Practice is subject to revision at any time. Texas 78759. administrative. Construction Industry Institute. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations. application. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. contractors. Austin. Changes. The University of Texas at Austin. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. PRINTING HISTORY December 1995 July 2001 May 2007 Issued Complete Revision Complete Revision Not printed with State funds . such laws or regulations must be followed. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500). The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade.

.. 2 2.... 2 1... Definitions ....Supplier Data Requirements Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 15 ..2 Government Regulations............................................................... 3 4.................. 7 4... Execution .......... Materials ..................... Requirements......2.................. 14 Tables Table 1 ..........................................1 General ................ 4 4........... 2 1..1 Industry Codes and Standards ....... 2 3.3. 8 4............................... 4 4...........2 Scope.. 3 2...Tolerances for Embedments Table 2 ...... Introduction................. References ................4 Loading of Self-Supporting Members..............................................................Maximum Sizes of Aggregate Table 3 ..................1 Purpose ....COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification Table of Contents 1.............................. 2 2..............

mixing.1 . Short titles are used herein where appropriate. 2.Standard ractice for Selectin eavywei ht and Mass Concrete – ACI 211.2R .Specifications for Structural Concrete – ACI 302.uide for Concrete loor and Slab Construction – ACI 304R .1R .Standard Specification for Cold – ACI 308R .uide to Curin Concrete – ACI 347R .Standard ractice for Selectin i htwei ht Concrete roportions for Normal roportions for Structural – ACI 301-05 . References Applicable parts of the following Practices. except as otherwise noted. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used.Cold Mi in ransportin and lacin – ACI 304.1 Industry Codes and Standards American Concrete Institute (ACI) – ACI 117 . placing. testing.uide to Sealin Joints in Concrete Structures – ACI SP-66 .lacin Concrete by umpin Methods eather Concretin eather Concretin eather Concretin – ACI 306.uide for Measurin Concrete – ACI 305R . Specifications for Structural Concrete.PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 1.2 Scope This Practice describes the technical requirements for furnishing and installing materials and for proportioning.1 Purpose This Practice provides requirements for cast-in-place concrete construction. and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. and curing of plain and reinforced concrete.1 .2 .CI Detailin Manual Page 2 of 15 Process Industry Practices . 2. This Practice supplements ACI 301-05. 1. industry codes and standards.uide to ormwor for Concrete – ACI 504R . Introduction 1.Standard Specifications for olerances for Concrete Construction and Materials – ACI 211.ot – ACI 306R .

Section Certification of Ready Mi ed Concrete roduction acilities lant Certification Chec ist Government Regulations U. and labor for the installation of the concrete in accordance with the contract documents.S. quality. and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the constructor. supervision.2 uality Control Manual . and data sheets. and performance of the civil works. materials. either by incorporation or reference. studies.Standard est Method for en th Chan e of ydraulic Cement Mortars posed to Sulfate Solution National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA) – 2. and appurtenances described in the contract documents.Standard Specification for Concrete re ates – ASTM C94/C94M . Department of Labor. practices.Standard Specification for Coal ly sh and Raw or Calcined Natural o olan for se in Concrete – ASTM C1012 .Standard Specification for Steel Reinforcement lain for Concrete elded ire – ASTM A615/A615M . including codes. contract documents Any and all documents. and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents. Unless otherwise noted.Standard Specification for Deformed and lain Carbon Steel ars for Concrete Reinforcement – ASTM C33 . that the purchaser or engineer of record has transmitted or otherwise communicated. structure. tools.COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification ASTM International (ASTM) – ASTM A185/A185M . The engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the work is to be constructed. specifications. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) – OSHA 29 CFR 1926 . en ineer of record Purchaser’s authorized representative with overall authority and responsibility for the engineering design.Standard Specification for Ready Mi ed Concrete – ASTM C150 . Definitions constructor The party responsible for supplying the materials. foundations. sketches. the term constructor shall apply also to the constructor’s subcontractor(s) and vendor(s). equipment.Standard Specification for ortland Cement – ASTM C618 . design drawings.Safety and ealth Re ulations for Construction 3. Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 15 .

or other legal agreement over the site facility structure or pro ect wherein what is to be provided or installed will be used. ACI 211. The purchaser may be the owner or the owner’s authorized agent.1. purchaser The party who awards the contract to the constructor. 4.1.2 . The following ACI documents are acceptable practices and may be helpful in meeting requirements of this Practice and CI 01: a. Page 4 of 15 Process Industry Practices . or other contract documents shall be brought to the attention of the purchaser for resolution.1 Concrete supply and construction shall be in accordance with all requirements of CI 01 05. eather Concretin ACI 308R .Standard ractice for Selectin Structural i htwei ht Concrete roportions for Normal roportions for 4.4 Requirements of state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the concrete is to be placed shall apply. Requirements 4. Possibly include shop drawings to assist in proper application.1. the design drawings. ACI 211. supplier The party responsible for supplying concrete materials in accordance with the contract documents. Have standard codes. Any conflicts or inconsistencies between this Practice. ACI 304. ACI 302.1 General 4. ACI 306R . Be manufactured in a controlled process b. specifications.Cold f. except as modified or supplemented in this Practice or by the contract documents. owner The party who has authority through ownership.3 4.1R .uide for Concrete loor and Slab Construction d.1 . tests c. ACI 347R.2R .uide to ormwor for Concrete h. installation and/or use Unless otherwise noted.lacin Concrete by umpin Methods e.1.uide to Sealin Joints in Concrete Structures 4. lease. ACI 504R .PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 manufacturer The party who produces and warrants the performance of the products materials and or items provided in accordance with the contract documents.2 c.Standard ractice for Selectin eavywei ht and Mass Concrete b. The products materials and or items shall: a.uide to Curin Concrete g. the term manufacturer shall apply also to the manufacturer’s subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s).

c. 4.5 Quality Control 4.4.5. d.1.5.5.5. at the place of preparation of materials. temperature. 4.1. or air content indicate nonconformance with the contract documents. The rate of sampling shall be in accordance with CI 01 and the following: a. obtain one sample at the beginning of each day of concreting work.1.COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification 4.3 The purchaser shall have the right to make inspections at any time at the source of supply of materials. For paving and slabs on grade.5 For each concrete sample obtained.1 A written quality control program and inspection procedures document shall be submitted to the purchaser for approval.5. at the mixing plant if ready mixed concrete is used. and during execution of all concrete work. For all other concrete.a. except if placing a number of items each smaller than 15 cubic yards (11 cubic meters) (3) One sample minimum per 15 cubic yards (11 cubic meters) if placing a number of items each smaller than 15 cubic yards (11 cubic meters) b.2 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.1. samples shall be obtained in accordance with the following requirements: (1) One sample minimum per 100 cubic yards (76 cubic meters) of concrete (2) One sample minimum for each structure or foundation. Additional samples shall be obtained if observations of tests for slump. For underground pipe or electrical encasements and fireproofing. the following tests shall be conducted in accordance with CI 01: a. These documents shall provide details of how compliance with the requirements of this Practice and contract documents shall be achieved. 4. For structures and foundations.1. e.1. the purchaser shall be responsible for furnishing a testing agency to act as the “owner’s testing agency” as defined by CI 01. obtain one sample per 50 cubic yards (38 cubic meters) of concrete. obtain samples in accordance with Section 4.1.5. Strength tests b. 4.4 Samples for testing shall be obtained in accordance with CI 01. Slump Process Industry Practices Page 5 of 15 .

1 Before the start of work. Name of inspector making cylinders and cylinder number 4. but not be limited to. Specified strength (f c) c. and time of day concrete was poured g. Proportions of concrete mix or mix identification e. 4.1. ready mixed concrete suppliers shall be certified in accordance with one of the following: a. concrete quality assurance test reports shall be provided to the purchaser weekly.5.5. the following: a. Air content 4. time of day concrete was batched. 4.6 Submittals 4.1.1. as a minimum.6 Test cylinder sets shall be dated and numbered consecutively.2 If required by the contract documents.5.PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 c. air and concrete temperatures at time of pour. shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and approval.1. Certification from the State Department of Transportation from the state of the project site location The certifications shall be current for the duration of the concrete supply. Certification by holding a current NRMCA Certificate of Conformance for Concrete Production Facilities b. Date poured d. 7. Air content h.7 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.6. Certification from an independent testing agency stating conformance with NRMCA Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities c. Slump.1. Location of concrete on the job and associated drawing numbers and structure/foundation identification b.1. Data in the test report shall include.6.and 28-day compressive strength f.8 Where concrete is to be placed in the United States of America. Temperature d. additional documentation in accordance with the requirements of CI 01 which is not listed in Table 3 shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and approval. documentation in accordance with the requirements of CI 01 which is listed in Table 3. Page 6 of 15 Process Industry Practices . 4.

2. Process Industry Practices Page 7 of 15 .1. 4.2 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. the mix design shall be tested in accordance with S M C1012 to verify sulfate resistance.2.2.1.4 Aggregate 4.2 Only one brand of cement shall be used. 4.2. 4.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.3 Calcium chloride and admixtures containing soluble chlorides shall not be permitted.1 Aggregate shall be in accordance with S M C 4. except air entrainment admixtures.2. Type I or Type II.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.2.2 Aggregate shall be obtained from a single source. 4.3.3 Admixtures 4. all reinforcing shall be uncoated.2. site specific requirements of the purchaser.2. 4.2 Materials shall be in accordance with applicable local volatile organic compound regulations. Materials 4. fly ash may be used in accordance with CI 01 and shall conform to S M C 1 . materials that are not in accordance with this Practice or the contract documents shall not be permitted.COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification 4.2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. state. 4. If Class C fly ash is used in a moderately to extremely aggressive sulfate environment. or local safety requirements.2.3. Portland cement shall be in accordance with S M C150.2. 4.2 Only one manufacturer for each admixture shall be used.7 Safety The work shall be in accordance with all applicable national. 4.2. 4.2.1 General 4.2. Note Class C fly ash which contains relatively hi h levels of amorphous calcium aluminate may ma e more calcium hydro ide available for reaction with sulfates thus contributin to concrete deterioration 4.1 All admixtures.2. grade 60.3.2.2. shall require the engineer of record’s authorization for use.5. 4.4.2.5.1. Class C or Class F.2. reinforcing bars shall be deformed billet steel in accordance with S M 15 15M. and all safety requirements specified in the contract documents.2 Cementitious Materials 4.2.1 Unless authorized in writing by the purchaser.5 Reinforcement 4.2.4.

4 Tie wire shall be black annealed wire. 4. ice. Alternately. and protection.1 Water used for mixing water.3 Welded wire fabric shall be plain wire fabric and in accordance with ASTM A185/A185M.2 Form-release agents shall not be applied if concrete surfaces shall receive special finishes or where the agent may affect applied coverings. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.3.2. measuring. 4.g. 4.2.3. 4.5.7 Accessories All accessories shall be provided in accordance with the contract documents. 4. Section 2.3. mixing.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. inside surfaces of untreated formwork shall be soaked with clean water and kept moist before placing concrete. and if curing starts immediately.6.. curing. 4.2. or any other function relating to placement of concrete shall be potable. b.1 General Storage. or sides of beams). transporting. 3/4-inch (20-millimeter) chamfer strips shall be provided at all corners on permanently exposed surfaces. 4.2.3 Execution 4.3. for determining strength of concrete for removal of formwork.2 Formwork 4.6 Water 4.2 Other water may be used if tested for suitability in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. and placing of concrete materials shall follow the methods and means outlined in ACI 304R and comply with manufacturer’s recommendation for handling. For structures for which the forms do not provide vertical support (e.6.2. the forms may be removed 48 hours after completion of placement if the concrete is sufficiently hard to prevent damage by form removal.3. storage. handling.6. 4.PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 4.3. walls. piers.2.4.2.3 Form removal shall be in accordance with ACI 301 and the following: a.3 Wash water from mixer washout operations shall not be used as mixing water. footings.2. Refer to ACI 301-05. forms for self-supporting members may be removed if the concrete strength is at least 80 percent of the specified 28-day strength. 16 gage minimum. 4.2. Page 8 of 15 Process Industry Practices .2.5. columns.

4. 4.. Control joints shall be cut in accordance with the saw manufacturer’s written recommendations.2. 4.3. before placing adjoining concrete. Section 4. The structure below this level may be placed against earth. 4.4 Form accessories that remain embedded in the concrete (e.g. walls.5 Unless specified otherwise in the contract documents. 4.3.g. a. but free of standing water.5 Dowels at expansion joints shall be properly aligned to prevent any restraint on expansion movement at the joint. and equipment foundations).3. Unless otherwise approved by the purchaser.3. manholes. Any variation from the location specified shall be approved by the purchaser..2.COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification c.3. Unless otherwise approved by the engineer of record. 4.3 Joints 4.3. Isolation joints shall be located in accordance with the contract documents.7 All side and bottom surfaces of structures that will be exposed shall be formed. 4. Tolerances for concrete surfaces not specifically mentioned in ACI 11 shall be in accordance with ACI 11 .3 Control joints in slab toppings shall be located directly above and in line with the control joints in the underlying concrete slab. formed concrete surfaces shall be constructed in accordance with the tolerances shown in ACI 11 .3. 4. forms shall not be left permanently in place. b. catch basins.6 The surface of joints shall be cleaned of scale and laitance and thoroughly wetted. Sawing sequence shall be based on pour time and size of slab.1 All joints shall be located and constructed in accordance with the contract documents. Process Industry Practices Page 9 of 15 .6 Formwork for column and wall shall be provided with adequate cleanout openings to permit inspection and easy cleaning after reinforcement has been placed.3.3.2.3.3.3. and within 12 hours after concrete placement.3. 4.3. 4. vertical surfaces of subgrade structures and pavements shall be formed at least to a depth of 300 mm (12 inches) below grade. ties and hangers) shall be a commercially manufactured type.3.2. columns.3.4 Isolation joints shall be placed where the pavement adjoins vertical surfaces (e.3.2 Control joints to be cut with a saw shall be cut as soon as the concrete is hard enough to prevent surface raveling and aggregate dislodging.

Each bundle of stock-length straight bars shall be tagged to indicate bar quantity. 5. Embedded aluminum items shall not be permitted. length. Each bundle of fabricated bars shall be tagged. Unless otherwise approved by the engineer of record.3.PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 4.5. location. anchors.. mark. welded or mechanical splices shall not be permitted.3. fabricated. The term “bolt group” used in Table 1 is defined as the set of anchor bolts for a single fabricated steel shipping piece. 2.5.5. sleeves. Reinforcement placing drawings and bending schedules shall be prepared in accordance with ACI S . Anchor bolts. bar quantity. grade. and design drawing number. and bar length. bar size.2 Installation 1. Welding of these items to the reinforcing bars shall not be permitted. and bending diagrams for reinforcing bars. concrete. Fabrication drawings shall indicate the related PO number. 6. grade. Reinforcing bars shall be spliced in accordance with the design drawings only. nosing. 3. 4. release number. and located as shown on the drawings only. and debris. Anchor bolt threads shall be protected from damage and kept free of concrete.3 Tolerances Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. inserts. 4. Page 10 of 15 Process Industry Practices . 4. mark number. release number.1 Detailing and Fabrication 1. grade. curb and seat angles. 4. Fabrication tolerances shall comply with the requirements of ACI 117. and other embedded items shall be installed before placing concrete. Anchor bolt sleeves shall be capped or plugged to keep out water. or a single piece of equipment or skid. 7. Splices in reinforcement shall be detailed.3. The tags shall indicate drawing number. and bar size. 4. Reinforcement shall be tagged with weather-resistant metal tags.5 Reinforcing and Embedments 4. 5.3.3. 3. embedments shall be installed in accordance with the tolerances shown in Table 1. drains. size.4 Waterstops Waterstops shall be installed in accordance with the contract documents and the manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Drawings and schedules shall show number.

5 for all other concrete. maximum water-soluble chloride ion concentrations in hardened concrete shall be 0. for moderate exposure. the maximum size of coarse aggregate in concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 301 and shall not be greater than the sizes shown in Table 2.30% by weight of cement.” 4. in accordance with ACI 301-05.6. Table 4.4 for liquid-retaining (hydraulic) structures and 0.3.3.2.2.3.2.6 Proportioning and Mixing 4.6.2 If high early-strength concrete is specified.3. Table 4.6 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 4.3.6. for “Other reinforced concrete construction. 4. f c. air content at the point of delivery shall be in accordance with ACI 301-05.7 Unless otherwise directed by the engineer of record. Process Industry Practices Page 11 of 15 . all admixtures shall be added at the batch plant. the maximum water-cementitious materials ratio shall be 0.6. 4.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.6.3. shall be in accordance with the contract documents. compressive strength shall be 7-day strength. – 0. Table 2 – Maximum Sizes of Aggregate Type of Construction Slabs and walls less than 8 inches thick Lightweight concrete Liquid retaining structures Underground pipe or electrical encasements Structures (beam and column construction) Fireproofing or structural steel encasements All other items Maximum Size 3/4 inch (20 mm) 3/4 inch (20mm) 3/4 inch (20 mm) 3/4 inch (20 mm) 3/4 inch (20 mm) 3/8 inch (10 mm) 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) 4.6.2.00 inch (0 mm) + or – 1/4 inch (6 mm) + or – 1/8 inch (3 mm) + or – 1/4 inch (6 mm) 1/8 inch in 3 feet (4 mm in 1 meter) + or – 1/4 inch (6 mm) horizontal and + or – 1/32 inch (1 mm) vertical 4.5 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.1 The minimum 28-day compressive strength.3.COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification Table 1 – Tolerances for Embedments Measurement Anchor bolt projection Center of bolt group Center to center of any two anchor bolts within a bolt group Center to center between bolt groups Anchor bolt plumbness Plate insert horizontal and vertical location Tolerance + 1/4 inch (6 mm).4 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 4.6.3.4.6.

4.8 Curing and Protection 4.9 Concrete envelopes for underground instrument air-line ducts shall have a specified 28 day compressive strength of 2.3. 4.7.3.3. 4. 4.000 psi (14 MPa) and be colored red by adding 10 pounds of red oxide powder per cubic yard (6 kilograms per cubic meter) of concrete unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.7.7.9 Discharge of the concrete shall be completed within 45 minutes after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates or the introduction of the cement to the aggregates. job-mixed concrete shall not be permitted.6 Materials and equipment for protection and curing shall be operational at the placement site before placement begins.1 Inspection and authorization shall be obtained from the purchaser before placing concrete.3. Section 5.8 Concrete envelopes for underground electrical ducts and cover slabs for direct-buried cables shall have a specified 28 day compressive strength of 2.7.4 Retempering or addition of water after concrete is first mixed shall not be permitted. 4. 4.10 Unless otherwise approved by the purchaser.3. concrete shall be cured and protected in accordance with ACI 301-05.000 psi (14 MPa) and be colored yellow by adding 10 pounds of yellow oxide powder per cubic yard (6 kilograms per cubic meter) of concrete unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.3.6.3.3. 4. This time may be extended up to 90 minutes with approval of the engineer of record.7. Page 12 of 15 Process Industry Practices .6.3.5 The addition of ice at the construction site shall be permitted only if it has been considered in the mix design.7.3.3. 4.6.3.8. The concrete manufacturer shall provide written instructions on the required amount of ice and the mixing procedure.PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 4.8 The interval between concrete deliveries shall be such that no more than 20 minutes interruption elapse during placement of a single foundation or slab.7 Slabs shall be placed in alternating strips.7 Placing Concrete 4. 4.3. 4.3. unless approved by the engineer of record.7.7.3.6. 4.3 Concrete that has achieved initial set or has been contaminated by foreign matter shall not be deposited in the structure.1 Unless otherwise specified in this Practice or in the contract documents.7.2 Concrete delivery tickets shall be maintained as a record for ready mixed concrete.3. 4.

4. and exterior slabs shall be finished with a broom or belt finish in accordance with the conventional straightedged tolerance requirements of ACI 11 . 4. 4. 3. ramps.10.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.2 The engineer of record shall be notified before proceeding with repair if the defect is either of the following sizes: a. or additional concrete.3. 4.9.3.8. 4.3. sprinkling.3. epoxy toppings.3 Interior floor slabs shall be finished with a trowel finish in accordance with the conventional flat tolerance requirements of ACI 11 . area paving.3. 2. tie holes.2 Equipment bases shall be finished with a floated finish.9. Stairs.3.10 Repair of Surface Defects 4. 4. or wet sand shall not be permitted. and other concrete surface defects shall be repaired promptly after form removal at a time and in a manner that shall not delay.g. 4. sprayed water.3.1 Unless otherwise specified or permitted by the engineer of record.4 Hydraulic (Liquid-Tight) Structures Any structure designated as a hydraulic structure in the contract documents shall comply with the following: 1.3.9 Surface Finishing and Tolerances 4.9. tiles.6.3.10. Hydraulic structures shall be cured by a wet-cure procedure only (e. However. honeycombs.3.8. 4.4.000 square mm). Wall forms shall be loosened and water continually sprinkled between the wall and forms. or impair the proper curing of the fresh concrete. ponding. for the preservation of moisture. 4. Curing shall occur for a minimum of 14 days.3.. Process Industry Practices Page 13 of 15 . interfere with. liquid membrane curing compounds shall not be used on surfaces that shall receive bonded treatments.4 Roads.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. steps.8. for interior concrete slabs. Section 5. the surface finish and correlating tolerance requirements shall be in accordance with ACI 301.COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification 4.9.3. paint or other adhered finishes. Depth is greater than 3 inches (75 mm) at the maximum point and surface area is greater than 150 square inches (100. or a moisture-retaining fabric). use of ponding. Moist wood forms in contact with concrete shall not be considered as curing for hydraulic structures.2 Concrete not in contact with forms may utilize any of the methods indicated in ACI 301-05. and walks shall be finished with a broom finish.

is expected to cause a rate of evaporation equal to or greater than 0.2 pounds per square foot per hour (9.5 Critical slab areas.3. applies. 4. 4. 4. 4.3. the requirements of ACI 30 1 shall be followed for concrete supply and construction.3 Prepackaged grouts and patching compounds or a patching mortar similar to the concrete mix without coarse aggregate may be used with approval from the engineer of record.3.10.11.6 newtons per square meter per hour).10.8.3. identified in the contract documents shall be replaced if out-of-tolerance. no superimposed load shall be applied to self-supporting members before the 28-day verification of the specified strength. Page 14 of 15 Process Industry Practices .11 Hot and Cold Weather Concreting 4. A demolition and replacement plan for the slab areas shall be submitted to the engineer of record for review and approval before proceeding. humidity.4 Out-of-tolerance slabs shall be repaired by grinding down high points and/or raising low points by using a specified underlayment compound or repair topping if the areas are exposed.3. 4.3.2 If the minimum temperature criteria of ACI 301-05. and wind velocity as shown in ACI 305 . unless the specified 28-day strength has been verified by fieldcured cylinders. Depth is greater than 1/4 the thickness of the member and greater than 6 inches (150 mm) in any other direction. 4.2.PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 b.4 Loading of Self-Supporting Members Unless otherwise approved by the engineer of record. The color shall match the surrounding area. Section 4.3. 4.1 If the combination of temperature.10.2.12 Architectural and Prestressed Concrete Architectural and prestressed concrete requirements that are in addition to ACI 301 and this Practice shall be in accordance with the contract documents. Figure 2. the recommendations of ACI 305 shall be followed for concrete supply and construction.11.5.1.

Sources. Certifications and Installation Instructions Proposed Curing Methods Reinforcing Bending Schedule and Placing Drawings Certified Mill Test Reports for each bar size and heat number Epoxy Coating Inspection Reports Delivery Ticket Compression Test Reports Compression Breaks 500 psi (3500 KPa) or more below required Water Testing Reports X X 7 days X X X X X X X X X For Record Weekly When Required After Before With RFQ Notice to Fabrication Submittal Proceed X X X X X X X X X If applicable Remarks X X X X 7 days If requested X X X X X If applicable With delivery X Same day submittal 10 days If applicable X Process Industry Practices Page 15 of 15 . and Certifications Manufacturer Spec's.COMPLETE REVISION May 2007 PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification Table 3 – Supplier Data Requirements Type of Submittal For Approval Supplier's QA Program Batch Plant and Truck Mixer Certification Mix Designs Trial Batch Qualification Test Results Cement Certifications Mineral Additive Certifications Fine and Coarse Aggregate Certifications Admixture Certifications Material Suppliers.

TECHNICAL CORRECTION June 2004 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STF05521 Details for Angle Railings for Walking and Working Surfaces .

pip. such laws or regulations must be followed. PRINTING HISTORY April 1999 Issued May 2001 Technical Correction Not printed with State funds October 2003 June 2004 Complete Revision Technical Correction . This Practice will be revised. reaffirmed. Changes. or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. administrative. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at www. this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users.org. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Texas 78759. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. application. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations. The University of Texas at Austin. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. Austin. overlays. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). Construction Industry Institute. or standards organizations. or withdrawn.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. PIP will not consider requests for interpretations (inquiries) for this Practice. contractors. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. addenda. This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will be reviewed every 5 years. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500).

.....................1 Process Industry Practices......................... 13 Step Through Ladder Details.......... 11 Post Connections to Concrete....................................................................... 9 Elevation ...................... 6 Section D-D ....................... 8 Section G-G ................................. 7 Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 14 .......Typical Railing ... 11 Detail 3.................... 5 Section B-B....................... 9 Section G-G (Alternate) . 14 2....... 7 Toe Plate Splice Detail ................................................... 7 Intermediate Rail Splice Detail ............................................ 2 1...... References ........... 12 Pipe Handrail Attachment to Wall Details 13 Wall-Mounted Handrail ......................................2 Industry Codes and Standards....................... 8 Section J-J ................................................ Introduction..... 2 Detail 1....... 4 Elevation A-A ...................... 6 Top Rail Splice Detail ...Removable Railing Type I . 11 Detail 4.................................................... 6 Elevation F-F ... 5 Section C-C ........................... 9 Section H-H (Alternate) ........................... 6 Elevation E-E ......................TECHNICAL CORRECTION May 2004 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STF05521 Details for Angle Railings for Walking and Working Surfaces Table of Contents 1............................................................................... 2 2................................................................... 2 3..................................................Typical Post Location . 2 2..... 3 List of Details Plan ..................................... Requirements............................................... 12 Detail 5............................................. 2 1....................................................1 Purpose ...........................2 Scope............... 8 Detail 2..... 7 Post Connections to Structural Steel............................................................................... 10 Elevation Removable Railing Type II................................................................ 8 Railing Termination at Columns .............. 8 Section H-H . 12 Detail 6............ 3 4............ 4 Elevation ....... Definitions ................

1 Purpose This Practice provides requirements for designers.2 Industry Codes and Standards American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) – Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings – Metric Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings – Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for process facilities.Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs. Introduction 1. 2.Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes Page 2 of 14 Process Industry Practices .Erection of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification 2. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used. they may not meet the requirements of local or national building codes. fabricators.2 Scope This Practice provides fabrication and installation details for standard angle railing for walking and working surfaces and for stair railing or handrail for egress stairs.Standard Specification for Pipe.Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification – PIP STS05130 .S. References Applicable requirements in the following PIP Practices. Although the details in this Practice are intended to meet U. Welded and Seamless – ASTM A307 . Allowable Stress Design (ASD) and Plastic Design American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) – ASTM A36 . and government regulations shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. Steel. 60000 PSI Tensile Strength – ASTM A500 .1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP STF05501 .PIP STF05521 Details for Angle Railings for Walking and Working Surfaces TECHNICAL CORRECTION June 2004 1. 2.Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel – ASTM A53 . Black and Hot-Dipped. and installers of angle railing. Zinc-Coated. Short titles will be used herein when appropriate. 1. codes and standards. except as otherwise noted.Fixed Ladders and Cages Details PIP STS05120 .

Galvanizing shall be done after fabrication and in accordance with PIP STS05120. platform. provide the minimum fillet as shown in Table J2. wall opening. Wall-mounted handrail shall be carbon steel. The minimum clearance between handrail or the top rail of stair railing/standard railing and any obstruction shall be 3 inches (75 mm). Metric LRFD. (1. All structural steel shall be ASTM A36 unless otherwise noted.4 of the AISC LRFD.4 4. If the size of fillet weld is not shown on the drawings.9-inches (48-mm) O. Subpart D.1 Refer to project design documents for the location. Field damage to coating shall be repaired with materials equivalent to original coating according to PIP STS05130. or runway to prevent falls of persons 4.D. or ASD Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. Requirements 4. or pipe conforming to ASTM A500 Grade B or ASTM A53 Grade B. orientation.3 4. Refer to page 14 of this Practice. 4. ramp. and arrangement of railing for regular operational use.9 Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 14 . stair railing: A vertical barrier erected along exposed sides of a stairway to prevent falls of persons standard railing: A vertical barrier erected along exposed edges of a floor opening.5 4.7 4. All bolts for railing connections shall be 5/8-inch (16-mm) diameter and in accordance with ASTM A307 unless otherwise noted. 1. All joints and welds in the top rail shall be finished smooth.2 4. Railing that meets the requirements of this Practice is designed to withstand a concentrated load of 200 pounds (890 N) applied in any direction at any point along the top rail. Railing systems shall be surfaced in a manner to prevent injury from punctures or lacerations and clothing snags. and any changes to the requirements of this Practice.5 inches [38 mm] nominal diameter). round structural tubing.8 4. special fabrication details. Definitions The following definitions from OSHA 1910.TECHNICAL CORRECTION June 2004 PIP STF05521 Details for Angle Railings for Walking and Working Surfaces 3. Railing assemblies shall be coated after fabrication in accordance with the design drawings and specifications governing the project. shall apply to this Practice: handrail: A single bar or pipe supported on brackets from a wall or partition to provide a continuous handhold for persons using a stair. standard weight.6 4. Railing shall be welded construction except as shown in design drawings and/or in the attached details. in accordance with OSHA requirements.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Paint System 02 970086 T905E-02A-0. June 2007 Modified PIP STS05120.2013-03-08 UOP Technical Requisition Painting Page 1 of 1 970086 R905F-1 1.Paint System 15 11.3. 6.0403. Technical Data Sheet . Units. Technical Data Sheet – Structural Steel Painting and Galvanizing 14. Technical Data Sheet . Technical Data Sheet . Painting selection Painting selection and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with the following documents: 1. June 2002 970086 S905F-0. 3. Surface Facilities Coating Base Anti Corrosive Protection System NRF-009-PEMEX-2004. 3. PEMEX documents shall take precedence over PIP document. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 970086 T905FS-0. of the following documents: 1. Colours and Labels for Facilities and Transport Vehicles Identification Modified PIP CTSE1000. Technical Data Sheet . 4. 2. NRF-053-PEMEX-2006. UOP Specification—Documents for Custom-Designed Goods and Services 970086 S140V-0. PEMEX. 9. 970086 T905E-16-0.Paint System 02A 10. Product Identification Transported Though Pipe or Contained in Storage Tanks NOM-026-STPS-2008. UOP Specification—Electronic Documentation Submittal 3. Application of External Coatings. . 970086 V905F-0. Technical Data Sheet . 5. 7. UOP Specification – Paint Application 970086 T905E-02-0.01:2007 CN. 970086 T905E-15-0. 970086 T905E-17-0. HSE Colors and Signs of Pipe Transporting Fluids Risk Identification P. 2. Other Painting selection and related goods and services shall comply with the most recent version. Conflicts In case of conflicts among the documents above. except as otherwise noted.Paint System 17 13. and Documents 970086 S140C-0. Documentation Data Sheet—Painting Application 2. Mexican Official Standard. Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification. UOP Specification—Language. 970086 S140A-0.Paint System 16 12. 8.

EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 Process Industry Practices Coatings PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings .

such laws or regulations must be followed. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. addenda. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. contractors. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at www. PIP will not consider requests for interpretations (inquiries) for this Practice. Changes. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. reaffirmed. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements.pip. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. overlays. or standards organizations. Austin. application. PRINTING HISTORY April 1999 Issued February 2005 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds July 2005 Technical Correction February 2006 Editorial Revision June 2007 Editorial Revision . this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations. This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will be reviewed every 5 years.org.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. The University of Texas at Austin. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). or withdrawn. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. Texas 78759. This Practice will be revised. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500). or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. Construction Industry Institute. administrative.

and Storage 16 Data Forms CTSE1000-D1 – Documentation Requirements Sheet The following data forms shall be part of this Practice only if indicated on the purchaser’s completed Documentation Requirements Sheet..... CTSE1000-D2 – Color Selection Sheet CTSE1000-D101 ..... 4 4. 3 3........ 3...1 Industry Codes and Standards ............. Coating System No......... 3 1... 5 4.....External Coating Systems...... Coating System No........ 7....2 4.............. 5 Procedures ...5 4.. Definitions ............................2 Scope... Introduction.................... Coal Tar Epoxy (2 Coats) TE/TE CTSE1000-D108 – External Coating Systems. 1............. Coating System No...... Coating System No.4 4.6 General .. Coating System No. 8. 12 Shipping..... 5. Epoxy Phenolic EP CTSE1000-D105 – External Coating Systems....... Inorganic Zinc/Silicone Acrylic (2 Coats) IZ/SA/SA 2....... 4...... Epoxy Polyamide/Urethane EC/UR CTSE1000-D107 – External Coating Systems...... 3 1............................1 4.................. 3 2...... 2.... 9.................. 7 Application ..... Epoxy Phenolic (3 Coats) EP/EP/EP CTSE1000-D106 – External Coating Systems.... Inorganic Zinc/Water-Borne Acrylic IZ/WA CTSE1000-D109 – External Coating Systems........... 4 CTSE1000-D102 ...................... Coating System No........ 10.. Coating System No... Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy Polyamide IZ/EC CTSE1000-D103 ..... Requirements.... 3 2.. References .. Coating System No... Epoxy Polyamide (3 Coats) EC/EC/EC CTSE1000-D104 – External Coating Systems......EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 Process Industry Practices Coatings PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings Table of Contents 1...... Handling.................. Coating System No.............. 6 Surface Preparation............ 9 Inspection ...3 4...... 6.....1 Purpose ........... Coating System No........2 Other References .. Inorganic Zinc IZ Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 16 ... Alkyd (3 Coats) OA/OA/OA CTSE1000-D110 – External Coating Systems.......External Coating Systems...External Coating Systems...

15. 17. Inorganic Zinc/Heat-Cured Silicone (2 Coats) IZ/HS/HS CTSE1000-D115 – External Coating Systems. 23. 18. Polysiloxane (2 Coats) PX/PX CTSE1000-D118 – External Coating Systems. Coating System No. Coating System No. 12. 24. Epoxy Phenolic (2 Coats) EP/EP CTSE1000-D121 – External Coating Systems. Coating System No. Coating System No. Silicone for Stainless Steel (2 Coats) SS/SS CTSE1000-D112 – External Coating Systems. Low Temperature Curing Epoxy (2 Coats) EL/EL CTSE1000-D117 – External Coating Systems. Coating System No. 26. Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy Mastic/Urethane IZ/EM/UR CTSE1000-D116 – External Coating Systems. Epoxy Novalac (2 Coats) EN/EN CTSE1000-D120 – External Coating Systems. 14. Epoxy Mastic for Manufacturer’s Standard EM CTSE1000-D114 – External Coating Systems. Coal Tar Epoxy (1 Coat) TE CTSE1000-D127 – External Coating Systems. Epoxy Mastic/Water-Borne Acrylic EM/WA CTSE1000-D123 – External Coating Systems. 20. 25. Epoxy Mastic/Epoxy Polyamide EM/EC CTSE1000-D124 – External Coating Systems.EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 CTSE1000-D111 – External Coating Systems. 27. Coating System No. Coating System No. 21. Organic Zinc/Urethane OZ/UR CTSE1000-D122 – External Coating Systems. High Build Epoxy (2 Coats)/Urethane EH/EH/UR CTSE1000-D126 – External Coating Systems. Coating System No. 19. Coating System No. Coating System No. Coating System No. Coating System No. 22. Coating System No. Coating System No. 16. 11. Epoxy Mastic/Urethane (2 Coats) EM/UR/UR CTSE1000-D125 – External Coating Systems. Coating System No. Coating System No. Thermal Spray Aluminum TSA CTSE1000-D128 – User-Defined Coating Systems CTSE1000-F – Daily Inspection Report Page 2 of 16 Process Industry Practices . Epoxy Mastic (2 Coats)/Urethane EM/EM/UR CTSE1000-D119 – External Coating Systems. HeatCured Silicone (2 Coats) HS/HS CTSE1000-D113 – External Coating Systems. Coating System No. 13.

and inspection of protective coatings.EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings 1. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used.and Dry-Bulb Temperatures) • Society of Protective Coatings (SSPC) – SSPC-AB 1 – Mineral and Slag Abrasives – SSPC-PA 1 – Shop.1 Industry Codes and Standards • American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) – ASTM D3359 – Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test – ASTM D4285 – Standard Test Methods for Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air – ASTM D4417 – Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel – ASTM D4541 – Standard Test Methods for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers – ASTM E337 – Standard Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a Psychrometer (the Measurement of Wet. except as otherwise noted. industry codes and standards. References Applicable parts of the following Practice. Introduction 1. application. 2. and Maintenance Painting – SSPC-PA 2 – Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages – SSPC-PA Guide 3 – Guide to Safety in Paint Application – SSPC-SP 1 – Solvent Cleaning – SSPC-SP 2 – Hand Tool Cleaning – SSPC-SP 3 – Power Tool Cleaning – SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. 4 – Brush-Off Blast Cleaning – SSPC-SP 11 – Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal – SSPC-VIS 1-89 – Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel (Standard Reference Photographs) Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 16 . Field. 2. 1.2 Scope This Practice describes the general requirements for surface preparation.1 Purpose This Practice provides requirements for the application of industrial external coatings. Short titles will be used herein where appropriate.

Part 3: Hand.Magnetic method – ISO 2360: Non-conductive coatings on non-magnetic electrically conductive basis materials .Surface preparation methods .Part 1: Rust Grades and Preparation Grades of Uncoated Steel Substrates and of Steel Substrates After Overall Removal of Previous Coatings – ISO 8503-5: Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application of Paints and Related Products .and powertool cleaning – ISO 8573: Compressed air – ISO 11126: Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application of Paints and Related Products .Part 5: Replica tape method for the determination of the surface profile – ISO 8504-2: Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products .Amplitude-sensitive eddy current method – ISO 2409: Paints and varnishes .Part 2: Abrasive blastcleaning – ISO 8504-3: Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products .Determination of relative humidity .Measurement of coating thickness .Corrosion Protection of Steel Structures by Protective Paint Systems .Surface Roughness Characteristics of Blast-Cleaned Steel Substrates .Part 7: Execution and Supervision of Paintwork 2.Part 4: Types of Surface and Surface Preparation – ISO 12944-7: Paints and Varnishes .Surface preparation methods . Definitions CS: Carbon and low-alloy steel DFT: Dry film thickness SS: Austenitic stainless steel Page 4 of 16 Process Industry Practices .Cross-cut test – ISO 4624: Paints and varnishes Pull-off test for adhesion – ISO 4677-2: Atmospheres for conditioning and testing .2 Other References • National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) – NIOSH Publication No.Part 2: Whirling psychrometer method – ISO 8501-1: Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application of Paints and Related Products .PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 • INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO) – ISO 2178: Non-magnetic coatings on magnetic substrates .Surface Preparation Methods (10 Parts) – ISO 12944-4: Paints and Varnishes .Visual Assessment of Surface Cleanliness .Measurement of coating thickness .Corrosion Protection of Steel Structures by Protective Paint Systems . 92-102 – NIOSH Alert: Request for Assistance in Preventing Silicosis and Deaths from Sandblasting 3.

application. and local codes and regulations on surface preparation.1. coating application.1 General 4.2 The latest issue of the coating manufacturer’s product data sheets. application instructions.1 Project Scope 4.1.2 Conflicts. 4.3 Surface preparation.1 All conflicts between the referenced documents and this Practice shall be submitted in writing to purchaser for clarification and resolution before proceeding with the coating application. and Substitutions 4. safety. 4.1 Documents required to define the scope of work are listed on purchaser’s data sheet CTSE1000-D1.1.3. Process Industry Practices Page 5 of 16 .2 All exceptions.2.2 If selected on purchaser’s documentation requirements sheet PIP CTSE1000-D1. 4. handling.1.1.1. supplier: Party responsible for furnishing and/or installing the coating system 4.3 Regulations and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) 4.1. data sheets PIP CTSE1000-D101 through CTSE1000-D127 shall be used to define specific requirements for each coating system.EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings nonferrous: Copper. unless otherwise approved by the purchaser. including the recommendations of SSPC-PA Guide 3.3. and substitutions to the requirements specified herein and in referenced documents shall be approved by the purchaser. 4.1.1.1. 4. and MSDS shall be available at the painting site and complied with during painting operations.5 Finish color requirements shall be in accordance with purchaser’s data sheet CTSE1000-D2.1. deviations.1.4 Coating materials used in the same system shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.1. Deviations.2.1. Exceptions. 4.1. state. The purchaser may be the owner or the owner’s authorized agent. storage.1. and environmental requirements. Requirements 4.1. 4.1 Protective coating applications shall comply with all applicable federal. aluminum owner: Party who owns the facility wherein the coating system will be used purchaser: Party who awards the contract to the supplier. 4. and materials shall be in accordance with the purchaser’s external coating system data sheets.

Internal surfaces of valves c.2 Procedures 4.2 Abrasives for use on SS shall be in accordance with SSPC-AB 1 (ISO 11126.3 If hand or power tool cleaning is required on SS and nonferrous metals.2.1. only SS wire brushes that have not been previously used on CS surfaces shall be used.1 All SS and nonferrous metals shall be protected from blasting.2. flange faces. Examples of such applications include: Page 6 of 16 Process Industry Practices . 4. overspray. Inspection point identification markers 4. Nonferrous metals c. Nonmetallic materials such as wood. Galvanized or metallized surfaces d. and coatings intended for CS. sulfur.2.2. natural abrasives (except silica sand) as well as coal furnace slag and fused aluminum oxide) and shall be free of metals. Electrical contact points d.1. halogens. especially coatings containing zinc.5 For items having dual materials of construction. Nameplates and identification tags e. Interior surfaces of piping and equipment b.2 The following surfaces shall not be coated and shall be protected from surface preparation and painting activity in the area: a.2. 4. Insulation jacketing e. tile.2 Precautions for Stainless Steel and Nonferrous Metals 4. and thermoplastics f.2. or metallic pigments that can harmfully affect SS or nonferrous metals. and other machined contact surfaces b.2. Cast iron products such as manhole covers and grating 4. concrete.2.2. 4.2.1 Unless specified otherwise. including the SS to CS weld. brick. Valve stems.2.PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 4. Resilient seal materials g.2.2. coatings containing zinc shall not overlap onto SS or nonferrous metals. 4.1 Surfaces not to be Coated 4.4 Coatings and solvents for use on SS and nonferrous metals shall be free of substances such as chlorides. the following surfaces shall not be coated: a. Glass surfaces of gage glasses and sight glasses f.2. Equipment identification i. Gasket contact surfaces h.

grease.1 All welds shall be relatively smooth. and other foreign matter and shall be kept dry at all times. SS piping within CS skirts c. neither welding nor grinding.3 Surface Preparation 4.3.3. shall be permitted on the pressure-resisting components and welds of pressure vessels and piping after hydrostatic testing. 4. Purchaser shall be notified of such defects for corrective action before proceeding with work. dirt.1.5 Presence of oil shall be checked either by rubbing a clean white cloth on the steel surface or by sprinkling water on the steel surface.2 Grain size shall be suitable for producing the specified anchor profile. 4.3.2 Unless approved in writing by purchaser.4 High-pressure water jetting or steam cleaning may be used to remove oil.2.7 Color-coding and fabrication markings applied directly onto SS and nonferrous metals shall be applied with low-chloride markers. Process Industry Practices Page 7 of 16 . CS saddles and skirts on SS equipment b.3.2. 4.EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings a. 4.3. including cosmetic grinding.3.1. Comment: If oil or grease is present. 4.2.2 Abrasive Blasting 4. flanges. sharp grade of abrasive. 4. 4.6 CS lap joint flanges shall be coated before assembly. and free of weld slag and weld spatter before blasting.2. 4.3.3. CS trunnions on SS piping and equipment g.3 All abrasives shall be free of dust. CS flange rings on SS lap joint flanges 4.1.2. and piping on clad equipment d. without sharp edges. SS nozzles. Cleaning with solvents shall only be permitted if cleaning by other methods defined in SSPC-SP 1 (ISO 12944-4) is not practical.3.1 Abrasive blast cleaning shall be performed with a clean. SS components in CS piping systems f. 4.1.3.2. all visible deposits of oil and grease shall be removed using the methods defined in SSPC-SP 1 (ISO 12944-4).2.1 Preparation for Blasting 4. the water will not spread out but will form beads.3 Before blasting. Miscellaneous CS clips and brackets on SS equipment e.1. and other surface contaminants.

5 Only designed ventilation and containment shall be used to protect personnel.PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 4.3.2. Page 8 of 16 Process Industry Practices . 4.3.2. blowing off with clean dry air. 4. SSPC-VIS 1 (ISO 8501-1) shall be used as a visual standard for confirming the degree of surface cleanliness. 92-102. 4.6 If automatic blasting equipment is used. 4. 4. and scabs shall be removed or repaired after blasting. or vacuum cleaning.2.12 Substrate temperature shall be determined with a surface thermometer.2.2. laminations.3. Refer to NIOSH Publication No. All blast-cleaned surfaces shall be inspected for proper cleaning before painting.3. 4. 4.9 Air compressors shall be equipped with either dryers or aftercoolers to remove entrained moisture from the compressed air.2.3.3.8 Air compressors shall be capable of maintaining 690 kPa (100 psig) minimum at the nozzle.2.14 All visible burrs.11 Dew point temperature shall be determined by sling psychrometer in accordance with ASTM E337 or ISO 4677-2. 4. 4.3.3. 4.10 Abrasive blast cleaning shall not be performed if the ambient or substrate temperature is less than 3°C (5°F) above the dew point temperature.1 4.17 Alternative forms of surface preparation shall not be used without written approval from the purchaser.2. 4.3.7 Air supply compressors shall be equipped with adequately sized and properly maintained oil and water separators.2.3.3. slivers.3.2.3.3.13 Blast-cleaned surfaces that show evidence of rust bloom or that have been left uncoated overnight shall be recleaned to the specified degree of cleanliness before coating.15 After blasting and immediately before spraying.2. 4. 4.3.2.4 Silica or other abrasive substances containing more than 1 percent crystalline silica shall not be used as an abrasive blasting material. dust and loose residues shall be removed by brushing.2.16 Inhibitive washes intended to prevent rusting after blasting shall not be permitted.3. at the location where work is being performed.3.2.3. the abrasive mix shall be maintained so that a consistently sharp profile is produced.3 Degree of Cleanliness and Anchor Profile 4.3. 4.2 Degree of cleanliness and anchor profile shall be as required for the specified coating system.

or fog or on damp surfaces or surfaces that may have frost. Anchor profile may also be verified in accordance with ISO 8503. clearly marked.2.3. Humidity: The ambient or substrate temperature is less than 3°C (5°F) above the dew point or outside the range recommended by the coating manufacturer.3. hand tool or power tool cleaning shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 (ISO St 2). substrate. particularly for spray application. and the requirements specified herein.3. 4.EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings 4.1. Method C. or outside the range recommended by the coating manufacturer. or equivalent electronic device at the location where work is being performed.1 General 4. when approved by purchaser.1 Coating materials shall be in accordance with purchaser’s external coating system data sheets.1 Paint shall not be applied while any of the following conditions are present or expected before the paint dries: a. Weather: During rain.4 Application 4.4.3. SSPC-SP 3 (ISO St 3).1 Application shall be in accordance with SSPC-PA 1(ISO 12944-7).4 All materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s latest published instructions and SSPC-PA 1 (ISO 12944-7).2 Temperature.4. Dew point temperature shall be determined by sling psychrometer in accordance with ASTM E337.4. and kept covered. the coating manufacturer’s published application instructions. or coating material temperatures are above 49°C (120°F).4. 4.4.3 Coating materials shall be furnished in the coating manufacturer’s unopened containers.1.4. Temperature: Ambient.4. 4.3. 4. 4. and SSPC-SP 11. shall be clean and in good condition. and protected. clean. Humidity. 4. ISO 4677-2.4.3. 4.3. MSDS. and Weather Conditions 4.4 Hand or Power Tool Cleaning If specified.3 Materials 4. 4.2 All solvents used for thinning shall be in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s recommendations. d.3 Anchor profile shall be verified in accordance with ASTM D4417. c.4.2 All application equipment shall be provided as recommended by the coating manufacturer. below 10°C (50°F). Wind: During strong or gusty wind conditions. snow. Process Industry Practices Page 9 of 16 . and shall be suitable for applying the coating as specified. b.4.

4.4.3 Mixing of partial kits shall not be permitted.4.7. 4. 4. 4.4. 4.4.4.6.4.1 Materials shall be mixed and thinned in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s written instructions.1 Primers shall be applied before flash rusting or other contamination occurs.4.4. or rain.5.2 Coating manufacturer’s recommended pot life shall not be exceeded.4.PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 4.4.4. 4.4 Mixing and Thinning 4.4 Primer shall not be applied within 100 mm (4 inches) of unblasted surfaces or 50 mm (2 inches) from the edges to be field welded.1 Materials that have exceeded the coating manufacturer’s recommended shelf life shall not be used.5. the spray pot shall be emptied and cleaned.7.6.5 Shelf and Pot Life 4. and other contaminants.4.4.4.5 Equipment fabricators shall indicate on their drawings the coating manufacturer and coating product numbers used.4.6.6 Priming 4. paints.7 Topcoating 4. Page 10 of 16 Process Industry Practices . 4.4.6.4. edges.7.4. 4.5 Inorganic zinc primer shall be applied using an agitated pot. and corners and shall be free of mud cracking. 4.4.3. and new material shall be mixed.4.4. 4.4.2 All mixing shall be done in clean containers that are free from grease. 4. 4.3 Primer shall have a uniform thickness over welds.4. dirt. If this limit is reached.5 Thinning shall not exceed the maximum allowable volatile organic compound (VOC) level for the coating involved.6. 4.1 Each coat of paint shall be of a contrasting color to indicate the extent of coverage. Containers shall be kept covered to prevent contamination by dust.4.3 Minimum drying time between coats shall be in compliance with the coating manufacturer’s instructions.2 Each coat of multiple-coat systems shall be allowed to cure sufficiently in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s directions before topcoating. 4.4.2 Previously coated surfaces shall be protected from contamination and overspray.4 Inorganic zinc primers and all pigmented coatings shall be strained before application in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s written instructions. 4.

8.4. 4.4. 4. sampling procedures shall follow SSPC-PA 2.3 DFT of each coat shall not be outside the specified range. Process Industry Practices Page 11 of 16 . Dry spray and overspray shall be removed.7 If spray applying over inorganic zinc primers.2 Care shall be exercised to prevent overspray.6 Inorganic zinc primers shall have all overspray removed with a stiff bristle brush or wire screen and shall be clean and thoroughly cured before topcoating.4.4 Coating thickness may also be measured using ISO 2178 for nonmagnetic coatings on magnetic substrates or ISO 2360 for coatings on non-magnetic substrates.1 Wet film thickness shall be checked during the application of each coat to assure the specified dry film thickness (DFT) is met.4 If the maximum recoat time has been exceeded. skips. bubbles.4.7. runs. 4.2 The DFT of each coat on CS shall be checked in accordance with the procedures defined by SSPC-PA 2 using a magnetic gage that has been properly calibrated. Comment: Wet film thickness measurements are not suitable for some materials such as inorganic zinc primers.7.4. 4. 4.7.8. 4.8. 4. 4. 4. 4.. The mist coat may be a thinned coat or applied by a quick pass of the spray gun before applying the full coat. sags. etc.1 Each coat of paint shall be of a uniform film.4. a mist coat shall be used to avoid bubbling.8.4.8. 4.4.8.4. and mud cracking). the cure of the primer shall be verified.7.4 Measurements shall be taken after removal of dry spray and overspray. blisters.3 Coating thickness on nonmagnetic substrates shall be checked using a Type 2 gage suitable for use on nonferrous substrates. voids. wrinkles. and of a uniform thickness and appearance.4.4. 4. However.5 All gages shall be adjusted to compensate for the substrate effect before application of any coating.9 Defects 4. free of defects (e. spillage. flake filled epoxies.9. but sufficient time shall be allowed for solvent evaporation. or application of coatings to surfaces for which they are not intended.5 Before topcoating over an inorganic zinc primer.4. previously applied coatings shall be roughened before topcoating or treated in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s directions.8 Film Thickness 4.g.4.9.9. pinholes.4.EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings 4.4.

4. Second line shall be used for SSPC surface preparation.4. Last line shall be the name of the shop or field coating contractor. Next line(s) shall be used for each coat of paint.3 Purchaser’s inspector(s) shall have the option to witness or repeat any of these functions as necessary.11 Job Stencil 4.4. and damaged coating shall be removed and the adjacent sound coating feathered back approximately 50 mm (2 inches) to form a uniform and smooth surface. 4.1. Page 12 of 16 Process Industry Practices . 4. 4.5 Inspection 4. a job stencil shall be applied in a prominent location to identify the coating system used.5.4. shall not be stenciled. Feathering shall be done by hand or power sanding with a grit wheel or sandpaper. 4.2 Damaged areas shall be spot-blast cleaned.3 Unless specified otherwise. a job stencil shall be applied to about 10 percent of the pieces.11.PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 4.4.4. etc. The prepared surface shall be free of loose.4. cracked.1 Before application of any coat. 4.1 General 4. 4.10.10. d.5.2 Purchaser’s inspector(s) shall be given adequate notice before the start of surface preparation and coating application to witness the work. Damage to finished work shall be thoroughly cleaned and recoated.11. the coating used for repair shall be the same as the original and shall have the same DFT. hangers.4. burnt. if specified by the purchaser.1.5. c. all defects and damage to the previous coat(s) shall be repaired.5 Small pieces such as lap flanges.10 Touch-Up 4.11. 4.5. 4.11. or blistered coating.4.1 All inspections and tests shall be performed that are necessary to ensure that surface preparation and coating application comply with the requirements of this Practice.1 After the coating system has been applied in the shop or field.11. b. Top line shall be used for the PIP External Coatings Systems Document Number. power tool cleaned.3 Stencil shall provide the following information: a.4. followed by the date of application (month and year). 4.4.1.2 Stencil shall be of 25 mm (1 inch) high letters of a color contrasting with the finished paint.4 If there are a large number of structural shapes. All loose.10. or hand tool cleaned as necessary to restore any exposed steel to an original degree of cleanliness.

c. 4.1. profile gauges.5.5.1.14 If oil contamination in the abrasive is evident: a. thickness gauges. and holiday detectors) shall be furnished in proper working order and calibrated before use.5. All lines shall be tested separately.1. Readings are required at 4-hour intervals or at other time intervals approved by the purchaser. relative humidity. at 4-hour intervals thereafter. Surfaces determined to have been blasted with contaminated air shall be cleaned with solvent and reblasted with clean air and abrasive. hygrometers.g. and spray equipment shall be tested for oil and water contamination in accordance with ASTM D4285 or applicable parts of ISO 8573.13 Recirculated shot and grit used for abrasive cleaning shall be tested for the presence of oil by immersing in water and checking for oil flotation.1.1.EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings 4.5. b.5. continuous monitoring of dew point and relative humidity may be performed using systems established or accepted by the purchaser.5.9 Substrate temperature shall be 3°C (5°F) minimum above the dew point.5. and work shall be available to purchaser’s inspector(s) at all times. 4.7 Dew point.5. 4. 4.5 Purchaser’s inspector(s) shall have access to the work site during the progress of the work and the right to conduct any inspection or testing deemed necessary to ensure that the coatings are properly applied. 4. Testing shall be performed at the beginning and end of each work shift and at not less than 4-hour intervals. 4.2.1.1.4 All materials. 4.4.1.11 Air supply for blast cleaning.5. and surface temperature shall be determined before surface preparation.12 If contamination is discovered: a.5. Contaminated abrasive shall be replaced with clean abrasive and retested before proceeding. and as follows: a. pyrometers.8 Alternatively.6 All instruments used in inspection activities (e. thermometer. Coatings determined to have been applied using contaminated air shall be removed and reapplied using clean air.1. Tests shall be made at the start of blasting. equipment. 4. pneumatic tools.. Process Industry Practices Page 13 of 16 . and at the end of blasting. All necessary corrective actions shall be made and the air supply retested.1.10 Work shall not proceed if the ambient temperature or relative humidity is not in accordance with Section 4. b.1. 4.5. 4.

5. 3.18 If coating adhesion or intercoat adhesion are of suspect quality. Verify that storage conditions for all materials are adequate and properly maintained.1 Prepainting Inspection 1. 4. 4.1. Page 14 of 16 Process Industry Practices .2 Inspection Checklist 4.5.23 Any work found not to be in accordance with the requirements specified herein shall be corrected.16 Surface preparation anchor profile shall be verified using either coarse or extra-coarse replica tape (as required by profile depth) and a spring-loaded micrometer in accordance with ASTM D4417.1. Verify that surfaces not to be coated are masked off or otherwise protected before surface preparation and coating application of adjacent surfaces.2.22 Completed paint job shall pass inspection by the purchaser’s inspector(s).5. Anchor profile may also be verified in accordance with ISO 8503-5.20 Adhesion test method shall be approved by the purchaser. when approved by purchaser. Method C.5.5.1.5.21 Acceptable adhesion classifications or pull-off strengths shall be in accordance with coating material manufacturer’s recommendations and approved by the purchaser.2. 4. 4. 2.5. Verify that oil and grease are removed before surface preparation.5.17 SSPC-VIS 1 (ISO 8501-1) visual standards shall be used for confirming the degree of surface cleanliness if adequacy of cleaning is in question. 4.2 Presurface Preparation 1.1. Verify that coating. 4.5. Verify that welds and sharp edges have been suitably prepared. Verify that the air supply is clean and free of oil and moisture. thinning.PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 b. 4.1. 4.1.1. 4.5.1. 4. 4.2.1. the adhesion shall be checked periodically.19 Adhesion may be assessed by means of portable pull-off adhesion tester in accordance with ASTM D4541 (ISO 4624) or one of the appropriate tape tests in accordance with ASTM D3359 (ISO 2409). 2.15 Abrasive-cleaned surfaces shall be inspected for proper surface cleanliness and anchor profile using SSPC (ISO 8501-1) visual comparators.5.3 Surface Preparation 1. All steel blasted since the last satisfactory test shall be reblasted. and blasting materials are as specified. 4.5.5.

5 Final Acceptance 1. Verify that the previous coat is sufficiently cured before application of topcoats. by following the procedures of SSPC-PA 2. 4. Verify. 6. and induction times are in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s instructions. slivers.4 Coating Application 1. substrate.5. Verify that coating manufacturer’s requirements regarding recoat time are observed.2. Verify that materials are as specified. Verify that the applicator is checking wet film thickness during application. and dewpoint temperatures are appropriate. Verify that all identified repairs have been properly made. Verify the adequacy of cleaning and blasting equipment. 3. 7. 7. that the DFT is within the specified range after each coat. and weld spatter have been removed after blasting. and that the shelf life has not been exceeded. using appropriate instruments.2. Verify the cleanliness and dryness of abrasives. Verify that ambient. 8. Verify that the air supply is clean and free of oil and moisture. by following the procedures of SSPC-PA 2. 4. 6. Verify that the coating system is cured. Verify that mixing. that materials are properly labeled. Verify that the proper application equipment is being utilized. Visually inspect each coat for defects and uniform appearance. Visually inspect the coated surface for defects and uniform appearance. 3. that the total DFT is within the specified range. that the anchor profile is as specified. 5. Process Industry Practices Page 15 of 16 . 10. Verify. substrate. scabs. hoses. 5. 4. 4. 4. Verify the degree of surface cleanliness and that contaminants have been removed. 2.EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings 2. Verify that visible burrs.5. thinning. and dew point temperatures are appropriate for proper surface preparation. Verify. Verify that the ambient. 9. 3. 2. etc.

cables.5.6.3. and secured for transport in a manner such that the coating will not be damaged in transit.6. inspections.5.g.6. PIP CTSE1000-F. 4. Items such as chains.6.6. Handling.3 Records 4. parallel height ridges of rock-free sand. Coated items shall be separated so that the items do not bear against each other. time.1 A Daily Inspection Report.1 Coated items shall not be handled or moved until all coatings have been properly dried or cured in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s instructions.5 4.PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings EDITORIAL REVISION June 2007 4. Dragging or skidding coated pipe shall not be permitted. for documenting that specified requirements have been met shall be completed for each work shift.5.6.7 Page 16 of 16 Process Industry Practices .3.3. and tests (including date.4 4. Coated items shall be stacked off the ground using suitable means (e. etc.) to avoid damage to the coating.2 4. Coated items shall be loaded. and narrow skids shall not be permitted to come in contact with the coating. 4.3 4.2 Supplier’s forms may be used with prior approval by purchaser. Handling equipment likely to cause damage to the coating shall not be used. and results of instrument calibrations).. 4.6. Coated items shall be handled with equipment such as wide belt slings.5. 4. and wide padded skids selected to prevent damage to the coating. tongs. web belts. metal bars. hooks.6 4. padded.6 Shipping. and Storage 4. wooden timbers placed under the uncoated pipe ends.3 A log shall be maintained of all reports.

Record unsatisfactory work. Submit a copy of all forms and back-up documents to the purchaser’s inspector(s). Attach additional sheets.: Instructions: This form shall be completed for each work shift to verify compliance with PIP CTSE1000. Lining Color Actual Overcoat Interval (hrs) Supplier’s Signature: Inspector’s Signature: . and corrective action.: Supplier Order/Serial Nos. conditions causing unsatisfactory work.: Unit: Supplier/Location: P&ID No. notes of meetings./Type Used DFT Specified µm mils DFT Obtained µm mils Linings Coat 1 Coat 2 Coat 3 Comments: Lining Applied Batch No.ASSOC. or reports as necessary for backup. Report Date: / / Start of Blasting °C °C °C °F °F °F Start of painting Midpoint of painting / Condition Time Ambient Temperature Relative Humidity (%) Dew Temperature Substrate Temperature Weather Conditions End of painting Surface Preparation: Condition of Surface Before Blasting: Method of Removing Contamination Before Blasting: Method of Blasting: Abrasive Type: Grade: Degree of Cleanliness Obtained: µm mils Method of Measuring Anchor Profile: Anchor Profile: Application Information: Method of Spraying: DFT Gage Type and Model: Date Calibrated: Thinner No. PIP: CTSE1000 DAILY INSPECTION REPORT CTSE1000-F PAGE 1 OF 1 JUNE 2007 APPLICATION OF EXTERNAL COATINGS Facility Name/Location: Item Name: Purchaser/Location: Item Tag Job No: No.: Service: Purchaser Order No. Attach copies of all replica tape readings taken.

TECHNICAL CORRECTION January 2002 Process Industry Practices Structural PIP STS05120 Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification .

PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes. such laws or regulations must be followed.org. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. administrative. contractors. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. or standards organizations.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. Austin. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. application. or withdrawn. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). addenda. Texas 78759. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500). and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. reaffirmed. This Practice will be revised. Construction Industry Institute. this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will be reviewed every 5 years. PRINTING HISTORY November 1994 January 1999 Issued Revision January 2000 January 2002 Technical Correction Technical Correction Not printed with State funds . Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at www.pip. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. The University of Texas at Austin. overlays. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations.

4. ASTM A36/A36M threaded bar or ASTM A307 bolts and corresponding nuts and washers . except ASTM A490 bolts. 6.3.4.ASTM A123 b.2 All materials.4 Vent holes shall be provided for piping or tubular assemblies as required by ASTM A385.4. when approved by the buyer) c.1 It shall be the fabricator’s responsibility to safeguard against embrittlement and warpage per ASTM A143 and ASTM A384.3. 6.1 Nuts shall be tapped oversize in accordance with ASTM A563/A563M. 6.3. and hardware shall be in accordance with the following ASTM specifications: a. shall be mechanically galvanized by the manufacturer according to the requirements of Class 50 of ASTM B695. 6.ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM B695 6. 6. shall be galvanized. and crane rails.3 The edges of tightly contacting surfaces shall be completely seal welded. cutting.3. 6. Process Industry Practices Page 15 of 17 . and welding shall be performed before galvanizing.4. unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.4.3 General Fabrication 6.4.4.5 Potential problems that require a modification in design shall be brought to the attention of the buyer by the fabricator before proceeding. if used.4.4.5 Inspection of Galvanized Steel The buyer reserves the right to inspect and reject all galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM E376. The fabricator shall remove weld slag before galvanizing. Galvanizing of steel shapes. drilling.3. 6.4.2 Nut threads shall be retapped after hot-dip galvanizing to provide a proper fit.4.4 Galvanizing of Steel Hardware 6. Steel shapes and plates .TECHNICAL CORRECTION January 2002 PIP STS05120 Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification 6.4.3.13 Checkered plate shall have 1/2-inch (12-mm) diameter drain holes provided for each 20 square feet (2 square meters) of area.4. Fabrication details shall meet the requirements of ASTM A385 to allow for the creation of high-quality zinc coatings. 6. 6.3 Direct tension indicators.1 6. ASTM A490M bolts.4 Galvanizing 6. ASTM A325/A325M bolts and corresponding nuts and washers – ASTM B695 (or ASTM A153/A153M. plates.4.2 Whenever practical.4. with a minimum of one hole per panel.4.

8 Galvanized steel that has been rejected shall be stripped.5. but less than 2%.5 Hot repairs shall be made in the shop if any of the following conditions exist: a.4.1.4 Cold repair using an organic zinc-rich coating is allowed if the total damaged area is less than 1% of the total coated area of the member being repaired and no single repair is greater than 2 square inches (1. 6.3 When surface defects exceed 2% of a member’s area. unless otherwise noted in the contract documents or arranged by the buyer.6. oil.6..7 Flux.4. 6. etc.4.4.1 Delivery of steel shall be made in the order needed for erection.1 Any damage to galvanizing shall be repaired in accordance with ASTM A780. or heavy dross inclusions shall be removed by brushing.4.10 If galvanized tension control bolts are used. all bare steel surfaces (i.08 mm) and contain a minimum of 65% zinc dust by weight. of the total coated area of the member being repaired b. erection bolts. bolt ends) shall be repair galvanized per this section. first-tier columns and framing for all its levels (including stairs and handrail). The dry film thickness shall be 2 mils to 3 mils (0. Shipping. 6.4. Any single repair is 12–inches (300–mm) long or more 6.4. Any nonadhering galvanizing shall be removed to the extent that the surrounding galvanizing is integral and adherent.6. the defects shall be repaired by redipping the member in the zinc bath. 6.5.1 Handling and Shipping 6.300 mm2) in area c. grinding. Page 16 of 17 Process Industry Practices .5 Handling.6.6. 6. 6. The delivery sequence for the fabricated steel.4. 6.6 Hot repairs shall be made using zinc alloy rod or powder manufactured for the repair of galvanized steel.6. regalvanized. The application of localized heating to straighten must be approved by the engineer of record.300 mm2) or 12–inches (300–mm) long. the exposed substrate metal shall be cleaned to bright metal and free of all visual rust.9 Correction of excessive warpage (that exceeds ASTM A6/A6M criteria) shall be by press straightening when possible.05 mm to 0. heavy ash.2 Before repair of damaged galvanized coating.4.6. and Delivery 6.6.6. or grease.6 Repair of Galvanized Steel 6.e.4. 6. second-tier columns and its framing.PIP STS05120 Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification TECHNICAL CORRECTION January 2002 6. or filing as required. and submitted again for inspection.4. Any single repair is at least 2 square inches (1.6. steel embedded in concrete. shall be as follows: loose base plates. 6. Total damaged area is greater than 1%.

4 The fabricator shall ensure that all steel and its coatings are protected from any damage caused by handling. or shipping before receipt by the buyer. 6.5.5.5.1 The fabricator is responsible for delivering all materials and documentation to the job site in good condition. and nuts shall be packaged and delivered in rigid (not cardboard).5.5 The fabricator shall ensure that adequate protection is provided for threads on sag rods and any other threaded components to prevent damage during shipping and handling. 6. 6.2 All bolts.2 The buyer reserves the right to reject all damaged or below-quality material or documentation. 6.2. All materials and documentation will be inspected immediately upon receipt by the buyer to determine that all items included in the Bill of Materials have been supplied. 6. Load in such a manner that continuous drainage will occur.1.1. washers. to assure that all documentation has been received.5. weatherproof containers.2 Delivery 6. storage. and to check for any damage.5.1. Process Industry Practices Page 17 of 17 .1.5.TECHNICAL CORRECTION January 2002 PIP STS05120 Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification 6.3 Railcars and/or trucks shall be loaded and cribbed so that others can readily unload them.2.

5. Abrasives for use on stainless steel shall be free from of metals contaminants If hand tools are used to clean stainless steel only dedicated (not used for carbon steel) stainless steel brushes shall be used Surface preparation or painting shall cease if environmental conditions are not per manufacturer’s recommendation. b. These requirements must be available in both English and the native language of the country where work is conducted. Testing shall comply with SSPC Guide 15. Any flange surfaces damaged for any reason shall be machine to proper condition. 2. 4. and shearing. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission. such as those normally occurring on rolled structural members or plates. 6. Surface preparation 1.2012-11-02 UOP Specification Paint Application Page 1 of 4 970086 S905F-0 1. surface shall be tested for salt contamination. 3. must be guarded sufficiently to withstand inadvertent direct abrasive blasting. Surfaces not meant to be painted shall be masked off before surface preparation and coating application of adjacent surface. and the testing and recording of the test results. a. such as machined surfaces. 2. 3. Salt contamination level shall be less than or equal to 5 µg/cm2. grinding. Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Steel and Other Non-Porous Substrates. welding. 8. It is the responsibility of the Supplier to assure requirements of this specification are available at the location of surface preparation and painting for reference. Salt test shall be performed after surface cleaning is completed. If noted in manufacturer’s data sheet or T905 document. . 9. Scope This document defines additional technical requirements for surface preparation prior to painting. General The process of paint application should follow the manufacturer’s recommended specifications unless noted in this document. Surface shall comply with paint manufacturer’s product data sheet referenced for each coating system. name plates and flange faces. Once steel is power cleaned and dust and loose residues have been removed. b. 7. c. as well as those resulting from flame cutting. Surface shall be free of sharp edges. Austenitic stainless steel within 100 ft (30 m) of application point of zinc-bearing paint shall be isolated from application point with a waterproof barrier. Prior to paint application. visual examination shall be performed in accordance with SSPC-Vis 3. Compressed air for abrasive blasting and painting must not contain moisture and oil. the following shall be true: a. Each item shall be tested. Surfaces that need protection from damage during surface preparation. the application of paint. Condition of all guards shall be checked after abrasive blasting to assure integrity. d.

6. Test method and technique 1. The accumulation of these reports will eventually become the Final inspection report for paint. Salt contamination level and Location of salt contamination test a. PIP Daily Inspection Report CTSE 1000F is an example of the minimum requirements of the report. except for flange surfaces which can remain covered until installation. Coating application shall be as per applicable T905E document. b. Replica Tape 3. d. 5. Surface preparation cleaning quality a. Coating applications 1. Daily Inspection Report shall include the following examination results and kept current and ready for review. g. 4.2012-11-02 UOP Specification Paint Application Page 2 of 4 970086 S905F-0 4. 2. a contrasting color shall be used to distinguish between coats. Masking and lubricant shall be removed after coating application. Specific content must include the following: a. h. ASTM D 4417 (Method C) 1. Dew point measurement Temperature Paint Batch number Cure time between coats 6. If more than one coat is specified. 2. 3. Surface shall be primed the same day that blast cleaning is performed. Dry film thickness (DFT) Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission. Daily Inspection Report and Final inspection report for paint 1. SSPC Guide 15 Surface profile a. SSPC-VIS-1 1. Salt contamination level and location of measurement if required in T905 or Manufacturer’s data sheet Surface profile measurement Visual inspection results of surface preparation cleaning quality Dry film thickness (DFT) Surface defects Coating Adhesion Environmental conditions 1. All coats should be a uniform film thickness. The paint shall meet the minimum thickness specified by the T905E documents. i. . e. 5. Before application of prime coat 4. 2. More coats will be applied until this minimum is reached. f. c.

Instrument display Gasket Gasket seating surfaces Threaded connection. shipping-storage-and handling. The following shall be free of coating material: a. except bolt threads Stainless-steel component Nickel-based alloy component Copper tubing Purchaser’s inspectors shall be given adequate notice before start of surface preparation and coating application to witness work. sags. Coating Adhesion a. product designation. SSPC-PA 2 and MP EW-020-206. Areas damaged by weather must be repaired. b. 5. 2. 3. blisters. g. b. Tolerance +/. e. 5. Container of paint shall be resealed after inspection. d. and manufacture date. An Examination and Test Record shall be completed as described in the S150 document. It shall include all details as defined in the S150 and U905F documents. Miscellaneous 1. Container of paint shall not be opened prior to use except for spot inspection. 6. 4. Locations selected by contractor 7. c. Purchaser’s inspector shall have the option to witness or repeat any of these functions as necessary An Examination and Test Plan will be developed by the supplier to cover all aspects of surface preparation. the paint should not be used. Correct all pin holes. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission. Paint shall be from original container bearing manufacturer’s name.6 1. Container 1. 3. Page 3 of 4 970086 S905F-0 Spot measurements – arithmetic mean of 3 gage readings. ASTM D 3359 Method A 1. Skin that has formed on top of the paint should be cut loose from the container and discarded before mixing. runs.20% of specified thickness Surface defects a. taken with 12 mm of each other. batch number. 8. 2. coating application. 4. If the skin is too thick and compromises the paint. f. testing and record keeping as described in this specification. Section 4. . Paint shall be thoroughly mixed before and during use to keep the paint in suspension. 5.2012-11-02 UOP Specification Paint Application a. 6. Check for uniformity and proper curing.

National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) NACE Standard RP0287. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) applicable ASTM D 4417 Method C. 3. Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel SSPC Vis 3. Application of External Coatings Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Guide 15. 9. Handling and lifting equipment must not cause damage to the finish. Coated items shall not be handled or moved until all items have been properly cured per manufacturer’s data sheet guideline. References The most recent edition. instrumentation and electrical components may use Manufacturer’s standard paint system for a High humidity / Moderate corrosive environment. cables. Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Steel and Other Non-Porous Substrates SSPC PA-2. Chains. Wide belt sling web belts and padded skids are recommended. NZRC-Protective Coatings of Steel Structures. Coated items shall be stacked off the ground using suitable means to avoid damaging the coating. Equipment and Piping Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission. 4. Visual Standard for Power and Hand Tool Cleaned Steel MP EW-020-206. Dragging or skidding finished coated pipe is prohibited. Measurements of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges. 10. 2. Shipping Handling and Storage 1. SSPC Vis 1-89. Page 4 of 4 970086 S905F-0 Proprietary items such as motors. hooks and other mechanisms that will cause surface damage are prohibited. Coated items shall be loaded using padding between pieces and secured for transport in a way to avoid damage to the coating.2012-11-02 UOP Specification Paint Application 7. Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP CTSE1000. 5. . except as otherwise specified. Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel Surfaces using Replica Tape. of the following documents are cited in this document. Test Method for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel. pumps.

7. Only manufacturer’s recommended thinners shall be used. Paint System for Petrochemical Environments – For Insulated Piping Systems. 2 2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids) 6. 14. . Sa 3 (SSPC SP-5) All dirt. Ferritic Steel Equipment and Machinery (Temp ≤ 120° C) Surface Preparation Coat No. to ensure consistency during coating application. 17. salts.01:2007 CN (Section 8. 9. 2 2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids) Paint Materials Coat No. Amount of thinner used shall be measured. grease. and other contamination shall be removed prior to abrasive blasting. 19. 12. ISO 8501-1. chemicals. Application Coating shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. and 970086 S905F documents.2013-03-08 UOP Technical Data Sheet Paint System 02 Page 1 of 2 970086 T905E-02-0 1. moisture. 18.13: Identification of Pipes) and P. 3. 13. 11.0403. 1 2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids) 5. NRF-053-PEMEX-2006.3. Mixing and Thinning Materials shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Final pipeline top coat colors shall be based upon line list. PIP CTSE1000. not estimated. oil. Surface Preparation Coat No.6: Identification of Facilities). 8. Material Manufacturer Product Designation Remarks Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 10. 1 2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids) 16. Touch-up Paint System SSPC-SP1 and SSPC-SP3 (St 3) Application Method Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron Spray 100 mil micron Spray 100 mil 150 mil 150 mil micron Surface Profile 38-63 micron mil Generic Material Type Maximum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron 15. Top Coat Color The topcoat color is per NRF-009-PEMEX-2004 (Section 8. Maximum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron 4. Generic Material Type Application Method Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron Spray 100 mil micron Spray 100 mil 150 mil 150 mil micron Surface Profile 38-63 micron mil 2.

but not limited to.2013-03-08 UOP Technical Data Sheet Paint System 02 Page 2 of 2 970086 T905E-02-0 20. 23. manufacturer and product designations shall require written approval from UOP before proceeding. 24. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 2 International Paint Intergard 345 Notes Any deviation to this paint system including. . 22. 1 Polyamide Epoxy Primer Polyamide Epoxy Primer International Paint Intergard 345 21.

and other contamination shall be removed prior to abrasive blasting. salts. 9. 8. 1 2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids) 5. 2 2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids) 2 Component Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane (65% solids) 6.2013-03-08 UOP Technical Data Sheet Paint System 02A Page 1 of 2 970086 T905E-02A-0 1. Generic Material Type Application Method Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron Spray 100 mil micron Spray 100 mil micron Spray 75 mil 100 mil 150 mil micron 150 mil micron Surface Profile 38-63 micron mil 2. grease. 12. not estimated. . 3 7. Application Coating shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Paint System for Petrochemical Environments – For Non-Insulated Piping Systems. 1 2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids) 17. 15.13: Identification of Pipes) and P. Touch-up Paint System SSPC-SP1 and SSPC-SP3 (St 3) Application Method Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron Spray 100 mil micron Spray 100 mil Spray 75 micron 100 150 mil micron 150 mil micron Surface Profile 38-63 micron mil Generic Material Type Maximum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron 16. PIP CTSE1000.3. Final pipeline top coat colors shall be based upon line list. 11. 2 2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids) 18. NRF-053-PEMEX-2006. 3 2 Component Aliphatic Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.01:2007 CN (Section 8. 14. Maximum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron 4. Top Coat Color The topcoat color is per NRF-009-PEMEX-2004 (Section 8. Sa 3 (SSPC SP-5) All dirt.6: Identification of Facilities). moisture. Only manufacturer’s recommended thinners shall be used. Surface Preparation Coat No. Mixing and Thinning Materials shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Amount of thinner used shall be measured. Structural Steel and Machinery (Temp ≤ 120° C) Surface Preparation Coat No. 13. oil.0403. ISO 8501-1. 3. and 970086 S905F documents. chemicals. coating application. to ensure consistency during 10. Ferritic Steel Equipment.

2 International Paint Intergard 345 23. 25.2013-03-08 UOP Technical Data Sheet Paint System 02A Acrylic Polyurethane (65% solids) mil Page 2 of 2 970086 T905E-02A-0 mil 19. manufacturer and product designations shall require written approval from UOP before proceeding. but not limited to. Coat No. 20. 3 International Paint Interthane 990HS Must meet local VOC requirements 24. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. . 21. 26. Notes Any deviation to this paint system including. 1 Material Polyamide Epoxy Primer Polyamide Epoxy Primer Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Manufacturer Paint Materials Product Designation Intergard 345 Remarks International Paint 22.

1 Ib/gal (1. Suitable for use as a one or two coat primer/finish coating or as an intermediate over recommended anti-corrosive primers. Brush.f.6 mils (143-214 microns) wet 225 sq.7-8. Ideal for use in moderately corrosive environments and where fast drying/rapid recoating is desired. Roller Overcoating Interval with recommended topcoats Temperature 50°F (10°C) ¹ 59°F (15°C) ¹ 77°F (25°C) ¹ 104°F (40°C) ¹ Touch Dry 90 minutes 75 minutes 60 minutes 30 minutes Hard Dry 7 hours 5 hours 2. Mixed 93°F (34°C) 12.5 hours 1 hour Minimum 7 hours 5 hours 2.5 hours 1 hour Maximum Extended² Extended² Extended² Extended² ¹ See Product Characteristics section for further details ² See International Protective Coatings Definitions & Abbreviations REGULATORY DATA Flash Point Product Weight VOC Part A 91°F (33°C). fast curing epoxy primer/finish containing zinc phosphate anti-corrosive pigmentation. high solids.60 m²/liter at 125 microns d. PRACTICAL INFORMATION FOR INTERGARD 345 Color Gloss Level Volume Solids Typical Thickness Theoretical Coverage Practical Coverage Method of Application Drying Time Wide range via the Chromascan® system Semi Gloss 70% 4-6 mils (100-150 microns) dry equivalent to 5.45 kg/l) 2. Intergard 345 provides a combination of anti-corrosive barrier protection.f. Air Spray.Intergard® 345 Epoxy PRODUCT DESCRIPTION INTENDED USES A two component.ft/US gallon at 5 mils d.t and stated volume solids 5. chemical fume and spillage resistance. Part B 109°F (43°C). low VOC.t and stated volume solids Allow appropriate loss factors Airless Spray. along with good abrasion resistance.67 lb/gal (320 g/lt) 235 g/kg EPA Method 24 EU Solvent Emissions Directive (Council Directive 1999/13/EC) See Product Characteristics section for further details Protective Coatings Page 1 of 4 Issue Date:12/1/2011 Ref:2129 Worldwide Product .

Surface defects revealed by the blast cleaning process should be ground. (1) Agitate Base (Part A) with a power agitator. including any delays. filled.0-4. If the shop primer shows extensive or widely scattered breakdown overall sweep blasting maybe necessary. Clean Up Page 2 of 4 .0 mils (75-100 microns) can be achieved Suitable . Abrasive Blast Cleaning Abrasive blast clean to SSPC SP6 or Sa2½ (ISO 8501-1:2007).43-0. Once the unit has been mixed. trowelling compounds. All surplus materials and empty containers should be disposed of in accordance with appropriate regional regulations/legislation.53 mm) Total output fluid pressure at spray tip not less than 2503 psi (176 kg/cm²) Gun Air Cap Fluid Tip DeVilbiss MBC or JGA 704 or 765 E Air Spray (Pressure Pot) Brush Roller Thinner Cleaner Work Stoppages Recommended Suitable . efflorescence. Clean all equipment immediately after use with International GTA415. it must be used within the working pot life specified. grease. dry and free from curing compounds. 4 part(s) : 1 part(s) by volume 50°F (10°C) 3 hours Recommended 59°F (15°C) 2 hours 77°F (25°C) 60 minutes 104°F (40°C) 45 minutes Mix Ratio Working Pot Life Airless Spray Tip Range 17-21 thou (0. If oxidation has occurred between blasting and application of Intergard 345 the surface should be reblasted to the specified visual standard. Thoroughly flush all equipment with International GTA415. All poured and precast concrete must also be sweep blasted (preferred) or acid etched to remove laitence.Small areas only Typically 3. Oil or grease should be removed in accordance with SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning. dry and free from contamination. Concrete. The surface may deteriorate to Sa2 standard but must be free from loose powdery deposits. dirt. Prior to paint application. release agents. or treated in the appropriate manner. It is good working practice to periodically flush out spray equipment during the course of the working day.Intergard® 345 Epoxy SURFACE PREPARATION All surfaces to be coated should be clean. temperature and elapsed time. Once units of paint have been mixed they should not be resealed and it is advised that after prolonged stoppages work recommences with freshly mixed units. etc Intergard 345 is suitable for application to concrete. Frequency of cleaning will depend upon amount sprayed.0-4. Primed Surfaces Weld seams and damaged areas should be blast cleaned to SSPC SP6 or Sa2½ (ISO 8501-1:2007).Small areas only Typically 3. APPLICATION Mixing Material is supplied in two containers as a unit. all surfaces should be assessed and treated in accordance with ISO 8504:2000. All surfaces should be clean. Always mix a complete unit in the proportions supplied.0 mils (75-100 microns) can be achieved International GTA220 (International GTA415) Do not thin more than allowed by local environmental legislation International GTA220 or International GTA415 Do not allow material to remain in hoses. Intergard 345 is suitable for application to blast cleaned surfaces which were initially to the above standard but have been allowed to deteriorate under good shop conditions for up to 7-10 days. (2) Combine entire contents of Curing Agent (Part B) with Base (Part A) and mix thoroughly with power agitator. The moisture content of the concrete should be below 6%. Concrete should be cured for a minimum of 28 days prior to coating. old coatings and loose or disintegrating concrete. surface hardeners. oil. For the first coat it is recommended that Intergard 345 is thinned 10-15% by International Thinners in order to provide good penetration with the concrete substrate and act as a primer/sealer coat. gun or spray equipment. Pre-cast Blockwork.

overcoat with recommended topcoats. Where a durable cosmetic finish with good gloss and color retention is required. When applying Intergard 345 by brush or roller. these phenomena are not detrimental to anti-corrosive performance. it is acceptable to specify Intergard 345 as a single coat at 3. Note: VOC values are typical and are provided for guidance purpose only. the required film build is unlikely to be achieved. Application by air spray may require a multiple cross spray pattern to attain maximum film build. When applying by methods other than airless spray. Consult International Protective Coatings for further details. however. which will form part of the film during normal ambient cure conditions. particularly the darker shades via the Chromascan system where maximum addition of colorants is required. it is recommended that a minimum of 4 mils (100 microns) dry film thickness should be specified to ensure adequate anti-corrosive performance. Intergard 345 will chalk and discolor on exterior exposure. This phenomena is particularly prominent in darker shades. In moderately corrosive environments. Condensation occurring during or immediately after application may result in a matte finish and an inferior film. it may be necessary to apply multiple coats to achieve the total specified system dry film thickness. However. For maximum performance ambient curing temperatures should be above 50°F (10°C). Surface temperature must always be a minimum of 5°F (3°C) above dew point.2 mils (80 microns) dry film thickness. Lower or high temperatures may require specific application techniques to achieve maximum film build. Exposure to dew or rain prior to specified hard dry time may cause a deterioration in surface appearance which may in turn impair overall performance. These may be subject to variation depending on factors such as differences in color and normal manufacturing tolerances. in non-aggressive. consult International Protective Coatings. low corrosive environments such as those equating to C2 as per ISO 12944 part 2. it can also be applied directly over the following primers:Intercure 200HS Intercure 200 Intergard 251 Intergard 269 Intergard 345 Interzinc 52 Interzinc 315 The following topcoats are recommended:Interfine 629HS Intergard 740 Interthane 870 Interthane 990 For other suitable primers/topcoats. When utilizing certain colors. SYSTEMS COMPATIBILITY Intergard 345 is normally applied directly to blast cleaned steel. ensure adequate ventilation. it is necessary to allow an increase in the quoted drying and overcoating times.Intergard® 345 Epoxy PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS Maximum film build in one coat is best attained by airless spray. Page 3 of 4 . This product will not cure adequately below 41°F (5°C). Low molecular weight reactive additives. In common with all epoxies. will also effect VOC values determined using EPA Method 24. When applying Intergard 345 in confined spaces. However.

Health. by operation of law or otherwise. Store in dry.Intergard® 345 Epoxy D ADDITIONAL et INFORMATION ai l T o p Further information regarding industry standards.6 lb STORAGE Shelf Life 18 months minimum at 77°F (25°C).com Page 4 of 4 . If in doubt regarding the suitability of use of this product. All products supplied and technical advice given are subject to our Conditions of Sale. including. Rect Top PACK SIZE Unit Size 20 liter 5 US gal Vol Part A Pack 20 liter 5 US gal Vol Part B Pack 5 liter 1 US gal 16 liter 4 US gal 4 liter 1 US gal For availability of other pack sizes contact International Protective Coatings SHIPPING WEIGHT Unit Size 20 liter 5 US gal Part A 26.international-pc. we do not accept any liability at all for the performance of the product or for (subject to the maximum extent permitted by law) any loss or damage arising out of the use of the product. shaded conditions away from sources of heat and ignition. and should be the same as this document.international-pc. www. dust and fumes will be emitted which will require the use of appropriate personal protective equipment and adequate local exhaust ventilation. consult International Protective Coatings for further advice. All work involving the application and use of this product should be performed in compliance with all relevant national.8 kg 50 lb Part B 4.com. We hereby disclaim any warranties or representations. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This product is intended for use only by professional applicators in industrial situations in accordance with the advice given on this sheet. 12/1/2011. You should request a copy of this document and review it carefully.international-marine.com or www. and should not be used without reference to the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) which International Protective Coatings has provided to its customers. Therefore. It is the user's responsibility to check with their local International Paint representative that this data sheet is current prior to using the product. Issue date: 12/1/2011 Copyright © AkzoNobel. the Material Safety Data Sheet and the container(s). 12/1/2011. Copyright © AkzoNobel. In the event welding or flame cutting is performed on metal coated with this product. Subject to re-inspection thereafter. This Technical Data Sheet is available on our website at www. Safety & Environmental standards and regulations. All advice given or statements made about the product (whether in this data sheet or otherwise) is correct to the best of our knowledge but we have no control over the quality or the condition of the substrate or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. any person using the product for any purpose other than that specifically recommended in this data sheet without first obtaining written confirmation from us as to the suitability of the product for the intended purpose does so at their own risk.com: • Definitions & Abbreviations • Surface Preparation • Paint Application • Theoretical & Practical Coverage Individual copies of these information sections are available upon request. any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. unless we specifically agree in writing to do so. without limitation. terms and abbreviations used in this data sheet can be found in the following documents available at www. Should there be any discrepancies between this document and the version of the Technical Data Sheet that appears on the website. The information contained in this data sheet is liable to modification from time to time in the light of experience and our policy of continuous development.3 kg 8.international-pc. Rect Bottom Disclaimer The information in this data sheet is not intended to be exhaustive. express or implied. then the version on the website will take precedence.

.

.

.

.

Amount of thinner used shall be measured. Alternate Material: Single Component Polymer Blend Paint Materials Product Designation Intertherm 751CSA Two (2) Coats Required HT-1027 Remarks 20. and Non-Insulated (120° C ≤ Temp ≤ 400° C) Piping Systems. 3. but not limited to. oil. not estimated. Surface Profile micron Surface 13. . 1 5. ISO 8501-1. require written approval from UOP before proceeding. Mixing and Thinning Materials shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Application 11. moisture. Coat No. 21. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Sa 2-1/2 (SSPC SP-6) Surface Profile micron All dirt. Coating shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and NRF-053-PEMEX-2006. 2 6. 10. 2 Spray 75 micron mil 100 micron mil 17. 8. Top Coat Color 7. chemicals. Surface Preparation Coat No. Notes Any deviation to this paint system including. Application Minimum Dry Film Maximum Dry Film Generic Material Type Method Thickness (DFT) Thickness (DFT) Heat Resistant Cold Spray Aluminum micron micron Alternate: Single Spray 75 100 mil mil Component Polymer Blend (34% solids) Heat Resistant Cold Spray Aluminum micron micron Alternate: Single Spray 75 100 mil mil Component Polymer Blend (34% solids) 4. Preparation mil 50-75 14. to ensure consistency during coating application. The topcoat color is Metallic Gray (Aluminum). SSPC SP-11 for Touch-up and Repair. thinners shall be used.2013-03-08 UOP Technical Data Sheet Paint System 15 Page 1 of 1 970086 T905E-15-0 Paint System for Hot Petrochemical Environments – For Insulated (205° C ≤ Temp ≤ 400° C) 1. Only manufacturer’s recommended 9. Generic Material Type Heat Resistant Cold Spray Aluminum Alternate: Single Component Polymer Blend (34% solids) Heat Resistant Cold Spray Aluminum Alternate: Single Component Polymer Blend (34% solids) Manufacturer International Paint Hi Temp Coatings Application Method Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron mil Maximum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron mil 15. 12. 1 Spray 75 100 16. grease. Ferritic Steel Equipment and Machinery 2. and other 50-75 mil contamination shall be removed prior to abrasive blasting. Material Heat Resistant Cold Spray Aluminum 19. salts. Touch-up Paint System SSPC-SP6. manufacturer and product designations shall 22. 18.

.

.

.

.

TECHNICAL DATA: Components: One Type: Inert Multipolymeric Matrix Dry Temperature Resistance: 1200˚F [650˚C] Continuous. 2) from by-products of process operations. single component coating formulated to prevent corrosion under insulation of carbon and stainless steel. chalking-free film with no maximum recoat interval. Hi-Temp 1027 can be applied directly to hot substrates having a metal temperature up to 600ºF [316ºC]*. Hi-Temp 1027 does not require a heat cure to achieve superior corrosion resistance. Thinning.com ● www.Stainless Steel .5 m /l] VOC: 3.O. regardless of operating temperature. MA 01720 Tel: 978-635-1110 ● Fax: 978-635-1124 ●hitemp@hitempcoatings. dry) service. Hi-Temp 1027 is resistant to thermal shock and thermal cycling in intermittent (wet. and 3) which may be incorporated in the insulation. high build primer which air dries at ambient temperatures to a UV resistant and stable film. sulfides and halides. eliminating the need for costly shutdown during maintenance. Hi-Temp 1027 provides a UV-resistant.5 lbs/gal [420 g/l] Weight: 16 lbs/gallon [1.com Rev. 1400˚F [760˚C] Peak Cryogenic Service: Minus 300˚F to 1000˚F [Minus 185˚C to 538˚C] Adhesion ASTM 3359: 100% Impact ASTM G-14 (direct): 30 lbs. Hi-Temp 1027 can be applied to tightly adhering rust in maintenance and repair situations. 060712 Page 1 of 4 . Finish: Flat Dry Time @ 50% R. Box 2347 ● Acton. HI-TEMP COATINGS TECHNOLOGY ● P. but corrosion protection will not be compromised. High Solids Protects Cryogenic Equipment Service Temperature: minus 300° F to 1200° F [minus 185° C to 650°C] F to 600° F [10° C to 316° C]* Surface Application Temperatures: 50° Hi-Temp 1027 is a high-build.Cryogenic Prevents Corrosion Under Insulation Prevents Stress Corrosion Cracking Direct to Tight. and provides excellent corrosion resistance at the full range of service temperatures. from coming in contact with stainless steel. 50 gallon drums Storage Temperatures: 40˚F to 120˚F [4˚C to 49˚C] Shelf Life: Two years * For direct application to hot substrates over 500° F and up to 600° F [260° C to 316°C] consult Hi-Temp Technical Service. steam. and Cleanup Table Volume Solids: 65% ± 2% as applied 2 Coverage @ 1 mil DFT 1042 ft /gal 2 @ 25 microns DFT [25. It helps protect against chlorides: 1) from the atmosphere. Colors Available: Black (Dark Gray).DTR .hitempcoatings. Adherent Rust Application High Build. Hi-Temp 1027 can be top coated with a full range of Hi-Temp color top coats. Hi-Temp 1027 is formulated to help prevent chloride induced stress corrosion cracking of stainless steel and has been tested by an independent laboratory for low leachable chlorides.92 kg/liter] Packaging: 1 gallon cans. 70˚F [21˚C]: To touch – 2 hours (Recoat and dry times are reduced when To ship – 24 hours applied to hot substrates) To topcoat – 6 hours Substrate Temperature During Application: 50˚F [10˚C] and rising to 600˚F [316˚C]* Thinner/Cleanup: See Mixing. Hi-Temp 1027 is a low VOC. Gray.Hi-Temp 1027® PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: . Hi-Temp 1027 will protect cryogenic equipment in continuous or cyclic operation from minus 300° F to 1000° F [minus 185ºC to 538ºC]. and Light Gray Minor color change may occur in exposed service.CUI .H.Primer . as long as the surface to be recoated is clean and free of all contaminants..

and all other contaminants. “Commercial Blast” [Sa 2] with a 1. Round off all rough welds and sharp edges. Insulated surfaces: • Recommended: Dry abrasive blast clean to SSPC-SP 6. dirt.0 mil [25 micron] profile. Hi-Temp 1027 should only be used to overcoat inorganic zinc or itself.5 to 2. Do not use any chemical additives in the rinse water. grease. SSPC-SP 3. with a minimum 1. grease. In maintenance and repair situations. When overcoating aged inorganic zinc. If previously applied coatings other than inorganic zinc or HiTemp 1027 are not fully removed by the method of surface preparation utilized. IMPORTANT: DO NOT USE CHLORINATED SOLVENTS ON STAINLESS STEEL SURFACES. Power Tool Clean or Hand Tool Clean to remove all existing coating except for aged inorganic zinc or existing Hi-Temp 1027. CARBON STEEL All surfaces to be coated with Hi-Temp 1027 shall be free of all weld splatter. prepare a small test patch and check for adhesion. After completion of this mechanical surface preparation. and all other contaminants. a light abrasive sweep blast using an appropriate chloride free abrasive may be performed. An anchor profile is not mandatory for adhesion of Hi-Temp 1027 on stainless steel surfaces. Round off all rough welds and sharp edges. the following methods are acceptable: • • SSPC-SP 15 “Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning”. Hi-Temp 1027 can be applied over a surface in which tightly adhering rust is still present.5 mil [38 to 63 micron] profile. 060712 . Large surfaces may be cleaned utilizing a high or low pressure wash or steam cleaning with an alkaline detergent.5 to 2. Always allow rinsed surfaces to dry before coating. followed by a freshwater rinse. especially salts. “Thorough Cleaning. Water used should be potable grade or better and should be checked to assure minimal salt content. Non-insulated surfaces: • Recommended: Dry abrasive blast clean to SSPC-SP 6. the following methods are acceptable: • • • SSPC-SP 15 “Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning”.” Use potable water. • STAINLESS STEEL All surfaces to be coated with Hi-Temp 1027 shall be free of all weld splatter. The remaining rust must be tightly adherent and not easily removed by lightly wiping with a cloth.SURFACE PREPARATION: As with all coatings. SSPC-SP 12. Page 2 of 4 • Product: Hi-Temp 1027 Rev. “Commercial Blast” [Sa 2] or better.” Use potable water. “Power Tool Cleaning” [St 3] or SSPC-SP 2.5 mil [38 to 63 micron] profile. “Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating” to meet the visual definition of WJ-3. remove all rust scale and loosely adhering rust until glints of bright metal are visible. When abrasive blast cleaning is not an option. and use Hi-Temp 1027 to spot prime only the areas where the substrate is exposed. with a minimum 1. with a 1. “Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating” to meet the visual definition of WJ-2 “Very thorough or Substantial Cleaning.0 mil [25 micron] profile. oil. SSPC-SP 12. When abrasive blasting is not an option. feather the edges of any remaining old coating. All existing coating must be removed except for aged inorganic zinc or existing Hi-Temp 1027. rinse the surface with potable grade water or better. following cleaning. especially salts. Non-insulated and insulated surfaces: • Small surfaces may be cleaned with a chloride free solvent. dirt. the performance and service life of Hi-Temp 1027 are relative to the quality of surface preparation accomplished. oil. o As an option. “Hand Tool Cleaning” [St 2].

2 mm 3000 psi Airless Spray Minimum Fluid Line 1/4 “ to 3/8” Tip size 417 to 521 Brush and Roll: Spray application is recommended but when spray painting is not possible. the shorter the recoat time. Brushing and rolling only in one direction may aid in building film thickness. #10.MIXING. Typical equipment is as follows: Product 1027 Air Pressure 60-80 psi Conventional Spray Fluid Fluid Tip Pressure Pressure <40 psi 1. using a wood-handled china bristle brush. similar to mist coating. immediately brush out the blisters before they set. use mechanical agitation for mixing immediately before application and as needed during application. For application to substrates over 500° F and up to 600° F [260° C to 316° C] consult Hi-Temp Technical Service. Use of a solvent other than Hi-Temp #5 thinner could produce a fire hazard. Application to ambient substrate Below 150ºF [66ºC] Flush equipment and thin with Hi-Temp #10 or #11 Application to hot substrate 150ºF to 500° F [66ºC to 260° C] Flush equipment and thin with Hi-Temp #5 Clean up with Thinners #5. total of 10 to 12 mils DFT [250 to 300 microns] Optional 3rd coat @ 5 to 6 mils DFT [125 to 150 microns]. surface temperature should be a minimum of 5° F [3° C] above the dew point. THINNING. total of 15 to 18 mils DFT [375 to 450 microns] Product: Hi-Temp 1027 Rev. Do not apply to surfaces with surface temperature below 50° F [10° C]. 060712 Page 3 of 4 . If blisters are observed in Hi-Temp 1027 applied to hot surfaces. Agitate as needed during application. APPLICATION EQUIPMENT: Spray application is recommended: Use conventional or airless spray and good painting practices. thin only with Hi-Temp thinners and in accordance with applicable regulations. For more specific instructions.8 to 2. Note that the higher the substrate temperature. If thinning is needed. Be sure any settled solids are incorporated during mixing. and dry spray and poor film characteristics may also result. APPLICATION TO HOT SURFACES: IMPORTANT! It is essential to apply multiple thin passes of Hi-Temp 1027 during application to hot steel. APPLICATION: For ambient application. For direct application to hot substrates over 500° F and up to 600° F [260° C to 316° C] consult Hi-Temp Technical Service. #11 For application to hot substrates over 150° F and up to 500° F [66° C to 260°C] thin (if needed) only with HiTemp thinner #5. refer to the Hi-Temp Coatings Application Guideline titled “Guidelines for Roller and Brush Application of Hi-Temp Coatings Products.” APPLICATION SYSTEMS: I. brush or roll application may be used. The coating should be applied with a suitable brush or short nap roller. INSULATED AND NON-INSULATED SERVICE ● Carbon Steel / Stainless Steel ● Applied direct to hot or ambient steel Hi-Temp 1027 2 coats @ 5 to 6 mils DFT [125 to 150 microns]. AND CLEANUP: Hi-Temp 1027 is a heavy bodied material. prevents blistering and also allows solvent to escape without leaving pinholes. Do not exceed recommended maximum dry film thicknesses for the appropriate service type and temperatures. This process.

Maximum Dry to Ship Cured 70° F [21° C] 100° F [38° C] 302° F [150° C] 50° F [10° C] 24 hours 6 hours 5 hours 1/4 hour No maximum as long as the surface is clean and free of contaminants 24 hours 24 hours 24 hours N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Dry times can vary based on environmental and substrate conditions. such as warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Hi-Temp’s sole obligation and buyer’s exclusive remedy shall be limited to replacement of products not conforming to this warranty. Minimum Dry to Recoat.2 [230] 2 2 174 ft /gal [4. safety and environmental regulations or in compliance with all pertinent local. Any claim for replacement product must be made within one year from the delivery date. regional and national regulations as well as good safety practices for painting. All use and application of this product should be performed in compliance with all relative federal. In no event shall Hi-Temp be liable for consequential or incidental damage. Hi-Temp makes no other warranties. PRECAUTIONS: This product is for use only by professional applicators in accordance with information in this data sheet and the applicable material safety data sheets (MSDS). total of 10 to12 mils [250 to 300 microns] [2. (Hi-Temp) warrants that its products are free from defects in material and workmanship. Inc.DO NOT EXCEED 8 mils [200 microns] total DFT RECOMMENDED APPLICATION PER COAT: Minimum Dry Film Thickness Wet Film Thickness Coverage Mils 5 7. Product: Hi-Temp 1027 Rev.3 m /l] APPROXIMATE DRY SCHEDULE: Substrate Temperature at 50% RH Dry to Recoat.II.] For service temperature of minus 100º F to 400º F [minus 73ºC to 204° C] 2 coats @ 5 to 6 mils [125 to 150 microns] DFT per coat. CRYOGENIC – INSULATED AND NON-INSULATED SERVICE ● Ambient Stainless Steel Hi-Temp 1027 [1.1 coat @ 5 to 6 mils DFT [125 to 150 microns] Hi-Temp Color Topcoats a] Ambient apply: b] Hot apply: (See appropriate topcoat PDS) Hi-Temp 500VS or Hi-Temp 1000VS Hi-Temp 500VHA or Hi-Temp 1000VHA III. Hi-Temp products are intended for buyers with the knowledge and skills to evaluate the suitability of Hi-Temp’s products for buyer’s intended use. 060712 Page 4 of 4 .Hi-Temp 1027 .” WARRANTY: Hi-Temp® Coatings Technology.] For service temperature of minus 300º F to 1000º F [minus 185º C to 538ºC] 1 coat @ 5 to 6 mils [125 to 150 microns] . Do not exceed maximum dry film thickness recommendations as this can affect dry times. PRIMER / TOPCOAT SYSTEM – NON-INSULATED SERVICE ● Carbon Steel / Stainless Steel ● Applied direct to hot or ambient steel Primer Coat . expressed or implied. “Shop. Field and Maintenance Painting of Steel. and in conformance with recommendations in SSPC-PA 1. state and local health. Refer to the appropriate MSDS before using this material.1 m /l] Maximum Mils Microns 6 [150] 9.7 2 208 ft /gal Microns [125] [192] 2 [5.

but not limited to. chemicals. oil. Material Titanium Modified 19. 2 6. salts. Touch-up Paint System 13. thinners shall be used.2013-03-08 UOP Technical Data Sheet Paint System 16 Page 1 of 1 970086 T905E-16-0 1. 10. manufacturer and product designations shall 22. require written approval from UOP before proceeding. moisture. 1 SSPC SP-11 for Touch-up and Repair. Paint System for Ultra Hot Petrochemical Environment – For Insulated and Non-Insulated Piping Systems. The topcoat color is Metallic Gray (Aluminum). . Coating shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and NRF-053-PEMEX-2006. Ferritic Steel Equipment and Machinery (400° C ≤ Temp ≤ 650° C) Surface Preparation Coat No. 15. not estimated. 14. Notes Any deviation to this paint system including. Sa 3 (SSPC SP-5) Surface Profile micron All dirt. Generic Material Type Titanium Modified Inorganic Copolymer (34% Solids) Titanium Modified Inorganic Copolymer (34% Solids) Manufacturer International Paint Application Method Spray Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) 100 micron mil micron mil Surface Profile 50-75 micron mil Maximum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) 100 micron mil micron mil 16. 3. grease. 4. Only manufacturer’s recommended 9. Application 11. Inorganic Copolymer (64% solids) 20. 21. and other 50-75 mil contamination shall be removed prior to abrasive blasting. to ensure consistency during coating application. 1 ISO 8501-1. 8. 17. 12. Amount of thinner used shall be measured. . Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 2. Mixing and Thinning Materials shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2 Spray 100 100 Paint Materials Product Designation Interbond 1202UPC Remarks Two (2) Coats Required 18. Top Coat Color 7. Surface Preparation Coat No. Application Minimum Dry Film Maximum Dry Film Generic Material Type Method Thickness (DFT) Thickness (DFT) Titanium Modified micron micron Inorganic Copolymer (34% Spray 100 100 mil mil Solids) Titanium Modified micron micron Inorganic Copolymer (34% Spray 100 100 mil mil Solids) 5.

.

.

.

.

manufacturer and product designations shall 23. NRF-053-PEMEX-2006. 1 Material Epoxy Phenolic (67% solids) Epoxy Phenolic (67% solids) Manufacturer International Paint Product Designation Intertherm 228 Remarks 20. 8. 1 2 ISO 8501-1. (Section 8. chemicals. 12. Ferritic Steel Equipment and Machinery (120° C ≤ Temp ≤ 205° C) Surface Preparation Coat No. Sa 3 (SSPC SP-5) Surface Profile micron All dirt. and other 38-63 mil contamination shall be removed prior to abrasive blasting. 2. grease. Only manufacturer’s recommended 9. 5. 3. 125 1 Spray 100 mil mil Phenolic (65% solids) 2 Component Epoxy micron micron 16. oil. 2 Spray 100 125 Phenolic (65% solids) mil mil 17. Application Minimum Dry Film Maximum Dry Film Generic Material Type Method Thickness (DFT) Thickness (DFT) 2 Component Epoxy micron micron Spray 100 125 Phenolic (65% solids) mil mil 2 Component Epoxy micron micron Spray 100 125 Phenolic (65% solids) mil mil Top Coat Color The topcoat color is per NRF-009-PEMEX-2004 (Section 8. CTSE1000. Mixing and Thinning Materials shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.0403.2013-03-08 UOP Technical Data Sheet Paint System 17 Page 1 of 1 970086 T905E-17-0 1.3. PIP 11. 6. salts. Amount of thinner used shall be measured. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Application Coating shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. moisture. Touch-up Paint System SSPC-SP11 Surface Profile micron Surface 13. 2 International Paint Intertherm 228 Notes Any deviation to this paint system including. 10.13: Identification of Pipes) and P.01:2007 CN 7. Preparation mil 50-75 Application Minimum Dry Film Maximum Dry Film 14. require written approval from UOP before proceeding. Final pipeline top coat colors shall be based upon line list. . to ensure consistency during coating application. 22. . 19. Paint Materials 18. not estimated. Paint System for Refinery Environment – For Insulated Piping Systems. Coat No. Coat No. 21. 4. Generic Material Type Method Thickness (DFT) Thickness (DFT) 2 Component Epoxy micron micron 15. and 970086 S905F documents. thinners shall be used.6: Identification of Facilities). but not limited to.

t and stated volume solids 6.83 lb/gal (340 g/lt) EPA Method 24 199 g/kg EU Solvent Emissions Directive (Council Directive 1999/13/EC) See Product Characteristics section for further details Protective Coatings Page 1 of 4 Issue Date:11/30/2011 Ref:2491 Worldwide Product .t and stated volume solids Allow appropriate loss factors Airless Spray. two component. Roller PRACTICAL INFORMATION FOR INTERTHERM 228 Color Gloss Level Volume Solids Typical Thickness Theoretical Coverage Practical Coverage Method of Application Drying Time Overcoating Interval with recommended topcoats Temperature 50°F (10°C) 59°F (15°C) 77°F (25°C) 104°F (40°C) Touch Dry 8 hours 7 hours 5 hours 3 hours Hard Dry 16 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours Minimum 36 hours 24 hours 16 hours 16 hours Maximum 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days REGULATORY DATA Flash Point Product Weight VOC Part A 79°F (26°C). process vessels etc.ft/US gallon at 4 mils d.Intertherm® 228 Epoxy Phenolic PRODUCT DESCRIPTION INTENDED USES A highly crosslinked.70 m²/liter at 100 microns d. Intertherm 228 has excellent resistance to "thermal shock" experienced during rapid temperature cycling. Brush. Intertherm 228 has been specifically designed to provide a corrosion resistant barrier when used to protect steelwork beneath thermal insulation in areas subjected to wet and dry cycling. operating at temperatures up to 446°F (230°C). high build Epoxy Phenolic coating which combines properties of corrosion and chemical resistance when used in high temperature service. Air Spray..f. Mixed 75°F (24°C) 15.f.86 kg/l) 2. Limited color range Eggshell 67% 4 mils (100 microns) dry equivalent to 6 mils (149 microns) wet 269 sq. Part B 118°F (48°C). including insulated and uninsulated steel. and on the exterior or pipework.5 Ib/gal (1. Suitable for exposure in a wide range of highly corrosive environments.

Power Tool Cleaning (Small Areas Only) Intertherm 228 is suitable for application over power tool cleaned surfaces prepared to a minimum of SSPC SP11.43-0. angular surface profile of 2-3 mils (50-75 microns) is recommended. Oil or grease should be removed in accordance with SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning. It is good working practice to periodically flush out spray equipment during the course of the working day. Prior to paint application all surfaces should be assessed and treated in accordance with ISO 8504:2000. A sharp. Clean Up Page 2 of 4 . (3) Combine entire contents of Curing Agent (Part B) with Base (Part A) and mix thoroughly with power agitator. and smooth weld seams and sharp edges.0 mils (50-75 microns) can be achieved Suitable . should be ground. Frequency of cleaning will depend upon amount sprayed.53 mm) Total output fluid pressure at spray tip not less than 2503 psi (176 kg/cm²) Gun DeVilbiss MBC or JGA Air Cap 704 or 765 Fluid Tip E Air Spray (Pressure Pot) Brush Roller Thinner Cleaner Work Stoppages Recommended Suitable . Abrasive Blast Cleaning This product must only be applied to surfaces prepared by abrasive blast cleaning to Sa2½ (ISO 8501-1:2007) or SSPC SP6. Intertherm 228 must be applied before oxidation of the steel occurs.0 mils (50-75 microns) can be achieved International GTA220 (International GTA415) Do not thin more than allowed by local environmental legislation International GTA822 or International GTA220 (or International GTA415) Do not allow material to remain in hoses. remove weld spatter. (1) Agitate Base (Part A) with a power agitator. gun or spray equipment. Surface defects revealed by the blast cleaning process. including any delays. Always mix a complete unit in the proportions supplied. If oxidation does occur the entire oxidized area should be reblasted to the standard specified above. all scale must be removed and all areas which cannot be prepared adequately should be spot blasted to a minimum standard of SSPC SP6 or Sa2 (ISO 8501-1:2007). filled. Surfaces may be primed with Intertherm 228 (thinned 10% GTA220) to 40 microns (1. Once the unit has been mixed it must be used within the working pot life specified. temperature and elapsed time. All surplus materials and empty containers should be disposed of in accordance with appropriate regional regulations/legislation. (2) Agitate Curing Agent (Part B) with a power agitator. Clean all equipment immediately after use with International GTA822. Once units of paint have been mixed they should not be resealed and it is advised that after prolonged stoppages work recommences with freshly mixed units.0-3. APPLICATION Mixing Material is supplied in two containers as a unit. Where necessary.Intertherm® 228 Epoxy Phenolic SURFACE PREPARATION All surfaces to be coated should be clean. 5 part(s) : 1 part(s) by volume 50°F (10°C) 5 hours Recommended 59°F (15°C) 4 hours 77°F (25°C) 2 hours 104°F (40°C) 1 hour Mix Ratio Working Pot Life Airless Spray Tip Range 17-21 thou (0. Note.Small areas only Typically 2. dry and free from contamination. Thoroughly flush all equipment with International GTA822.0-3.Small areas only Typically 2.5 mils) dry film thickness before oxidation occurs. or treated in the appropriate manner.

which will form part of the film during normal ambient cure conditions. Surface temperature must always be a minimum of 5°F (3°C) above dew point. Application at temperatures below 50°F (10°C) will result in extended drying times. In common with all epoxies Intertherm 228 will chalk and “yellow” on exterior exposure. or initial stripe coating. drips. humidity and film thickness. All deficiencies and defects should be corrected. However. Intertherm 228 is an immersion grade epoxy phenolic coating. and is operating at continuous in-service temperatures ranging from ambient up to 392°F (200°C). Intertherm 228 will also show a marked color change when exposed to higher temperatures. Maximum performance is not attained until the film has completely cured. and is suitable for use in situations of continuous intimate contact with wet insulation. The use of other methods. Good ventilation throughout application and cure. inclusions or other defects. After the last coat has cured hard. Curing times are proportionately shorter at elevated temperatures and longer at lower temperatures. The cured film should be essentially free of runs. The curing times will vary depending upon dry film thickness and conditions that exist during application and throughout curing periods. will also effect VOC values determined using EPA Method 24. Application by air spray may require a multiple cross spray pattern to attain optimum film build. it is recommended that Intertherm 228 is applied as a three coat system at 2. Intertherm 228 is normally topcoated with itself. Low molecular weight reactive additives. Cure is a function of temperature. When applying by methods other than airless spray. SYSTEMS COMPATIBILITY This system is self-priming and is not suitable for application over other primers. sags. When applying Intertherm 228 by brush or roller. are essential to ensure full removal of retained solvent and optimum performance of cured film. it may be necessary to apply multiple coats to achieve the total specified system dry film thickness.g. for other suitable topcoats please consult International Protective Coatings. with intermittent surges up to 446°F (230°C). the coating system dry film thickness should be measured using a suitable nondestructive magnetic gauge to verify the average total applied system thickness. When applying Intertherm 228 in confined spaces. these phenomena are not detrimental to anti-corrosive performance provided recommended temperature limits are not exceeded. However. the required film build is unlikely to be achieved. Page 3 of 4 . The total coating system film thickness applied must not exceed 12 mils (300 microns) in order to avoid cracking during high temperature service. Intertherm 228 is suitable for protection of insulated steelwork. Maximum film build in one coat is best attained by airless spray. may require more than one coat and are suggested only for small areas. If Intertherm 228 is to be applied by brush to coat small areas for maintenance purposes. The relative humidity during application and curing should not exceed 80%. This color change is more noticeable in lighter shades and at temperatures in excess of 302°F (150°C). ensure adequate ventilation. Note: VOC values are typical and are provided for guidance purpose only. The coating system should be free of all pinholes or other holidays. Normally Intertherm 228 coating systems at 8 mils (200 microns) dry film thickness will exhibit full and complete cure for optimal temperature resistance in 7-10 days at 77°F (25°C). Intertherm 228 is not intended for use as an internal tanklining. and firm control of film thickness. Care should be taken to avoid over-application.5 mils (195 microns). which may cycle between wet and dry conditions. e. brush or roller.5 mils (65 microns) per coat to give a total coating system dry film thickness of 7.Intertherm® 228 Epoxy Phenolic PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS Intertherm 228 is typically applied as a two coat system at 4 mils (100 microns) per coat to give a total coating system film thickness of 8 mils (200 microns). These may be subject to variation depending on factors such as differences in color and normal manufacturing tolerances.

11/30/2011. If in doubt regarding the suitability of use of this product. We hereby disclaim any warranties or representations. dust and fumes will be emitted which will require the use of appropriate personal protective equipment and adequate local exhaust ventilation. You should request a copy of this document and review it carefully.com or www. including. Safety & Environmental standards and regulations.83 US gal Part B 3. Rect Bottom Disclaimer The information in this data sheet is not intended to be exhaustive. Store in dry. Subject to re-inspection thereafter.com: • Definitions & Abbreviations • Surface Preparation • Paint Application • Theoretical & Practical Coverage Individual copies of these information sections are available upon request.17 US gal 3. 11/30/2011.67 liter 4.7 kg 73 lb STORAGE Shelf Life 6 months minimum at 77°F (25°C). In the event welding or flame cutting is performed on metal coated with this product. shaded conditions away from sources of heat and ignition.com. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This product is intended for use only by professional applicators in industrial situations in accordance with the advice given on this sheet. The information contained in this data sheet is liable to modification from time to time in the light of experience and our policy of continuous development. Should there be any discrepancies between this document and the version of the Technical Data Sheet that appears on the website. Therefore.international-pc.international-pc.96 kg 8 lb SHIPPING WEIGHT Unit Size 20 liter 5 US gal Part A 35.international-marine. express or implied.33 liter 0. Copyright © AkzoNobel.com Page 4 of 4 .international-pc. any person using the product for any purpose other than that specifically recommended in this data sheet without first obtaining written confirmation from us as to the suitability of the product for the intended purpose does so at their own risk. www. Copyright © AkzoNobel. Rect Top PACK SIZE Unit Size 20 liter 5 US gal Vol Part A Pack 20 liter 5 US gal Vol Part B Pack 5 liter 1 US gal 16. All products supplied and technical advice given are subject to our Conditions of Sale. by operation of law or otherwise. All work involving the application and use of this product should be performed in compliance with all relevant national. unless we specifically agree in writing to do so. It is the user's responsibility to check with their local International Paint representative that this data sheet is current prior to using the product. Health. without limitation. the Material Safety Data Sheet and the container(s). we do not accept any liability at all for the performance of the product or for (subject to the maximum extent permitted by law) any loss or damage arising out of the use of the product. and should be the same as this document. any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. then the version on the website will take precedence. All advice given or statements made about the product (whether in this data sheet or otherwise) is correct to the best of our knowledge but we have no control over the quality or the condition of the substrate or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. This Technical Data Sheet is available on our website at www.Intertherm® 228 Epoxy Phenolic D ADDITIONAL et INFORMATION ai l T o p Further information regarding industry standards. and should not be used without reference to the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) which International Protective Coatings has provided to its customers. consult International Protective Coatings for further advice. terms and abbreviations used in this data sheet can be found in the following documents available at www.

.2012-10-30 UOP M&ET—Technical Data Sheet Structural-Steel Painting and Galvanizing Painted or Galvanized Painted Galvanized NA Page 1 of 1 970086 T905FS-0 1 2 3 Steel shapes and plates 4 ASTM A490 bolts 5 Bolts other than ASTM A490 6 Nuts and washers 7 Ladders and safety cages 8 Grating and grating fasteners 9 Stair treads Other Fluorokote #1® 10 Handrails and toeboards attached to handrails 11 Toeboards not attached to handrails 12 Pipe rack support 13 Pipe frames 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Remarks: 28 29 30 Location At slip-critical (SC) connection Not SC. or buried (not galvanized) Bracing and Secondary Elements (not galvanized) Ladders and safety cages Steps Rails and Toeboards attached to Rails Handrails Paint System and Touch-Up System Paint System Touch-Up Identifier System Identifier 02A 02A 02A 02A 02A 02A 02A 02A 02A 02A 02A 02A 02A 02A Color YELLOW PMS 803C2X GREEN PMS 378C or 7498C GREEN 7489C YELLOW PMS 803C2X BLACK (Process Black C) YELLOW PMS 803C2X BLACK (Process Black C) Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. fireproofed.

2012-10-30 UOP Documentation Data Sheet Paint Application OMM Finalb Note 3 MRB Finalb Note 3 Page 1 of 1 970086 V905F-0 Proposala Note 1 Reviewb Note 2 DESCRIPTION General 4F 2P 0S 4F 0S 1. 6. 2. X . For documents indicated in the Review column. 3. F . provide an electronic copy or one hard copy.number of weeks prior to shipment. 3. . provide an electronic copy or one hard copy.number of weeks after firm order. For documents indicated in the Proposal column. and inspection plan (ETIP) Examination. and inspection record (ETIR) Nomenclature: S . 2. P . a Proposal drawings and data do not have to be certified or as built. testing.number of weeks prior to beginning surface preparation. 5.if no due date is established Notes: 1. Surface preparation and painting procedure Paint manufacturer’s product data sheet Paint application logs Examination. 4. For documents indicated in the Final columns provide an electronic copy and one hard copy. b Purchaser will indicate in this column the time frame for submission of materials using the nomenclature given at the end of this form. testing. Typical data shall be clearly identified as such.

Language 1. o. and Documents Page 1 of 3 970086 S140A-0 1. Scope This document defines technical requirements for language.033 kg/cm²(a) std m³/h at 15°C kcal/kg mm kcal/h kW cP m. c. b. MKS units shall be defined as follows: a. Enthalpy n. Writing shall be in Spanish language for nameplates. 2. e. 2. Document identification Document shall contain the following identification: 1. i. Writing shall be in English language for technical documents. 3. j. k. 2. Vapor Liquid normal m³/h at 0°C and 1. 3. 2. Supplier or original-equipment-manufacturer name Supplier or original-equipment-manufacturer document designator Revision designator and date Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 2. f. Values of physical quantities shall be expressed in MKS units. Units 1. Units. units. 2. Mass Vapor Liquid kg/h m³/h m³/h kg/m³ l. . Temperature Pressure (gauge) Pressure (absolute) Mass Volume Length Alternate Length Liquid Relative Density C kg/cm²(g) kg/cm²(a) kg m³ m mm sp gr T°C/15°C Liquid Absolute Density kg/m³ at 15°C Vapor Flowing Density Flowing Quantities 1. d.2012-10-08 UOP Specification Language. p. h. and documents. 3. g. Standard Quantities 1. Heat Rate Electrical Power Viscosity 4.

3. 2. 2. b. e.2012-10-08 UOP Specification Language. 4. Reduced copies 1. If C or D-size document is provided. Marked “Certified for Construction” Signed by a person authorized to bind supplier Document shall not be certified for construction unless either of the following is true: a. c. For bid For approval Final As-built 6. If A1 or A2-size document is provided. a copy reduced to A3 or A4 size shall be provided. f. Transmittal letter shall contain the following information: a. For each document listed in the transmittal letter. b. Supplier name UOP purchase order number UOP Technical Requisition designator Supplier reference number Date of submittal Street address of location to which comments and approval should be returned Name and phone number of contact who can confirm receipt of comments and approval Submitted document shall be listed in transmittal letter. . b. Transmittal letter 1. It has been approved without comment. Transmittal letter shall be provided with document or documents. g. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. which shall be one or the following: 1. 2. Certification of final documentation 1. d. 7. a copy reduced to A or B size shall be provided. and Documents 4. the following shall be shown: a. e. Units. d. 3. 2. c. 4. Title Item tag number Page 2 of 3 970086 S140A-0 5. Supplier or original-equipment-manufacturer document designator Revision designator and date Title Number of copies submitted Reason for submittal. 5. Final document shall be both of the following: a.

of the following documents are cited in this document. Units. None Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Page 3 of 3 970086 S140A-0 If approved with comment. . comments have been incorporated without modification. except as otherwise specified. References The most recent edition. and Documents b. 8.2012-10-08 UOP Specification Language.

B.2012-10-08 UOP Specification Documents for Custom-Designed Goods and Services Page 1 of 1 970086 S140C-0 1. Scope This document defines technical requirements for documents. with the revision number or letter inside. except as otherwise specified. 4. an indication of which lines changed shall be provided. C. 5. shall abut cloud. Deletion shall be struck through. a. if available. References The most recent edition. 3. American National Standard ANSI Y14. 3. or D. the following shall apply: a. Change shall be clouded. b. Order-specific document Document created specifically for the order shall comply with this section.2. Decimal Inch Drawing Sheet Size and Format Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Final submittal shall include the native file. If information not on data sheet or drawing changes.1. Revisions 1.1. of the following documents are cited in this document. 2. . b. 4. 2. a markup showing changes shall be provided. Addition shall be underlined. 4. A triangle. Document size Document size shall be ANSI Y14. Inapplicable information Inapplicable information shall be excluded or crossed out.1 flat size A. Native File Submittal 1. If information on data sheet changes. If information on drawing changes.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Final documentation shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic format. . 6. 8. Transmittal letter shall be provided with each document submittal. File name shall include revision designator.2012-10-08 UOP Specification Electronic Documentation Submittal Page 1 of 1 970086 S140V-0 1. 7. 2. Text color. File size should be kept to a minimum and shall not exceed 9 megabytes. For multi-page documents. Electronic files shall be converted directly into PDF or TIFF from the native file rather than scanned. when available. 3. Scope This document defines technical requirements for submittal of documents in electronic form for proposals and review. Transmittal letter 1. The file name shall be the same as the paper document designator. b. Background color shall be white. Requirements 1. 4. line work and diagram shall be black unless color differentiation clarifies the document. 5. a single file containing all pages shall be provided. 3. 2. Adobe® PDF file or TIFF file Native format documents. Electronic documentation shall be in both of the following formats: a.

Installation of Flexible. Testing. 6. Removable/Reusable Insulation Covers for Hot Insulation Service. NRF-034-PEMEX-2011 shall take precedence over UOP specification.2012-11-15 UOP Technical Requisition Insulation Supply and Installation Page 1 of 1 970086 R907F-0 1. 4. UOPM S907O-B. 970086 W907-0. Specification—Examination. 8. Technical Data Sheet – Equipment Insulation Summary 970086 V907F-0. Other Insulation supply. Vessels. 9. 5. PIP INSR1000. Conflicts In case of conflict among the documents above. Acoustic Insulation Systems Specification. Specification – Heat Insulation for High Temperatures in Equipment. Technical Data Sheet. Hot Service Insulation Materials and Installation Specification. Specification – Removable and Reusable Insulation Cover Location 970086 T907R-0. Insulation Inspection Checklist 10. 970086 S150. UOP specifications shall take precedence over Process Industry Practices. 2. July 2012 13. September 2012 12. NRF-034-PEMEX-2011 shall take precedence over Process Industry Practices. except as otherwise noted. installation. 7. March 2011 3. 2. and related goods and services shall comply with the most recent version. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Shop-Insulated Pipe 11. External High Temperature Insulation and Weathershielding 970086 S907-0. Documentation Data Sheet – Insulation Supply and Installation 970086 T801EL-0. and Pipe Surface UOP Specification 9-11-7. PIP INSH1000. February 2011 14. and Inspection Plan and Record 4. Piping Line List – NOTE: Please refer to the latest Line List for the up-to-date listing of pipeline insulation thicknesses. Cap for Field-Welded. PIP INIH1000. Insulation and installation Insulation and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with the following documents: 1. Scope This document defines technical requirements for insulation materials and installation of insulation. 3. 2. 3. the following shall apply: 1. Extent of Hot Service Insulation 970086 T907FE-0. Hot Insulation Installation Details. . NRF-034-PEMEX-2011. of the following documents: 1. PIP INSA1000. Specification – Insulation 970086 S907R-0.

.....................................................................1 General ................................3 Mastics and Coating Finish Weatherproofing ..............2 References ....................................................... 6 2..................................... 2 1....................................................................................................... 5 2....................................................................... 1 1..................................................... 14 1....................................................................................... 8 2...............................1 Personnel Protection..................4 Extent of Insulation ............................................................................ Form QUA-03-6 .............................................................................................................................. 11 4...................................... consistent with the requirements of UOP Project Specifications...........................................................1 Scope a..................................................... 12 4....................................... 14 4................................................................................................... APPLICATION .....................................6 Steam and Electrical Heat Tracing ...............................................................................................................Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines............ Illinois 60017-5017............................... GENERAL 1.................................................................................................................................................................... 8 2...................................................................... 10 3..................... 6 2.......................................... 7 2..... MATERIALS ................................................. USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 1 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission......................................... 9 3...... 9 2........... 12 4....................................................2 Jacket Weatherproofing...................................8 Noise Reduction ................ and Fitting of Insulation....................................................... 5 2........................................... 5 2........................ Insulation is used to perform the following tasks: (1) (2) (3) (4) Personnel protection Heat conservation Fire insulation Noise reduction b........ 4 2.............5 Handling..... 9 3.............3 Insulating Temperature ........3 Metal Weatherproofing .............................................................4 Mastic Weatherproofing ............................. GENERAL ..... 13 4....3 Definitions .7 Fire Insulation .......... Cutting............................................................. 9 3....................................................................................................... This Standard Specification covers the general requirements for external insulation and weathershielding applied to equipment and piping operating from 70F (20C) through 1500F (815C)......................................................................................5 Insulation of Flanges .......................... 12 4.......................................................................... DESIGN ..................................... Selection of the insulation system and its attachment method shall be the responsibility of the Owner/Contractor.....................................................................................9 Weatherproofing ............2 Heat Conservation ...............1 Scope ........................... 1 1.............................1 Insulation .........2 Insulation ....................................................... Transporting.............................................................. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP Table of Contents Table of Contents ................................................................. 1 1...................................................................................................................................................

AluminumCoated. use the edition of that document required by the referenced document. References Unless noted below. USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 2 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Sheet. 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process”. by the Hot-Dip Process. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP c. “Standard Specification for Portland Cement”. and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications”. “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber HydraulicSetting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement”. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): (1) A 240 / A 240M “Standard Specification for Chromium and ChromiumNickel Stainless Steel Plate.2 Exceptions or variations shown in the UOP Project Specifications take precedence over the requirements shown herein. “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet. (2) A 463/ A 463M A 653/ A 653M (3) (4) A 792/ A 792M B 209/ B 209M C 150 C 168 (5) (6) (7) (8) C 195 (9) C 449/ C 449M Form QUA-03-6 .” “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet. Illinois 60017-5017. “Standard Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation”. When a referenced document incorporates another document.Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process”. “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement”. use the edition and addenda of each referenced document current on the date of this Standard Specification. a. “Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and Plate”. 1. “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet.

Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP (10) C 450 “Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping and Vessel Lagging”. (11) C 533 (12) C 547 (13) C 552 (14) C 553 (15) C 585 (16) C 592 (17) C 610 (18) C 612 (19) C 647 (20) C 795 Form QUA-03-6 . “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation”. “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (MetalMesh Covered) (Industrial Type)”. “Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel”. “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation”. “Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation”. USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 3 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Illinois 60017-5017. “Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System)”. “Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation”. “Standard Guide to Properties and Tests of Mastics and Coating Finishes for Thermal Insulation”. “Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation”. “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications”.

Form QUA-03-6 . “Standard Specification for Spray-Applied Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal Insulation”.3. “Guide for Pressure-Relieving and Depressuring Systems”. c. Transporting. Receiving. and local governmental regulations and laws. f. “Control of Corrosion Under Thermal Insulation and Fireproofing Materials – A System Approach” National. “Standard Practice for Handling. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) B31. and Application of Thermal Insulation Materials for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel”. (22) C 921 (23) C 929 (24) C 930 (25) C 1029 (26) C 1094 (27) E 84 b. d.Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 4 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. 1. Section I. Storage. ASME. “Standard Guide for Flexible Removable Insulation Covers”.3 Definitions Terms pertaining to insulation systems used in UOP Specifications shall be defined in accordance with ASTM C 168. “Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation”. Shipping. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. e. Illinois 60017-5017. “Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”. state. “ Rules for the Construction of Power Boilers” National Association of Corrosion Engineer (NACE) International Standard Practice SP-0198. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP (21) C 892 “Standard Specification for High-Temperature Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation”. “Standard Classification of Potential Health and Safety Concerns Associated with Thermal Insulation Materials and Accessories”. American Petroleum Institute (API) Recommended Practice (RP) 521. “Process Piping”.

f.Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP 2. g. measures shall be taken for corrosion under insulation. platforms. Heat conservation insulation shall be used if normal operating temperature exceeds 150ºF (65ºC). c. The primary consideration for using personnel protection insulation shall be to limit the temperature of exposed surfaces. or walkways and within 3 feet (900 mm) horizontally of handrails. or open guards at least 3 inches (75 mm) from the hot surface. b. or open guards. shield. Personnel protection shall be by barriers. Where the operating temperature is 250ºF (120ºC) or less. When the operating temperature is below 250ºF (120ºC) and heat conservation insulation is needed. DESIGN 2. or walkways adjacent to paths traveled by personnel. The rate of heat loss per unit area through the selected insulation system(s) is based upon average annual ambient temperature and average annual wind speed and shall be limited to the values specified below: Form QUA-03-6 . Equipment and piping with a bare metal temperature above 150F (65C) and that do not require insulation for heat conservation shall be provided with personnel protection.2 Heat Conservation a. The outer surface temperature of insulation system(s) shall not exceed 150F (65C) within the envelope defined in Section 2. but insulation is neither permitted nor provided. not insulation. shields. 2. Where personnel protection is required. unless loss of heat is desirable. c. b. platforms. corrosion under insulation is a concern.1. Design of personnel protection insulation shall be based upon summer day bulb temperature of minimum 95 ºF (35ºC) and low wind velocity at maximum 2 mph to reflect a worst case condition. d. USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 5 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. e. Personnel protection shall be provided on portions of equipment or piping 7 feet (2100 mm) or less above grade. Illinois 60017-5017. protection shall consist of barriers.b.1 Personnel Protection a.

(2) (3) 2.700 (316 – 370) 701 .260 ) 501 . use the higher of the inlet or outlet temperature. exhaust. Lines exhausting to atmosphere do not require insulation. Equipment and piping requiring insulation for process reasons are indicated on the UOP Piping and Instrument Diagrams (P&ID’s). condensate piping and flanges.3 Insulating Temperature a. including valve body to bonnet flanges.4 Extent of Insulation a. exhaust and condensate. Manways and exchanger heads shall be insulated with easily removable and reusable insulation system(s). The temperatures are listed in the UOP Project Specifications.900 (371 – 480) Above 900 (480) 2.500 ( 206 . For compressors and exchangers. Steam turbines shall be insulated for the maximum operating temperature of the steam supply listed in the UOP Project Specifications. Steam generation piping systems per ASME Section I shall be insulated for the maximum operating temperature and as shown n UOP project specification.Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. Piping (1) With the exception of steam supply. b. Form QUA-03-6 .600 (261 – 315 ) 601 . Equipment (1) Maximum Rate of Heat Loss (based on insulation system mean temperature) Btu/ft2·h W/m2 Kcal/m2·h 70 220 186 75 235 200 80 250 213 85 270 226 90 285 240 95 300 253 Equipment shall be insulated for the highest operating temperature listed in the UOP Project Specifications. Steam supply. Illinois 60017-5017. piping shall be insulated for the highest operating temperature of the connected equipment. shall be insulated for the maximum operating temperature listed in the UOP Project Specifications. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP Maximum Operating Temperature F ( C ) 70 – 400 ( 21 – 205 ) 401 . (2) b. USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 6 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

Paragraph 300. on insulated process lines or equipment with an operating temperature over 800F (425C) shall not be insulated. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP c. and valve packing glands shall not be insulated. strainers.3. dials. Flanges in hydrogen service [hydrogen service is defined as a system containing hydrogen as a major component in the process stream or when the hydrogen partial pressure is equal to or greater than 100 psia (7. toxic.(1). shall meet the requirement of Paragraph 2. is required at vessel to skirt connections when the operating temperature of the vessel exceeds 700F (370C) or is greater than 500F (260C) with a wall thickness greater than 2 inches (50 mm).Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. 2. Illinois 60017-5017. (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Form QUA-03-6 . as defined in Figure 1.2 shall not be insulated.b. sightglasses. and severe cyclic services. etc. when insulated. shall remain unobstructed and in clear view. Flanges in toxic. including valve body to bonnet flanges. g. Heat traced flanges for hydrogen. Expansion joint bellows. Void areas are to be packed with a mineral fiber insulation. External stiffening rings on vessels and piping shall be insulated with the same thickness as required for vessels or piping. Insulation shall be applied so that there is no interference with either the operation or function of the equipment. h. steam traps. Provide adequate space for removal of flange bolting without damage to the surrounding insulation. or valves.0 kg/cm2) or service containing 90% hydrogen or higher at any pressure level] shall not be insulated. instrument. Insulation shall be applied behind the nameplate mounting bracket(s) but insulation shall not cover the nameplate. An air space. General (1) Flanges. ball joints. e. The entire stiffening ring shall be maintained at the same temperature as the shell of vessel and piping.5. USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 7 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Piping and equipment insulation shall be continuous at all penetrations. d. or severe cycling services as defined in ASME B31. Gauges. Heat traced flanges shall be insulated. f.5 Insulation of Flanges a.

The primary consideration for using tracing and associated insulation shall be control of process temperatures.15.Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. 2. Where this credit is taken. strain. Requirements for Insulated Flanges (1) For hydrocarbon and other hazardous services. Bolting materials shall be suitable for the insulated flange maximum operating temperature. The design shall permit removal of the insulation system and flange bolting without damage to the insulation. a flange leak detection system shall be provided. the insulation thickness and other requirements shall be in accordance with API RP 521. Weathershielding of flanges shall be in accordance with Figures 2 and 3. The primary consideration for the use of fire protection insulation shall be control of the rate of heat gain in a fire. b. Insulation systems around flanged joints shall be provided with 1/2 inch (12 mm) drain and vent tubes ("telltales").6 Steam and Electrical Heat Tracing a. Credit for the insulation may be considered for evaluation of the fire exposure relief case of equipment and piping. The equipment and pipe insulation may be oversized to accommodate the tracer(s).7 Fire Insulation a. Insulation for steam and electric heat tracing shall be in accordance with UOP Project Specifications. (2) (3) (4) (5) c.5. b. Illinois 60017-5017. Weathershielding (1) (2) Requirements for weathershielding are indicated on the UOP P&ID's and UOP Project Specifications. 2. and creep. Section 3. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP b. Form QUA-03-6 . Flanges shall not be weathershielded until pressure and leak testing are complete. The use of sniffers shall be determined on a case by case basis consistent with local laws and codes. Flanges with spectacle blinds shall be provided with flexible type removable and reusable insulation systems. The drains and vents shall be piped to a safe location. considering stress. USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 8 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

Mineral fiber hydraulic setting thermal insulating and finishing cement in accordance with ASTM C 449/C 449M.9 Weatherproofing Weatherproofing shall be applied to all insulation. Where noise reduction is needed. Cellular glass thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C 552. Form QUA-03-6 .8 Noise Reduction a. Spray-applied rigid cellular polyurethane thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C 1029. Mineral fiber pipe insulation in accordance with ASTM C 547. MATERIALS 3. Illinois 60017-5017. 3. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP 2. a composite system of a sound absorber and sound barrier shall be utilized. For more effective treatment. 2. Mineral fiber blanket thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C 553. Molded expanded perlite block and pipe thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C 610. USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 9 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.1 Insulation a. The primary consideration for use of noise reduction insulation shall be control of noise to industry standard level. Calcium silicate block and pipe thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C 533. Securement shall be by glass reinforced adhesive tape. No screws or “Z” clips are permitted. Mineral fiber blanket insulation (metal-mesh covered) in accordance with ASTM C 592. resulting in a decoupled barrier system. multiple layers of the composite system shall be used. High temperature fiber blanket thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C 892. Insulation materials shall conform to the following: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement in accordance with ASTM C 195.Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. b. Mineral fiber block and board thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C 612.

perlite. Paragraphs 3. Insulating materials. coatings.15. and suitable for application to the substrate surface. c. cellular glass. zinc or aluminum coated steel. Insulation used for fire exposure or as part of a fireproofing system shall function effectively.4 for up to two hours.Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. General (1) (2) Jacketing material shall be stainless steel. shall be asbestos-free. USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 10 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. The typical rankings for resistance to moisture from best to worst are cellular glass. Stainless steel or steel jackets are required on any insulation system where insulation is considered to be in place for the relief valve fire exposure design case. coastal) locations where moisture absorption is a concern. 3.g. etc.15. mineral wool. Inner and outer diameters of rigid insulation for piping and tubing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 585. sealants. when exposed to fire temperatures and duration in accordance with API RP 521. or is a part of a fireproofing system. and calcium silicate. Insulation materials and vapor barriers for weatherproofing shall have a maximum flame spread of 25 in accordance with ASTM E 84. i. fabrics. mineral wool and glass fiber. retaining its integrity and insulating value. Insulation in areas subjected to abuse shall be selected considering its ability to resist damage. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP b. non-corrosive whether wet or dry. Joint sealers and flashing compounds shall be non-shrinking and permanently flexible. The typical ranking for resistance to damage from best to worst are calcium silicate. d. e. The insulation shall also resist dislodgment by fire water streams. Consideration shall be given to select the insulation materials to be used for wet (e.5. f. j. Removable insulation covers shall be in accordance with ASTM C 1094.5.2 through 3. Illinois 60017-5017. g.2 Jacket Weatherproofing a. h. (3) Form QUA-03-6 . finishing cements.. perlite. or aluminum in accordance with ASTM C 921. Thermal insulation and accessories to be used in contact with austenitic stainless steel surfaces shall be in accordance with ASTM C 795. Stainless steel or steel jackets are required in areas subject to severe mechanical damage. flashing compounds.

Weatherproofing material shall have a maximum flame spread of 25 in accordance with ASTM E 84. Illinois 60017-5017. Type 304 or 316. Mastic and coating finish materials shall be in accordance with ASTM C 647. Zinc coated steel jacketing materials shall be in accordance with ASTM A 653/ A 653M. and on equipment heads. Edges shall be overlapped with a bead of flexible joint sealant applied on the lap. Form QUA-03-6 . Flat or smooth jacketing may be used on piping through 24 inches in diameter. Aluminum coated steel jacketing materials shall be in accordance with ASTM A 463/A 463M. 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) pitch corrugated or crimped jacketing shall be used on vertical vessels and storage tanks. (6) (7) (8) (9) b. Aluminum jacketing materials shall be in accordance with ASTM B 209/ B 209M. d. Type 3003-H14 or 5005-H14. exchangers.3 Mastics and Coating Finish Weatherproofing a. Jacketing materials shall conform to the following: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Stainless steel jacketing materials shall be in accordance with ASTM A 240. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP (4) (5) Jacketing shall be provided with a heat laminated factory-installed moisture barrier. 3. non-corrosive whether wet or dry.Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. 3/16 inch (5 mm) pitch corrugated or crimped jacketing shall be used on piping over 24 inches in diameter and horizontal vessels. USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 11 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Weatherproofing shall be a vapor-permeable type. and suitable for application to the substrate surface. b. Metal weatherproofing subject to corrosive environments shall be coated with a material which resists the environment. Weatherproofing material shall be asbestos-free. Jacketing for exposed heads of vessels and tanks shall be fabricated from stucco embossed sheet and either a multi-segmented or single piece tapered type installation. c. Circumferential corrugations shall be used for services subject to severe mechanical damage. and equipment. 55% aluminum alloy-coated steel materials (hot dipped) shall be in accordance with ASTM A 792.

and resealed. c. d. Defaced insulation shall be filled with sealing compound.1 General a. the insulation shall be inspected for open joints. voids. 4. non-destructive tested and repaired prior to application of insulation. Working parts of valves and other mechanical equipment shall be protected when insulation is applied. the exposed ends shall be temporarily protected with mastic weatherproofing. When installation is halted for more than one hour. Insulation and weatherproofing shall only be applied on dry and clean surfaces. etc. and defacing. Valves. g. Insulation shall be covered with the weatherproofing on the same day the insulation is installed. and heat treatment are completed. Before applying weatherproofing. Insulation systems for equipment and piping shall permit access to parts requiring maintenance without damaging the insulation system. USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 12 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Materials shall be kept dry. e. Insulation shall conform to the contour of the item to be insulated. and installation procedures to be used. insulating system.Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. Insulation showing any evidence of moisture exposure shall not be used. flanged and threaded connections. Illinois 60017-5017. voids. APPLICATION 4. cracks. Weld seams. b. To minimize the stress corrosion cracking (SCC) under insulation. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP e.2 Insulation a. Exposed insulation shall be protected against moisture until the weatherproofing is installed. Insulation with open joints. replaced. and “telltale” holes shall not be insulated until pressure and leak testing. Portland cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C 150. 4. shall be inspected. c. Form QUA-03-6 . g. f. Insulation contractor shall have previous experience with the materials. b. Reinforcement shall be plain open mesh glass or polyester fiber. f. and cracks shall be completely removed. The insulation system shall accommodate expansion and contraction of equipment and piping. the substrate shall be coated as per NACE Standard Practice SP-0198. non-destructive examination. piping. gauges.

USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 13 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. each succeeding layer shall be staggered relative to the longitudinal and circumferential joints of the preceding layer. Jacketing shall be secured with stainless steel bands. valve glands. Corrugated sheets shall be applied with the corrugations positioned vertically. and supported at the horizontal joints by components fabricated from stainless steel. 4. the longitudinal lap shall be approximately 45 from the bottom. Each lap shall be filled with a sealer. shall be flashed weather-tight. e.2. On horizontal installations.a (8). Illinois 60017-5017. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be 1½ inch (40 mm). Lap joints of jacketing shall be arranged so that the overlaps shed water. The inner layers of multiple-layer insulation and insulation on irregular equipment surfaces (where use of bands and seals is impractical) shall be secured using stainless steel wire. The ends shall be bent over and embedded into the insulation. except as noted in paragraph 3. Jacketing shall be installed weather-tight.Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. Breather springs shall be used where required for expansion and contraction. d. hangers. h. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP d. f. A single layer of insulation shall be used up to 3 inches (75 mm) thick. b. Bands shall cover seams between sections of jacketing. Jacketing shall be installed with a minimum lap of 3 inches (75 mm) for circumferential joints and the greater of 3 inches (75 mm) or two corrugations for longitudinal joints. Jacketing for vertical piping and equipment shall be installed starting at the bottom and working upward. Vertical joints shall be staggered between courses. c. mineral fiber blocks and / or expanded perlite. The wire shall be taut and embedded in the insulation.. etc.3 Metal Weatherproofing a. exposed edges of insulation shall not be permitted. g. Form QUA-03-6 . When applying multi-layer insulation. The bottom 3 feet (900 mm) of tank shells shall be insulated with cellular glass. Jacketing shall overlap mastic weatherproofing coatings by a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm). Over 3 inches (75 mm). Longitudinal butt joints in each layer of insulation shall be staggered. the insulation may be applied in single or multiple layers. instrument connections. Insulation openings such as for tracers.

Mastic shall be applied to all corners and crevices where water is likely to collect. Cutting. Handling. and other irregular surfaces. rebound. b. fittings. For valves.Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines. and their application shall be evaluated in accordance with ASTM C 930. tanks. accessories. c. d. and overspray. gauges. mastic coating with reinforcing fabric may serve as the weatherproofing. and Fitting of Insulation a. transporting.4 Mastic Weatherproofing a. Form QUA-03-6 . and compressors shall be weatherproofed with reinforcing fabric and mastic weatherproofing. non-insulated items. e. Health and safety concerns associated with thermal insulation materials. Cutting and fitting of insulation shall be in accordance with ASTM C 450. Mastic weatherproofing shall contain reinforcing material. metal weatherproofing. pumps. and application of thermal insulation materials and accessories for use in contact with austenitic stainless steel shall be in accordance with ASTM C 929. USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 14 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. In abused areas metal jacket weatherproofing shall be provided. the instruments. 4. Mastic weatherproofing shall be used as flashing at all possible sources of moisture penetration. b. Illinois 60017-5017. Transporting. etc. shall be protected from splatter. Prior to application of mastics. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP 4. c.5 Handling. Spheres.

USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 15 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Illinois 60017-5017. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP Form QUA-03-6 .Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines.

USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 16 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Illinois 60017-5017. EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP Form QUA-03-6 .Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines.

EXTERNAL HIGH TEMPERATURE INSULATION AND WEATHERSHIELDING AUTHD 24JAN11 Revised DNM RGP Form QUA-03-6 . USA STANDARD SPECIFICATION 9-11-7 DATE Page 17 STATUS APVD of 17 Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. Illinois 60017-5017.Revision Indication UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines.

the bottom head insulation design must be considered to prevent sagging due to gravity 3. c. 6. Insulation of vessels shall take into account support rings a. 7. . and C612 a.2012-11-06 UOP Specification Insulation Page 1 of 1 970086 S907-0 1. Scope This document defines technical requirements for selection and specification of the insulation system. C553. b. 4. 5. The density of mineral wool insulation for piping less than 200 mm diameter shall be 120 kg/m3 The density of mineral wool insulation for piping greater than or equal to 200 mm diameter shall be 144 kg/m3 The density of mineral wool insulation for equipment shall be 144 kg/m3 Personnel protection insulation shall be provided less than 2100 mm vertically from grade or less than 600 mm horizontally from edges of walkways. b. The support rings shall extend to at least ¾ of the outermost layer of insulation without extending to the outermost edge of the insulation For vertical vessels. Insulation shall never obstruct or interfere with the visibility. Insulation 1. Equipment and piping that requires steam tracing shall use heat transfer cement in its installation and shall be listed on the isometric. operation and maintenance of any measuring or control instrument. 8. ladders and platforms where surface temperature is greater than 60 deg C. 9. Piping and equipment expansion joints (for growth of the base materials) shall be considered in the design and located on the isometrics For items that insulation requirements are not defined or unclear. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. detailed designer shall contact UOP insulation specialist. Equipment or piping that requires steam tracing shall increase the insulation size to accommodate the tracer(s). The insulation material shall be mineral wool per ASTM C547. 2. Lines that require heat dissipation yet must be personnel protected shall be noted on the MFD’s and isometrics “Barrier or Screen Installation Required”. 2.

Control valves in heat traced lines 11. 6. . including channel barrels. covers. 5. 8. 2. 9. Location Removable and reusable covers shall be provided at the following locations: 1. Scope This document defines technical requirements for the location of removable and reusable insulation covers. 4. and bonnets Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission. 2. All heat exchanger front and rear heads.2012-11-08 UOP Specification Removable and Reusable Insulation Cover Location Page 1 of 1 970086 S907R-0 1. 7. Process flange and Terminal Box on Regeneration Heater (BH-500) Process flanges and Terminal Boxes (3) on Air Heater (BH-502) Process flanges and Disengaging Hopper (FA-513) Process flanges and Lift Gas Blower Spillback Cooler (EA-516) Process flanges and Vent Gas Cooler (EA-520) Process flanges and Preheat Gas Heater (EA-521) Process flanges and expansion joints of Regeneration Blower (GB-505) Process flanges of Regeneration Cooler Fan (GB-506) Expansion joints 10. 3.

SHELL AND HEAD SURFACES YES [4] N/A .SOCKETWELD.FLANGE ORIFICE SETS LINES IN HYDROGEN .ELECTRIC TRACED ST . SJ.STEAM JACKETED PF .STRAIGHT OR BENT PIPE YES [4] YES . HJ.FLANGED MANUAL VALVES .HOT FLUID TRACED PP .STEAM TRACED HC HC PP [1] ET.CONTROL VALVES NO [5] YES [5] . ST.SAMPLE PIPING .STEAM TRAPS NO [4] NO NO [2] .FLANGED PIPE FITTINGS [4] YES [5] YES [5] LINES WITH NOTE J IN MFD'S .VESSELS. THREADED.EXPANSION JOINTS (EJ) NO NO NO [4] .PROCESS STABILITY HJ .FLANGED SPECIALTY ITEMS (I.PIPE SUPPORT CLAMPS . ITEMS AMB – 649°C EXCEPTIONS 61°C – 649°C HT. STRAINERS) .EJ ON VENT GAS COOLER SHELL .RELATED STRAINERS .VESSEL HAND HOLES NO [5] [4] N/A Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.PERSONNEL PROTECTION PS .PRIMARY PIPING FOR INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS .HANGER RODS NO NO NO YES .2012-11-06 UOP Technical Data Sheet Extent of Hot Service Insulation Page 1 of 2 970086 T907R-0 INSULATION REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT (NOTE: PROJECT PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SPECIFICATIONS MAY MODIFY THESE REQUIREMENTS.PIPING FLANGES CONNECTED TO SERVICE [6] EQUIPMENT NOZZLES . & PF (AS REQUIRED BY (AMB TO 1200°F) (141°F – 1200°F) THE PURCHASER) . .RELIEF VALVES NO NO NO NO .PREVENTION FROM FREEZING HC . OR BUTTWELD PIPE FITTINGS.HEAT CONSERVATION HT . THREADED. 5] .E.PIPE TRUNNIONS NO NO NO .VENT AND DRAIN PIPING .INSTRUMENTS AND ASSOCIATED TUBING NO NO YES .REGENERATION LOOP EJs . . OR BUTTWELD VALVES ..HOT FLUID JACKETED FP .PIPE UNIONS NO [4] [4] YES [2.) SJ .SOCKETWELD.FIRE PROTECTION INSULATION ET .

HYDROGEN SERVICE IS DEFINED AS A SYSTEM CONTAINING HYDROGEN AS A MAJOR COMPONENT IN THE PROCESS STREAM OR WHEN THE OPERATING HYDROGEN PARTIAL PRESSURE IS EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN 100 PSIA (7. AND BONNETS .HOT FLUID TRACED PP . ST.PERSONNEL PROTECTION PS .VESSEL INSTRUMENT TRIM NO N/A . UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED BY PURCHASER. 4. INCLUDING CHANNEL BARRELS.ELECTRIC HEATERS YES NOTES: 1.PROCESS STABILITY HJ . & PF (AS REQUIRED BY EXCEPTIONS 61°C – 649°C ITEMS AMB – 649°C THE PURCHASER) (141°F – 1200°F) (AMB TO 1200°F) . 5.HOT FLUID JACKETED FP . INSULATION SHALL BE FURNISHED BY EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER.HEAT EXCHANGER SHELL AND INTEGRAL YES [4] N/A SHELL COVER SURFACES YES [5] [4] N/A .2012-11-06 UOP Technical Data Sheet Extent of Hot Service Insulation Page 2 of 2 970086 T907R-0 INSULATION REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT (NOTE: PROJECT PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SPECIFICATIONS MAY MODIFY THESE REQUIREMENTS. 2. COVERS.BLOWERS.) SJ . PERSONNEL PROTECTION (PP) SHALL BE PROVIDED TO 7 FT (2100 mm) ABOVE GRADE OR PLATFORMS AND 2 FT (600 mm) HORIZONTALLY FROM THE PERIPHERY OF PLATFORMS.HEAT CONSERVATION HT . PROVIDE REMOVABLE METAL GUARDS OR SUITABLE PERSONNEL BARRIERS IF REQUIRED FOR PERSONNEL PROTECTION.HEAT EXCHANGER FRONT AND REAR HEADS. HJ. INSULATE OR GUARD ONLY IF REQUIRED FOR PERSONNEL PROTECTION.0 KG/CM2) Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. WALKWAYS. FANS YES [5] N/A .FIRE PROTECTION INSULATION ET .HEAT EXCHANGER FLANGED JOINTS NO [5] [4] N/A . REMOVABLE / REUSABLE COVERS SHALL BE PROVIDED.INTERNALLY INSULATED ITEMS NO [4] N/A .STEAM TRACED ET. OR LADDERS.ELECTRIC TRACED ST . . 6. HC PP [1] HC HT.STEAM JACKETED PF . SJ. 3.VESSEL MANWAYS NO [5] [4] .COMPRESSORS NO N/A N/A .PREVENTION FROM FREEZING HC .

1 Disengaging Hopper Lift Engager No. Pad must be sewn to a metal mesh cover (ASTM C592. Insulation thickness will depend on the unit’s size supplied by the vendor. No Insulation 89 PP Guard. C585).2012-11-06 UOP Technical Data Sheet Equipment Insulation Summary Page 1 of 1 970086 T907FE-0 Item Number BH-500 BH-502 FA-512 FA-513 FA-517 EA-516 Item Description Maximum Operating Temperature (Deg C) 483 571 93 150 38 148 SS / 46 TS Insulation Thickness (mm) 191 178 PP Guard. 2 Lift Gas Blower Spillback Cooler Vent Gas Cooler Insulation thickness will depend on the OD of the Heat Exchanger. ST – Denotes Steam Tracing required and insulation support rings have to be increased by one size to allow for tracer tubes. No Insulation Later Notes Regeneration Heater Air Heater Lift Engager No. Insulation thickness will depend on the OD of the Heat Exchanger. and C612 at 144 kg/m3. Insulation thickness will depend on the OD of the Heat Exchanger. Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission. EA-520 367 SS / 565 TS Later EA-521 Preheat Gas Heater 156 SS / 375 TS Later GA-513 GB-503 GB-505 A/B Organic Chloride Injection Pumps Lift Gas Blower Regeneration Blower 35 135 538 None 38 Later (229) Insulation thickness will depend on the unit’s size supplied by the vendor. C553. Insulation thickness will depend on the unit’s size supplied by the vendor. . GB-506 Regeneration Cooler Fan 50 Later (38) GB-507 A/B Instrument Air Compressor Package Air Drier Dust Collector Booster Gas Coalescer 50 Later (38) ME-502 ME-503 ME-504 40 38 38 None None None Note: All insulation is Mineral Wool per ASTM C547.

b Purchaser will indicate in this column the time frame for submission of materials using the nomenclature given at the end of this form. . provide an electronic copy or one hard copy. 7. C553. 8. 2. testing. 4. 10. caulks. F . cements. 3. and marking pens and tapes that come into contact with stainless steel Certificate of conformance (CFCs) for installation work performed Applicable manufacturer’s material safety data sheets (MSDS) Examination.number of weeks prior to shipment. Typical data shall be clearly identified as such. 3. and C612 Certified material test reports (CMTRs) in accordance with ASTM C795 Certified material test reports (CMTRs) in accordance with ASTM C871 for all mastics. For documents indicated in the Review column. adhesives. labels. and inspection plan Installation schedule Approved deviations Certified material test reports (CMTRs) in accordance with ASTM C547. D . 12. testing. and inspection record Non-Conformance reports Ship Loose insulation packing list Nomenclature: S . X 6F 6F 2S 2S 2S 2S 2S 2S 2S 2S 0S 2. Supplier document index Examination. 9.2012-11-6 UOP Documentation Data Sheet Insulation Supply and Installation Page 1 of 1 970086 V907F-0 OMM Finalb Note 3 MRB Finalb Note 3 Proposala Note 1 Reviewb Note 2 DESCRIPTION General 1. provide an electronic copy or one hard copy. For documents indicated in the Proposal column. 11. For documents indicated in the Final columns provide an electronic copy and three hard copies.number of weeks after firm order. 5. a Proposal drawings and data do not have to be certified or as built. 6. (X if no due date is established) Notes: 1.number of weeks after receipt of approved drawings.

Housekeeping in compliance with site requirements. Veracruz.Modernization of CCR Unit Minatitlan. 5. 2. The materials are correct per the project specifications. Comments: YES NO N/A III. 7. MATERIAL 1. All appropriate safety equipment is present and in use. 8. YES NO N/A . All personnel have received safety training appropriate to the job. SAFETY 1. Existing installed insulation is protected from damage. 3. 2. All joints are correctly staggered. Heat tracing has been installed. All required testing is complete and systems released for insulation by the appropriate authority. All materials have been stored in a manner that prevents contamination by water or process chemicals or physical damage. Insulation samples have been obtained for testing.INSULATION 1. OTHER PEMEX Refincion . Joints are cut and fit to a maximum of 1/8 inch. DATE 970086 I. 4. 9. Mexico PROJECT NO. INSULATION SPEC. The insulation is the correct thickness and numbers of layers. 5. Comments: YES NO N/A II. The surface to be insulated has been coated and released for insulation by the appropriate authority.INSULATION INSPECTION REPORT INSULATION INSPECTION CHECKLIST 970086 W907-0 PAGE 1 OF 3 November 2012 FACILITY NAME LOCATION PO / CONTRACT NO. 3. The surface to be insulated is clean and dry. All materials have been received in approved condition. Appropriate Manufacturer Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are available. 6. 3. All insulation supports are installed properly. inspected and released for insulation by the appropriate authority. 5. 2. 4. 4. INSTALLATION . EQUIPMENT ID PIPE LINE ID P&ID NO.

DATE 970086 III. 9. finish. Comments: good average unacceptable . INSTALLATION – WEATHERPROOFING. Veracruz. Flashing is properly installed. 11. AND FITTING COVERS 1. OTHER PEMEX Refincion . Metal jacket overlap. The extent of insulation is correct. INSULATION SPEC. thickness. Mexico PROJECT NO. 2.). Expansion or contraction springs are correctly installed and spaced. Securement is properly spaced. 7. are correct. Workmanship (check the appropriate rank). 6. The correct material has been used (type. Expansion / contraction joints are correctly installed and spaced. 12. 3. INSTALLATION – INSULATION (Cont’d) 10. 5. 11. Vapor barrier is correctly installed and undamaged. 14.INSULATION INSPECTION REPORT INSULATION INSPECTION CHECKLIST 970086 W907-0 PAGE 2 OF 3 November 2012 FACILITY NAME LOCATION PO / CONTRACT NO. 13. JACKETING. 13. All terminations have been caulked / sealed. 8. All joints are sealed / buttered. Mastic type. reinforcement and overlap are correct. EQUIPMENT ID PIPE LINE ID P&ID NO. Expansion or contraction springs are correctly installed and spaced. 17 Comments: good average YES NO N/A unacceptable IV. 14. thickness. Metal jacket securement is correct. amount and placement. The insulation securement is correct. Banding ends and seals are configured to prevent sharp ends. 16. 15. 4. “S” clips are used as specified. 12. Joints are properly caulked / sealed. etc. YES NO N/A 10. Workmanship (check the appropriate rank).Modernization of CCR Unit Minatitlan. Metal gores are properly installed.

5.INSULATION INSPECTION REPORT INSULATION INSPECTION CHECKLIST 970086 W907-0 PAGE 3 OF 3 November 2012 FACILITY NAME LOCATION PO / CONTRACT NO.Modernization of CCR Unit Minatitlan. Valve extension handles are installed. Jacketing properly caulked. AND EQUIPMENT 1. Comments: good average YES NO N/A unacceptable INSPECTION COMPLETED BY: (Printed) . EQUIPMENT ID PIPE LINE ID P&ID NO. 3. Veracruz. 4. 2. Mexico PROJECT NO. 6. DATE 970086 V. OTHER PEMEX Refincion . Workmanship (check the appropriate rank). INSTALLATION – FLANGES. INSULATION SPEC. VALVES. Removable/reusable covers properly made and installed. Allowance for bolt removal is correct.

s907o-b.dgn 07/19/2004 09:44:39 AM .

EDITORIAL REVISION October 2007 Process Industry Practices Insulation PIP INIH1000 Hot Insulation Installation Details .

While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. administrative. this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. PRINTING HISTORY October 1997 Issued February 2002 Editorial Revision September 2005 October 2007 Technical Revision Editorial Revision Not printed with State funds . These are printed with the express permission of MICA. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). overlays. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations. Note (added February 2002): PIP INIH1000. The University of Texas at Austin. or standards organizations. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. may incorporate drawings and other information previously published in standards owned and copyrighted by the Midwest Insulation Contractors Association (MICA). PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. Construction Industry Institute. contractors. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. Changes. This Practice is subject to revision at any time. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. addenda. such laws or regulations must be followed. Hot Insulation Installation Details. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500). application. Austin. Texas 78759.

........ 2 Industry Codes and Standards ..Vertical Insulation Support Multi-Layer INIH0006 Piping ............ 2 Details INIH0001 Piping ................1 Purpose.....Vertical Insulation Support Single Layer INIH0004 Piping ..........General Arrangement INIH0002 Piping ......... 2 1.... 2 1.......2 Scope ....... References ...........EDITORIAL REVISION October 2007 Process Industry Practices Insulation PIP INIH1000 Hot Insulation Installation Details Table of Contents 1.................Insulation Connections INIH0009 Removable and Reusable Insulation ....... Introduction....Layered Insulation INIH0003 Piping ......................Flange Insulation INIH0007 Piping ....Flexible INIH0010 Valve Cover INIH0011 Pipe Supports INIH0050 Vertical Vessels with Outside Diameters over 900 (36”) INIH0051 Vertical Vessels with Outside Diameters 900 (36”) and Less INIH0052 Vessel Composite Type 1 INIH0053 Vessel Composite Type 2 INIH0054 Vertical Vessel Bottom Head Insulation INIH0055 Top/Horizontal Head Nozzles INIH0056 Vessel Stiffener Insulation Detail INIH0059 Typical Clip Details INIH0060 Nozzle Flashing INIH0061 Head Lap Seam Details INIH0062 Horizontal Vessels INIH0064 Horizontal Heat Exchangers Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 2 ............. 2 2............................

2. 1. industry codes and standards. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used. valves. horizontal and vertical vessels. Introduction 1. Short titles will be used herein where appropriate.2 Scope This practice provides details for installing hot insulation systems on piping. and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. References Applicable parts of the following Practices.1 Purpose This Practice provides installation details for hot insulation systems.PIP INIH1000 Hot Insulation Installation Details EDITORIAL REVISION October 2007 1. and heat exchangers. Industry Codes and Standards American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM C-450 – Standard Practice for Prefabrication and Field Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping. Vessel Lagging. and Dished Head Segments Page 2 of 2 Process Industry Practices . except as otherwise noted.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

REAFFIRMATION WITH EDITORIAL REVISION July 2012 Process Industry Practices Insulation PIP INSA1000 Acoustic Insulation Systems Specification .

Changes or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. Authorized Users may attach addenda or overlays to clearly indicate modifications or exceptions to specific sections of PIP Practices. individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. or standards organizations. These purposes include but are not limited to the procurement process (e. and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. Austin. application.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. © Process Industry Practices (PIP). PIP’s copyright notices must be clearly indicated and unequivocally incorporated in documents where an Authorized User desires to provide any third party with copies of the Practice. Authorized Users may provide their clients. This Practice is subject to revision at any time. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices. contractors. The University of Texas at Austin. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations. this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users.g. suppliers and contractors with copies of the Practice solely for Authorized Users’ purposes. administrative. PRINTING HISTORY March 2001 Issued June 2006 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds February 2007 May 2008 Editorial Revision Editorial Revision July 2012 Reaffirmation with Editorial Revision .. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Texas 78759. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. Construction Industry Institute. as attachments to requests for quotation/ purchase orders or requests for proposals/contracts) and preparation and issue of design engineering deliverables for use on a specific project by Authorized User’s client. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500). The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. such laws or regulations must be followed.

.....2 4.....6 Documentation ....3..4 Data Sheets ..............2 INSA1003 – Piping – Sheet and Mastic Barrier Layer Attachment INSA1004 – General Arrangement – Piping Insulation INSA1005 – Piping – Flange Insulation INSA1006 – Valves without Extended Bonnets 2...................7 4.....1 Acoustic Insulation – General Design Information ...............2 1.........7 Data Forms INSA1000-D1 – Documentation Requirements Sheet List of Details INSA1001 – Various Acoustic Insulation Configurations INSA1002 – Piping – Layer Staggering & Overlapping of Absorptive Barrier Process Industry Practices Page 1 of 7 ...............3 4........................... Requirements ................................................ Installation of the Barrier Layer ......5 Inspection ......2 1................................................................ References .......5 4...............2 Installation of the Absorptive Layer .......5 4...2 Scope ........7 4..............3 4....2 3.......................................................2 Process Industry Practices ..... Introduction ....1 Purpose ....................................REAFFIRMATION WITH EDITORIAL REVISION July 2012 Process Industry Practices Insulation PIP INSA1000 Acoustic Insulation Systems Specification Table of Contents 1. Definitions ......

Hot Service Insulation Materials and Installation Specification – PIP INSA1001 . Listing of or reference to supporting documents within this Practice does not imply suitability for specific designs. Systems requiring additional insulation specifications beyond PIP Practices shall be covered by purchaser’s documentation.Various Acoustic Insulation Configurations – PIP INSA1002 .Piping-Layer Staggering and Overlapping of Absorptive Barrier – PIP INSA1003 .Piping Insulation – PIP INSA1005 .General Arrangement . application.1 Purpose This Practice provides requirements for acoustic insulation systems. Acoustic insulation can be used to reduce surface radiation from Process Industry Practices Page 2 of 7 .Insulation Inspection Checklist – PIP INSC1000 .Piping-Sheet and Mastic Barrier Layer Attachment – PIP INSA1004 .Piping-Flange Insulation – PIP INSA1006 . except as otherwise noted. resilient. 2. References Applicable parts of the following Practices should be considered an integral part of this Practice. Comment: Use of this Practice for contractual purposes requires the purchaser to make specific choices and assemble additional supporting documents.Valves without Extended Bonnets 3. The edition in effect on the date of contract award should be used. Short titles will be used herein where appropriate.PIP INSA1000 Acoustic Insulation Systems Specification REAFFIRMATION WITH EDITORIAL REVISION July 2012 1. and extent of acoustic insulation on piping and equipment operating at high and low temperatures. or mastic installed over the absorptive layer to provide a sound barrier acoustic insulation: Insulation that attenuates acoustic energy radiating from surfaces by absorption and containment.Insulation Design and Type Codes – PIP INTG1000 . dense material such as loaded vinyl. low-density 48 to 128 kg/m³ (3 to 8 lb/ft³) material such as glass or mineral fiber applied to a sound-radiating surface to absorb sound outer barrier layer: Impermeable. 1. Introduction 1. elastomer.2 Scope This Practice describes the requirements for the design. Definitions absorptive layer: Porous.Requirements for Cold Service Insulation Materials – PIP INSH1000 . Process Industry Practices (PIP) – PIP INEG1000 .

1. 4. 4.3 The acoustic insulation type code is AC as defined in PIP INEG1000. barrier. Comment: A method of matching material properties to the noise to be controlled is to use laboratory test results of noise reduction for various insulation systems and field measurements of the sound to be reduced. transmission loss: Reduction in magnitude between the incident and transmitted sound for a given acoustic material Noise Reduction (NR): Difference in noise.1. or thermal designs are required. which is the key factor in obtaining the required noise reductions at low frequencies. The general requirements for design and installation of insulation contained in PIP INEG1000 and PIP INSH1000 shall be followed. thermal insulation. thicknesses.7 4.4 4. and weatherproof finish layers or thermal insulation with absorptive.1. care shall be taken to ensure that the absorptive layer adequately isolates the outer-barrier layer from surface vibrations at the frequencies of interest.1.1. attenuation is highest at the frequency having the highest sound pressure level. and weatherproof finish layers: 7 dBA to 11 dBA Process Industry Practices Page 3 of 7 . Comment: PIP INSA1001 illustrates possible combinations. In designing acoustic insulation treatments. measured in dBA 4. Additional acoustic insulation type codes shall be required if two or more combinations of materials. layers. absorptive layers.1.1 Acoustic Insulation – General Design Information 4.PIP INSA1000 Acoustic Insulation Systems Specification REAFFIRMATION WITH EDITORIAL REVISION July 2012 many different types of piping and equipment and to comply with regulatory requirements. Acoustic insulation is composed of a resilient sound-absorptive layer and an outer-barrier layer applied to noise-radiating surfaces.8 The following are general rules for predicting noise reduction that may be expected in actual field installations: a. at a given point before and after acoustic treatment. also known as sound pressure level.e.)..1. Requirements 4. The best material combination shall be one in which the transmission loss properties are matched to the sound spectrum of the source (i. Acoustic insulation with absorptive. and weatherproof finishes can be used.5 4. barrier layers. Normal thermal insulation systems or acoustic insulation with absorptive and standard weatherproof finish layer only: 5 dBA to 7 dBA b.1. Different combinations of absorptive layers. outer barrier.2 4.6 The ultimate goal for installing acoustic insulation is to obtain a satisfactory noise reduction. Acoustic insulation is normally composed of a resilient sound-absorptive layer and an outer-barrier layer applied to noise-radiating surfaces.1 4.

If the peak octave band sound pressure level is above 1000 Hz. d.12. 4. Hangars or other supports shall be covered with the absorptive material. the acoustic absorptive material may be applied directly to the piping or equipment if its maximum service temperature is not exceeded. 4. 4. the outer barrier layer is adequately isolated from the vibrating surface and the system is completely sealed: 11 dBA to 15 dBA Comment: These values assume that background noise has been compensated for and that the dominant noise is not at or below 250 Hz. the following rules may be used: a. 4.11 For cold service installations. 4. use a 25 mm thick (1-inch) absorptive layer. Multiple layers of absorptive and barrier material (two layers each) where it is known that all relevant radiating surfaces are covered.1. Use a nominal 7. use a 50 mm thick (2-inch) absorptive layer.11.1 Alternatively. 4. 4.1.12. If the peak octave band sound pressure level is between 250 Hz and 999 Hz. a layer of appropriate thermal insulation shall be applied to reduce the interface temperature to within the range of the selected absorptive layer.1.13 An acoustic absorptive layer may be applied directly over existing thermal insulation without modification to the thermal system.5 lb/ft2) outer barrier layer if the peak octave band sound pressure level is at or above 2000 Hz.1.12 For hot service. the acoustic absorptive layer may be applied before the complete cold service thermal system is applied.3 kg/m² (1. 4.2 The complete thermal system shall be applied according to the appropriate PIP cold service Practice. 4.1. Process Industry Practices Page 4 of 7 .9 If the noise reduction properties cannot be rigorously matched to the noise source. b. the appropriate thickness table in PIP INEG1000 shall be used to determine the minimum insulation thickness.1.1.1.5 lb/ft2) outer barrier layer if the peak octave band sound pressure level is below 2000 Hz. Acoustic requirements may call for additional thickness.2 The thermal-insulating properties of the absorptive layer may be utilized to minimize overall insulation thickness. Use a nominal 2.PIP INSA1000 Acoustic Insulation Systems Specification REAFFIRMATION WITH EDITORIAL REVISION July 2012 c.10 If insulation is required for reasons other than for acoustic control.11.1.4 kg/m² (0.1 If surface temperatures exceed allowable service temperatures of the selected absorptive layer. followed by the outer barrier layer. c. the complete thermal system shall be applied according to the appropriate PIP cold service Practice before any acoustic absorptive material is applied.

4. Leaks can render acoustic insulation treatments ineffective.2 Installation of the Absorptive Layer 4. The barrier layer shall be an impervious. fittings. tape.2.1 Circumferential and longitudinal joints of sheet barrier material shall be overlapped a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches). etc. Sheet barrier materials shall be applied in a watershed fashion and stagger all joints of barrier material and absorptive material.3. the thickness of the absorptive layer may be decreased to provide clearance. 4. on the piping or equipment to be acoustically insulated. which permit leakage of undiminished noise from the surface being insulated.3.3 Unless otherwise specified. 4. all surfaces shall be covered. 4. and PIP INSA1006 shows the acoustic insulation of valves without extended bonnets. If it is impossible to fit the entire specified thickness of absorptive and barrier layers. gapless fashion. bands. sheet material shall be extended a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) over the mastic..3. including valve bodies. 4.2. 4.PIP INSA1000 Acoustic Insulation Systems Specification REAFFIRMATION WITH EDITORIAL REVISION July 2012 4. shall be sealed. etc. Installation of the Barrier Layer 4.2.3. Comment: PIP INSA1002 shows the installation detail of the absorptive layer. a barrier layer shall be applied over all absorptive layer surfaces.3.3.4 Process Industry Practices Page 5 of 7 .5 All sheet barrier materials shall be applied in an airtight. Comment: PIP INSA1004 shows the general arrangement for acoustic insulation applied to piping. 4.2.3 If sheet barrier is applied after mastic has dried or if adhesion between sheet and mastic is in doubt.2 All joints and interruptions of outer-barrier material at protrusions such as valve bonnets..3 The continuity of the barrier layer shall not be broken. Comment: Acoustic sealing means the insulating materials are free from gaps or open areas.2.2. flanges.1 Acoustic insulation shall cover all relevant radiating surfaces and shall be acoustically sealed.3.3.4 On vertical transitions.2 On horizontal transitions between sheet barrier material and loaded mastics. 4.3. wire. or adhesive bonding shall all be acceptable means of attachment.2.3. PIP INSA1005 shows the acoustic insulation of piping flanges.1 When specified. 4. supports.2 4. 4.2. On sheet barrier materials and vinyl or elastomeric barrier materials over which an additional weatherproof finish is to be applied. hangers. dense sheet material or loaded mastic and shall not contain lead. a suitable joint sealer shall be applied in the overlap area between sheet barrier and mastic. mastic shall be extended 50 mm (2 inches) over the sheet material to provide proper watershed.

3. 4.5. 4. all joints shall be adhesively bonded.3.3. 4. Process Industry Practices Page 6 of 7 .6 Loaded mastic shall be applied directly to absorptive materials and reinforced with glass cloth following the manufacturer’s recommended procedures.3.3. the reinforcing fabric shall be applied to the middle coating. 4. 4.6.5 If vinyl or elastomeric sheet material is the finished surface.PIP INSA1000 Acoustic Insulation Systems Specification REAFFIRMATION WITH EDITORIAL REVISION July 2012 4.8 4.3.6.3.3.5 The installed reinforcing fabric shall be free of wrinkles and protruding edges.5.6. and then the final coat shall be applied to the specified wet thickness. 4.1 If metallic jacket and barrier material laminate is to be applied. A 6 mm (1/4-inch) bead of caulking compound shall be applied to all joints in the outer weatherproof finish to prevent acoustic leakage or moisture penetration.4 Adjacent pieces of reinforcing fabric shall be lapped a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches).3.2 A tack coat of mastic shall be applied to approximately half the desired finish thickness with sufficient pressure to assure impregnation of the absorptive layer. 4.4 Sheet metal screws shall not be used on vinyl or elastomeric sheet barrier materials.3. bands shall be used for attachment. hangers. an additional weatherproof finish cover shall be required over vinyl and elastomer barrier materials.7 Barrier layer applications of loaded vinyl or elastomers can be left unfinished if all lap joints are adhesively bonded.6 In multiple coat applications. 4.6.3.9 Caulk shall be applied to all removable cover joints. 4.3 Reinforcing fabric shall be embedded in the wet tack coat.6. and the insulated item is not exposed to direct sunlight or the weather. 4. 4.3 To ensure gapless joints on vinyl or elastomeric sheet applications.3. Comment: Examples include any interruptions of the weatherproof finish or barrier layer at joints or between finish or barrier layers and protrusions such as valve bonnets. 4.1 Conflicts between this Practice and the manufacturer’s recommended procedure shall be submitted in writing to Purchaser for clarification and resolution before proceeding with the installation.3.3.2 All joints in the laminate shall be sealed with a suitable joint sealer to ensure an airtight installation. If such layers are so exposed.5.5. bands shall be used for attachment. and instrument connections. 4. Comment: PIP INSA1003 shows the barrier layer attachment detail.3.6.

4. Process Industry Practices Page 7 of 7 .5 Inspection Inspection of acoustic insulation shall be in accordance with PIP INTG1000. 4.6 Documentation Documents required to define the scope of work shall be listed on Documentation Requirements Sheet PIP INSA1000-D1.PIP INSA1000 Acoustic Insulation Systems Specification REAFFIRMATION WITH EDITORIAL REVISION July 2012 4.4 Data Sheets Project specific requirements for acoustic insulation on piping and equipment shall be specified on the purchaser’s data sheet(s) contained in PIP INSH1000 or PIP INSC1000.

FACILITY NAME LOCATION PIP DOC NUMBER / PROJ DOC NUMBER INSA1000 INSC1000 INSH1000 INTG1000 PROJECT DOCUMENT NO. DATE REVISION DESCRIPTION BY CHECKED APPROVED PROJECT NO. PIP: INSA1000 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS SHEET PIP INSA1000-D1 PAGE 1 OF 1 JULY 2012 ACOUSTIC INSULATION SYSTEMS SPECIFICATION NO. TITLE ACOUSTIC INSULATION SYSTEMS SPECIFICATION COLD SERVICE INSULATION MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION HOT SERVICE INSULATION MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION INSULATION INSPECTION CHECKLIST REV DATE NOTES INSA1001 INSA1002 YES YES NO NO ACOUSTIC INSULATION INSTALLATION DETAILS VARIOUS ACOUSTIC INSULATION CONFIGURATIONS PIPING – LAYER STAGGERING & OVERLAPPING OF ABSORPTIVE BARRIER PIPING – SHEET AND MASTIC BARRIER LAYER ATTACHMENT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT – PIPING INSULATION PIPING – FLANGE INSULATION VALVES WITHOUT EXTENDED BONNETS INSA1003 INSA1004 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO INSA1005 INSA1006 NOTES: .ASSOC.

.

.

.

.

.

.

EDITORIAL REVISION August 2007 Process Industry Practices Insulation PIP INSH1000 Hot Service Insulation Materials and Installation Specification .

While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users. Austin. Construction Industry Institute. overlays. PRINTING HISTORY October 1997 October 2005 Issued Complete Revision August 2007 Editorial Revision Not printed with State funds . The University of Texas at Austin.PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations. this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users. such laws or regulations must be followed. This Practice is subject to revision at any time. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. 39